Schlumberger Wireline Perforating FOM

Wireline Perforating Field
Operations Manual
Reference: InTouch ID 3013565
Version: 3.1
Release Date: 10-Jun-2004
EDMS UID: 274896043
Produced: 13-Jul-2006 20:55:42
Owner: SRC-Wireline
Author: SRC-Wireline
Private
Copyright © 2006 Schlumberger, Unpublished Work. All rights reserved.

Wireline Perforating Field
Operations Manual
Reference: InTouch ID 3013565
Version: 3.1
Release Date: 10-Jun-2004
EDMS UID: 274896043
Published: 13-Jul-2006 20:55:42
Owner: SRC-Wireline
Private
Copyright © 2006 Sophia, Unpublished Work. All rights reserved.

Intentionally Blank
Private
WL FOM / Legal Information
Legal Information
This work contains the confidential and proprietary trade secrets of Schlumberger
and may not be copied or stored in an information retrieval system, transferred,
used, distributed, translated or retransmitted in any form or by any means,
electronic or mechanical, in whole or in part, without the express written
permission of the copyright owner.
Trademarks & Service marks

SRC-Wireline\SRC-Wireline\InTouch ID 3013565\3.1\Release Date:10-Jun-2004\EDMS UID: 274896043\Produced: 13-Jul-2006 20:55:42
Schlumberger, the Schlumberger logotype, and other words or symbols used

to identify the products and services described herein are either trademarks,
trade names or service marks of Schlumberger and its licensors, or are the
property of their respective owners. These marks may not be copied, imitated
or used, in whole or in part, without the express prior written permission of
Schlumberger. In addition, covers, page headers, custom graphics, icons, and
other design elements may be service marks, trademarks, and/or trade dress
of Schlumberger, and may not be copied, imitated, or used, in whole or in part,
without the express prior written permission of Schlumberger.
A complete list of Schlumberger marks may be viewed at the Schlumberger

Oilfield Services Marks page: http://www.hub.slb.com/index.cfm?id=id32083
Marks of Schlumberger include but may not be limited to *, ASFS, CIRP,
CST, CleanPACK, DSI, Enerjet, FMI, FPIT, HEGS, HSD, HyperJet,
InTouchSupport.com, MaxTRAC, PGGT, PURE, PerfoExpress, PowerJet,
PowerJet Omega, S.A.F.E., SPAN, Secure, Secure Plus, UBI, UltraJet,
UltraPack, Ultrajet, WPP, eFire.
Private
WL FOM / Document Control
Document Control
Owner: SRC-Wireline
InTouch Helpdesk
intouch-src-wl@slb.com
Reviewer: Charleton Walker
Approver: SRC-Wireline
Contact Information
Name: SRC-Wireline
Title: InTouch Helpdesk

Phone: 281-285-5400
Email: intouch-src-wl@slb.com
Revision History
Rev Effective Date Description Prepared by
3.1 11-Jul-2006 Corrected part number of Digital Steve Young
Safety Multimeter from T6005200 to
T6005202.
3.0 12-Jun-2006 Removed volume 2 (Gun Systems). Steve Young
Updated Time-Temperature
Guidelines, Explosive Placard
and HMX sensitivity warning.
Also added info on Digital Safety
Multimeter, the new HSD-L, FRAC,
PPG and SBS guns. In addition,
replaced explosive and chemical
cutters info with links to the InTouch
content.
2.5 01-Mar-2005 Removed detonators specifications Charleton Walker
table from Explosives chapter
and added link to the Approved
Detonator List in InTouch (Content
ID: 4030670).
2.4 07-Dec-2004 Updated the Detonator Charleton Walker
Specifications section in the
Explosives chapter.
2.3 01-Dec-2004 Added the ATPS and WPST Charleton Walker
descriptions to the Perforating
Accessories chapter.
2.2 18-Sep-2004 Updated the Scotchlok connector Charleton Walker
temperature rating (280°F) in the
Hostile Environment appendix
chapter.
2.1 08-Sep-2004 Added the Perforating Gun Vertical Charleton Walker
Make-Up chapter to the appendix.
Private
WL FOM / Document Control
Rev Effective Date Description Prepared by

2.0 22-Jun-2004 Reformatted the FOM and released Charleton Walker
for printing. Updated the Safety,
Explosives and Selectivity chapters.
Added the Setting Tools and Depth
Control chapters. Removed the
Wellhead Equipment, SPAN chapter
and MWPT GFE paper. Moved gun
sections to volume 2.
1.9 14-Jan-2004 Added Retainer Ring B036724 and Steve Young
Washer 100070241 to 1.69 Shock
Sub T6054015 on Speciality SCP
Chart.
1.8 13-Jan-2004 Updated the Explosives and Charleton Walker

Selectivity sections.
1.7 31-Oct-2003 Corrected part number for Secure Steve Young
Top Sub from 100013469 to
100013467.
1.6 21-Oct-2003 Major revisions made to SCP Steve Young
cutter tables and running hardware.
Also, Goex cutters are no longer
manufactured. Goex specifications,
drawings and parts lists remain for
reference only.
1.5 16-Jun-2003 Added Addressable Shot-by-Shot Charleton Walker
Gun System section to the Gun
Systems chapter.
1.4 06-Sep-2002 In Safety chapter, updated placard
for Explosives Field Safety
Procedures (InTouch ID 2023926) to
include changes in Field Technical
Alert (InTouch ID 3339945).
1.3 13-Feb-2002 Replaced obsolete detonator
EB-161 (H523621) with Nobel
detonator 0026FD (T6041743)
in Wireline Explosives chapter,
Detonator Specifications and HSD
Wellsite Operations chapter.
1.2 12-Feb-2002 In Cutters and Severing Tools
chapter, added content IDs for
InTouch reference, added note as
to why we don’t offer the 38.0 gram
cutter and added part numbers
for rubber and teflon low-friction
standoffs.
1.1 17-Dec-2001 Corrected Booster Specification
Table in Explosives chapter to
include HP-10 Booster (H447624).
Private
v WL FOM / Table of Contents v
Table of Contents
1 Safety
1.1 General Safety ______________________________________________ 1-1
1.2 Collector Safety Switch (CSS) _______________________________ 1-35
1.3 Casing-to-Rig Voltage Monitor (SFT-111) _____________________ 1-39
1.4 Schlumberger Safety Multimeter (SFT-300) ___________________ 1-43
1.5 Schlumberger Digital Safety Multimeter (DSMM) (Provisory) ___ 1-52
2 Explosives
2.1 Explosives for Wireline Operations ____________________________ 2-1
2.2 Detonator Specifications ____________________________________ 2-29

2.3 Detonating Cord Specifications ______________________________ 2-30
2.4 Booster Specifications ______________________________________ 2-32
2.5 API Summary _______________________________________________ 2-33
3 Perforating Accessories
3.1 Correlation Tools _____________________________________________ 3-1
3.2 Weights ____________________________________________________ 3-15
3.3 Positioning Devices _________________________________________ 3-18
3.4 Adapters ___________________________________________________ 3-29
3.5 Heads ______________________________________________________ 3-30
3.6 WPSA _____________________________________________________ 3-32
3.7 WPAT ______________________________________________________ 3-41
3.8 POT-C _____________________________________________________ 3-56
3.9 WOPT _____________________________________________________ 3-79
3.10 WPP _______________________________________________________ 3-90
3.11 WPST _____________________________________________________ 3-133
3.12 ATPS _____________________________________________________ 3-142
4 Selectivity
4.1 Addressable Switch __________________________________________ 4-1
4.2 Selective Switches ___________________________________________ 4-8
4.3 Dual Diode _________________________________________________ 4-14
4.4 Setting Tool to Gun Adapters ________________________________ 4-18
5 Depth Control
5.1 Perforating Depth Control ____________________________________ 5-1
5.2 Procedures for Perforating Depth Control ______________________ 5-2
6 Gun Systems
6.1 Hollow Carrier Gun Systems __________________________________ 6-1
6.2 Port Plug Gun Systems _____________________________________ 6-55
6.3 Exposed Gun Systems ______________________________________ 6-83
Private
vi WL FOM / Table of Contents vi
7 Setting Tools
7.1 CPST _______________________________________________________ 7-1
8 Pipe Recovery
8.1 Punchers ____________________________________________________ 8-1
8.2 Backoff ______________________________________________________ 8-4
8.3 FPIT ________________________________________________________ 8-7
8.4 Cutters and Severing Tools ___________________________________ 8-7
8.5 PRS Chemical Cutters _______________________________________ 8-7
Appendices
A Perforating Gun Vertical Make-Up

A.1 Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) _________________________ A-1
A.2 Vertical Make-Up Instructions _________________________________ A-2
B Detonating Cord Cutter Instructions
C Crimper Instructions
D Hostile Environment (GFE paper, by R. Sonthalia, 1996)

D.1 Introduction __________________________________________________ D-1
D.2 Heads _______________________________________________________ D-2
D.3 Perforating Accessories ______________________________________ D-8
D.4 Explosives _________________________________________________ D-21
D.5 Enerjet Gun Systems _______________________________________ D-26
D.6 Scallop/Hyperdome Gun Systems ___________________________ D-37
D.7 Pivot Gun Systems _________________________________________ D-42
D.8 HSD Gun Systems _________________________________________ D-44
D.9 Casing Guns ______________________________________________ D-51
D.10 Program to Evaluate Gun Systems (PEGS) __________________ D-54
D.11 Pipe Recovery Systems ____________________________________ D-58
E Appendix
E.1 Glossary - Notes _____________________________________________ E-1
E.2 i-Handbook _________________________________________________ E-2
Private
1-i WL FOM / Safety 1-i
1 Safety
1.1 General Safety _________________________________________________ 1-1
1.1.1 References __________________________________________________ 1-1
1.1.2 Explosives Field Safety Procedures Placard ___________________ 1-2
1.1.3 Field Safety Procedures for Conventional Electric Detonators ___ 1-4
1.1.3.1 Predeparture Check ______________________________________ 1-4
1.1.3.2 Arrival At Wellsite _________________________________________ 1-4
1.1.3.3 Rigging-Up _______________________________________________ 1-5
1.1.3.4 Arming ___________________________________________________ 1-8
1.1.3.5 Operational Procedures in the Well _______________________ 1-12
1.1.4 Field Safety Procedures for Slapper Activated Firing Equipment
(S.A.F.E.) ___________________________________________________ 1-14

1.1.4.1 Exceptions to Conventional Electric Detonator Field Safety
Procedures _____________________________________________ 1-14
1.1.4.2 SAFE-BA Gun Preparation _______________________________ 1-15
1.1.4.3 Gun Arming _____________________________________________ 1-15
1.1.5 Field Safety Procedures for Coil-Tubing-Deployed Perforating Guns Fired
Electrically __________________________________________________ 1-18
1.1.5.1 Determining Equipment to Use ___________________________ 1-18
1.1.5.2 Job Preparation _________________________________________ 1-18
1.1.5.3 Equipment Preparation and Rig-Up _______________________ 1-19
1.1.5.4 Operational Procedures in the Well _______________________ 1-19
1.1.6 Field Safety Procedures for Downhole Tractor conveyed explosive
devices _____________________________________________________ 1-20
1.1.6.1 Schlumberger MaxTrac (PSTT) ___________________________ 1-20
1.1.6.2 Downhole tractor systems ________________________________ 1-20
1.1.6.3 Welltec Well Tractor® ____________________________________ 1-21
1.1.7 Potential Delayed Detonation (Thermal Event Procedure) _____ 1-26
1.1.8 Gun Disarming for all Types of Electrically Fired Guns _________ 1-29
1.1.9 Hazardous Gases ___________________________________________ 1-29
1.1.10 Post-Job Checks ____________________________________________ 1-29
1.1.11 Gun Handling _______________________________________________ 1-30
1.1.12 Fishing Operations __________________________________________ 1-30
1.1.13 General Rules for Transportation of Explosives and Radioactive
Materials ___________________________________________________ 1-31
1.1.13.1 Common Rules for Both Explosives and Radioactive
Materials ________________________________________________ 1-31
1.1.13.2 Transport of Explosives __________________________________ 1-31
1.1.13.3 Transport of Radioactive Materials and Explosives on the Same
Vehicle _________________________________________________ 1-32
1.1.13.4 Offshore Transport ______________________________________ 1-33
1.1.13.5 Prepacked Expendable Kits ______________________________ 1-33
1.1.13.6 Reporting Theft or Loss of Explosive Material _____________ 1-33
1.1.14 Disposal of Explosives ______________________________________ 1-34
1.2 Collector Safety Switch (CSS) _________________________________ 1-35
Private
1-ii WL FOM / Safety 1-ii
1.2.1 CSS Functionality ___________________________________________ 1-35

1.2.2 Common Precautions _______________________________________ 1-35
1.2.3 Types of Collector Safety Switches ___________________________ 1-36
1.2.3.1 CSUD-CSS (Obsolete) __________________________________ 1-36
1.2.3.2 DBM-MBM-CSS _________________________________________ 1-37
1.2.3.3 MCM-CSS ______________________________________________ 1-37
1.2.3.4 SWPT-CSS _____________________________________________ 1-38
1.2.4 Operational Checks _________________________________________ 1-38
1.3 Casing-to-Rig Voltage Monitor (SFT-111) _______________________ 1-39
1.3.1 Operating Instructions _______________________________________ 1-39
1.3.2 RITE Program for SFT-111 and Grounding Straps _____________ 1-41
1.3.2.1 FIT 1 - Mechanical Checks _______________________________ 1-41
1.3.2.2 FIT 2 - Electrical Checks _________________________________ 1-41
1.3.2.3 Commonly Replaced Parts for SFT-111 Casing-to-Rig Voltage

Monitor _________________________________________________ 1-41
1.4 Schlumberger Safety Multimeter (SFT-300) ____________________ 1-43
1.4.1 Features of the Schlumberger Safety Multimeter ______________ 1-43
1.4.2 Operator’s Manual for Schlumberger Safety Multimeter
SFT-300 ____________________________________________________ 1-45
1.4.2.1 Approval ________________________________________________ 1-45
1.4.2.2 Multimeter Safety ________________________________________ 1-45
1.4.2.3 Reset Button Check _____________________________________ 1-46
1.4.2.4 Polarity _________________________________________________ 1-46
1.4.2.5 “Off” Position ____________________________________________ 1-46
1.4.2.6 Zero-Ohms Check _______________________________________ 1-47
1.4.2.7 Capacitance Check ______________________________________ 1-47
1.4.2.8 Pointer-Adjust-For-Zero Check ___________________________ 1-48
1.4.2.9 Repair __________________________________________________ 1-48
1.4.3 Checking a Blasting Cap ____________________________________ 1-49
1.4.4 Checking a Selective Switch or Monoswitch After Installation in the
Selective Adapter ___________________________________________ 1-49
1.4.5 Checking a Dual Diode Plug or Dual Diode Switch ____________ 1-50
1.4.6 Checking the Correct Wiring of a Selective Gun String During
Assembly ___________________________________________________ 1-51
1.4.7 Checking Input Capacitor of ESIC (EFI Cartridge) in a SAFE
System _____________________________________________________ 1-51
1.5 Schlumberger Digital Safety Multimeter (DSMM) (Provisory) ___ 1-52
1.5.1 Operator’s Manual for Schlumberger Digital Safety Multimeter
(DSMM) ____________________________________________________ 1-52
1.5.1.1 Approval ________________________________________________ 1-53
1.5.1.2 Multimeter Safety ________________________________________ 1-53
1.5.1.3 Reset ___________________________________________________ 1-53
1.5.1.4 Battery __________________________________________________ 1-53
1.5.1.5 Fuses __________________________________________________ 1-54
1.5.1.6 Polarity _________________________________________________ 1-54
1.5.1.7 Resistance ______________________________________________ 1-54
Private
1-iii WL FOM / Safety 1-iii
1.5.1.8 Capacitance Checking ___________________________________ 1-54

1.5.1.9 Environment ____________________________________________ 1-54
1.5.1.10 Repair __________________________________________________ 1-54
1.5.2 Checking a Detonator _______________________________________ 1-54
1.5.3 Checking Secure Devices ___________________________________ 1-55
1.5.4 Checking Input Capacitor of ESIC (EFI Cartridge) in a SAFE
System _____________________________________________________ 1-55
1.5.5 Checking Logging Cable ____________________________________ 1-56
1.5.6 Checking Casing Collar Locator _____________________________ 1-56
1.5.7 Checking a Selective Switch or Monoswitch __________________ 1-57
1.5.8 Checking a Dual Diode _____________________________________ 1-57
1.5.9 Checking a Gun String ______________________________________ 1-58
Private
SRC-Wireline\SRC-Wireline\InTouch ID 3013565\3.1\Release Date:10-Jun-2004\EDMS UID: 274896043\Produced: 13-Jul-2006 20:55:42 1-iv
Private
WL FOM / Safety
Intentionally Blank

1-iv
1-1 WL FOM / Safety 1-1
1 SAFETY
1.1 General Safety

The protection of personnel and property is of primary importance. To ensure
the safety and health of all personnel, Schlumberger has specific procedures
for the handling of explosives in the shop and at the wellsite. Compliance with
these rules is mandatory.
IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF EACH EMPLOYEE TO KNOW AND FOLLOW

SCHLUMBERGER OPERATING RULES.
Every field engineer/technician is a supervisor and a representative of

Schlumberger. As such, the engineer/technician is responsible for the
crew. Safety is an important responsibility. Therefore, it is mandatory for
the engineer/technician to ensure all safety procedures are carried out and
to exercise good judgement in determining whether working conditions are
acceptable for safe operations.
IF A JOB CAN’T BE DONE SAFELY, DON’T DO IT AT ALL.
1.1.1 References
Information including, training, ordering, gun descriptions and loading instructions
for specific gun systems, and explosive policies or procedures can be found at
or ordered from either:
• Schlumberger Reservoir Completions Technology Center

• Schlumberger Riboud Product Center
Additional information, including minimum safe practices for the United States
and Canada can be found at the following:
1. United States Department of Transportation Regulations (49 CFR)

2. Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco and Firearms Regulations (27 CFR)
3. Canada Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act and Regulations (TDG)
4. American Petroleum Institute (API)
5. Institute of Makers of Explosives (IME)
Private
Table 1-1: Explosive Safety Equipment Check List
Safety Tube H041901

Detonator Carrying Case (CYC-W) H018373
Padlock for Detonator Carrying Case and Explosive Remnant Box H406452
Key for padlocks H406454
Explosive Remnant Box H014813
Casing-to-Rig Voltage Monitor (SFT-111) H117313
Schlumberger Safety Multimeter (SFT-300) H622622
1
Schlumberger Digital Safety Multimeter (DSMM) T6005202
Safety Grounding Device of Truck/Unit (Spool, Connection, Strap, C. H117555
Clamp)
Offshore Unit H117556
Explosives Field Safety Procedures Check List (Placard) H709745
“Danger Explosives - Turn Off Two Way Radios and Radio Phones” sign B024663
“Flip” Explosive Placards B027326
U.S. DOT Motor Carrier Identification sticker H530052
1
Currently in Field Test
1.1.2 Explosives Field Safety Procedures Placard

For the latest version of the Explosives Field Safety Procedures Placard (InTouch
ID: 2023926) go to InTouchSupport.com.
Private
EXPLOSIVES
Schlumberger Field Safety Procedures
Conventional Electrical Detonators
1. Hold consultation with client, if possible. 8. Instrument cab preparations for explosive e. Insert the detonator into the Blasting Cap
2. Check well area for hazards and correct when operations: Safety Tube. Close and secure the top of
necessary. a. Ensure continuity of logging cable to the the tube.
3. Hold spot safety meeting. safety switch (CSS). Do not disconnect f. Connect the detonator wires to the gun
collector plug. wires. (Electrically arm the gun).
4. No smoking except in designated areas.
Smoking materials must be stored when b. Turn off all AC powered instrumentation, g. Remove the detonator from the Safety Tube
leaving these areas. main circuit breakers, inverters, UPSs, AC and connect it to the detonating cord using
power generators, and rig power detonator crimping pliers or other connector
5. Rig up cable. Remove rig wiring that might connections. For units that use an isolated as appropriate (Ballistically arm the gun.)
contact cable. Top drive systems should be power distribution utility leg, follow the h. Store all explosive remnants.
electrically isolated in accordance with the official powerdown procedures posted on
manufacturer s procedures. i. Prepare the gun to run in the hole.
the power distribution panel.
6. Outside preparations before attaching an 11. Proceed into the well.
c. Turn off safety switch (CSS) and remove
explosive device: 12. Safety procedures while in the hole:
key. The key MUST remain outside the

a. Turn off electrical cathodic protection wireline unit until the explosive device is a. At a minimum depth of 200 ft (70 m) below
systems. introduced into the well to a minimum depth ground level or the sea floor, turn on the
b. Discontinue all electric welding operations. of 200 ft (70 m) below ground level or the safety switch, restore AC power, etc.
c. On water operations, install the positive sea floor. Essential RF transmitters may be turned on.
grounding cable from truck to barge or Continue into the hole.
9. Procedure for attaching any explosive device
wireline unit to generator skid. (such as CPST, CST, perforating guns, etc.) to b. Tie in, position the gun and shoot.
d. Check voltage between the rig, casing and the cable: c. Coming out of hole, at a minimum depth of
cable armor using a multimeter. Attempt to a. Arming or disarming a gun must not be 200 ft (70 m) below ground level or the sea
eliminate it at its source, if present. performed during a lightning storm. floor, reestablish RF silence and prepare
e. Test and install Casing-to-Rig Voltage the instrument cab as for explosives
b. Arming procedures must not be
Monitor. operations (8.a. through c.). Verify that the
commenced if such weather, a helicopter or
Casing-to-Rig voltage is less than 0.25V.
f. DO NOT PROCEED WITH OPERATIONS a boat is expected to arrive before the
CAUTION - if a lightning storm, helicopter or
IF RESIDUAL VOLTAGE IS IN EXCESS arming operation can be completed and the
boat will arrive before the disarming
OF 0.25V BETWEEN RIG, CASING, AND gun introduced into the well to a minimum
operation can be completed, the gun must
CABLE ARMOR. depth of 200 ft (70 m) below ground level or
be kept in the well at a minimum depth of
g. Install safety grounding straps between the the sea floor.
200 ft (70 m) below ground level or the sea
unit, rig and casing. c. Verify that the Casing-to-Rig Voltage floor.
h. Put out sign reading "Danger Explosives - Monitor reads less than 0.25V.
13. If hollow carrier gun(s) did not fire, perform the
Turn Off Radio Transmitters" or equivalent. d. Clear the line of fire of all personnel. test to determine if an ongoing thermal event
i. Turn off all radio frequency (RF) e. Attach the explosive device to the head. (a hang fire) is occurring. If there is, follow the
transmitters (radio, cellular, radar, RF The individual performing this operation recovery procedures. Otherwise, immediately
wireless networks, etc.) within 100 ft (30 m) MUST have the safety switch key in their relieve any trapped pressure and then disarm
of the well. Receiving units located within possession at the time. The key MUST the gun(s) (ballistically before electrically using
the established safe distance must be remain outside the wireline unit until the the procedure provided in the Field Operations
disabled such that an incoming call cannot explosive device is introduced into the well Manual). Once disarmed, the gun may be
activate the transmitter. to a minimum depth of 200 ft (70 m) below disconnected from the cable. If the gun
j. All transmitters (such as radio or TV ground level or the sea floor. contains HMX explosives that were heated to
stations) greater than 200 watts and within 10. Arming perforating guns (Only the engineer or more than 330 F, disarm it but do not
1 mile (1.6 km) of the well must be disabled technician in charge of job may arm a gun).: download the explosives from the gun for
such that they cannot transmit. a. The cable must be attached to the gun 48 hr.
7. APPLYING POWER AT SURFACE ONCE THE string before the gun string is armed. 14. All guns must be safely relieved of any trapped
EXPLOSIVE OPERATION HAS STARTED IS However, guns that will not be electrically pressure immediately upon removal from well
PERMITTED ONLY ON THE CONDITION connected to the cable when the head is according to the instructions in the Field
THAT THE CABLE HEAD AND ENTIRE attached may be armed immediately prior to Operations Manual.
TOOLSTRING ARE IN CLEAR VIEW OF THE their use and then attached to the cable. 15. Check the area for detonating cord remnants,
ENGINEER WHILE APPLYING TOOL b. Confirm that the line of fire is still clear. charges, etc., and pack them in the explosives
POWER. Power must not be applied through a c. Check the gun wires for sparking. remnants box. Pack misfired detonators in the
gun or explosive tool assembly at any time d. Trim the gun wires and detonating cord to detonator carrying case after shunting their
while on the surface, ARMED OR UNARMED. length. leads. All remnants must be returned to the
Explosive operations have started when magazine for storage and then properly
explosives are no longer secured as required disposed of.
for shipment and or storage.
Slapper Actuated Firing Equipment

For operations utilizing an initiator from the family of Slapper Actuated Firing Equipment in place of conventional electrical detonators, the
following exceptions apply to the procedures above:
Radio transmitters can be left powered and Electrical cathodic protection systems can be Electrical welding operations can be continued
used without restrictions. left powered. except in areas where explosives are stored or
Casing-to-Rig voltages can exceed 0.25V, but Helicopter and boat operations can be are being used.
MUST NOT exceed 40.0V. continued.
All OTHER procedures must be followed.
An approved exemption is required per SLB QHSE Standard S010 (MOC and Exemption) - Wireline Appendix if any of these procedures
cannot be followed.
Refer to Field Operation Manual for details and clarification. REVISION 20-SEP-2005 Placard Part Number H709745 Rev AG
Figure 1-1: Explosives Field Safety Procedures Placard. See InTouch for the latest version
of the Explosives Field Safety Procedures Placard (InTouch ID: 2023926).
Private
1.1.3 Field Safety Procedures for Conventional Electric

Detonators
1.1.3.1 Predeparture Check

• Check that all equipment, carrying cases, etc., which contain explosives are
properly marked and labeled, according to Schlumberger and the country or
local regulations. See the Explosive Safety Manual (InTouch ID: 3010562)
• Ensure that all explosives are properly packed, separated and secured.
• Check that blasting cap carrying cases are properly mounted, locked and
grounded, and that remnant boxes are grounded and locked.
• Check to see that all necessary transport papers are completed correctly
and accurately.
• Ensure transport vehicles are properly placarded and drivers properly
licensed according to local regulations.
1.1.3.2 Arrival At Wellsite

1. Hold consultation with client:
Hold consultation with client, if possible, to confirm the perforating plan (well
name, interval, correlation reference log, perforating objective, charge size
and density, gun/packer size, orientation, well restrictions). Discuss any
production or testing schedules that may follow the perforating job. This
would include any plan to flow the well between perforating runs, downhole
pressures expected, pressure equipment needed, and a contingency plan if
an unexpected “kick” occurs. Discuss rig safety and any existing hazardous
conditions.
2. Check the well area for the following hazards and correct when
necessary:
a. Safe accesses to the catwalk, rig or wellhead. Eliminate any Stepping,

Handling and Lifting issues.
b. Clear any potential fire or electrical hazards.
c. Halt any rig maintenance that may interfere with the explosive arming
procedure.
d. Check for hazards that can disturb the logging cable such as traffic or
overhead obstacles.
e. Check the proximity of RF antennas or high voltage power lines.
Private
f. Check the area for other explosives operations that have been scheduled
to proceed during the same time.
3. Hold a spot safety meeting with the client, the entire Schlumberger
crew and all personnel involved in the operation. Discuss items such as:
a. A brief outline of the perforating plan, discussing who has what

responsibilities and telling all non essential personnel to stay clear until
notified.
b. General safety with wireline operations.
c. Radio silence plan.
d. The controlled explosive area.
Decide where gun make-up will take place. Some rigs have a “controlled
area” for explosives. Clear all unnecessary personnel from the controlled
area and put up barriers if necessary.
e. Pressure control equipment.
f. Agree to any hand signals that may be used during the operation.
4. No smoking except in designated smoking areas. Smoking material must
be stored when leaving these areas.
1.1.3.3 Rigging-Up
5. Rig up the cable. Remove any rig wiring that might contact the cable.
Top drive systems should be electrically isolated in accordance with the
manufacture’s recommended procedures.
6. Outside preparations before attaching an explosive device.
a. Turn off electrical cathodic protection system devices.

b. Discontinue all electrical welding operations and turn off welding
machines.
c. On water operations, install the positive grounding cable from the truck to
the barge or from the wireline unit to the generator skid.
d. Check voltage between the rig, casing and cable armor using a
multimeter. Eliminate at the source if present. Start with a high voltage
range and reduce the range until the residual voltages are less than
0.25 V.
e. Test and install the SFT-111 Casing-to-Rig Voltage Monitor according to
the instructions provided in this chapter. If the residual voltage is not
zero, attempt to eliminate it before proceeding.
f.
Private
Potential Severity: Light

Potential Loss: Assets
Hazard Category: electrical
DO NOT PROCEED WITH THE OPERATION IF RESIDUAL VOLTAGE

IS IN EXCESS OF 0.25 V BETWEEN RIG, CASING, AND CABLE
ARMOR.
g. Install safety ground straps by:
• Visually inspecting the ground connection to the logging unit, connect

the plug to the socket on the reel.
• Visually inspecting the straps and C clamps for damage, rust, etc.
and check continuity between C clamps, logging unit, ground and
cable armor.
• Attach each clamp securely, one to the derrick and one to the casing.
• Check continuity of these connections using a multimeter.
• Bring the multimeter back inside the logging unit. Only the safety
meter or safety multimeter is allowed outside the logging unit until
the end of the operation.
h. Set out signs reading “Danger Explosives - Turn Off Two Way Radios
and Radio Phones” (B024663) or equivalent. Place one at the site and
one at each entrance to the site. Once the signs are erected, ensure all
radio, cellular, etc. transmissions are deactivated.
i. Turn off all radio frequency (RF) transmitters (radio, cellular, radar, RF
wireless networks, etc.) within 100 ft (30 m) of the well. Receiving units
located within the established safe distance must be disabled such that
an incoming call cannot activate the transmitter.
j. All transmitters (such as radio or TV stations) greater than 200 watts
and within 1 mile (1.6 km) of the well must be disabled such that they
cannot transmit.
7.
Private

APPLYING POWER AT SURFACE ONCE THE EXPLOSIVE OPERATION

HAS STARTED IS PERMITTED ONLY ON THE CONDITION THAT THE
CABLE HEAD AND ENTIRE TOOLSTRING ARE IN CLEAR VIEW OF THE
ENGINEER WHILE APPLYING TOOL POWER. Power must not be applied
through a gun or explosive tool assembly at any time while on surface,
ARMED or UNARMED. Explosive operations have started when explosives
are no longer secured as required for shipment or storage.
8. Instrument cab preparations for explosive operations:
a. Ensure continuity of logging cable to Collector Safety Switch (CSS). Do

not disconnect collector plug.
b. Turn off all AC powered instrumentation, main circuit breakers, inverters,
UPSs, AC power generators, and rig power connections. For units that
use an isolated power distribution utility leg, follow the official powerdown
procedures posted on the power distribution panel.
c. Turn the Collector Safety Switch (CSS) to “OFF” position and remove
key. The key MUST remain outside the wireline unit until the explosive
device is introduced into the well to a minimum depth of 200 ft (70 m)
below ground level or the sea floor.

ONLY AC power circuits for safety systems such as purge and pressurization
systems, fire and gas detection systems and electric winch motive power
can be left connected (if these are installed and need to be used). These
circuits must be independent of the PDP. All AC power into PDP must be
turned off.
9. Procedure for attaching any explosive device (i.e., CST, casing or tubing
cutters, setting tools, perforating guns, etc.) to the cable:
a. Arming or disarming a gun must not be attempted during a thunderstorm,

dust storm, sandstorm, or during the arrival of helicopters or boats at
an offshore site.
Private
b. Arming procedures must not be commenced if such weather, a helicopter

or a boat is expected to arrive before the arming operation can be
completed and the gun introduced into the well to a minimum depth of
200 ft (70 m) below ground level or the sea floor.
c. Verify the Casing-to-Rig Voltage Monitor is reading less than 0.25 V.
d. Clear line of fire of all personnel. No other work is to be done on the rig
and no one is to be above or below the rig floor during assembly, arming,
disarming or disassembly operations.
e. Attach the explosive device to the head or collar locator. The individual
performing this operation MUST have the safety switch key in his/her
possession at the time. The key MUST remain outside the wireline unit
until the explosive device is introduced into the well to a minimum depth
of 200 ft (70 m) below ground level or the sea floor.
Note
Only a Schlumberger Safety Multimeter (H622622) or a Schlumberger
Digital Safety Multimeter (T6005202) may be used when checking electrical
explosive devices (EEDs) and their circuits. All Schlumberger Safety
Multimeters (red meter and red carrying case) have the Schlumberger logo
and name on the face of the meter dial. Do not use conventional multimeter:
Weston, Simpson, etc.
1.1.3.4 Arming
10. Gun and Setting Tool Arming
a. Gun Arming
Before proceeding to specific arming procedures, you are reminded that:
ONLY THE ENGINEER OR TECHNICIAN IN CHARGE OF THE JOB
MAY ARM OR DISARM A GUN. THE ENGINEER/TECHNICIAN MUST
NEVER DELEGATE THIS JOB.
Arming procedures vary from gun type to gun type, refer to the specific
gun system manual for detailed arming procedures. However, some
steps must be observed for all gun types. These steps are:
i.
Private

The cable must be attached to the gun string before the gun string is
armed. Guns that are not electrically connected to the cable when
the head is attached (such as in a multiple gun string) may be armed,
immediately prior to their use at the wellsite and then attached to
the cable.
When using:
• Percussion switches: cable must be attached before the bottom

gun or bottom two guns if using a diode switch are armed.

• Addressable switches: cable must be attached before the top
gun is armed.
ii. Confirm line of fire is clear of all personnel. No other work is to be

done on the rig and no one is to be above or below the rig floor during
assembly, arming, disarming or disassembly operations.
iii. Remove the blasting cap from carrying case with lead wires still
shunted together.
iv. Place cap in Safety Tube (H041901). Close lid and secure with hand
screws.
v. Remove shunt after closing Safety Tube cover and check resistance
using the Schlumberger Safety Multimeter or Schlumberger Safety
Meter.
vi. Cut one wire lead to the desired length at a time. Do not
simultaneously cut both lead wires. Strip insulation off wires as
needed.
vii. Prepare conductor wire lead and check for sparking.
viii. Splice and insulate conductor wire to one blasting cap lead.
ix. Prepare ground wire lead and splice to blasting cap lead, then
insulate.
x. Make a fresh square cut on the detonating cord using only an
approved detonating cord cutter. See the section on Detonating Cord
Cutter included in this manual.
xi. Remove cap from Safety Tube and insert detonating cord.
xii. Push cap onto detonating cord until it seats.
Private
xiii. Crimp the cap onto the detonating cord using proper crimping
techniques or insert blasting cap in booster holder. Remember to use
a cork (H432083) or rubber (P172102) shield for fluid desensitization
if required.
xiv. Prepare gun for watertight seal.
xv. Store all explosive remnants
b. Setting Tool Arming
It is recommended that electrical arming be completed prior to ballistic
arming. However, there may be situations where it is logistically very
difficult and possibly unsafe to follow this arming procedure.
When setting very long and/or heavy devices, either vertical or horizontal
make-up, it may be very difficult to make up the firing head to the setting
tool (CPST-BST) if the cable is already attached. In these cases, it is
permissible to ballistically arm BEFORE electrically arming. This will
facilitate making up the string by utilizing the quick connect between the
firing head and the correlation device. This method is only acceptable
when pre-job Hazard Analysis and Risk Control (HARC) as per OFS
QHSE Standard 020 is completed, and verifies size or length of assembly
to be set is prohibitive to effective make-up as per standard procedures.
Note: Electrical arming of Setting Tools

Electrical arming of the setting tool occurs when the firing head, with
igniter installed, is connected to the cable/head/correlation device.
The individual performing this operation MUST have the safety switch
key in their possession at the time, and the key MUST remain outside the
wireline unit until the setting tool is introduced into the well to a minimum
depth of 200 ft (70 m) below ground level or the sea floor.

Potential Loss: Assets, Personnel
Hazard Category: explosives
You are reminded that: ONLY THE ENGINEER OR TECHNICIAN

IN CHARGE OF THE JOB MAY ELECTRICALLY ARM OR DISARM
AN EXPLOSIVE DEVICE. THE ENGINEER/TECHNICIAN MUST BE
DIRECTLY INVOLVED IN THIS TASK AND NEVER DELEGATE THIS
JOB.
Private
Note: Ballistic arming of Setting Tools

Ballistic arming of the setting tool occurs when the firing head, with igniter
installed, is connected to the burn chamber with power charge. The
engineer/technician in charge must be aware that this portion of the
operation is being carried out, but may delegate the actual task to other,
qualified Schlumberger crew members.
i. Standard Arming Procedure (Electrical before Ballistic)
a) Clear line of fire of all personnel. No other work is to be done on

the rig and no one is to be above or below the rig floor during
b) Install igniter into firing head.
c) Point lower end of firing head in safe direction, and check
resistance of igniter using the Schlumberger Safety Multimeter.
d) Verify that there is no residual voltage at head or correlation
device by shorting at bottom and checking for spark.
e) Confirm line of fire is still clear of all personnel.
f) Attach cable/head/correlation device to firing head. This
constitutes electrical arming of the setting tool. The
engineer/technician in charge of the job must be directly involved
with this portion of the procedure.
The individual performing this operation MUST have the safety
switch key in their possession at the time, and the key MUST
remain outside the wireline unit until the setting tool is introduced
into the well to a minimum depth of 200 ft (70 m) below ground
level or the sea floor.
g) Install power charge into burn chamber of setting tool.
h) Install firing head, with igniter, onto setting tool. This constitutes
ballistic arming of the setting tool. This task may be delegated
by the engineer or technician in charge to other, qualified
Schlumberger crew members,
ii. Alternate Arming Procedure (Ballistic before Electrical)
a) Clear line of fire of all personnel. No other work is to be done on

the rig and no one is to be above or below the rig floor during
b) Install igniter in Firing Head.
Private
c) Point lower end of firing head in safe direction, and check

resistance of igniter using the Schlumberger Safety Multimeter.
d) Install power charge into burn chamber of setting tool.
e) Install firing head, with igniter, onto setting tool. This constitutes
ballistic arming of the setting tool. This task may be delegated
by the engineer or technician in charge to other, qualified
Schlumberger crew members,
f) Verify that the Casing-to-Rig Voltage Monitor is reading less than
0.25 V.
g) Verify that there is no residual voltage at head or correlation
device by shorting at bottom and checking for spark.
h) Confirm line of fire is still clear of all personnel.

i) Attach cable/head/correlation device to firing head. This
constitutes electrical arming of the setting tool. The
engineer/technician in charge of the job must be directly involved
with this portion of the procedure. The individual performing this
operation MUST have the safety switch key in their possession at
the time, and the key MUST remain outside the wireline unit until
the setting tool is introduced into the well to a minimum depth of
1.1.3.5 Operational Procedures in the Well

11. Proceed into the well.
12. Safety procedures while in the hole
a. At a minimum depth of 200 ft (70 m) below ground level or the sea floor,
turn on the Collector Safety Switch, restore AC power, etc. Continue
in hole.
b. Tie in, position gun and shoot.
c. Come out of hole. At a minimum of 200 ft (70 m) below ground level or the
sea floor, prepare the instrument cab as for explosive operations (1.1.3.3
Rigging-Up) and verify the casing to rig voltage is less than 0.25 V.
Private

If a thunderstorm, dust storm or sandstorm threatens to arrive before the

disarming operation can be completed, the gun must be kept in the well
at a minimum depth of 200 ft (70 m) below ground level or the sea floor.
13. If explosive device did not fire:
a. If hollow carrier gun(s) did not fire, perform the test to determine if an
ongoing thermal event (a hang fire) is occurring. If there is, follow the
recovery procedures as explained in “Potential Delayed Detonation”

section. Otherwise, immediately relieve any trapped pressure and then
disarm the gun(s) (ballistically before electrically using the procedure
provided in the Field Operations Manual).
Once disarmed, the gun may be disconnected from the cable. If the gun
contains HMX explosives that were heated to more than 330°F, disarm it
but do not download the explosives from the gun for 48 hr.
b. If a setting tool did not fire, immediately disarm the tool electrically by
disconnecting the head/collar locator and then the firing head (electrically
disarm before ballistic disarming).
14. All guns must be safely relieved of any trapped pressure immediately upon
removal from the well using the procedure described in the manual for the
specific gun string.
15. Repack unused detonators. Police the area for detonating cord remnants,
unused or misfired charges, etc. and pack them in the explosives remnant
box.
Private
1.1.4 Field Safety Procedures for Slapper Activated

Firing Equipment (S.A.F.E.)
1.1.4.1 Exceptions to Conventional Electric Detonator Field Safety

Procedures
Note: Follow procedures for Conventional Detonators

Follow the procedures explained in Conventional Electric Detonator Field Safety
Procedures, only specific differences and exceptions are given in this section.
• The ESIC-CB incorporates safety features that must be verified before use
at the wellsite. These features include the DC standoff voltage, polarity
selectivity and the RF filter circuit. All of these functions can be tested with
either the ESIB test box or using ESIC FIT and TRIM procedures. These tests
must be performed prior to each job to verify the ESIC is operating properly.
• The EFI should be installed just prior to running in the well. Since the
EFI contains explosives that are sensitive to moisture, it is packaged in a
hermetically sealed bag with a packet of desiccant. If the bag is damaged or
opened, or if there is any sign of moisture on the EFI, do not use the EFI.
Arrival At Wellsite:
• No need to check for proximity of RF antennas.

• Operations may be performed in wells alongside (but not underneath) high
voltage power lines providing that the minimum clearance of all equipment
and personnel from the lines is 30 ft (10 m).
• During Spot Safety Meeting highlight to all that a “SAFE-BA or Secure*”
system is to be used.
Rigging-Up:
• Outside Preparations:
– Electrical cathodic protection systems can be left powered.

– Electrical welding operations can be continued except in areas where
explosives are stored or are in use.
– Radio transmitters can be left powered and used without restrictions.
– Helicopter and boat operations can be continued.
Private
• Casing-to-Rig voltages can exceed the 0.25 V limitation used when

conducting conventional detonator operations, but MUST NOT exceed 40.0
V. Although this level of voltage is non-hazardous for “S.A.F.E.” operations,
it does present a risk to personnel and should be reported to the client
representative at the wellsite.
• Test and install the SFT-111 Casing-to-Rig Voltage Monitor according to
instructions.
Note
DO NOT PROCEED WITH THE OPERATION IF RESIDUAL VOLTAGE IS
IN EXCESS OF 40 V.
1.1.4.2 SAFE-BA Gun Preparation

1. Lay out guns in proper sequence.
2. Clear line of fire of all personnel. No other work is to be done on the rig
and no one is to be above or below the rig floor during assembly, arming,
disarming or disassembly operations.

SAFETY PINS MUST BE INSTALLED ONTO THE GUN STRING DURING

ALL OF THE FOLLOWING STEPS.
3. Verify electrical connection to each cartridge using a Schlumberger

Safety Multimeter (H622622) or a Schlumberger Digital Safety Multimeter
(T6005202).
4. Prepare the SAFE-BA basic units and connect to guns.
5. Make up gun string mechanically.
6. Splice wires and electrically check from head to cartridge bottom using the
Schlumberger Safety Multimeter (H622622) or a Schlumberger Digital Safety
Multimeter (T6005202).
1.1.4.3 Gun Arming

Before proceeding to specific arming procedures, you are reminded that: ONLY
THE ENGINEER OR TECHNICIAN IN CHARGE OF THE JOB MAY ARM OR
DISARM A GUN. THE ENGINEER/TECHNICIAN MUST NEVER DELEGATE
THIS JOB.
Private
For SAFE-BA operations:

The cable must be attached to the gun string before the gun string is armed.
Guns that are not electrically connected to the cable when the head is attached
(such as in a multiple gun string) may be armed, immediately prior to their use at
the wellsite and then attached to the cable (before the bottom gun or bottom two
guns if using a diode switch are armed).
Pick up guns. Remove SAFE-BA safety barriers and completely make up the
EFI Head to the gun string.
Complete instructions for the use and maintenance of all SAFE-BA applications
can be found in the SAFE-BA Mechanical and Electrical Volume Maintenance
Manual (InTouch ID: 3012752).
For Secure detonator operations:

The cable must be attached to the gun string before the gun string is armed.
Guns that are not electrically connected to the cable when the head is attached
(such as in a multiple gun string) may be armed, immediately prior to their use at
the wellsite and then attached to the cable.
When using:
• Percussion switches: cable must be attached before the bottom gun or

bottom two guns if using a diode switch are armed.
• Addressable switches: cable must be attached before the top gun is armed.
For Secure detonator operations:
1. Cut one wire lead to desired length at a time. Do not simultaneously cut
both lead wires. Strip insulation off wires as needed.
2. Prepare conductor wire lead and check for sparking
3. Splice and insulate conductor wire to one Secure lead.
4. Prepare ground wire lead and splice to Secure lead, then insulate.
Private
5. Insert booster into Secure detonator and lock in place.

6. Prepare gun for watertight seal.
Complete instructions and best practices for Secure applications can be found
on the Secure Reference Page (InTouch ID: 3701657).
Private
1.1.5 Field Safety Procedures for Coil-Tubing-Deployed

Perforating Guns Fired Electrically
To perforate with guns deployed on coiled tubing and fired electrically via an
integral wireline, the following explosive safety rules shall be applied. Standard
pressure handling and coiled tubing operation safety rules must also to be
followed.
1.1.5.1 Determining Equipment to Use

1. Either a “SAFE” system or an electric detonator may be used if an

electric-before-ballistic arming sequence can be followed. This sequence
has three parts:
a. Attach the cable head first;

b. Attach the detonator electrically second; and then
c. Make the ballistic connection to the gun.
2. If the bottom gun in the string cannot be armed using the
electric-before-ballistic arming sequence (for whatever reason, be it gun
length, lubricator characteristics, or wellhead pressure) then a “SAFE”
system is the only approved method to electrically actuate the guns.
3. Top-arming a gun with an electric detonator in the same electric-before-ballistic
manner is also allowed, if there is only one gun or one assembly of
ballistically connected guns in the string.
1.1.5.2 Job Preparation

1. Observe all standards listed on the current Schlumberger Field Safety
Procedures placard.
2. Remove rig wiring that might contact the coiled tubing or the lead between
the coiled tubing and logging units.
3. Install the grounding straps between wellhead, rig, coiled tubing reel, logging
unit and generator.
Private
1.1.5.3 Equipment Preparation and Rig-Up

1. Before attaching any explosive device to the cable, the Collector Safety
Switch in the wireline unit must be turned off and the key removed. If no
Collector Safety Switch exists in the logging unit, the coiled tubing unit shall
be equipped with a Collector Safety Switch installed between the collector
and the lead going to the logging unit.
2. Lead from the Collector at Coiled Tubing reel to Log Unit (Collector Safety
Switch) must be connected at all times.
3. The individual attaching the explosive device to the head shall have the
safety switch key in his/her possession.

4. The safety switch key shall remain outside the wireline (or coiled tubing) unit
until the explosive device is introduced into the well to a minimum depth of
1.1.5.4 Operational Procedures in the Well

1. At a minimum depth of 200 ft (70 m) below ground level or the sea floor, turn
on the Collector Safety Switch, restore AC power and continue into the hole.
2. When coming out of the hole, at 200 ft (70 m) turn off and remove the safety
switch key as above.
Private
1.1.6 Field Safety Procedures for Downhole Tractor

conveyed explosive devices
Tractor operations present a significant hazard due to the risk associated with
their high power electrical motors. Conventional resistorized detonators shall
NEVER be used in downhole tractor operation.
There are a wide variety of downhole tractor models available today. The
procedure for perforating with this equipment depends on the model being used.
Refer to the Tractor Reference Page (InTouch ID: 3264207) for the latest tractor
procedures and information.
1.1.6.1 Schlumberger MaxTrac (PSTT)

The PSTT can only be used with Secure detonators, in a single gun configuration.
Follow all standard explosive safety procedures for S.A.F.E. as well as all
standard procedures specified for safe PSTT operation.
1.1.6.2 Downhole tractor systems

Non-Schlumberger downhole tractors shall only be ran with the eFire* IRIS
Selective Perforating System.
Non-Schlumberger downhole tractors would require a safety adapter sub to

be used with the SAFE-BA detonating system. The number of unique tractor
designs, versions and modifications continues to flourish. An attempt to produce
a safety adapter sub for each would produce an uncontrollable safety hazard.
Each tractor would require a unique certified safety sub. The company producing
the tractor would need to alert Schlumberger any time it wanted to make a
modification. Re-certification of the associated safety sub would be required
for every modification.
To avoid this complex, error prone and time consuming process the eFire IRIS
Selective Perforating System has been designed to be the detonating system for
explosive devices ran with all non-Schlumberger tractor conveyance systems.
IRIS isolates the explosive device from the tractor voltages and signals and only
allows detonation on correctly encoded IRIS control signals. It incorporates
S.A.F.E. technology giving it the same safe operation characteristics as the
SAFE-BA and Secure systems.
Private
When working with the eFire IRIS operated firing head (IFMU-W/F or the newer
IFSU) and a downhole tractor all standard eFire safety procedures must be
followed including the explosive safety procedures. These are documented in
the IFMU-W or IFSU maintenance manual available from the InTouch Document
Distribution service.
1.1.6.3 Welltec Well Tractor®

Currently all Welltec tractor perforating jobs must have design details submitted
to SRC InTouch for approval. Refer to the SAFE-BA manual (InTouch ID:
3012752) and/or the Welltec Tractor and SAFE-BA page (InTouch ID: 3550961)
for the latest Welltec tractor operating procedures.
Select Welltec tractors are the only exception to the rule requiring the use of the
IRIS detonating system. When using the Welltec tractor a SAFE-BA detonating
system may be used provided two special SAFE-BA safety adapter subs
(H358020) are placed in the string between the Well Tractor and the SAFE-BA
system. These subs protect the SAFE-BA equipment from the high power
required for tractor operation and control.
Secure is NOT compatible with this system.
Welltec builds the tractors that they operate. The SAFE-BA/Welltec safety
adapter sub was designed to work with specific Well Tractors and has only been
certified safe when combined with these specific models.
Identification of Welltec operated Welltec Tractor Electronics

Compatible with SAFE-BA Adapter
operated Well Tractor versions compatible with the SAFE-BA/Welltec safety

adapter sub and the SAFE-BA equipment are the following:
Welltec Well Tractor Welltec Electronics Cartridge version

3-1/8 in. diameter P42M124-01
2-1/8 in. diameter P22M301-01
P22M202-01
The electronics cartridge version id can be found stamped on the chassis of

the Welltec electronics.
Private
SRC-Wireline\SRC-Wireline\InTouch ID 3013565\3.1\Release Date:10-Jun-2004\EDMS UID: 274896043\Produced: 13-Jul-2006 20:55:42 1-22 WL FOM / Safety 1-22
2-1/8" Well Tractor 3-1/8" Well Tractor
Identification of MWS operated Welltec Tractor Electronics

compatible with SAFE-BA adapter
The exact configuration of the Welltec tractor electronics cannot be established

from external inspection of the tool – an internal inspection of the electronics
section is required.
1. MWS Tractor specialist to remove electronics housing.
Tractor
Bottom
Tractor
Top
Electronics
Housing
Figure 1-2: Electronics housing
2. Look for the circuit card near the top end of the electronics chassis
Private
Electronics Top
(Cable Head End)
Figure 1-3: Electronics chassis
3. Ensure that the Welltec part number printed on the board is 42MD0117, and
that the revision code of the board is Rev 1.
Rev
1
Welltec
42MD0117
here
Figure 1-4: Welltec part number
4. If the part number and revision code are as described, reinstall electronics
housing and proceed with job.
Safety Procedures for SAFE-BA Welltec Tractor Operation
All Schlumberger Safety Rules apply. In ADDITION to the standard explosive

safety procedures displayed on the Explosive Field Safety Procedures placard
H709745, the following steps shall be taken.
1. Prior to connecting Schlumberger equipment below the Well Tractor have

the tractor configured for perforating as specified by the Welltec procedures
manual and tested following Welltec’s pre-job test procedures. The tractor
should be connected through the logging cable to the Welltec surface power
supply and controls during its pre-job operational check.
2. Each Tractor Safety Sub is then to be tested separately in conjunction with
the tractor.
3. After successfully testing the tractor and Tractor Safety Subs, the Welltec
surface controls and unit must be prepared for explosive operations:
Private
• Turn off all AC powered Welltec surface controls and instruments.

• Disconnect the Welltec surface control panel from the logging cable and
wireline unit.
• Turn off the Welltec power supply (generator, or supplied rig power).
• The Welltec safety switch must be placed in the off position and the key
MUST be removed and given to the Schlumberger engineer until the gun
string is safely deployed into the well.
• Any Welltec jumper cables that were used to connect power to the
Schlumberger unit must be removed, ensuring isolation of the Welltec
power supply from the logging cable. Any Schlumberger cabling that was
removed to allow Welltec power to connect to the logging cable must be
reattached to ensure the Schlumberger safety switch (CSS) is operable.

• It MUST be made clear to everyone involved that the Welltec safety
switch key will be controlled by the Schlumberger engineer. The Welltec
safety switch, surface equipment and power supply may only be operated
with the express approval of the Schlumberger engineer.
4. The operator may now assemble the Schlumberger tools below the Welltec
tractor, including the two Tractor Safety Subs and the ESIC cartridge (the
safety subs must be above the ESIC). However, perforating guns or other
explosive devices must not be connected to the string at this time.
5. All Schlumberger rules and practices for dealing with explosives must be
followed. If an operational check is desired use the SAFE-BA test box (ESIB)
below the ESIC and follow operational check procedures outlined in the
SAFE-BA manual, “Theory of Operation” chapter. This is the only operational
check technique permitted when SAFE-BA and Tractor Safety Subs are in
the string. A “Hot Check” using a shorting device must not be performed
through the safety sub.
In all respects comply with rules concerning when and where a “Hot Check”
may be performed.

Hazard Category: machinery equipment hand tools
Caution: The Tractor Safety Sub cartridge used below the Welltec tractor
must also be tested separately. Failure to follow test procedures outlined for
the safety sub WILL result in damage to the safety sub and WILL result in
a mis-run. (See the chapter on Operating Instructions for testing the safety
sub in a stand-alone manner.)
Private
6. When all surface checks have been completed successfully, and all other
preparations have been completed as outlined in the Schlumberger Explosive
Safety Procedure placard, place the Schlumberger safety switch (CSS)
in the OFF position. At this point the engineer must confirm that there is
continuity between the logging cable and Schlumberger Safety Switch (CSS),
the Welltec surface equipment is disconnected from the logging cable, and
that he has possession of the Welltec safety switch key. With the safety
switch (CSS) key in the possession of the Schlumberger operator making the
connection, the UNARMED explosive devices may be connected to the string.
7. Standard Schlumberger SAFE-BA arming procedures must be followed to
arm the explosive device.
8. When arming is complete, the tool string may be lowered down hole. When
the string is deeper than the minimum safe depth identified in the Explosives
Field Safety Procedures placard, the Schlumberger safety switch (CSS) may
be turned on or the logging cable may be connected to the Welltec surface
equipment. Surface equipment may then be powered up. The Welltec safety
switch, surface equipment and power supply may only be operated with the
express approval of the Schlumberger engineer.
9. When the guns have been fired and the string is being brought out of the well,
before the minimum safe depth is passed the Welltec surface equipment
must be prepared as described in item 2 and the Schlumberger surface
equipment prepared as described in the Explosive Safety Procedures
placard. The Welltec surface equipment must be disconnected from the
logging cable, and the logging cable to Schlumberger Safety Switch (CSS)
connection must be established and confirmed. The Welltec safety switch
must be placed in the OFF position and the key given to the Schlumberger
engineer. The Schlumberger safety switch key must remain outside the
wireline unit until the gun has been disarmed if necessary and disconnected
from the string. Everyone involved must be reminded not to operate the
Welltec surface equipment and power supply until the explosive device has
been disarmed and disconnected from the string.
Private
1.1.7 Potential Delayed Detonation (Thermal Event

Procedure)
Summary
Under a unique and extremely rare combination of specific conditions, a misfire in

a sealed hollow carrier device can initiate a thermal event. This event potentially
could last for 1/2 hr or longer and could ultimately result in a detonation. The
alert applies to all hollow carrier devices (HSD, PPG, HEGS, severing tools, jet
cutters, punchers, etc.) and all explosive types (PETN, RDX, HMX, HNS, HTX).
Details
When a gun misfires, the detonating cord may burn rather than detonate. If well
conditions do not permit the thermal energy generated in the gun to dissipate, a
slow process may begin which heats the explosive compounds in the shaped
charges. If the charges remain at this elevated temperature long enough they
can also start to burn, generating more heat which could in turn lead other
charges to burn or even detonate.
This specific sequence of events is so rare in our perforating business that there
have only been two known field occurrences. However, drawing on the general
knowledge of the Institute of Makers of Explosives (IME), the general explosive
industry is more familiar with delayed initiations. "Hang fires" are known in
explosives disposal, military, and mining. They are a byproduct of the nature of
explosives. It is not an issue specific to Schlumberger perforating systems.
Until an example of delayed initiation was observed, experts had not considered
it possible in our operating environment. SRC is developing a recreation of
the event under controlled laboratory conditions. Testing is ongoing to find the
combination of conditions that would support this event so that it can be studied
and further understood in a perforating gun context.
Procedure
Due to the potentially catastrophic safety hazard of a delayed detonation

occurring at surface during gun retrieval, a procedure for retrieving misfired
guns has been developed. This procedure provides methods of identifying a
gun undergoing this thermal event and steps that must be taken to ensure the
safety of personnel.
This flowchart lays out the procedures:
Private
Misfired (Hollow Carrier) Device

Retrieval Procedure
Recover the Gun
Did it misfire?
"no holes in the carrier"
Yes
Is well head temperature > 100

No
degC (212 degF)?
Yes
Perform the "Water Test".

Proceed Apply a few drops of water to
No
Normally the gun.
Does water bubble & boil off?
Yes
-Leave gun where it is!!!

-Clear the area.
-Wait 15 min.
Perform the "Water Test".

Proceed Apply a few drops of water to
No
Normally the gun.
Yes
-Leave gun where it is!!!

-Clear the area.
-Wait 2 hrs
Proceed normally
Assume HMX explosives Perform the "Water Test".
have been exposed to Apply a few drops of water to the
No
temperature above 330 gun.
Yes
Figure 1-5: Misfired (Hollow Carrier) Device Retrieval Procedure
Private
A misfired gun undergoing a thermal event will be very hot when retrieved. Gun
carrier temperatures will exceed the boiling point of water (212°F). When a gun
experiencing a thermal event is identified the gun must not be moved. The
area surrounding the gun shall be kept clear of all personnel for 2 hr to protect
them from a delayed detonation. Once the gun and its explosives have cooled
they may be handled normally. Assume HMX explosives have been exposed
to temperature above 330°F and require special handling (do not down load
for 48 hr).
In high temperature wells gun carrier temperature even for fired guns could
exceed 212°F. The 15 min waiting period on the flow chart allows such guns to
cool below 212°F.
Action Required by Operation Managers:
The "Water Test" must be performed on all misfired hollow carrier devices. This
test was chosen because it is easy to perform at the wellsite and will positively
identify every occurrence of a thermal event.
Review this procedure with all crews immediately.
Report all situations where the 2 hr waiting period is invoked to InTouch.
Prevention
The way to prevent a thermal event from occurring is to prevent gun misfires.
Please refer to InTouch alert 304688 on Misfire Prevention for remedies to
common causes.
If you have any further queries or comments regarding this message, please
contact SRC InTouch (e-mail: intouch-SRC-WL@slb).
Private
1.1.8 Gun Disarming for all Types of Electrically Fired

Guns
The disarming of any explosive is the responsibility of the engineer/technician as
was the arming. In the interest of safety and efficiency, the engineer/technician
physically performs the act of arming and disarming. Neither task is to be
delegated.
It is mandatory that all explosive field safety procedures be observed whenever

an armed gun is returned to the surface.
Specific instructions for each gun system is located under Disarming in either
the Wireline Perforating FOM (C200499) or the Maintenance Manual for the
gun system being run.
1.1.9 Hazardous Gases

1. Hazardous gases produced during detonation can include carbon monoxide
and nitrogen oxides.
2. Caution should be exercised where these gases can collect and every effort
should be made to adequately ventilate the area.
3. The use of monitoring equipment and breathing apparatus is recommended
in confined areas.
4. If detonating fumes are inhaled, move immediately to an area of fresh air.
Apply artificial respiration if indicated. Call a physician immediately.
1.1.10 Post-Job Checks

1. Make sure all equipment brought to the well is loaded for the return trip and
make an inventory.
2. If the DOT/Transport Canada label is not on the gun, etc., replace it on any
device that contains explosives.
3. Police the area for detonating cord scraps, loose charges, trash, etc.
4. Place all waste detonating cord and charges in the remnant box for
transportation to the shop.
5. Short the leads of waste detonators and transport them back to the shop in
the detonator carrying case.
Private
1.1.11 Gun Handling

Explosives, even in their safest state, are potentially dangerous. It is good
practice to treat loaded guns with care and avoid shocks when handling them.
This is particularly important when dealing with guns that have misfired and
contain explosives that have been subjected to high temperature for an extended
period.
Potential Severity: Serious

Hazard Category: temperature, explosives
HMX exhibits an increase in impact sensitivity after exposure above 330 degF
[166 degC], even for a short time; or after exposure above 300 degF [149 degC]
for 100 h. Therefore, if a Schlumberbger HMX perforating system has been
exposed to 330 degF [166 degC] or to 300 degF [149 degC] for 100 h, it must
be removed (unshot) from the well and stored in a safe location. Furthermore,
the system shall not be downloaded (explosives components removed from
the carrier) for at least 48 h, allowing sufficient time for HMX to revert to a less
impact-sensitive state.
Loaded guns must be stored and transported with plastic vent plugs, or O-ring
groove vent systems. This allows outgassing of explosives in case of fire while
still providing moisture protection during transportation or storage.
1.1.12 Fishing Operations

The procedures for fishing operations are similar to the procedures for misfires.
All safety rules that pertain to disarming must be followed. However, one thing
must be remembered: treat any gun that has been fished out of the hole
as a gun with trapped pressure and proceed accordingly. It should also be
noted that the gun must be disarmed ballistically and then electrically before any
attempt is made to remove the device from the fishing tool.
Private
1.1.13 General Rules for Transportation of Explosives and

Radioactive Materials
The responsibility for ensuring that hazardous items, including explosives and
radioactive materials, are transported in a safe and correct manner lies with all
members of the crew. While the engineer/technician holds the final responsibility,
all crew members must take joint responsibility for knowing and ensuring that
proper procedures are followed. They must also make sure that the transport is
conducted in accordance with established procedures. Refer to the Explosive
Safety Manual (InTouch ID: 3010562) for transportation standards.
The following are Schlumberger rules; additional local regulations may apply.
1.1.13.1 Common Rules for Both Explosives and Radioactive

Materials
1. Radioactive sources and/or explosives must always be the last thing loaded
onto the vehicle (just prior to departure from the facility) and the first thing
unloaded from the vehicle (immediately upon arrival back at the facility
office). Sources must be returned to the storage pit immediately upon return
from the wellsite; and explosives must be returned to their proper storage
locations immediately upon return from the wellsite.
2. Radioactive sources and/or explosives must be properly signed in and out of
the storage pits and/or bunkers for each transport.
3. Radioactive sources and/or explosives must always be properly stored and
secured for transport. Refer to the Transport of Explosives section below for
details.
4. All radiation shields and boxes or cases containing explosives must
be properly labeled at all times (including loaded guns). Details on
proper labeling are located in the Explosive Safety Manual and Logging
Supervisor/Assistant Radiation Manual. Vehicles must display the proper
warning signs while radioactive sources and/or explosives are on-board and
they must NOT be displayed if NOT on-board.
1.1.13.2 Transport of Explosives

Blasting caps and loaded guns may be carried on the same truck only under
the following conditions:
1. Blasting caps must be carried in a blasting cap carrying case. The carrying
case must be locked, grounded, and secured to an integral part of the truck.
Private
2. The blasting cap carrying case must be placed either in the recorder cab with
the door to the cab locked or in a locked compartment of the truck.
3. No more than two blasting caps may be carried for each loaded gun in transit.
4. The total weight of the explosives in the guns on the truck may not exceed
90 kg (200 lb). This is the total weight of explosives not the weight of the
guns or packing.
5. Shaped charges may be carried either in the recorder cab with the door to
the cab locked or in a locked compartment in their original container only.
Boxes of charges must be closed (sealed with tape) and packaged as they
were originally by the manufacturer.
a. If a roll of detonating cord must be transported, carry it either in the

recorder cab with the door to the cab locked or in a locked compartment
in its original container. The container must be sealed with tape.
b. Packer setting tool primary igniters (and secondary igniters, if applicable)
must be carried in a different blasting cap carrying case than that carrying
the detonators.
c. Packer setting tool charges, such as flammable solids, must be carried
separately from the explosive materials.
6. An explosives remnant box must be available on any job using explosives.
Waste detonating cord and/or excess explosives must be transported from
the job in the remnant box. Waste blasting caps must be separated from the
other explosives, shunted, and placed in the blasting cap carrying case.
7. Primary High explosives (typically detonators) must be stored in separate
containers from Secondary High explosives (typically boosters, detonating
cord and shape charges).
8. All loaded guns and explosive materials must be securely stored for transport
to prevent any loss or damage while in transit.
1.1.13.3 Transport of Radioactive Materials and Explosives on the

Same Vehicle
Explosives (other than class 1.1) may be transported on the same vehicle as
radioactive sources. Class 1.1 explosives can include some shape charges
such as 58C and 64C UltraPack, 1-11/16 HNS Enerjet and 51J Ultrajet HMX,
as well as some detonating cord, some cutters and severing tools. Refer to
the Explosive Safety Manual (InTouch ID: 3010562) for details on the class of
explosives. However, note that when shape charges and detonating cords are
loaded in a gun, their shipping class changes from 1.1 to 1.4, and as such, can
be carried on the same vehicle as radioactive sources.
Private
When explosives and radioactive materials are carried on the same vehicle, they
should not be carried in the same compartment of the vehicle. All rules, as listed
above for each, must be complied with.
1.1.13.4 Offshore Transport

When transporting explosives or explosive devices offshore, follow these rules:
1. Explosives sent to a rig should be prepared in the standard, prescribed

manner. High and low explosives must be in separate remnant boxes or
original containers and blasting caps and boosters in the cap carrying case.
2. Explosive tools on pallets must be secured by three chains in a hold-down

arrangement, with a chain or rod attached to the end of the carrier that
threads through the gun head protector caps. The chain or rod should be
locked to prevent removal during transport.
3. A shock-absorbing mounting device must be provided on the bottom of the
carrier to protect guns from excessive shock.
4. Crew boxes that contain blasting cap carrying cases must be kept locked
during transport. The case must be locked, grounded and secured inside
the box.
1.1.13.5 Prepacked Expendable Kits

Field locations preparing Baker kits may not include the explosives unless they
are carried in a blasting cap carrying case.
1.1.13.6 Reporting Theft or Loss of Explosive Material

When the daily inventory reveals a possible theft or loss of explosives, or as
soon as any employee acquires knowledge of or suspects a theft or loss of
explosives, the Geomarket QHSE Manager must be immediately notified through
the Operation Manager. If explosives are missing from a shipment, notify
“InTouch” and your Geomarket QHSE Manager immediately.
In the U.S., the theft or loss must be reported to the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco
and Firearms and the Department of the Treasury, within 24 hr of discovery of
the theft or loss by QHSE staff. In addition, the theft or loss must be reported to
local authorities and some state agencies.
Private
1.1.14 Disposal of Explosives

All explosives must be disposed of according to the procedures described in the
Explosive Safety Manual (InTouch ID: 3010562).
Private
1.2 Collector Safety Switch (CSS)
1.2.1 CSS Functionality

The CSS (Collector Safety Switch) is a simple switch that will allow the field
engineer/technician to switch the logging cable(s) to selected surface equipment.
When in the “OFF” or “PLAYBACK” position, the logging cable is shorted to
ground through two 10k ohm resistors. These resistors bleed off any residual
charge in the cable. The CSS is also equipped with a key, which will lock the
switch in the “OFF” position.
The two 10k ohm resistors (one rated at 3W and the other at 5W) are run in
parallel. If a large charge/surge is encountered, the lower wattage resistor will
burn first, allowing the second, larger wattage resistor to continue to dissipate
charges. The CSS resistors can be checked during the truck TRIM procedures
by reading the value of the safety resistor. Normal checking of these resistors
will give a reading of 5k ohms. If the reading is 10k ohms, one of the resistors is
not functioning and must be replaced immediately.
The CSUD was designed with two different cable buses on the back of its Tool
Interface Unit. CSU MAIN was used to power tools that didn’t require auxiliary
(sonde) power and CSU AUX is used to power tools that did. The original design
evolved from the function of the CSS to select a downhole tool and supply it with
AC power (Main) or DC power (Auxiliary). This “CSU” design is carried to the
tool module design. Since we are still using these tool modules, the same two
cable buses still exist in the Dual Bay Maxis, Mono Bay Maxis and the Modular
Configuration Maxis.
1.2.2 Common Precautions

1. The CSS is not a circuit breaker. Do not operate it while downhole tool
power is still applied.
2. The CSS is not a master switch. Switch off the computers properly using the
designated power switches (hardware or software activated).
3. When the CSS is in the “OFF” or “Playback” position:
a. The cable will be detached from the surface equipment. This will prevent
accidental power transmission to the downhole tools.
b. The cable will be grounded or discharged by the two 10k ohm resistors.
A typical 20k ft (6 km) cable has the capacity of a 2 µF capacitor charged
with hundreds of volts. This charge, if not discharged, is enough to
Private
activate an explosive detonator if it is not equipped with internal safety

resistors. In the “OFF” position, the CSS will also disarm the power to the
surface equipment. The Safety Key can then be detached and the CSS
will be locked in the “OFF” position.
4. A properly operational CSS will ensure the cable is discharged and safe for
electrically arming the detonator. Check that both resistors are intact and the
cable is physically connected to the CSS (through the cable and/or AK plug
or the Cannon bulkhead connector). It is a good habit to ground the arming
wires to mass prior to arming an explosive device.
5. A spare key is normally bolted to the CSS.
1.2.3 Types of Collector Safety Switches

The four basic types of CSS are:
1. CSS in the CSU-D logging units (CSUD-CSS) (Obsolete)

2. CSS in the Dual-Bay or Mono-Bay Maxis logging units (DBM-MBM-CSS)
3. CSS in the Modular Configuration Maxis logging racks (MCM CSS)
4. CSS in the Shallow Well Perforating Truck (SWPT-CSS)
Only a generic Collector Safety Switch is covered for each type of unit. Please
be aware of the features or limitations of the particular CSS in your unit or
logging rack.
1.2.3.1 CSUD-CSS (Obsolete)

1. CSUD-CSS has an “intermediate step” between switch positions.
2. The CSS switch has a set of switches connected to 1 sec delay of
arming/disarming the PDP, for both the CSU power and the Panel power.
3. Two resistors (10k ohm/5W wirewound, 10k ohm/3W carbon) in parallel,
giving 5k ohms.
4. Monocable connections:
a. When in CSU Main (Monocable) - the monocable is connected to line

#1 of the CSU-MAIN cable.
b. When in CSU AUX (Monocable) - the monocable is connected to line
#7 of the CSU-AUX cable.
c. When in PANEL SURVEY (Monocable) - the monocable is connected to
line #1 of the PANEL SURVEY cable.
Private
d. When in Panel SHOOT (Monocable) - the monocable is connected to

line 1 of the PANEL SHOOT cable.
5. The SP ground/fish and DLT return/fish are always connected to the CSU via
CSU-MAIN cable, even when you are using CSU-AUX cable.
1.2.3.2 DBM-MBM-CSS
1. MAXIS CSS has an “intermediate step” between switch positions.
2. The CSS switch has a set of switches connected to 1 sec delay of
arming/disarming the PDP, for both the MAXIS power and the Panel power.
3. Two resistors (10k/5W wirewound, 10k/3W carbon) in parallel, giving 5k ohm.

4. Monocable connections:
a. When in CSU MAIN (Monocable) - the monocable is connected to line

#1 of the CSU-MAIN cable.
b. When in CSU AUX (Monocable) - the monocable is connected to line
#7 of the CSU-AUX cable.
c. When in PANEL SURVEY (Monocable) - the monocable is connected to
the line #1 of the PANEL SURVEY cable.
d. When in PANEL SHOOT (Monocable) - the monocable is connected to
line #1 of the PANEL SHOOT cable.
5. Both CSUF MAIN Cable (P8) and CSU AUX Cable (P9) have SP ground/fish
(LCA8) and DLT return/fish (LCA9) cables.
6. Each cable has complete conductors running independently. SP ground/fish
in MAIN and AUX cable are connected together in the SSD. DLT return/fish
in the MAIN and AUX cable are connected together in the SSD.
7. Each conductor is shielded. These shields are indirectly grounded via the
overall shield.
8. MAXIS CSS has an extra set of switches allowing the SSD to know the
position of the CSS. Both MAIN and AUX cable can be used to sense CSS
position.
1.2.3.3 MCM-CSS
1. MCM-CSS does NOT have an “intermediate step” between switch
positions. Heptacable and/or Monocable are alternatively shorted by their
corresponding safety resistors when not in use.
2. The CSS switch does not have the 1 sec delay for arming/disarming the
power.
Private
3. Two resistors (10k/5W wirewound, 10k/3W wirewound) in parallel. These

resistors are socketed, allowing easily replacement/interchange in the field.
4. When MONO cable is selected, it will be connected to conductor #7 of both
HEPTA MAIN and HEPTA AUX. When CIS is selected the monocable is
connected to pin G of P23 (CIS).
5. Both CSUF MAIN cable (P14) and CSU AUX cable (P18) have SP
ground/fish (LCA8) and DLT return/fish (LCA9) cable.
6. Each cable has complete conductors running independently. SP ground/fish
in MAIN and AUX cable are connected together in the WAFE and CSS.
DLT return/fish in the MAIN and AUX cable are connected together in the
WAFE and CSS.
7. Each conductor is shielded. These shields are grounded on the CSS end
except for the CIS.
8. MAXIS CSS has an extra set of switches allowing the SSD to know the
position of the CSS. Both MAIN and AUX cable can be used to sense CSS
position.
1.2.3.4 SWPT-CSS
1. SWPT-CSS does NOT have an “intermediate step” between switch positions.
2. The CSS switch does not have the 1sec delay for arming/disarming the
power.
3. Two resistors (10k/5W wirewound, 10k/3W wirewound) in parallel.
4. The CSS has only two positions, OFF and ON.
1.2.4 Operational Checks

The operational checks can be completed using either a standard Simpson 260
or Schlumberger Safety Multimeter. These checks must be completed prior to
any work involving use of an explosive device.
1. Set Range Switch to R x 10,000 position and perform a ZERO-OHMS

CHECK.
2. Turn Collector Safety Switch to OFF position.
3. From the head, check each conductor (1-7) to mass. Resistance reading
should be 5k ohms plus a cable resistance of 10 ohms per 1000 ft (300 m).
A resistance reading of 10k ohms indicates that one of the resistors is not
functioning.
4. Replace any damaged resistors immediately.
Private
1.3 Casing-to-Rig Voltage Monitor (SFT-111)

The Casing-to-Rig Voltage Monitor (H117313) is designed for a continual
checking of stray voltages between rig and casing and is to be used on all
operations involving explosives. The voltmeter will show a 3 VAC maximum
reading but is capable of withstanding continuous 120 VAC input. The SFT-111
Monitors must be used with the safety grounding device.
1.3.1 Operating Instructions

1. Plug the leads into the rear portion of the monitor.

2. Using a multi-meter or Schlumberger Multimeter, check continuity between
the two clamps. Resistance between the clamps should be approximately
3000 ohms and the Casing-to-Rig Voltage Monitor should read approximately
1 V. This test determines if the meter is functioning properly and that both
clamps and cables are unbroken. An alternate test is to use a 1.5 V battery
attached between the two clamps. In this case, the SFT-111 Monitor should
read the voltage of the battery. After making the test check, unplug the leads
from the monitor and:
a. Scrape the paint from the derrick and attach one clamp securely to the
derrick. Check continuity between the derrick and the plug at the other
end of the lead.
b. Scrape the paint from the casing and attach the other clamp securely to
the casing. Check continuity between the casing and the plug at the
other end of the lead.
c. Plug in leads to the monitor. Keep plugs separated and avoid handling
together.
d. Spot the meter face on the rig floor, catwalk or pipe rack so the
engineer/technician arming the gun may conveniently observe the meter
reading.
3. If any voltage in excess of 0.25 V exists, ascertain its nature:
a. Connect a multimeter between the two terminals on the Casing-to-Rig

Voltage Monitor marked “AC Only” and “Ground”. Place multimeter on
“AC” position and select the most appropriate sensitivity scale. If there is
an AC component to the voltage, the multimeter will deflect. If there is not
an AC component to the voltage, the meter will not deflect.
Private
b. Place multimeter on the “DC” position and connect it to the terminals on

the Casing-to-Rig Voltage Monitor marked “AC or DC” and “Ground”.
Select appropriate sensitivity scale to ascertain the voltage magnitude.
This procedure measures the DC component of the voltage.
c. Track down and eliminate any source of voltage. Stray voltage must be
below 0.25 V to continue operations.
4. Attach the Safety Ground Clamps and ensure the voltage monitor still reads
less than 0.25 V. Do not attach the ground clamps to the Casing-to-Rig
Voltage Monitor clamps.
The monitor is sealed and can be left out in the rain. The meter has a full scale
reading of 3 V but can withstand 120 V without damage. The circuitry will
respond to either AC or DC voltages.
Note
On all operations involving explosives, the Safety Grounding Device and the
Casing-to-Rig Voltage Monitor must be used.
First
C-Clamps Monitor
Second Scrape
paint
Ground
3 bolts welded to
winch frame
< 0.25 V AC-DC
< 0.25 V AC-DC Scrape
paint
Logging
Unit
Grounding straps
< 0.25 V AC-DC
Casing
Figure 1-6: Safety Grounding Device and Casing-to-Rig Voltage Monitor
Private
1.3.2 RITE Program for SFT-111 and Grounding Straps
1.3.2.1 FIT 1 - Mechanical Checks

1. Visually inspect grounding straps for damage.
2. Clean C-Clamps of grounding device and Casing-to-Rig Voltage Monitor.
3. Check threaded bolts of C-Clamps. Bolts must turn freely.
4. Check connection of grounding straps to C-Clamps.
5. Check tightness of electrical connection to Unit ground. There are three bolts
welded to the winch frame.
6. Check Plug and Socket at grounding strap reel.
7. Check integrity of insulated covering on grounding cables and Casing-to-Rig
Voltage Monitor.
1.3.2.2 FIT 2 - Electrical Checks

1. Plug in grounding straps.
2. Check continuity between C-Clamps, Unit Ground and Cable Armor.
Resistance should be < 1 ohm.
3. Check continuity of monitor leads. Resistance should be approx. 0 ohms.
4. Plug in monitor leads. Check continuity between the two clamps, making
sure the clamps are not shorted together. Resistance between the clamps
should be approx. 3000 ohms. The Casing-to-Rig Voltage Monitor should
read approximately 1 V.
1.3.2.3 Commonly Replaced Parts for SFT-111 Casing-to-Rig

Voltage Monitor
1. Positive (Red) Lead (H117555)
a. Neoprene Tubing, 2 in. length (B009212)

b. Red Nylon Socket Plug (E022263) - Note: plugs are different size.
c. Grounding Clamp, 1-1/2 in. jaw (E023886)
d. Wire, AWG, 600 V, 8 gauge, 360 in. length (E037352)
2. Negative (black) Lead (H117556)
Private
a. Black Nylon Socket Plug (E022265) - Note: plugs are different size.
b. All other parts are the same.
3. SFT-111 Unit
a. Pin Receptacle, 1/4 in. dia. Black Nylon, 1 in. dia. Mounting hole, Black
receptacle on back (E022266)
b. Pin Receptacle, 1/4 in. dia. Red Nylon, 1 in. dia. Mounting hole, Red
receptacle on back (E022264)
c. Voltmeter Display, replacement meter (H334006)
d. Hex Nylon Binding Post, Red, J3 (E014352)
e. Hex Nylon Binding Post, Black, J4 (E011549)

f. Hex Nylon Binding Post, White, J5 (E015692)
Private
1.4 Schlumberger Safety Multimeter (SFT-300)
1.4.1 Features of the Schlumberger Safety Multimeter

1. Replaces the Schlumberger Safety Meter (H123080) and ALL other analog
multimeters (Simpson, Triplett, Weston, etc.).
2. Is approved for use with ALL Schlumberger Electrical Explosive Devices
(EEDs) by both NAM and ESF Safety and Compliance.
3. The OUTPUT CURRENT IS LIMITED TO LESS THAN 25 MILLIAMPERES
FOR ANY RESISTANCE RANGE in accordance with API RP67 Paragraph

3.9 (American Petroleum Institute Recommended Practices for Oilfield
Explosives Safety). This version of the Schlumberger Safety Multimeter is
NOT INTRINSICALLY SAFE.
4. The RED colored multimeter includes a 4-1/4 in. indicating instrument for
easy reading of values. The multimeter includes a small blue and white
Schlumberger logo, mirrored scale for parallax reduction, a function switch, a
range switch, zero ohms knob and a reset switch, plus other jacks.
5. Includes a custom-made RED companion carrying case which is waterproof
and contains a hard foam insert which fits snugly around three sides of
the multimeter (the fourth side is used to store the 48 in. lead probes and
alligator clips. The carrying case also contains a copy of the entire SFT-300
on a plasticized trifolded card which is stored inside of a transparent envelop
bonded to the lid of the carrying case. The carrying case cover displays a
4-in. wide blue and white Schlumberger logo with the name and part number
of the multimeter so that customers will see that this safety multimeter has
been designed, built and approved by Schlumberger.
6. Has a primary line of safety, which is the placement of five resistors through
which all current measurements must travel. This line of safety also includes
back-up resistors for whenever the primary resistors should happen to fail.
7. Has a secondary line of safety, which is the addition of a current monitoring
circuit that detects currents greater than 25 ma. Whenever a current is
measured that is greater than 25 ma, the circuit kills all meter functions. The
white circuit reset button is enabled on the face of the multimeter and must
be manually reset before resuming operations. This feature also measures
the strength of the two batteries and whenever the strength of either of the
two batteries falls below the level necessary to throw the reset button, all of
the functions of the multimeter are killed until fresh batteries are installed
and the reset button is depressed.
Private
8. Uses a polarity which follows standard industry convention and NOT that of
the Schlumberger Safety Meter (H123080). When checking a diode, positive
voltage is on the (+) terminal.
9. Can give capacitance kicks when switched between the (+) positive and (-)
negative polarity positions. This is invaluable for SAFE operations when
checking out the ESIC or circuit continuity.
10. Has an “OFF” position which is added to conserve the life of the internal
batteries whenever transporting or storing the multimeter.
11. Has three Resistance scales: R x10, R x 100 and R x 10,000. There is
NO R x 1 scale.
12. Uses common commercial alkaline 1.5V “D” cell and 9V batteries in a
separate compartment away from the multimeter circuit board.

13. Main PCB is surface treated to withstand humidity and moisture penetration.
Only a Schlumberger Safety Multimeter (H622622) or Schlumberger Digital

Safety Multimeter (T6005202) may be used in checking electrical explosive
devices (EEDs) and their circuits. All Schlumberger Safety Multimeters (red
meter and red carrying case) or Schlumberger Safety Meters (red meter and
black leather case) have the Schlumberger logo and name on the face of the
meter dial.

DO NOT USE CONVENTIONAL MULTIMETERS (Simpson, Triplett, Etc) AT

ANYTIME!
Figure 1-7: Schlumberger Safety Multimeter H622622
Private
1.4.2 Operator’s Manual for Schlumberger Safety

Multimeter SFT-300
Note: Temperature Rating

The SFT-300 operating temperature is -20°C to 65°C. However, the added
safety circuit will shut it down sooner at low temperatures if the battery is not
new because of the alkaline voltage drop-off characteristic and the safety circuit
shut-down limit.
Since newer alkaline batteries are rated at -20°C to 54°C, one must plan to
keep the meter warm.
1.4.2.1 Approval
The Schlumberger Safety Multimeter is approved for use with ALL
SCHLUMBERGER ELECTRICAL EXPLOSIVE DEVICES (EEDs) and their
circuits by the Schlumberger NAM Safety and Compliance Committee.
1.4.2.2 Multimeter Safety

The Schlumberger Safety Multimeter OUTPUT CURRENT IS LIMITED TO LESS
THAN 25 MILLIAMPERES FOR ANY RESISTANCE RANGE (R x 10, R x 100 &
R x 10,000) in accordance with API RP67 Paragraph 3.9 (American Petroleum
Institute Recommended Practices for Oilfield Explosives Safety). This version
of the Schlumberger Safety Multimeter (H622622-AB) is NOT INTRINSICALLY
SAFE.
The safety of the Schlumberger Safety Multimeter is dependent upon how well it
limits the CURRENT drawn from its two internal batteries. The Schlumberger
Safety Multimeter maintains TWO LEVELS OF NON-HUMAN INTERVENTION.
1. The first level of safety is the strategic addition of three resistors on the
main printed circuit board, two of which replace OEM resistors. These three
resistors have been especially chosen for their value, material and location.
If any resistor passes too much current under any condition, there may be a
safety hazard. For this reason and after a failure analysis, one of the three
new resistors has been replaced with three separate resistors in series with
each other and with one-third of their previous value such that if any resistor
should fail by shorting, the remaining resistors would continue to draw less
than 25 milliamperes (ma).
Private
2. The second level of safety is the incorporation of a protection circuit whereby

the multimeter stops functioning whenever it measures a current in excess
of 25 ma. The multimeter’s existing Reset Button will trip whenever the
protection circuitry measures a minimum of 25 ma and will require manual
depressing when tripped before any new measurement can be made. This
protection circuitry capability is in addition to the original purposes of the
Reset Button.
1.4.2.3 Reset Button Check

The RESET BUTTON trips only when there is a problem. That problem may
occur when measuring overVage or excessive current draw. Whatever the
reason, the cause must be understood and eliminated before making a second
measurement.
To check if the RESET BUTTON works properly,
1. Set the Range Switch to R x 10,000 and the Function Switch to (-) DC.
2. Plug the Black Test Lead into the (-) Common jack terminal.
3. Touch the probe end to the inside of the (+) 10 Amp input terminal.
The Relay RESET BUTTON should rise indicating that the overload circuit is
working properly. If not working, replace only the 9V alkaline battery and repeat
the attempt. If still unable to raise the RESET BUTTON, follow the procedures in
step 11.
1.4.2.4 Polarity
The Schlumberger Safety Multimeter (H622622) and Schlumberger Digital
Safety Multimeter (T6005202)follows standard industry convention and not that
of the Schlumberger Safety Meter (H123080). When checking a diode, positive
voltage is on the (+) terminal.
1.4.2.5 “Off” Position

When transporting or storing the Schlumberger Safety Multimeter, conserve the
life of the internal Alkaline batteries by positioning the Function Switch to the
“OFF” position. It makes NO difference where the Range Switch is positioned.
Private
1.4.2.6 Zero-Ohms Check

Before making any RESISTANCE measurement with the Schlumberger Safety
Multimeter, check if the battery provides sufficient voltage.
1. Set the Range Switch to the Resistance range desired;

2. Set the Function Switch to the Positive (+) DC position;
3. Plug the RED probe lead into (+) jack terminal and BLACK probe lead into
Common (-) jack terminal;
4. Short lead probe ends together;
5. Adjust meter pointer to 0 ohms using the Zero Ohms knob.
If unable to achieve zero for the R x 10 or R x 100 ranges, replace the 1.5V
D-cell Alkaline battery and repeat attempt to zero out the pointer. When replacing
the 1.5V D-cell Alkaline battery always observe the correct polarity. Pointer will
deflect in wrong direction if battery is installed incorrectly. If unable to achieve
zero for the R x 10,000 range, replace the 9V alkaline battery and repeat attempt
to zero out the pointer. If still unable to zero out the pointer, follow the procedures
in step 11. NOTE: If the stored output voltage from the 9V Alkaline battery falls
below a threshold of 8 volts, the protection circuitry will shutdown all multimeter
functions until the 9V Alkaline battery is replaced with a fresh battery.
1.4.2.7 Capacitance Check

Use the R x 10,000 range to obtain maximum scale indication while rotating
Function Switch between (-) DC and (+) DC positions. The meter pointer will
move an amount proportional to the size of the total capacitance.

Battery Handling or storage of a 9V battery around Blasting Caps, Detonators,

or other Electrical Explosive Devices (EEDs) may be dangerous. Replace the 9V
battery in the Safety Multimeter in an electrically safe location away from EEDs.
Private

Pinched Test Leads - When closing the carrying case, beware that the Test
Leads are easy to pinch between the cover and base of the carrying case. Fold
the Test Leads so they fit properly into the space provided in the hard foam below
the Safety Multimeter. You may leave test leads plugged into the recessed jack
terminals. Alligator clips should be stored underneath the folded leads.
1.4.2.8 Pointer-Adjust-For-Zero Check

With the Schlumberger Safety Multimeter set to any operating position, check
if the pointer indicates zero at the left end of the scale (∞ ohms) when there is
no input. If the pointer is off zero, adjust the black screw located in the center
of the meter below the meter dial. Use a small screwdriver to turn the screw
slowly CW or CCW until the pointer is exactly over the zero mark. If the pointer
can NOT be zeroed, remove the 9V battery, then reinstall battery and check
pointer position again.
1.4.2.9 Repair
Note
See Repair & Calibration Procedure (InTouch ID: 2049595) for detailed Safety
Multimeter field repair procedure.
If the Schlumberger Safety Multimeter should MALFUNCTION, perform as many

of the following steps as necessary until the meter is properly functioning:
1. Ensure meter settings are correct for the type of measurement desired.
2. Depress “Reset Button” and try measurement again.
3. Replace Alkaline batteries located in Battery Compartment; check polarity.
4. Replace fuse(s). The 1A 250V fuse (Littlefuse Type #312001), and its spare,
are located in the Battery Compartment. Replacement of the 2A 600V fuse
(Littlefuse Type BLS or Bussman Type BBS) requires that the meter case be
removed. There is no spare 2A fuse.
5. Return the Schlumberger Safety Multimeter to SPT for repair after obtaining
“Return Instructions” from SPT - Customer Service.
Private

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REPAIR MAIN PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD. All

circuit diagrams have been omitted on purpose.
1.4.3 Checking a Blasting Cap

1. Set Range Switch to the R x 10 position and perform a ZERO-OHMS CHECK.
2. Place Blasting Cap into Safety Tube and measure Resistance between wire
leads.
3. Resistance of most Blasting Caps is between 50 and 60 ohms.
1.4.4 Checking a Selective Switch or Monoswitch After

Installation in the Selective Adapter
2. Connect RED lead probe to WHITE wire and press BLACK lead probe into
CONNECTOR hole in switch piston (end for attaching Shock Disk or Wire
Connector). There must be continuity, or less than ≈ 1 ohm.
3. Disconnect BLACK lead probe from CONNECTOR hole in switch piston, but
leave RED lead probe attached to WHITE wire.
CHECK.
5. Leave RED lead probe attached to WHITE wire, hold BLACK lead probe
against Selective Switch/Monoswitch metallic BODY. Resistance must be
infinite (∞ ohms).
6. Leave RED lead probe attached to WHITE wire, connect BLACK lead probe
to COLORED wire (either Red, Green or Blue). Resistance must be infinite
(∞ ohms). Change polarity to Negative (-) DC. The Resistance must remain
7. Leave BLACK lead probe connected to COLORED wire and Function Switch
set to Negative (-) DC position. Disconnect RED lead probe from WHITE
wire and hold RED probe against Selective Switch/Monoswitch metallic body.
Resistance must be infinite (∞ ohms). Change polarity to Positive (+) DC
position. The Resistance must remain infinite (∞ ohms).
Private
1.4.5 Checking a Dual Diode Plug or Dual Diode Switch

It is preferred that the plug is already installed in the selective adapter so the
following checks will cover installation.
Figure 1-8: Dual Diode Plug and Dual Diode Switch Circuit Diagram
1. Set Range Switch to the R x 100 position and perform a ZERO-OHMS

CHECK.
2. Connect RED lead probe to the UPPER WHITE plug wire.
3. Place BLACK lead probe on the LOWER TERMINAL (OR LOWER WHITE
WIRE). The Resistance should be between 600 and 700 ohms.
4. Set Function Switch to Negative (-) DC position. The Resistance must be
infinite (∞ ohms). Set Range Switch to R x 10,000 position. Resistance
must remain infinite (∞ ohms).
5. Set the Range Switch to R x 100. Leave Function Switch in the Negative (-)
DC position and RED lead probe connected to the UPPER WHITE plug
wire. Connect the BLACK lead probe to the BLUE wire. Resistance should
measure between 600 and 700 ohms.
6. Leave both lead probes connected as described above, set Function Switch
to Positive (+) DC position. The Resistance must be infinite (∞ ohms). Set
Range Switch to R x 10,000 position. Resistance must remain infinite (∞
ohms).
7. Leave the Function Switch set to Positive (+) DC position and the Range
Switch set to the R x 10,000 position, as well as the RED lead probe
connected to the UPPER WHITE plug wire. Disconnect the BLACK lead
probe from the BLUE wire and hold the BLACK lead probe against Dual
Diode metallic BODY. The Resistance must measure infinite (∞ ohms).
8. Leaving both lead probes connected as described above, set Function Switch
to Negative (-) DC position. The Resistance must remain infinite (∞ ohms).
Private
1.4.6 Checking the Correct Wiring of a Selective Gun

String During Assembly
1. Set Range Switch to the R x 10,000 position and perform a ZERO-OHMS
CHECK.
2. At BOTTOM end of gun, connect RED lead probe to WHITE gun wire. Hold
BLACK lead probe against Gun Carrier BODY. Resistance must be infinite
(∞ ohms).
3. Disconnect RED lead probe from WHITE gun wire and BLACK lead probe
from Gun Carrier BODY.

5. Place RED lead probe against Gun Carrier BODY. Connect BLACK lead
probe to COLORED Ground wire at bottom of gun. There must be continuity
(less than ≈4 ohms).
6. Leave BLACK lead probe connected to COLORED Ground wire at bottom of
gun. Connect RED lead probe to WHITE gun wire at bottom of gun.
7. At upper end of gun, short CONDUCTOR or WHITE WIRE to GROUND or
MASS using a screwdriver/knife/jumper/etc. There must be continuity (less
than ≈4 ohms).
8. Repeat steps 1 through 7 for next gun.
1.4.7 Checking Input Capacitor of ESIC (EFI Cartridge)

in a SAFE System
It is required that the ESIC be installed into a SAFE Basic Unit or ESIC Pressure
Housing so there is a return loop in the circuit.
1. Set Function Switch to either the Positive (+) DC or Negative (-) DC position
2. Plug RED lead probe into (+) jack terminal and BLACK lead probe into
Common (-) jack terminal.
CHECK.
4. Connect RED lead probe to INPUT side of ESIC, HOT gun wire or Upper
Head CONDUCTOR and BLACK lead probe to GROUND side of ESIC, GUN
MASS or BASIC UNIT MASS (not to colored Ground gun wire!).
Private
5. Change polarity by rotating Function Switch between Positive (+) DC

and Negative (-) DC positions. Rotate Function Switch several times to
determine size of meter pointer movement. Meter pointer deflection should
be approximately 1/4 in. (meter reading of ≈ 200) for a single ESIC, and
approximately 1/2 in. (meter reading of ≈ 100) for two ESICs. If there is no
deflection, or if there is a resistance, recheck wire connections. If problem
persists, the input capacitor of the ESIC may be bad. Refer to SAFE
Electrical Maintenance Manual or replace ESIC.
1.5 Schlumberger Digital Safety Multimeter

(DSMM) (Provisory)
1.5.1 Operator’s Manual for Schlumberger Digital Safety

Multimeter (DSMM)
Schlumberger
Digital Safety Multimeter

Power on or select Back lighting
secondary functions
SEL/ON ZOOM Hz SURV
Bar graph scale Monitoring values
magnification PRINT RANGE REL PK +/- HOLD selection / display
Send data to printer Display hold
Range change
T6005200 Peak measurement
Relative mode
measurement o
F
o Time function selection
C
AC 10A
AC DC
+ uA mA
DC DC
OFF
Ω V mV V
CCL DC DC AC
dB
AC + DC
!
600V CAT |||
CCL
+ 750V
V 1000V .... COM A mA 10A
Figure 1-9: Schlumberger Digital Safety Multimeter T6005202
Private
Note: Temperature Rating

The operating temperature range of the DSMM is partly a function of the
battery. The DSMM operating temperature is 0 degC to 50 degC and storage
temperature is -40 degC to 70 degC. Since newer alkaline batteries are rated at
-20 degC to 54 degC, one must plan to keep the meter warm.
1.5.1.1 Approval
The Schlumberger Digital Safety Multimeter (T6005202) has been approved by
the Schlumberger Explosives Safety Committee for use with all Schlumberger
Electrical Explosive Devices (EEDs) and associated circuits.
1.5.1.2 Multimeter Safety

The DSMM output current is actively limited to less than 20 ma for any
measurement, including the special CCL function. The DSMM is not intrinsically
safe, nor is it approved for use in explosive atmospheres.
1.5.1.3 Reset
If the meter shuts down during a measurement, for whatever reason, it can be
reset by turning the selector switch momentarily to the OFF position. If it still
does not reset, then press the Yellow SEL/ON button.
1.5.1.4 Battery
The meter will shut down automatically after a non-use period of about 30
minutes. The selector switch should be returned to the OFF position whenever
the user has completed measurements.
The meter operates on a single 9-volt alkaline battery, which is located under
the front cover plate. Whenever battery replacement is necessary, do so in an
electrically safe location away from EEDs.
Never leave the selector switch in the CCL position after a measurement – always
turn to OFF or some other position to disable the 9-volt potential at the probes.
Private
1.5.1.5 Fuses
There are two user serviceable fuses under the front cover plate. F1 (0.63 A)
and F2 (10 A) failures are indicated in the display. An internal 20-mA safety fuse
in the battery supply circuit is not replaceable by the user.
1.5.1.6 Polarity
The DSMM (T6005202) follows standard industry convention. Positive voltage is
on the V-ohm (Red) probe connection.
1.5.1.7 Resistance
The maximum resistance reading that can be displayed is 50 Mohm. An open
circuit, or ∞ (infinite) ohms, is indicated on the display as “.0L MΩ”.
1.5.1.8 Capacitance Checking

Capacitance can be measured directly by turning the selector switch to the –||–
(capacitance) position. The display bar graph will indicate a capacitance “kick”
and the digital display will show the actual value of the capacitance being tested.
1.5.1.9 Environment
The DSMM is rated for use in temperatures between 32 degF (0 degC) and 122
degF (50 degC). The acceptable storage temperature is between -40 degF (-40
degC) and 158 degF (70 degC). The DSMM is rated for IP67 use, meaning it
is splash-proof protected. For best results always close the case cover when
the meter is not in use.
1.5.1.10 Repair
Since the DSMM is a safety meter, if it should ever malfunction, do not attempt to
repair it. User interaction is limited to replacing the fuses, battery and probes.
1.5.2 Checking a Detonator

These instructions describe how to check conventional detonators’ safety resistor
and filament continuity.
Private
1. Turn selector switch to Ω (ohm) position.

2. Place detonator into Safety Tube.
3. Measure resistance between wire leads. Resistance of most detonators is
between 50 and 60 ohms.
1.5.3 Checking Secure Devices

The following instructions describe how to check the input continuity and RF
blocking safety of a Secure detonator.
1. Turn selector switch to –||– (capacitance) position.

2. Place Secure detonator into Safety Tube.

3. Measure capacitance between wire leads. Capacitance of Secure devices
is between 90 and 110 nfd.
The following instructions describe how to check the input continuity and RF
blocking safety of a Secure igniter.
1. Unthread the 8-32 × 1/2-in. grounding screw from the igniter about 0.25 in.
2. Twist a temporary test wire (positive) around the threads under the head of
the grounding screw.
3. Twist a second temporary wire (negative) around the OD of the igniter metal
bulkhead mass.
4. Place Secure igniter into Safety Tube.
6. Measure capacitance between wire leads. Capacitance of Secure devices
is between 90 and 110 nfd.
1.5.4 Checking Input Capacitor of ESIC (EFI Cartridge)

in a SAFE System
The following instructions describe how to check the RF blocking safety and
input capacitor for an ESIC.
It is required that the ESIC be installed into a SAFE Basic Unit or ESIC Pressure
Housing so there is a return loop in the circuit.
Private
2. Plug red lead probe into (+) jack terminal and black lead probe into COM (-)
socket.
3. Connect red lead probe to INPUT side of ESIC, HOT gun wire or Upper Head
CONDUCTOR and black lead probe to GROUND side of ESIC, GUN MASS
or BASIC UNIT MASS (not to colored ground gun wire!).
4. Capacitance for ESIC is between 90 and 160 nfd for a single ESIC in the
gun string.
Note
Two ESICs will measure double the reading.
1.5.5 Checking Logging Cable

The following instructions describe how to check the continuity and capacitance
of the logging cable.
Insulation is best checked with a 500 volt megohmmeter since the DSMM uses
only low voltage for measurements. Continuity can be accurately checked
with the DSMM.

2. Attach probes to cable conductor and armor (with other end shorted).
3. Capacitance can be measured by turning selector switch to –||– (capacitance)
position.
Instead of just a capacitance kick, the DSMM will give an actual capacitance
reading.
1.5.6 Checking Casing Collar Locator

The following instructions describe how to check the collar signal and zener
continuity of the Casing Collar Locator.
1. Turn selector switch to V DC position.

2. Connect one probe to upper head spring, one probe to mass and strike a
collar. Observe voltage fluctuations.
3. Turn selector switch to CCL position ( –||– position)
4. Press yellow SEL/ON function button (V unit should be seen in display) to
check through zener diode. The display will show 0.L V (outside range).
5. Touch the probes to the upper and lower contacts of the CCL. The correct
zener diode response is a voltage reading of 6.0 to 7.9 V, both polarities.
Private
Note
If the voltage reading stays as 0.L V, the zener diode circuit is open. If the
voltage reading goes to less than 1 V,, the zener diode is shorted.
6. Return the selector switch to OFF after voltage reading is obtained.
1.5.7 Checking a Selective Switch or Monoswitch

The following instructions describe how to check insulation and continuity of
selective and mono-switches before and after installation in the adapter.

2. Connect red probe to white switch wire.
a. Connect black probe to threaded connection, or brass pin. Continuity;

resistance <1 ohm.
b. Connect black probe to colored (red, green, or yellow) switch wire. Open
circuit (.0L MΩ) indicated.
c. Connect black probe to switch body: Open circuit (.0L MΩ) indicated.
3. Connect red probe to switch body and black probe to colored switch wire.
Open circuit (.0L MΩ) indicated.
4. Connect red probe to colored switch wire.
a. Connect black probe to white switch wire. Open circuit (.0L MΩ) indicated.
b. Connect black probe to switch body. Open circuit (.0L MΩ) indicated.
1.5.8 Checking a Dual Diode

The following instructions describe how to check insulation and continuity of a
dual diode. When the dual diode is installed in the selective adapter the following
checks will cover installation.
Private
Figure 1-10: Dual Diode Plug and Dual Diode Switch Circuit Diagram

2. Connect red probe to white switch wire.
a. Connect black probe to switch body. Open circuit (.0L MΩ) indicated.
b. Connect black probe to blue wire. Open circuit (.0L MΩ) indicated.
3. Connect black probe to white switch wire.
a. Connect red probe to threaded connection, or brass pin. Open circuit

(.0L MΩ) indicated.
b. Connect red probe to switch body. Open circuit (.0L MΩ) indicated
5. Press yellow SEL/ON function button.
6. Connect red probe to white switch wire and black probe to threaded
connection, or brass pin. Continuity; 0.6 V ±0.1 (HPHT dual diode; 0.5
V ±0.1).
7. Connect red probe to blue wire and black probe to white wire. Continuity; 0.6
V ±0.1 (HPHT dual diode; 0.5 V ±0.1).
1.5.9 Checking a Gun String

The following instructions describe how to check the insulation and continuity of
a selective gun string.

2. At top of gun, connect red probe to the gun contact spring, or white hot wire.
3. Connect black probe to gun mass.
4. At bottom of gun, leave both gun wires separated. Open circuit (.0L MΩ)
indicated.
Private
5. At bottom of gun, short white gun wire to gun mass. Continuity; < 4 Ohms.
6. At bottom of gun, short black (or ground) gun wire to gun mass. Open circuit
(.0L MΩ) indicated.
7. At bottom of gun, short white gun wire to black (or ground) gun wire.
Continuity; < 4 ohms.
8. Repeat steps 1 through 7 for each gun as it is added to the string.
Private
SRC-Wireline\SRC-Wireline\InTouch ID 3013565\3.1\Release Date: 10-Jun-2004\EDMS UID: 274896043\Produced: 13-Jul-2006 20:55:42 1-60
Private
WL FOM / Safety
Intentionally Blank

1-60
2-i WL FOM / Explosives 2-i
2 Explosives
2.1 Explosives for Wireline Operations _____________________________ 2-1
2.1.1 Theory ______________________________________________________ 2-1
2.1.1.1 Overview ________________________________________________ 2-1
2.1.1.2 Generalities on Behavior of Explosives _____________________ 2-2
2.1.1.3 Explosives Data __________________________________________ 2-6
2.1.1.4 Selection of Explosives ___________________________________ 2-8
2.1.2 Slapper Actuated Firing Equipment (S.A.F.E.) _________________ 2-11
2.1.2.1 SAFE-BA _______________________________________________ 2-11
2.1.2.2 Secure __________________________________________________ 2-14
2.1.2.3 Secure Plus _____________________________________________ 2-16
2.1.3 Electric Detonators __________________________________________ 2-19

2.1.3.1 Fluid Desensitized Detonators ____________________________ 2-19
2.1.3.2 Pressure Tight Detonators _______________________________ 2-20
2.1.3.3 Detonator Tips __________________________________________ 2-20
2.1.4 Detonating Cords ___________________________________________ 2-21
2.1.4.1 Hints on Use of Detonating Cords ________________________ 2-21
2.1.5 Boosters and Detonators ____________________________________ 2-22
2.1.5.1 Detonators and Boosters _________________________________ 2-23
2.1.6 Shaped Charges ____________________________________________ 2-26
2.1.6.1 Charge Identification _____________________________________ 2-26
2.1.6.2 Charge Tips _____________________________________________ 2-27
2.1.7 Shipping Data for Explosives ________________________________ 2-28
2.2 Detonator Specifications _____________________________________ 2-29
2.3 Detonating Cord Specifications _______________________________ 2-30
2.4 Booster Specifications _______________________________________ 2-32
2.5 API Summary _________________________________________________ 2-33
Private
SRC-Wireline\SRC-Wireline\InTouch ID 3013565\3.1\Release Date:10-Jun-2004\EDMS UID: 274896043\Produced: 13-Jul-2006 20:55:42 2-ii
Private
WL FOM / Explosives
Intentionally Blank

2-ii
2-1 WL FOM / Explosives 2-1
2 EXPLOSIVES FOM, SRC
2.1 Explosives for Wireline Operations
2.1.1 Theory
2.1.1.1 Overview
An explosion is a sudden release of chemical, mechanical or atomic energy in the
form of expanding gas, exerting high pressure on its surroundings. A substance
may exhibit explosive properties if its rate of decomposition or reaction with
another substance is accelerated by heat and pressure generated in the process.
Chemical explosives are divided into two main categories: (1) deflagrating or
low explosives, and (2) detonating or high explosives. They differ by orders of
magnitude in reaction rate and in the pressures which are developed.
Low Explosives, once initiated by exposure to heat or flame, burn rapidly with
intense heat and dazzling flame. Pressures developed by low explosives reach
50,000 psi and can persist for milliseconds. These are suitable as propellants
and are used with our sample taker and bullet guns.
High Explosives detonate rather than burn. The chemical reaction takes place
within a shock wave front moving through the explosive at tremendous velocity
(1 to 6 mi/sec) which gives rise to a short duration pressure pulse in the order
of 50,000 to 4,000,000 psi. High explosives are subdivided into two categories
according to the method which is normally used to initiate the reaction.
1. Primary high explosives, are initiated by a hot wire or flame. They first burn
during a few microseconds, then undergo a transition from deflagration to
detonation. Primary explosives are extremely sensitive to friction and impact
and can be initiated by small disturbances like heat, friction, etc.
2. Secondary high explosives normally require a high energy shock wave,
provided by some primary high explosives to initiate detonation. When
burned or heated, secondary high explosives may or may not detonate
depending on factors such as, confinement, rate of heat dissipation and
the nature of the explosive.
Private
C H E M IC A L
E X P L O S IV E S
FLAMMABLE L O W or H IG H or
S O L ID S D E F L A G R A TIN G D E TO N A TIN G
B aker Ch arg es B lack p ow d er P R IM A R Y H IG H S E C O N D A R Y H IG H

Titan C P S T C h arg es Am erican Hig h Tem p . in itiated b y c om b u s tion in itiated b y d eton ation
(In C an ad a th ese are classed (u sed in ig n iter n eed les
as a p yrotech n ic exp losive.) an d C S T cartrid g es)
Lead azid e R DX (Cyclon ite or H exog en e), H MX,

u sed in d eton ators P S F (S u lfon e), H NS , P E TN , P Y X
(u sed in sh ap ed ch arg es,
b oosters an d d eton atin g cord s)
Figure 2-1: Explosives Chart

2.1.1.2 Generalities on Behavior of Explosives

Information on explosive compatibility, compaction, purity, cords, handling,
combustion, traceability, age and storage is given in this section.
Explosives Compatibility
It is always advisable not to mix explosive types within one gun.
There will be times, especially in more remote locations, where only certain
explosives are available. If explosive types must be mixed, here are some
guidelines on what to do.
The ability of one explosive material to transfer a high order detonation to another
material is based on the energy or detonation speed of the explosive material.
The relative energies of the explosive materials are listed in Table 2-1 Relative
Energies and Temperature Ratings of Explosives on a scale of 0 to 100:
Table 2-1: Relative Energies and Temperature Ratings of Explosives
Temperature Rating
Type Scale
(1 hr) - °F [°C]
RDX 100 330 [166]
HMX 105 400 [204]
HNS 70 500 [260]
In general, explosives will transfer detonation very well from high energy to low
energy but not so well from low energy to high energy. For example, RDX and
HMX are at the high end and are very similar. RDX and HMX parts can be
interchanged without any problem. With HNS more care is needed. For example,
an HNS charge will probably be detonated properly by an RDX or HMX cord, but
an RDX or HMX charge may not be detonated properly from an HNS cord.
Private
If explosive types must be mixed, submit a request to InTouchSupport.com for

advice detailing all explosives components to be used, the application, the
environment and all part numbers involved.
Note
If explosive types must be mixed, the temperature rating of the entire system will
be that of the lowest rated explosive in the system.
Compaction of Explosives
A weakly compacted explosive (detonating cord) initiates more easily than a

highly compacted one (booster). Practically, this means that at the bottom of the
gun, the detonating cord may have difficulty setting off its associated booster if
conditions are not standard (i.e., bad crimp, gap, detonating cord shrinkage,
humidity).
However, once the booster fires, it easily initiates the attached detonating cord.
This explains why, in the case of partial firing, the detonation usually stops at the
bottom of a gun.
There is a practice, still carried on in the field, of putting a little loose powder in
the booster or detonator before inserting the detonating cord. This is totally
unnecessary and can cause misfires.
Purity of Explosives
Impurities in the explosives degrade the temperature rating of that explosive.
RDX is relatively easy to obtain in industrial quantity with a good grade.

Moreover, it is relatively insensitive to impurities. RDX is usually found as an
impurity in HMX because of the fabrication process and can seriously degrade
the HMX operating temperature. HMX is generally manufactured with 5%, 2% or
0.2% RDX content. SRC specifies 0.2% RDX. But a guaranteed rating of this
explosive is dependent on thorough quality control. Low-order detonation of HMX
charges has been traced to contamination by up to 15% of RDX. Some of the
problems associated with HMX cords could also be due to such contamination.
Extra-refined HNS is more expensive and allows us to improve the HNS

temperature rating of our high-temperature systems. It can get very close to the
PYX rating but PYX also has purity problems.
How to Recognize Certain Explosive Cords
Explosive color:
Private
• RDX is dyed light pink

• HMX is white
• HNS is pale yellow
• PYX is dark yellow
Solubility:
• RDX is not soluble in water

• Solubility of RDX in acetone is 18 g per 100 cm3
• Solubility of HMX in acetone is 1 g per 100 cm3
Thus, apart from the color, a fast way to identify whether a cord is HMX or RDX is
to dissolve the explosive content of one meter of cord (@ 80 gr/ft) which should
weigh around 18 g in 100 cm3 of acetone.
If it all dissolves, it is RDX. If only a little dissolves, it is HMX.
Handling of Explosives
Primary and secondary explosives are relatively insensitive to shock under

normal handling conditions as long as they are kept in their original packaging
(shaped charges or detonators).
Loose powder from a secondary explosive is dangerous because it can be

squeezed between two metallic parts and enough energy may be available to
set it off.
Lead azide in a percussion cap will go off if there is a mechanical deformation of

the cap housing and crushing of the explosive grains (or excessive heat).
Any detonator that has been deformed (open housing) presents a serious safety
hazard. It should be put into a metallic transport tube before being stored with
other remnants.
Combustion of Explosives
Gas volume in liter per gram of explosive at standard conditions (1 atm, 20°C)
are as follows:
• RDX: 0.908
• HMX: 0.908
• HNS: 0.646
Private
• PYX: 0.655
To find gas volume at different pressure and temperature apply:
P1V1T2 = P2V2T1
Main products of combustion for RDX are, in decreasing order:
N2, H2O, CO, CO2, NH3
Traceability of Explosives
All of the explosive items received in the field are traceable through the date shift
code (DSC) which is usually printed, stamped or written on the box containing
the explosives or sometimes, with some electrical detonators, on the component
itself. This code usually takes the form of a date and then some other numbers
that will identify a spool (for detonating cord), a particular batch or series of that
component. Some codes may be just a series of numbers.
The date shift code provides a source of reference if additional information is

needed about the explosives being used. If there is a problem, this code will help
in identifying a bad batch of charges, boosters, cord, etc.
Whenever a misrun, misfire or low order detonation occurs, the date shift code of
all of the explosives used must always accompany the failure report.
Since it is often difficult to find the packing boxes for explosives after a failure
has occurred, it is a good idea to record the date shift codes as the explosives
are installed.
Report any boxes or spools found without date shift codes via InTouch. Be sure
to reference the invoice number for the explosives.
Explosive Age
The maximum storage limit for Schlumberger explosive components used in

the field is 5 years provided they are in the original packing and have been
stored properly. By comparison, the U.S. military quotes a maximum age limit
of 25 years for similar explosive materials, so the Schlumberger limit is quite
conservative. If explosives are more than 5 years old, it is recommended to have
them tested prior to use and SRC can do this testing.
Private
In many areas of the world, it is not feasible to send explosives back to SRC for
testing. In some countries, it is also quite common for explosives to be stored for
a long time before use. Field experience has shown that explosives more than 5
years old work very well provided they have been stored properly.
For optimum safety, try to avoid using explosives more than 5 years old,
especially detonators, boosters and cord in a gun string. Some areas use a
maximum age limit of 3 years for cord, boosters and detonators used in a gun.
Use older explosives in wireline guns and don’t hesitate to destroy explosives
that are very old and have not been stored properly. Be sure to follow the
approved procedures for the destruction of explosives.
It is critical to use explosives that have been stored properly.

Storage of Explosives
Explosives should be stored in their original sealed packing in a cool, dry place.
In humid environments such as the tropics and offshore, it is especially important
that the original packing be kept in good shape and that the bunker be accessed
only when necessary. If the bunker is in good shape and properly built (i.e.,
with wooden walls, etc.) the explosives will remain in good shape for a long
time. To keep your explosives supply in good shape, make sure the following
is adhered to:
• Opened boxes of shaped charges should be repacked and resealed with

fresh desiccant. Current SRC recommendations for repackaging involve use
of vacuum seal bags on each layer of charges, so as to provide the same
quality level SRC offers the field with original charge packaging. Details of
the field repackaging system are available at InTouch Content ID 3857948.
• Detonating cord is in a box and a rubber boot is on the end.
• Boosters have plastic plugs in them or are in ziplock bags.
• Percussion detonators have plastic plugs in them or are in ziplock bags.
• Bunker has ventilation holes.
• Bunker will not leak when the weather is rainy and windy.
• Always use older explosives before new boxes are opened.
2.1.1.3 Explosives Data

The characteristics of primary and secondary high explosives are described in
this section.
Private
Primary High Explosives

Table 2-2: Lead Azide
Composition PbN6
Very sensitive to friction
Characteristics Will self-detonate when heated
Flash point 625°F
Percussion caps, detonators
Applications
Booster C-63
Secondary High Explosives

Table 2-3: RDX (Cyclonite or Hexogene)
Composition Cyclotrimethylene trinitramine (C6H6N6)

White crystalline solid with a melting point of 388°F, crystal density
1.82 g/cm3
Detonation velocity 8400 m/sec
Characteristics
RDX “outgasses” or decomposes harmlessly when heated or burned at
atmospheric pressure. However, it will detonate if heated in a confined
space.
Detonating cords, detonators and shaped charges for standard
Applications
temperature conditions.
Table 2-4: HMX (Octogene)
Composition Cyclotetramethylene tetranitramine (C4H8N8O8)

White crystalline solid with a melting point of 525°F, crystal density
1.90 g/cm3
Characteristics Detonation velocity 9100 m/sec
Changes phase at 310°F (becomes more sensitive). Process is
reversible.
Detonating cords, shaped charges, for medium to high-temperature
Applications
conditions.
Private
Table 2-5: HNS
Composition Hexanitrostilbene (C2H2N6O12)

Crystalline solid with melting point of 602°F
Density 1.74 g/cm3
Characteristics
Detonation velocity 7000 m/sec
Self-detonation at 608°F
Detonators, boosters, cords and charges for high temperature
Applications
conditions.
2.1.1.4 Selection of Explosives

The explosive system requires considerable attention.
• Components need to be chosen for a given job based on well temperature

and exposure time at this temperature.
• Equipment preparation must be meticulously carried out, paying particular
attention to the items in the detonation train.
• The perforating system is a combination of the explosives selected, the
detonator, the firing head, the gun system design, the seals, lubricants,
quality control, cleanliness, assembly procedures and training. Any one of
these factors can affect the rating of the system.
When using explosives close to the time/temperature rating and if anything

goes wrong in the running procedure or changes occur in the well completion,
the following can result:
• Poor charge performance

• Misfire or low-order detonation
• Gun split/sheared and dropped
• Gun reloading is necessary.
In the estimated running time, provision should be made for errors in estimation
of BHT (it is usually higher than thought) and unexpected delays (offshore
weather, leaks while nippling up, other mechanical problems). This estimated
running time must be discussed with the customer and, should the operating
point fall too close to the explosive critical line, the next higher rated explosive
package should be proposed.
Private
Time-Temperature Guidelines
A successful perforating job is the result of proper preparation, selection and

operation of all perforating system components. The perforating system is a
combination of explosives selection, firing head and detonator, gun system, seals,
lubricants, quality control and conformance, cleanliness, assembly procedures
and training. Any one of these factors can affect the rating of the system.
For high temperature applications HNS charges should be used for all HT
perforating operations that fall within the revised Time-Temperature guidelines.
For applications requiring the use of HNS explosives in order to meet the
time-temperature capabilities of the explosive charges:
• HNS detonating cord and NONA boosters should be used.

(HP3A boosters are no longer recommended for ANY application.)
• High temperature TCP detonator and firing heads are required.
• Seals and perforating gun systems also have time and temperature
characteristics separate from the explosives components. The gun system
selected must also match the required time and temperature characteristics
of the explosives.
• Specialized field preparation and assembly procedures must be followed.
• Many clients require additional quality control procedures that can only be
performed at the time of manufacture.
The temperature rating of any system will be the rating of the lowest rated
component of that system.
Clean and controlled loading facilities are required equipped with appropriate
cleaning, handling and inspection tools.
Reusing explosives that have been exposed to Temperature cycles increases

the risk of failure, misfires and should only be considered as a last resort. If due
to unscheduled events the time and temperature exposure of the explosive is
exceeded typically the results will be reduced/no performance and low order
detonation (except for the RDX and HMX, see warning).
Private

Potential Loss: Assets, Process
Hazard Category: machinery equipment hand tools, temperature
For RDX and HMX: If the time and temperature exposure is exceeded due
to unscheduled events, typically the systems failure may result in high order
detonation with potentially catastrophic results for the well completion.


Potential Loss: Assets, Personnel
Hazard Category: explosives, pressure, temperature
Special care must be taken in retrieving unfired explosives devices that have
exceeded time and temperature limits due to concern of trapped pressure.
Private
SRC-Wireline\SRC-Wireline\InTouch ID 3013565\3.1\Release Date:10-Jun-2004\EDMS UID: 274896043\Produced: 13-Jul-2006 20:55:42 2-11 WL FOM / Explosives 2-11
Figure 2-2: Time-Temperature Guidelines for Selection of Explosives in Hollow Carrier Guns
This chart only identifies time-temperature capabilities and is not the rating of
the perforating system. High Risk completion projects (high temperature, high
pressure and long duration) require special preparation. All jobs above the
HMX line fall into this category. Do not plan, bid or advise on a job of these
characteristics without contacting InTouch.
Additionally hardware changes may be required whenever conditions exceed any

one of the following: Temperature > 330°F; Pressure > 15,000 psi; Time > 100 hr.
2.1.2 Slapper Actuated Firing Equipment (S.A.F.E.)
2.1.2.1 SAFE-BA
General
The SAFE-BA system was designed to significantly improve wellsite safety and
efficiency for wireline perforating related tools. Primarily, the SAFE-BA systems
do not require the shut down of electrical generating or EMF (Electrical Magnetic
Field) power equipment.
Private
The SAFE system replaces each conventional detonator in a gun/tool system

with a SAFE detonator EFI (Exploding Foil Initiator). This EFI requires an
ESIC (Electronic Secondary-explosive Initiating Cartridge) and its supporting
hardware.Figure 2-3 Typical Bottom-Up Fired Gun shows the location of these
components when configured for shooting a single wireline-conveyed gun fired
bottom-up. SAFE components may be located at the bottom (bottom-up), at the
top (top-down), or in between two guns (middle-out). Enerjet guns, back-off
tools, setting tools and cutters are only shot top-down.
The EFI contains no primary-high explosive; therefore, it is less likely to be set-off

by the simple application of heat or mechanical shock. The ESIC is immune to
radio frequencies, cathodic protection devices, welding machines and stray
voltage under 165 V.
Private
Mono Adapter
Detonating Cord
Upper Wireline Head
Booster
Gun
EFI
SAFE Gun Adapter
ESIC
Safety Clamp
Contact Assy
Figure 2-3: Typical Bottom-Up Fired Gun
Private
2.1.2.2 Secure
Overview and Applications
Overview
The Secure* detonator, using exploding foil initiator (EFI) technology, is the
safest detonator in the industry. No primary high explosives are used in the
detonator. All electronics are contained in the detonator package and are fully
expendable - no separate downhole cartridge is required.
As can be expected with any new electronic or explosive device, some pre-job
preparation is required. Pay particular attention to gun string insulation, including
the collar locator, because much higher voltages are required to shoot. Arming
and shooting require attention because Secure is polarity sensitive. Shooting
technique is much simpler than with SAFE-BA, but there is a suggested
procedure for best results.
• Gun Wiring - Secure operates at 350 to 540 V. Gun wires must be Teflon,
600 volt rated to withstand this voltage level.
• Hot Check - Check ALL equipment used (cable, head, weights, CCL, etc.)
with a megohmmeter. ALSO, if possible, perform an insulation hot check
through the cable and CCL by sending 540 V to check for leaks.
• Polarity Sensitive - The Secure detonator will ONLY fire on the correct
polarity. Whether single guns or selective guns, correct wire connections are
imperative. Each Secure is shipped with a basic instruction sheet showing
how to arm guns.
• Temperature Downgrade - The Secure detonators, carrier gun version
T6005040, from DSC 01-108 to 01-201 (serial numbers 5445 through 8195)
have been downrated to 300°F for one hour. All others are rated at the
standard 340°F for one hour.
Applications
Description Application Part Number Rating (one hour)

Secure Detonator Carrier Guns/Cutters T6005040 340°F
Secure Igniter CPST/BST/CHC T6005090 340°F
Secure Exposed Enerjets T6005130 340°F 15,000 psi
Private
The Secure hollow carrier version is fluid desensitized; therefore, it must be used
only in hollow carriers. It is 4.9 in. long, about 0.8 in. in diameter and will fit all
standard firing heads and bottom noses. Some early slim HSD* bottom noses
will need to be swapped for later, larger versions.
Fluid Desensitized
Figure 2-4: Secure Hollow Carrier Version
The Secure Igniter consists of a pressure bulkhead, an electronics package with

explosive pellet and a Pyrodex cup containing an ignition mixture. It is 5.4 in. long
and the (maximum) diameter of the Pyrodex cup is 0.95 in. Unique Secure firing
heads are required, except that existing CPST-AA firing heads can be locally
modified. The Secure Igniter has been tested with Schlumberger, Baker, Owen
and PRS charges in their respective tools. A secondary igniter is not required.
Pyrodex Cup Pressure Bulkhead
Figure 2-5: Secure Igniter
The Secure exposed detonator consists of a pressure-tight housing with a

wire feed-through connection on one end and an internal electronics package
with explosive pellet. The explosive bulkhead is shipped separately, to meet
regulations and must be installed at the wellsite. The assembled detonator is
0.81 in. in diameter and nearly 7.0 in. long. A unique mounting bracket is
required to attach the detonator to an exposed gun.
Pressure Tight Housing
Explosive Bulkhead
Figure 2-6: Secure exposed detonator
Private
2.1.2.3 Secure Plus
Overview
The Secure Plus* system combines the Secure actuator with the Addressable
Switch Firing System. Secure devices, using exploding foil initiator (EFI)
technology, are the safest detonating systems in the industry. No primary high
explosives are used in Secure Plus devices and each device has an unique
address. All electronics are contained in the detonator package and are fully
expendable - no separate downhole cartridge is required.
As can be expected with any new electronic or explosive device, some pre-job
preparation is required. Pay particular attention to gun string insulation, including
the collar locator, because high voltages are required to shoot.
• Gun Wiring - Secure Plus fires at 350 to 540 V. Gun wires must be Teflon,
600 V rated to withstand this voltage level.
• Hot Check - Check ALL equipment used (cable, head, weights, CCL, etc)
with a megohmmeter. ALSO, if possible, perform an insulation hot check
through the cable and CCL by sending 540 V to check for leaks.
Secure Plus devices use Addressable Switch technology. All testing must
be performed appropriate to the Addressable Switch Firing System (ASFS)
procedures. Initiating the Secure Plus devices can only be accomplished with
AS_SHM software.
General Description

Potential Loss: Personnel, Process
Before operating the tool, read the Safety precautions in the "Wellsite Operations"
section.
Secure Plus is the fourth generation of Slapper Actuated Firing Equipment

(S.A.F.E.*). The Secure Plus system is comprised of a disposable actuator
consisting of an electronic section for communication and high voltage
generation, an EFI section and a Secondary explosive pellet.
Private
Features and Benefits
Secure Plus combines the features of Secure with that of the Addressable Switch
Firing System (ASFS) by adding circuitry to facilitate two-way telemetry.
Secure Plus provides the following list of features and benefits:
• RF certification from Thales Missile Electronics

• Straight replacement for standard detonators
• Shorter gun string, no additional hardware
• Exploding Foil Initiator (EFI) technology
– Inherently safe (all failure modes exclude initiation)

– Requires megawatts of power to fire detonator
• Fully expendable
– No maintenance
• No special surface hardware

• Standard Secure technology rated to 340°F
• Cannot be accidentally fired by just applying power.
• Provides an unique address for each device.
• Eliminates mechanical piston switches.
• Provides skip-over in case of a misfire.
• Shot indication provided via communication queries.
• Circuitry can be tested before and after arming the gun.
Tool limitations
Although lab tests show successful operation with cable lengths ranging from 0 ft
to 30,000 ft, limited verification testing has been performed using H2S cable and
COAX. Very long NT heptacables, especially at higher temperatures, present a
particular telemetry problem at this stage of development.
Compatibility with the Xantrex power supply used in the “Europe WAFE” is
compatible with Maxis software OP11/ KP1 and OP12 only with Appkit SRC-2483
or later.
Private
Applications
Secure Plus Hollow Carrier Version
Donor
Receiver
Fluid Desensitizing Gap
Figure 2-7: Secure Plus Hollow Carrier Version
Description Application Part Number Rating

Secure Plus Carrier Guns/Cutters 100034412 340°F
The Secure Plus is fluid desensitized; therefore, it must be used only in carrier
guns. It is 4.9 in. long, about 0.8 in. in diameter and will fit all standard firing
heads and bottom noses.
Secure Plus Igniter
Figure 2-8: Secure Plus Igniter
Description Application Part Number Rating

Secure Plus Igniter Setting 100071245 340°F
Tools/Chemical
Cutters
The Secure Plus Igniter consists of a pressure bulkhead, an electronics package

with explosive pellet and a Pyrodex cup containing an ignition mixture. It is 5.4
in. long and the (maximum) diameter of the Pyrodex cup is 0.95 in. Unique
Secure firing heads are required, except that existing CPST-AA firing heads can
Private
be locally modified. The Secure Igniter has been tested with Schlumberger,
Baker, Owen and PRS charges in their respective tools. A secondary igniter is
not required.
2.1.3 Electric Detonators

Electrical detonators (blasting caps) are devices used to initiate detonation of
high explosives. Electrical detonators operate in the following sequence:
1. Electrical current passes through a wire causing it to heat.

2. The hot wire ignites a match compound mix that burns.
3. The ignition mix heats the primary explosive (lead azide) causing the lead
azide to detonate.
4. The detonation of the lead azide detonates the secondary explosive base
charge.
2.1.3.1 Fluid Desensitized Detonators

This is an integral blasting cap/booster unit for most applications where the cap
is not exposed to well pressure. The purpose of fluid desensitization is to prevent
detonation of cord and charges of a hollow carrier gun into which well fluids have
leaked. Should a liquid filled gun be allowed to fire, it would swell and/or crack,
ruining the carrier and possibly causing a fishing job.
Desensitization is accomplished by leaving an air gap between the main section

of the detonator and the booster. If this gap becomes filled with liquid, detonation
will not be transmitted across the gap. To assure that energy sufficient to initiate
the booster section is not transmitted through the liquid, a rubber, cork or wooden
shield is positioned over or near the cap (not shown here).
Most have a 27Ω resistor in each leg wire in series with the filament to prevent
accidental firing from stray current:
Private
Holes for
Two 27Ω Filament
Match liquid
safety ignition Lead Lead azide
entry
Leg Rubber resisters pellet or azide
wires plug powder primer RDX
Air gap Booster section

Figure 2-9: Fluid Desensitized Detonator
2.1.3.2 Pressure Tight Detonators

When we must expose the caps to the well fluid, they must be pressure proof. In
typical applications the caps will be subjected to several thousand psi and must
not collapse so they are built with a strong shell. The leg wires enter through fluid
tight seal at one end. A rubber boot, rubber tape or plastic tape is used to seal
the detonating cord after it has been attached to the booster end.
Lead
Two 27Ω Filament
azide Lead
safety primer
Match azide
Leg resisters
Rubber ignition
wires RDX RDX
plug pellet
booster section
Figure 2-10: Pressure Tight Detonator
2.1.3.3 Detonator Tips

Exceeding a detonator’s pressure rating can cause it to collapse with enough

force to detonate thereby firing the guns. This can happen during a surface
pressure test as well as downhole.
Private
All of our fluid desensitized detonators require a shield to dampen pressure

pulses in order to assure reliable fluid desensitization. SPT provides a cork
shield (H432083) to surround the detonator in guns. SRPC provides a foam
rubber tube (P172102) as an alternative to the cork shield.
2.1.4 Detonating Cords

Refer to the Parts Catalog (InTouch ID: 3269220) at InTouchSupport.com for the
most current detonating cord, booster and detonator information.
Detonating cord consists of a high explosive core (RDX, HMX, etc.) covered by
a plasticized braid jacket, or in some cases a lead sheath. Its purpose is to
transmit the explosion from the blasting cap to a number of individual charges.
Since the velocity of detonating wave is about 4 mi/sec, initiation of charges is
for practical purposes simultaneous.
Plastic
Textile Braid Lead Jacketed
Detonating Cords
Explosive
Figure 2-11: Detonating Cords
2.1.4.1 Hints on Use of Detonating Cords

1. The only recommended way to cut detonating cord is with the new Detonating
Cord Cutter (H432334). This tool safely makes a clean straight cut.
2. Beware of wet detonating cord - the explosive looks dark and forms lumps.
3. Leave sufficient detonating cord length that it can be cut back to fresh
powder when priming.
4. Watch for irregularities, cuts or breaks in the jacket (particularly with ribbon
cord).
5. Where RDX or HMX cord is damaged replace or make overlap splice (1 in.
for ribbon and 2 to 3 in. for round cord). Do not splice HNS or PYX cord.
6. Avoid loops, kinks or sharp bends which may cause interruption of the
detonating wave.
7. Avoid long storage periods for loaded guns.
8. Blind boot detonating cord on stored guns.
Private
9. Do not drag Hyperdome strips in and out of carriers several times before use
as this may damage the lead cord.
10. Carefully guide ribbon cord in charge groove when loading to prevent
pinching the cord.
11. Use string or soft aluminum wire to tie ribbon cord to channel holder strip
between charges (clips have sharp edges which can damage ribbon cord
particularly where well is producing at high volume shaking the gun).
12. Use watertight transport handling caps with plastic vent plugs on all guns
loaded in the shop.
13. Feed detonating cord straight from roll. The cord on the left (see Figure 2-12
Correct Way to Feed Detonating Cord) is twisted and can pull tight over the
sharp end of the gun causing loosening of the explosive packing and a low
order detonation when the gun is fired. Reboxed cord should be respooled
as soon as possible to prevent the bent cord from taking a permanent set
Figure 2-12: Correct Way to Feed Detonating Cord
2.1.5 Boosters and Detonators

A booster is an auxiliary explosive charge which is crimped on the end of a
detonating cord to assure reliable transmission of the detonating wave. The
booster consists of a thin aluminum shell containing a secondary explosive
charge which is held against the explosive core of the detonating cord.
Private
2.1.5.1 Detonators and Boosters

Specifications for detonators and boosters used in perforating applications are
located at the end of this chapter.
Use only the recommended boosters for perforating applications. All substitutions
should be reviewed via InTouch.
There are three crimp-on explosive transfer boosters recommended that cover
the entire temperature range and both side-by-side and end-to-end transfer
applications:
System Booster
RDX Systems 1. RDX Booster (H448841)
2. Used in HSD, TCP and S.A.F.E./Secure applications. HP3
RDX Booster (H524270) is obsolete and is not recommended
for any application.
HMX Systems 1. HMX Booster (H447381)
2. Can be used in every instance requiring explosive transfer in
this temperature range, including S.A.F.E./Secure carrier guns.
EB-3 HMX 250 mg SAFE-BA Booster (H545234) is obsolete
and is not recommended for any application.
HNS Systems 1. HP-10 NONA Booster (H447624)
2. Replaces all HNS boosters and replaces HP-4 boosters (used
in exposed SAFE-BA applications). HP3–A HNS booster
(H524273) is obsolete and is not recommended for any
application.
There are also special boosters for other applications:
• HP-4 booster (H447509) for SAFE-BA is obsolete. It can still be used for
initiation of S.A.F.E. exposed guns and is now listed as an acceptable
alternate booster in that system only - it should not be re-ordered.
• NONA receptor booster (H432465) for TCF - TCP applications (e.g., Sealed
Ballistic Transfers, Ballistic Swivels and CIRP). HNS receptor booster
(B029245) for use in TCF is obsolete and is not recommended for any
application.
• HMX 400°F Nobel booster (B077451) must be used when HT pressure tight
detonator (P285784) and Halar detonating cord are combined (high-temp
exposed guns and back-off applications).
Private
P291271 - EPS Electric Fuse Detonator

IATA 1.4S
UN 106.5 mm
12
5.6 HNS HNS

Remarks
- Copper case, red wires
8.5 DIA
- Firing intensity: 0.4 to 0.7A
- Fluid-desensitized, 54 ohm safety resistor
- Ratings: 480°F for 1hr, 380°F for 100 hr
Figure 2-13: EPS Electric Fuse Detonator (P291271)

2.2 in.
[56 mm]
Housing, Metal
IATA 1.4S
UN 0367 Cap, Metal
Box 10
0.5 in.
1 hr 500°F [13 mm]
100 hr 450°F
Explosive, Primer
200 hr 425°F Cap, Plastic
Explosive
Figure 2-14: Receptor Booster for TCF (H432465)
1.370 –0.010
0.695 –0.025
0.250 Dia Retainer

Max.
RDX
Figure 2-15: RDX Booster (H448841)
Private
1.375 –0.010
0.720 –0.035
0.250 Dia.
Shell HMX
Retainer
Figure 2-16: HMX Booster (H447381)
NONA
0.220 +- 0.010
0.000 0.240 +- 0.008
0.000
0.700
1.375 – 0.010
Figure 2-17: Hi-Temp NONA Booster (H447624)
Turn the booster upside down onto a piece of dark paper. Carefully lift the
booster and look at the paper. If there is a circle filled with explosive then do not
use the booster. If only a few specs of powder are present on the paper, then
examine the face of the explosive down the shell. A small indentation (0.5 mm)
is acceptable, anything else is not.
When installing boosters, it is very important not to twist the booster relative to
the detonating cords. This is especially important with lead covered cords. The
explosive in the boosters is soft and could be loosened by the abrasion caused
by this twisting action.
Always keep the plastic plugs in the end of the boosters. This helps prevent any
moisture problems. The HP series of boosters come with these plugs installed.
This helps prevent any moisture problems.
Private
2.1.6 Shaped Charges

The shaped charge consists of a small quantity of high explosive compressed
into a metal case together with a conically shaped metallic liner. In the shaped
charge gun, a single electrical detonator initiates a detonating cord which sets
off a number of shaped charges. For all practical purposes the process is
instantaneous.
Case or Container
Main Explosive Charge

Primer Charge
Liner
Detonating Cord
Figure 2-18: Shaped Charge
The detonation shock wave is initiated at the apex in each shaped charge, and
propagated through the explosive charge, collapsing its metallic liner. Velocities
in the order of 4 mi/sec and pressures of about 4,000,000 psi are generated.
Under these conditions the mechanical resistance of solid material is negligible
and the liner collapses toward the charge axis forming a high speed jet moving at
about 4 mi/sec. This jet material impinges on the casing, cement and formation
with pressures of 3,000,000 psi and penetrates by laterally pushing the solid
material aside.
2.1.6.1 Charge Identification

A Schlumberger charge without its jacket or retention system is identified by its
liner diameter, liner material, type of charge and explosive.
DP 41 B HJ II RDX HSD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1. Charge type:
System Booster
DP Deep Penetrating
Private
BH Big Hole
2. Diameter of liner top in mm

3. Code defining liner type and material:
System Booster
A pressed powder (copper, lead, tungsten)
B pressed powder (copper, lead)
C solid copper
D solid zinc
E solid aluminium
F titanium powder
J copper, lead, tungsten
4. Generic name of charge:
System Booster
HJ Hyperjet
UJ Ultrajet
HP Hyperpack
UP Ultrapack
CP CleanPack
CS Cleanshot
5. Levels of performance:
SX I, HJ II, HJ III, UJ
6. Explosive type:
PETN, RDX, HMX, HNS, PYX
7. Gun type:
System Booster
HSD High Shot Density
PPG Port Plug Gun
2.1.6.2 Charge Tips

1. Open all boxes carefully (don’t just tear them apart). Make a neat slit in the
bag so that it can be resealed later with tape.
Private
2. Keep the original packing, especially the silica desiccant and humidity proof
bag.
3. Humidity deteriorates explosives. Keep charges properly wrapped during
storage.
4. Never let loose charges knock against each other particularly during
transportation. Overpack with rags if necessary.
5. Cracked liners are responsible for irregular exit holes, shooting off-center of
the port plug, excessive burrs, gun damage, and poor formation penetration.
Visual inspection of all charges is recommended.
6. Random low-order charge detonation or abnormally large burrs can be
caused by charges coming out of their retainer jacket or the retainer jacket
coming out of the loading strip. To avoid this problem handle loaded guns as
smoothly as possible and avoid shocks.
Table 2-6: Temperature Ratings of Explosives
Explosive Temperature Rating for One Hour

(°F) (°C)
PETN 210 99
RDX 330 166
HMX 400 204
HNS 500 260
2.1.7 Shipping Data for Explosives

For explosive shipping data refer to the following:
• The explosives section in the catalog.

• The Competent Authority - Classification of Explosives Database.
• The Transportation section in the Explosives Saftey Manual (InTouch ID:
3010562)
Private
SRC-Wireline\SRC-Wireline\InTouch ID 3013565\3.1\Release Date:10-Jun-2004\EDMS UID: 274896043\Produced: 13-Jul-2006 20:55:42 2-29
2.2
Private
Approved Detonator List
Temperature Rating Pressure Rating Explosive
Part Number Description for 1 hr ( F [ C]) (psi [kPa]) Type Type Manufacturer Manufacturer PN
1
P448696 DETONATOR, DYNAWELL 1019S, FOR PIVOT GUN 365 [185] 12,000 [82,737] End Fire HNS DYNAenergetics 1019S
P190860 2 DETONATOR, DYNAWELL Z-480 300 [149] 15,000 [103,421] Crimp On RDX DYNAenergetics Z-480
WL FOM / Explosives
3
T6005130 ASSEMBLY, DETONATOR, SECURE EXPOSED 340 [171] 15,000 [103,421] End Fire NONA SRC T6005130
P581311 DETONATOR, DYNAWELL 1018 355 [179] 15,000 [103,421] Crimp On HNS DYNAenergetics 1018
P285784 DETONATOR, DYNAWELL 2026, HPHT 480 [249] 25,000 [172,369] End Fire HNS DYNAenergetics 2026
ID: 4030670) for latest version.

H448936 DETONATOR TEC-1 330 [165] Fluid Desensitized End Fire RDX Dyno Nobel TEC-1
P082938 DETONATOR, DYNAWELL 0015FD 340 [171] Fluid Desensitized Crimp On RDX DYNAenergetics 0015FD
100026475 DETONATOR, A-140 340 [171] Fluid Desensitized End Fire RDX Austin Powder A-140
100034412 4 ASSEMBLY, SECURE PLUS 340 [171] Fluid Desensitized End Fire NONA SRC 100034412
T6005040 ASSEMBLY, DETONATOR, SECURE 340 [171] Fluid Desensitized End Fire NONA SRC T6005040
100187535 DETONATOR, A-85 340 [171] Fluid Desensitized Crimp On RDX Austin Powder A-85
Detonator Specifications
H448887 DETONATOR, DFC-10 350 [177] Fluid Desensitized Crimp On RDX ORICA DFC-10
100087502 DETONATOR, 3050-009LS 450 [232] Fluid Desensitized End Fire HNS OWEN 3050-009LS
B033720 DETONATOR, E-161 475 [246] Fluid Desensitized Crimp On HNS OWEN E-161
H291271 or P291271 DETONATOR, DYNAWELL 0026FD 500 [260] Fluid Desensitized Crimp On HNS DYNAenergetics 0026FD
H334496 DETONATOR, G-21 500 [260] Fluid Desensitized End Fire HNS OWEN G-21
T6041743 DETONATOR, DYNAWELL 0026FD END-FIRE 500 [260] Fluid Desensitized End Fire HNS DYNAenergetics 0026FD END FIRE

1. Pivot gun and dump bailer detonator. Requires detonating cord boot (P095467).
2. Requires detonating cord boot (P095467)
InTouchSupport.com for the most current detonator information.
3. Requires booster (100043871)

Refer to the Approved Detonator List (InTouch ID: 4030670) at
4. Currently in field test
Figure 2-19: Detonator Specifications. Check InTouchSupport.com (Content

Approved by: For local and hard copies of this document check InTouchSupport.com for latest version. InTouch ID: 4030670
SRC: B. Ference Schlumberger Private Revised: 22-Feb-2005
2-29
2.3 Detonating Cord Specifications

Type Load Sheath Shrink (-)/Elong Temp. Rating Pressure Applications1 Part
gr/ft (+) (1hr) Rating Number
Exposed Non Exposed Non
exposed exposed
RDX 80 Nylon -8% – 330°F – PPG B017597
[166°C]
2
HNS 40 Lead 0 – 500°F – WLNE & B027910
[246°C] TCP
2 – –
RDX 40 Lead 0 340°F WLNE & H106960
3
Ribbon [166°C] TCP
2 – –
HNS 40 Lead 0 500°F WLNE H304114
Ribbon [260°C]
HMX 80 Nylon -1% 330°F 400°F 20,000 WLNE, H304800
[166°C] [204°C] psi BO & EJ
[137,895
kPa]
RDX 80 Nylon -1% 300°F 340°F 15,000 WLNE, H304843
[149°C] [166°C] psi BO & EJ
[103,421
kPa]
RDX 80 – 300°F – EJ B073382
[149°C]
HMX 80 FEP -2% 365°F 365°F 20,000 WLNE & H352944
[185°C] [185°C] psi EJ
[137,895
kPa]
HNS 87 Lead 450°F 500°F 20,000 EJ & BO H448845
[232°C] [260°C] psi
[137,895
kPa]
HMX 60 Rilsan -1% 330°F – 20,000 EJ H448369
[166°C] psi
[137,895
kPa]
HMX 35 Lead 0 – 400°F – WLNE & H448706
[204°C] TCP
HMX 50 Rilsan -1% 360°F 360°F – WLNE & H447050
[182°C] [182°C] PG
PYX 80 Teflon LS -2% 415°F Use 20,000 BO B030294
PFA Textile [213°C] H429816 psi
[137,895
kPa]
Private
HMX 80 Zytel -2% 400°F – WLNE H543012

[204°C]
RDX 80 Zytel -1% 340°F – WLNE H543021
[171°C]
HNS 87 Lead 450°F 500°F 20,000 WLNE & H429816
[232°C] [260°C] psi BO
[137,895
kPa]
PETN 80 – 210°F – HEGS H447045
[99°C]
RDX 40 NYLON B031291
HNS 87 H429816
PETN 80 PVC WLNE H447045

HNS 40 500°F H448894
1
WLNE = Wireline Nonexposed, BO = Backoff, EJ = Enerjet, HEGS = High Efficiency Gun System, PG =
Pivot Gun
2
The lead detonating cord will shrink approximately 10 - 15% in exposed conditions. This detonating cord is
not recommended for exposed conditions.
3
The H106960 lead ribbon cord has been manufactured by JRC and Ensign Bickford. The one from JRC
is too brittle and should not be used.–
Private
2.4 Booster Specifications

Description Properties Temperature Pressure Application Part

Rating (1 hr) Rating Number
Booster RDX 330°F [166°C] – Wireline H448841
perforating
Booster HMX 400°F – High H447381
temperature
wireline
perforating
HP-10 NONA 500°F [260°C] – High H447624
temperature
wireline
perforating
Secure Exposed HNS / N/A 15,000 psi Exposed 100043871
Booster NONA [103,421 kPa] Perforating
1
Booster HNS 480°F [249°C] – High P376362
temperature
wireline
perforating
Det. Cord Link RDX 300°F [149°C] 15,000 psi Back-off P190687
1-7 [103,421 kPa]
Det. Cord Link HNS 480°F [249°C] 25,000 psi Back-off P285791
1-7 [172,369 kPa]
1
Equivalent to H334877
Private
2.5 API Summary

Refer to API Data Sheets page at InTouchSupport.com (Content ID: 2051406)
for the latest API information.
Private
Private
WL FOM / Explosives
Intentionally Blank

2-34
3-i WL FOM / Perforating Accessories 3-i
3 Perforating Accessories
3.1 Correlation Tools _______________________________________________ 3-1
3.1.1 Casing Collar Locators _______________________________________ 3-1
3.1.1.1 Theory of Measurement __________________________________ 3-1
3.1.1.2 Hardware Description _____________________________________ 3-3
3.1.1.3 Operating Instructions ____________________________________ 3-4
3.1.1.4 RITE Maintenance ________________________________________ 3-6
3.1.1.5 Catalog Drawings & Parts Lists ___________________________ 3-12
3.1.2 Gamma-Ray Detectors ______________________________________ 3-12
3.1.2.1 Theory of Measurement _________________________________ 3-12
3.1.2.2 Hardware Description ____________________________________ 3-14
3.1.2.3 Operating and Maintenance Procedures __________________ 3-14

3.2 Weights _______________________________________________________ 3-15
3.2.1 Specifications _______________________________________________ 3-15
3.2.2 FIT 1 _______________________________________________________ 3-15
3.2.3 FIT 2 _______________________________________________________ 3-16
3.2.4 FIT 3 _______________________________________________________ 3-16
3.2.5 Troubleshooting ____________________________________________ 3-16
3.2.5.1 Problem ________________________________________________ 3-16
3.2.5.2 Remedy ________________________________________________ 3-16
3.2.6 Catalog Drawings & Parts Lists ______________________________ 3-16
3.3 Positioning Devices ___________________________________________ 3-18
3.3.1 Theory of Measurement _____________________________________ 3-18
3.3.1.1 Powered Orientating Tools (POT) _________________________ 3-18
3.3.1.2 Magnetic Positioning Devices (MPD) _____________________ 3-20
3.3.1.3 Spring Positioning Devices (SPD) ________________________ 3-20
3.3.2 Principal Applications _______________________________________ 3-20
3.3.2.1 POT-C __________________________________________________ 3-20
3.3.2.2 MPD-LB, MB, NB ________________________________________ 3-21
3.3.2.3 SPD-AB, F ______________________________________________ 3-21
3.3.3 Tool History _________________________________________________ 3-21
3.3.4 Hardware Description _______________________________________ 3-21
3.3.4.1 Tool Ratings ____________________________________________ 3-21
3.3.5 Operating Instructions _______________________________________ 3-22
3.3.5.1 Safety __________________________________________________ 3-22
3.3.5.2 Hardware Preparation ___________________________________ 3-23
3.3.5.3 Acquisition Software ____________________________________ 3-23
3.3.5.4 Common Problems _____________________________________ 3-25
3.3.6 RITE Maintenance __________________________________________ 3-26
3.3.6.1 MPD-G/F/H _____________________________________________ 3-26
3.3.6.2 SPD-AB ________________________________________________ 3-27
3.3.6.3 SPD-F __________________________________________________ 3-27
3.3.7 Catalog Drawings & Parts Lists ______________________________ 3-28
3.4 Adapters ______________________________________________________ 3-29
3.4.1 Specifications _______________________________________________ 3-29
Private
3-ii WL FOM / Perforating Accessories 3-ii
3.5 Heads _________________________________________________________ 3-30

3.5.1 Hardware Description _______________________________________ 3-30
3.5.2 Operating Hints _____________________________________________ 3-30
3.6 WPSA _________________________________________________________ 3-32
3.6.1 General Description and Specifications _______________________ 3-32
3.6.1.1 Overview and Applications _______________________________ 3-32
3.6.1.2 Combinability ___________________________________________ 3-33
3.6.1.3 Equipment and Operational Specifications ________________ 3-33
3.6.1.4 Downhole equipment ____________________________________ 3-34
3.6.1.5 Surface Equipment ______________________________________ 3-36
3.6.1.6 Wellsite auxiliary hardware _______________________________ 3-37
3.6.1.7 Workshop auxiliary hardware _____________________________ 3-37
3.6.1.8 Test Equipment and Facilities ____________________________ 3-39
3.6.2 Theory of Operation _________________________________________ 3-39

3.6.2.1 Basic physics of service _________________________________ 3-39
3.7 WPAT _________________________________________________________ 3-41
3.7.1 General Description and Specifications ______________________ 3-41
3.7.1.1 Principal applications ____________________________________ 3-41
3.7.1.4 Explosives ______________________________________________ 3-46
3.7.1.5 Selectivity _______________________________________________ 3-46
3.7.1.6 Wellsite auxiliary equipment _____________________________ 3-46
3.7.1.7 Workshop Auxiliary Equipment ___________________________ 3-47
3.7.1.8 Test Equipment _________________________________________ 3-49
3.7.2 Theory of Operations ________________________________________ 3-50
3.7.2.1 Basic Physics of Service _________________________________ 3-50
3.7.2.2 Advanced Physics of Service _____________________________ 3-51
3.8 POT-C _________________________________________________________ 3-56
3.8.1 Description _________________________________________________ 3-56
3.8.1.1 Introduction _____________________________________________ 3-56
3.8.1.2 General Theory and Applications _________________________ 3-58
3.8.1.3 CCL-LB Collar Locator ___________________________________ 3-62
3.8.1.4 CME-BA Centralizer _____________________________________ 3-64
3.8.1.5 POSA-AA Powered Orienting Shock Absorber ____________ 3-66
3.8.1.6 POGS-AA Powered Orienting Gun Spacer ________________ 3-68
3.8.2 Theory of Operation _________________________________________ 3-70
3.8.2.1 Description ______________________________________________ 3-70
3.8.2.2 Types of Completions ____________________________________ 3-72
3.8.2.3 Detector System ________________________________________ 3-75
3.8.2.4 Module _________________________________________________ 3-76
3.9 WOPT _________________________________________________________ 3-79
Private
3-iii WL FOM / Perforating Accessories 3-iii
3.9.1.4 Surface Equipment ______________________________________ 3-86

3.9.1.5 Wellsite Auxiliary Hardware ______________________________ 3-87
3.9.1.6 Workshop Auxiliary Hardware ____________________________ 3-88
3.9.1.7 Third-party equipment ___________________________________ 3-88
3.9.1.8 Test Equipment and Facilities ____________________________ 3-88
3.9.2 Theory of Operations ________________________________________ 3-88
3.10 WPP __________________________________________________________ 3-90
3.10.1.3 Measurement Specifications _____________________________ 3-98
3.10.1.5 Surface Equipment _____________________________________ 3-101
3.10.1.6 Wellsite auxiliary hardware ______________________________ 3-102

3.10.1.7 Workshop Auxiliary Hardware ___________________________ 3-103
3.10.1.8 Third-party equipment __________________________________ 3-105
3.10.1.9 Test equipment and facilities ____________________________ 3-105
3.10.2 Theory of Operation ________________________________________ 3-106
3.10.2.1 Basic physics of service and measurement _______________ 3-106
3.10.2.2 Advanced Physics of Service/Measurement ______________ 3-114
3.10.3 References ________________________________________________ 3-132
3.11 WPST ________________________________________________________ 3-133
3.11.1.1 Overview and Applications ______________________________ 3-133
3.11.1.2 Equipment and Operational Specifications _______________ 3-134
3.11.1.3 Downhole Equipment ___________________________________ 3-134
3.11.1.5 Wellsite auxiliary hardware ______________________________ 3-137
3.11.1.7 Test equipment and facilities ____________________________ 3-140
3.11.2 Theory of Operation ________________________________________ 3-140
3.11.2.1 PERC Mode ___________________________________________ 3-140
3.11.2.2 ASFS Mode ____________________________________________ 3-141
3.11.3 References ________________________________________________ 3-142
3.12 ATPS _________________________________________________________ 3-142
3.12.1.1 Overview and Applications ______________________________ 3-143
3.12.1.2 Equipment and Operational Specifications _______________ 3-144
3.12.1.3 Downhole Equipment ___________________________________ 3-146
3.12.1.5 Wellsite Auxiliary Hardware _____________________________ 3-148
3.12.1.7 Third-Party Equipment __________________________________ 3-149
3.12.1.8 Test Equipment and Facilities ___________________________ 3-150
3.12.2 Theory of Operations _______________________________________ 3-150
3.12.2.1 Overview ______________________________________________ 3-150
Private
3-iv WL FOM / Perforating Accessories 3-iv
3.12.3 References ________________________________________________ 3-151

Private
3-1 WL FOM / Perforating Accessories 3-1
3 PERFORATING ACCESSORIES
3.1 Correlation Tools
3.1.1 Casing Collar Locators

This section provides a summary information on the various heads commonly
used in perforation operations.
3.1.1.1 Theory of Measurement

Before operating the tool, read the safety precautions in the “Operating
Instructions” Section.
Principal Applications
Casing collar locators are primarily used to detect joints in pipe, whether it be in
easing strings, drill pipe or in production strings. In casing strings they are used
for correlation with CBL-VDL logs prior to perforations. In drill pipe they are
used to identify downhole equipment and joints prior to running a back-off shot
or say a colliding tool. In tubings they are run to identify down-hole equipment
like packers, expansion joints and gas-lift valves etc.
Physics of Measurement
The basic principle behind the detection of casing collars by a easing collar
locator is Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction, which says that an e.m.f
is induced in a coil if the magnetic flux around it is changed and it lasts for
the time for which the flux is changing. The amplitude of the induced e.m.f in
the coil is proportional to the rate of change of flux around it. The CCLs are
electromechanical devices used to locate collars by passing a strong magnetic
Private
field directly over the mass of a collar joint and measuring the voltage induced
due to disturbance of the magnetic flux lines by the discontinuity in the easing
(i.e., the collar joint).
Two permanent magnets are installed in line with the south magnetic poles facing
each other. Between the two magnets and in the magnetic field are four coils.
The coils are wired in series around a ferro-magnetic core, but the coil phasing is
such that the flux lines that induced voltage into the coils will produce zero volts if
the magnetic fields of the two magnets are equal. Comparatively, few lines of
force (flux) will exist in air between the poles of the magnets because air presents
a very high reluctance. However if an iron mass is placed near the magnetic
field, it provides a path of low reluctance, and more lines of force will exist. If the
mass detected is even (such as a smooth casing pipe), it will increase the two
fields created by the magnets by the same amount, and the voltage induced in
the two coils will be equal and opposite. In fact the coils have been wound for
this, because we are only interested in anomalies caused by sudden increases
or decreases in the casing mass. When passing a casing collar:
• the first magnet senses the increase in mass,

• the flux density of that magnet increases,
• the increased flux travels to the return points on the core and continues
through the core to the south pole of the magnet,
• the change of flux density induces a voltage into the coils,
• the induced voltage is sent up as the CCL signal.
1 6 1 6
D etector
Figure 3-1: CCL Principle of Detection
After the first magnet goes past the collar, the second magnet detects the collar.
The voltage induced into the coils is opposite in phase from the first magnet,
because the second magnet is oriented differently. This is what causes the
multiple and bipolar deflections on the log.
Voltage V = ∆Φ/∆t = change in flux density/ change in time
Private
The voltage induced into the coils is dependent on two things, flux density and
change in time (logging speed). At the logging speeds generally used, the output
of the collar locator coils is a linear function of speed. Below is a composite log
signal of a detected collar. The smaller peaks are due to the 2K coils, while the
larger ones are caused by the 8K coils.
Figure 3-2: Composite Collar Signal
Flush joint collars are difficult to detect because this type of joint is machined to
be close fitting. Furthermore, they often have a seal that reduces the air gap to
almost nothing. Flush joints are low in mass compared to the rest of the pipe
and consequently present a high reluctance path for tile magnetic field. This will
change the flux density which in turn will be felt by coils and translated into a
collar signal. Most flush joint collar signals are low in amplitude.
Almost all CCLs used for perforating have zener diodes connected back- to-
back on the gun line. The purpose of these is to prevent the CCL signal from
shorting to ground through the detonator. The zeners which are rated to about
6V, prevent voltages below this value to reach the detonator. With a shorted
zener, you won’t get a CCL signal; and with an open zener you will not be able
to fire on the gun line. The exception to this is the CCL-AG and CCL-AT which
have a series coil. Here the coil ground is through the detonator and we get the
collar signals as long as the detonator has not fired.
3.1.1.2 Hardware Description

All CCLs discussed below use the SHM series of tool modules. None of them
need any surface power for signal generation. They are used for different
applications based on their size and temperature and pressure ratings.
Table 3-1: Collar Locator Equipment Information
Component Assembly Temperature Pressure OD Weight Length

Number (degF) (psi) (in) (lbm) (in)
1
PCCL-LA P495650 392 20,000 1-11/16 - 16.0
2
PCCL-X 100091939 - 2-5/8 - -
Private

3
CCL-N P030462 350 20,000 1-3/8 6 17.8
4
CCL-L P024737 350 20,000 1-11/16 12 18.0
CCL-AG P125542 500 20,000 1-11/16 12 18.0
CCL-AT P654260 500 25,000 1-11/16 12 18.0
CAL-GA H523045 350 10,000 3-1/8 - -
5
CAL-B P046158 450 20,000 3-3/8 60 18.0
6
CCL-AF P123770 350 20,000 3-3/8 90 58.1
1
CCL-L must be replaced by CCL-AG above 392 degF (200 degC). The CCL-AG is a 60 to 80 ohm series coil
rated to 500 degF and 20 kpsi. It does not have diodes. The CCL-AT is a high pressure version of CCL-AG.
2
CCL-NB (P279506) is a 1-3/8 in. CCL with a 1-11/16 in. housing. The CCL-NB can withstand back-off
3
shock without deforming like CCL-L.

4
5
CAL-B can be run in emergencies up to 480 degF (232 degC) for 1 h but it must be completely serviced
afterward.
6
CCL-AF is not shock proof. Do not use it for perforating operations. It is recommended for BST-C, especially
in large casing.
3.1.1.3 Operating Instructions
Safety
1. All CCLs have exceptionally high eccentering forces. Care should be

exercised when handling the locators near steel benches.
2. All O-rings must be replaced every time the tool is used close to its
temperature rating.
3. Do not store casing collar locators near electronic cartridges, especially
dipmeters; and tools having nuclear detectors.
4. No two casing collar locators should be allowed to come together, especially
if the coil and magnet assembly is out of the pressure housing. To do so
would reduce the locator signal level and eccentering forces, both of which
reduce the signal to noise ratio. Demagnetization is very severe when
locators of different size are allowed to come together, for example, a 3-3/8
in. vs. a 1-3/8 in. locator; the smaller one will get demagnetized slightly.
Private
Wellsite Software Setup and Operations
No special software procedures are required to operate casing collar locators.

All of them are declared by the generic name of CCL when declaring a tool
string. The software used is the latest version of PERFO2. Details of using this
software are given in the WRMs. CCLs do not have any calibrations, nor are
there any test phase checks. For better visual effects, their gain can be changed
in the INPUT table. Since signal magnitude is proportional to the rate of change
of magnetic flux, the higher the logging speed, the higher is the signal to noise
ratio. Signal to noise ratio can vary from near zero for a “Flush joint Hydrill (7 in.
pipe)” to about 175 for standard 5 in. pipes.
The only items required for operating the tool is the latest version of the PERFO2
software and a SHM module. The above mentioned locators do not need any
power from the CSU.
Troubleshooting
Problem: No CCL signal because of faulty CCL-MMD/ANA cards.
The CCL signal is processed in the CSU through the non-redundant CCL-MMD
and CCL-ANA cards. You should always have spares in case any of them go
bad. In case you end up with no spares and the problem is in these cards, then
the CCL signal can be acquired through the SP channel. Just declare the tool as
SP, instead of CCL, change SPLW from W6 to W1 and SPLR from W8 to W10.
Then change the sampling rate from 6 in. to 2 in. (check patch in DIR for latest
CP versions) to avoid getting a lazy CCL. Set the scale to 500 mV/track (-280
to 220) to see a good signal and continue logging.
The Hi-Res patch (for 6 in. to 2 in. sampling) for CP versions up to 32.6 is
given below.
Version # HFRAME HSUBFRAME Address #1 Address #2

38.2 6426 6432 37412 37420
32.6 6426 6432 37412 37420
32.4 6424 6430 37412 37420
32.2 6434 64466 36676 36704
HFRAME always gets changed from 74 to 14 and HSUBFRAME always changes

from 5 to 1 in all the versions. Later versions are likely the same, but the address
may change a bit - look around in the area of the address for 32.6 (the data in
the two locations should be the same, separated by the same amount and likely
within a few locations of those given for CP 32.6 - probably the same ones).
Private
Problem: No CCL and can’t shoot because of faulty SHM

Hazard Category: human
The procedure given below bypasses all CSU safety features (H/W and S/W).
So know what you are doing.
If you can’t shoot or get a CCL and suspect your SHM, here is way to do your
job on the CSU.
1. Connect pins BA (CCL-HI) and BB (CCL-LO) of TIU side 1, bottom row to the
required cable conductors inside the TIU. Note that pins EA to EF are logging
cables 1 to 6, pin EH is logging cable 7 and pin EL is logging cable 10.
Load a program containing a CCL and log as for standard correlation.
2. For shooting, correlate and position gun using the above procedure.
Connect DC power directly to the required cable conductors inside the TIU.
Note that pin DN is DC+ and pin DS is DC-. Typically you would reconnect
DN to EA and DS to EL when shooting on line 1.
Enable DC power, by halting and typing 17764076/ and then 777777.
Send DC power as for normal shooting operation.
3.1.1.4 RITE Maintenance

The routine maintenance procedures for each of the CCLs are given in the
following pages. With the FIT checks of each is given a detailed assembly
diagram, which can be used to disassemble, replace and repair any part
required. A TRIM may be required when the generated signal becomes weak.
The TRIM procedure comprises of a disassembly of the tool and a remagnetizing
of the CCL-magnets.
Remagnetization
The casing collar magnetizer (CLM-A) is basically a strong electromagnet.

Suitably shaped detachable heads are used on the pole pieces of the
electromagnet to adapt to each size of casing collar locator. The magnetization
of a magnet is rather rapid; as soon as the monitoring current has reached the
maximum value, the magnetization process is complete and the power to the
device should be switched off. The detailed procedure for magnetization can
be found in the maintenance manual.
Private
CCL-N
Application
1. All perforating operations requiring 1-3/8 in. collar locator.

2. With 1-11/16 in. lower head can be used with 1-11/16 in. perforating
hardware.
FIT 1
1. Take off thread protectors and magnetic screen.

2. Clean tool.
3. Check O-rings and replace if worn.
4. Check that upper head pin is not bent.
5. Check presence of screw. When male contact is needed, replace screw
by spring contact.
FIT 2
1. Check continuity between upper head pin and housing. Multimeter should
read between 3600 Ω and 4000 Ω.
2. Check between upper head pin and screw. Multimeter (on range x10k)
should deflect on each polarity.
FIT 3
1. Connect multimeter (on 100 mA scale) between upper head pin and housing.
2. Pass a steel rod or screwdriver along the housing. Momentary deflections
of 25 to 50 mA should be observed.
3. Oil housing and slightly grease O-rings.
4. Install thread protectors and magnetic screen.
Private
Note
Do not store casing collar locators near electronic cartridges, especially
Dipmeters.
CCL-L
Application
1. All perforating using 1-11/16 in., 2-1/8 in. or 2-7/8 in. guns.
2. Used with Baker #05 and #10 setting tool and junk catcher.
FIT 1

2. Clean tool.
4. Check that spring contact is tightened in place.
5. Check presence of screw. If MPD-H is used, replace screw by spring contact.
FIT 2
1. Check continuity between spring contact and housing. Multimeter should

read between 3600 Ω and 4000 Ω.
2. Check between spring contact and screw. Multimeter (on range x10k) should
deflect on each polarity.
FIT 3
1. Connect multimeter (on 100 mA scale) between spring contact and housing.
Private
Note
Dipmeters.
CCL-AG
Application
1. All perforating using 1-11/16 in., 2-1/8 in. or 2-7/8 in. guns especially
Pivot Guns. Preferred over CCL-L for high temperature and high pressure
operations.
FIT 1

2. Clean tool.
3. Check O-rings and back-up rings and replace if worn. Inspect O-ring groove
for pitting and corrosion. Also inspect O-ring seal surface in housing.
4. Check that spring contact is straight and that screw is functional. If an MPD
is to be used replace screw with contact spring and ensure that it is straight.
FIT 2
1. Check continuity between spring contact and contact cone. Multimeter

should read between 75 Ω and 80 Ω.
FIT 3
1. Connect multimeter (on 100 mA scale) between spring contact and contact
cone.
Private
Hints
CCL signal is grounded through the detonator. So after firing the gun you may
not get CCL signal. This is also a positive indication of the gun firing.
Note
Dipmeters.
CCL-AT
Application
1. All perforating using 1-11/16 in., 2-1/8 in. or 2-7/8 in. guns especially
Pivot Guns. Preferred over CCL-L for high temperature and high pressure
operations.
FIT 1

2. Clean tool.
3. Check O-rings and back-up rings and replace if worn. Inspect O-ring groove
for pitting and corrosion. Also inspect O-ring seal surface in housing.
4. Check that spring contact is straight and that screw is functional. If an MPD
is to be used replace screw with contact spring and ensure that it is straight.
FIT 2
1. Check continuity between spring contact and contact cone. Multimeter

should read between 75 Ω and 80 Ω.
FIT 3
1. Connect multimeter (on 100 mA scale) between spring contact and contact
cone.
Private

Hints
CCL signal is grounded through the detonator. So after firing the gun you may
not get CCL signal. This is also a positive indication of the gun firing.
Note
Dipmeters.
CAL-B
Application
All services requiring 3-3/8 in. mono collar locator.
FIT 1

2. Clean tool.
4. Check that spring contact and lower connector rod are tightened in place.
FIT 2
1. Check continuity between spring contact and housing. Multimeter should

read between 10 kΩ and 14 kΩ.
2. Check continuity between spring contact and lower connector rod. Multimeter
(on range x10k) should deflect on each polarity.
FIT 3
1. Connect multimeter (on 100 mA scale) between spring contact and housing.
2. Pass a steel rod or screwdriver slowly along the housing. Momentary
deflections of about 20 mA should be observed.
Private
Note
Dipmeters.
CCL-AF
Applications
The CCL-AF is a flush joint collar locator. It is a wall contact device which locates
casing collars by passing the magnets directly over the crack created by the
collar joint. Since the crack is necessarily narrow, particularly in flush joints the
time duration of the signal is very low. The circuit is especially designed to pick
up the high frequency components of this signal whose duration at a logging
speed of 3600 ft/hr can be as low as 1/30th of a second.
3.1.1.5 Catalog Drawings & Parts Lists

Refer to the SRC Parts Catalog (InTouch ID: 3269220) at InTouchSupport.com
for the most current catalog drawings and parts lists.
3.1.2 Gamma-Ray Detectors
3.1.2.1 Theory of Measurement

Gamma rays are high-energy electromagnetic waves emitted spontaneously by
some elements. Nearly all the gamma radiation encountered in the earth is
emitted by radioactive elements of the uranium and thorium series.
The number and energies of these gamma rays are distinctive for each
element. Potassium K40 emits gamma rays of a single energy, whereas the two
radioactive series emit gamma rays at various energies.
In passing through matter, a gamma ray undergoes successive

Compton-Scattering collisions with atoms of the formation, losing energy at each
collision until it is absorbed by the photo-electric effect. In the photo-electric
effect, the atoms of the formation material completely absorb low-energy gamma
rays, resulting in the ejection of electrons.
Private
To detect gamma rays, we use a NaI crystal coupled to a photomultiplier. When

a gamma ray enters the crystal, several interactions may occur, resulting in a
short flash of light detected by the photomultiplier, where it is seen as an electric
pulse with an amplitude proportional to the gamma-ray energy. As mentioned
earlier, the GR log has a wide variety of uses. Some of these are
• Correlation
• Lithology identification (shales)
• Quantitative evaluation of shaliness
• Quantitative evaluation of radioactive mineral deposits
• Cased hole perforating depth control
• Water Flow detection

• Silicon Activation measurement for gravel pack logging.
• The GR log is sometimes used in connection with radioactive tracer
operations.
The following block diagram describes the gamma ray detector operation:
Integrated Gamma-Ray Detector
Threshold
NaI crystal PMT Pre-amp discriminator Monostable
3-us pulses
out
HV-
Gamma High-voltage
rays ladder
HV Control DC + 5V
Oscillator in
Figure 3-3: Integrated Gamma Ray (IGR) block diagram
The Integrated Gamma Ray (IGR) detector uses a ruggedized NaI(Tl) scintillator
crystal. The photomultiplier tube (PMT) is optically coupled to the crystal. It
accepts at its photocathode the light output from the crystal and outputs at its
anode a negative electrical signal proportional to the energy of the gamma ray
deposited in the crystal.
The PMT is operated with the anode grounded; a High Voltage Ladder supplies
negative voltages to each dynode of the PMT, with the resulting cathode voltage
being typically at –1200 V to –2000 V relative to the anode. No resistive bleeder
string is used to set the voltage at each individual dynode. Rather, the various
stages of the high voltage multiplier are directly coupled to the dynodes. The
Private
applied high voltage is regulated via internal feedback to be proportional to a low

voltage provided by a voltage regulator and voltage divider inside the power
supply. The operating voltage for each detector is set at PTC after recording the
plateau data. This operating voltage is selected to achieve count rate stability
over the tool’s operating temperature range.
The current pulse from the PMT anode is passed to a preamplifier, which
performs the pulse shaping and current-to-voltage conversion. This signal is
passed to a voltage comparator that provides a logic pulse signal. The falling
edge of the logic pulse triggers a dual, monostable multi-vibrator, which then
produces a 20-microsecond pulse. These pulses are conveyed to the CAN
bus via a Universal Acquisition Board.
3.1.2.2 Hardware Description

Gamma-ray tools need surface power for signal generation. They are used for
different applications based on their size and temperature and pressure ratings.
Table 3-2: Gamma Ray Detector Equipment Information

PGGT-C H327377 350 20,000 1-11/16 37 76
PGGT-B 500 for 6 hr 20,000 2-1/8 58 98
27,500 2-1/4
PGGT-BC H341062 260 25,000 2-1/8 58 97.4
500 for 6 hr 27,000 2-1/4
PGGT-A H341067 300 - 350 20,000 1-11/16 37 77
1
PGGT-DA H409380 350 20,000 3-5/8 97 76
PGGT-DA K409380 350 20,000 3-3/8 97 76
1
UPCT-AA 1 767-0060 347 20,000 1-11/16 - 54

continuous
374 for 1 hr
2
WPGRT 10004322 350 15,000 1-11/16 18 40.3
1
CCL also included.
2
Compatible with WPP and PSP.
3.1.2.3 Operating and Maintenance Procedures

Refer to the Powered Gun Gamma Ray Tool (InTouch ID: 3378065) and the
Universal Perforating Correlation Tool (InTouch ID: 3312241) reference pages
for operating and maintenance procedures.
Private
3.2 Weights
This section provides general information on the various weights commonly
used in perforation operations.
3.2.1 Specifications
Pres-
sure Temp. Water
Rating Rating Air Dis-
OD Length Weight placed
Part File (psi (°F

Number (in.) Code Type [kpa]) [°C]) (in.) (lb) (lb) Service
H126168 1-3/8 EQF-41 Steel 20,000 450 45.8 19 2.5 Std
[137,895] [232]
H244120 1-3/8 EQF-47 Hi- 20,000 450 72 48.5 3.9 H2S
Density [137,895] [232]
H122856 1-11/16 EQF-38 Steel 20,000 450 48.4 30.4 3.9 Std
[137,895] [232]
H131630 1-11/16 EQF-43 Hi- 20,000 450 72 74 5.8 Std
Density [137,895] [232]
H223662 1-11/16 EQF-53 Hi- 25,000 500 72 61 5.8 H2S
Density [172,369] [260]
H123136 2 EQF-39 Steel 20,000 450 48.4 42.7 5.5 Std
[137,895] [232]
H132600 2-1/8 EQF-46 Hi- 25,000 450 72 104 9.2 Std
Density [172,369] [232]
H223666 2-1/8 EQF-54 Hi- 25,000 500 72 105 9.2 H2S
Density [172,369] [260]
H106325 3-3/8 EQF-33 Steel 20,000 450 60 150 19.5 Std
[137,895] [232]
3.2.2 FIT 1
1. Remove thread protectors.
2. Clean tool.
4. Check cleanliness of O-ring seat on upper head.
5. Check that spring or pin contact is not bent and tight.
6. Check that contact rod terminal is tightened in place.
Private
Note
EQF connector rods can be properly repaired with a new hi-temp shrinkable
tubing (E048946). Rated to 500°F, this tubing easily fits onto the 0.168 to 0.170
in. dia connector rod and requires only a standard heat gun (400-450°F).
3.2.3 FIT 2
1. Check insulation between spring or pin contact and body. Multimeter should
read infinite resistance.
2. Check continuity between spring contact and contact rod terminal.
3.2.4 FIT 3
2. Install thread protectors.
3.2.5 Troubleshooting
3.2.5.1 Problem
High density weights are two concentric tubes with an annular space full of
powdered tungsten. If a high density weight is flooded, water will pass through
holes in the inner tube into the powdered tungsten in the annulus. Once in the
annulus the water will boil (when the weight is run to a high enough temperature)
distributing water vapor into all of the weights. However, since water vapor is
non-conductive a failure will probably not occur on this descent. On the trip out
of the well the water vapor will condense causing the weights to leak. Cleaning
the conductor parts will fix the leak but liquid will remain in the tungsten powder
assuring future problems.
3.2.5.2 Remedy
Remove the rods and heat all effected weights to 250°F [121°C] overnight.
3.2.6 Catalog Drawings & Parts Lists

Specifications.............................See Catalog
Private
Steel......................................See Catalog
High Density...............................See Catalog

Private
3.3 Positioning Devices

Orientation tools are useful in orienting shots correctly for perforating guns.
Positioning devices make sure that the gun, prior to firing, is positioned in a
manner that ensures proper distance of the shots from the casing, thus ensuring
a higher efficiency in perforations. Three different types of positioning and
orientation devices are used depending on the specific positioning requirements
of the gun and the well completion in which it is run.


Before operating the tool, read the safety precautions in the “Operating
Instructions” section.
3.3.1 Theory of Measurement
3.3.1.1 Powered Orientating Tools (POT)

The POT (POT-C, WPP, etc.) allow one to direct shots of a perforating gun.
The POTs are used to optimize fracture jobs, to minimize sand production
and/or perforate in multiple string completions. In multiple string completions,
with the POT and perforating guns in one string of the tubing, typically the
objective is to prevent the guns from perforating the other strings of tubing. This
is accomplished by rotating the gun downhole with an electromagnetic detector.
When the relative direction of the other string(s) of the tubing is found, the gun is
rotated so the charges are pointed away from the other tubing(s).
These systems consists of:
• A CCL for correlation.

• A centralizer with rollers/scratchers that allow the tool to move up/down but
resists torque.
• A motor to rotate the tool and guns below the centralizer.
The coil array that rotates with the guns and detects the direction of adjacent
tubing strings.
Shock absorber , gun spacer and perforating guns.
Private
The coil array section shown in Figure 3-4 Coil Array consists of an Exciter
Coil, a Reference Coil and a Directional Detector Coil at approximately 3.5 ft
from the Exciter. The Exciter is a bifilar wound inductor with each coil’s polarity
180° from the other. When the inductor is toggled between its two windings by
the electronic switching circuit an AC magnetic field results. The Exciter coil
establishes a magnetic field around the casing as shown in the figure. This
magnetic field is then distorted by the metal mass due to the surrounding tubing
and/or casing strings.
Magnetic
Field
Metal
Proximity Max. Metal Exterior
Pipe of
Interest
Detector
Upper String Coil
Exciter
Coil
Reference
Lower String Coil
Lower String
Gun
Figure 3-4: Coil Array
This distorted magnetic field is received by both the Reference and Detector coils
which will calculate a flux from the received frequency. The high flux corresponds
to the greater metal mass in the proximity. The tool is then positioned facing the
higher flux reading, therefore the Long String, while the guns will be facing 180°
away. The value of the flux is relative to the surrounding metal spacing and
thickness, thus the tubing/casing geometry and weights.
Since the tubing/casing geometry cannot be predicted, a shop simulation must

be done for each job using the exact casing/tubing samples and positioning them
in all possible positions to know what to expect.
The measurement theory is conditional on the assumption that the surrounding

environment is uniform between the Exciter and the Detector. Therefore, the
following should not exist.
• Massive pipe corrosion

• Existing perforations
• Splits (vertical or horizontal)
Private
• Casing patches
Positive DC power is used to run the motor and tool electronics and negative
DC power is used to shoot the gun.
The POT-C is not combinable with any other tools. The POT-C has a optional
gun spacer, used to avoid positioning the POT-C sensors too near a collar. If the
tool pickup coil array is too near a collar, the mass of the metal will distort the
electromagnetic field and prevent proper location of adjacent tubing string(s).
The POT-C does not support the use of switches or multiple guns.
The WPP is a modular to and can detect casing collars, deviation , pressure,
temperature and gamma-ray signals while perforating. The WPP support
addressable and percussions switch allowing it to selectively fire multiple guns.
3.3.1.2 Magnetic Positioning Devices (MPD)

MPDs use a strong magnetic force to eccenter them and provide zero clearance
to a scallop or enerjet gun prior to firing. They come in different sizes (1-3/8 in.,
1-11/16 in., 2 in.) to facilitate running in different tubing sizes.
3.3.1.3 Spring Positioning Devices (SPD)

SPDs use a strong spring force to eccenter them and provide zero clearance to a
scallop or enerjet gun prior to firing.
3.3.2 Principal Applications
3.3.2.1 POT-C
The POT-C is used in multiple string completions to orient perforating guns,
typically a 2-1/8 in. Enerjet or SCG gun (a maximum of 20 ft), with the objective
of preventing perforating the other tubing strings in the completion.
The WPP is used in multiple string completions, to optimize fracture jobs, to

minimize sand production and/or to acquire borehole pressure and temperature.
Typically a 2-1/2 in. or smaller HSD, Enerjet or SCG gun is used with the WPP.
Private
3.3.2.2 MPD-LB, MB, NB

The MPDs are used to provide zero clearance (and hence ensure maximum
perforation efficiency) for tubing puncher, enerjet guns and zero and 180°
phasing scallop guns. They use magnetic force for eccentering.
3.3.2.3 SPD-AB, F
The SPDs are used to provide zero clearance (and hence ensure maximum
perforation efficiency) for enerjet guns and zero and 180° phasing scallop guns.
They use spring force for eccentering. Different casing arms are available for
eccentering in different casings (typically 5 in., 7 in. and 9-5/8 in.). They have
just about been replaced by the much better MPDs, primarily because of the
problems they caused in running in of guns. They were principally used to orient
2 ⅞ in. zero phasing hyperdome guns.
3.3.3 Tool History

The 2-7/8 in. OD spring positioning devices (SPDs) were positioning devices
used for scalloped guns. The obsolete version SPD-E (H224314) and the new
version SPD-F (H-224859) have interchangeable electrical components but not
the same springs. Two SPDs are used, above and below the guns to provide
maximum eccentering.
The MPDs were developed to counter the running difficulties associated with
SPDs, especially in deviated wells. The commonly used MPD-G (1-3/8 in.),
MPD-F (1-11/16 in.) and MPD-H (2 in.) have now been redesigned to improve
reliability and performance and to simplify manufacturing. The new MPDs are
MPD NB, MPD-LB and MPD-MB. These have a higher pressure rating as well
as better long term retention of magnetic properties.
The POT was developed for working in multiple string completion environment.
3.3.4 Hardware Description
3.3.4.1 Tool Ratings

Equipment associated with the tool is described below.
Private
Table 3-3: Equipment Information
Tool Module Assembly Temp Press Hole Dia. Weight Length

Number (°F) (kpsi) Size(in.) (in.) (lb) (in.)
Min. Max.
POT-C POT-M 350 15 1.7 12 1.7 45 116
MPD-G H123172 340 15 1-3/8 7 17.5
MPD-F H115519 400 20 1-11/16 10 19.5
MPD-H H123181 400 25 2 12.5 21.2
MPD-NB H432240 500 25 1-3/8 11 19.4
MPD-LB H432202 500 25 1-11/16 14 19.4
MPD-MB H432223 500 25 2 17 19.4

MPD-XS H432243 500 25 2 17 19.4
SPD-AB H432216 500 25 1-11/16
SPD-F H224859 470 20 2-7/8 NA 39.6
The MPD-NB, MPD-LB and MPD-MB have pull-off forces of 30, 35 and 50 lb respectively.
The MPD-XS is under field testing and has a pull-off force of 75 lb and a slide force of 10 lb.
The assemblies for MPD-G, MPD-F and MPD-H are no longer sold.
3.3.5 Operating Instructions

This section provides operating instructions, including guidelines for safety,
hardware preparation, wellsite software setup and operations, log quality control
and troubleshooting.
3.3.5.1 Safety
1. The POT-C uses DC MAIN for a power source. This voltage is hazardous.
2. The MPDs exert very strong eccentering forces. Care should be taken when
working with them near metallic benches or tools. Care should be taken to
avoid pinched fingers when installing magnetic keepers.
3. Care should be taken when opening a closed spring arm of an SPD.
Preferably the tool should be laid on the ground, with a rope around it. The
rope should then be used to open the spring arm slowly.
Private
3.3.5.2 Hardware Preparation
Equipment Checklist
The POT-C should be run with a POSA-AA (shock absorber), a CME-BA

centralizer and a CCL-LB on top. It uses the POTM tool module. A POGS-AA
(gun spacer) is optional and required if at shooting position the POT-C sensor is
close to a collar.
The MPDs and SPDs are electrically through wires and usually used with guns.
A firing head adapter, which adapts the MPDs and SPDs to the guns as required.
An SHM is used to fire the guns.
Combinations
The POT-C is not combinable with other services and is run with a CCL-LB,
CME-BA and POSA-AA. It is available in the CP38 PERFO2 software.
The MPDs and SPDs are combinable with all through tubing puncher, scallop
and enerjet guns.
Tool Transportation
The MPDs should always be transported with their magnetic screens. The SPD
spring arms should be left open to prevent any damage to the spring action
by large stresses.
3.3.5.3 Acquisition Software
POT-C
The POT-C requires certain special operating features which are described
below.
Setup Phase
The POT-C is available tool in the CP38 PERF02 software. The format used to
display motor revolutions, magnetic flux and CCL is: POT. Though you can run
ONLY one gun with the POT-C, the software requires you to enter the number
of guns as 1.
Private
The POT-C tool length in the tool tables is set to zero to ensure that the CCL is
not memorized. The distance from the CCL sensor (tool zero) to the top shot of
the gun must be entered correctly to ensure that the gun is not fired off-depth.
ALWAYS zero the odometer on the CCL sensor.
Log Phase
• Correlation log
The CCL-LB is used to generate the correlation log to verify that the POT-C
and gun are correctly positioned. Every time, you give a VIEW or LOG
command you must press the “LOG” button on the POTM AA in order to
display the CCL signal. The “LOG” button on the POTM-AA activates a relay
in the tool module that connects the tool module to the logging cable. The
button also causes the green LED next to it to light up. The relay will remain
energized and the LED on until you issue a “ROTAtion” command and then a
STOP command. At that time the relay will be deactivated and the LED next
to the “LOG” button on the POTM AA will go off. After stopping the rotation
of the POT-C, you will need to reactivate the log relay if you wish to acquire
any further CCL signals. In order to do this, you will need to follow the earlier
sequence of events of first issuing a “LOG” or “VIEW” command and then
pressing the “LOG” button on the POTM-AA.
• Orienting the Gun
After positioning the POT-C at the proper depth, you are now ready to orient
the gun for shooting. To orient the gun without generating a film or data file
enter the command “VIEW TIME”.
Press the “LOG” button on the POTM-AA (if necessary, i.e., the green LED
next to the button is off). Then enter the command “ROTA”.
The DC main power will now be enabled and you should press the “ARM”
button on the TPU and turn up the variac until the delta volts is approximately
in the center of the meter. At the same time the computer will disallow the
CCL curve and begin presenting on the numeric display the raw input value
of FLUX. In general, the higher the FLUX reading the greater the mass of
metal that the POT-C sensor is seeing. In most cases you will want to avoid
shooting adjacent tubing strings. So assuming the shots are oriented 180°
out of phase with the sensor, when the sensor is pointing directly at the
greatest mass of metal, the shots are pointed away. Generally the greatest
mass of metal will be the adjacent tubing string(s) and so the shots will be
pointed away from the adjacent tubing. In some completions there might
be circumstances in which the greatest mass of metal is not the adjacent
tubing string(s) and so caution is necessary in interpreting the POT-C results.
Assuming you wish to stop the tool at the highest value of FLUX, the simplest
procedure is to enter the command “STOP”.
Private
The computer will then print the message “STOP ROTA? (Y/N)’.
Now while watching the FLUX value in the numeric display, wait until the
FLUX value reaches its maximum before entering the command “Y”.
You may want to watch several cycles to get an approximate value for the
FLUX maximum reading before stopping rotation. Immediately after entering
the “Y” the computer will drop the DC main enable and disable the logging
relay in the POTM-AA. As the tool no longer has motor power it will stop
rotating. The sensor should be pointed at the greatest mass of metal. Enter a
second command “STOP” to stop the log. If you are not satisfied with the
stopping point you can redo the whole procedure.
• Shooting the Gun
With the gun on depth (in the shot window) and the shots pointing in the
correct direction, you are ready to fire the gun. To fire the gun you must
enter the command “SHOOT”.
After entering the command, press the “SHOOT” button on the POTM-AA
and continue to hold it during the entire shooting cycle. You will see the
red LED next to the “SHOOT” button begin to blink. The shoot relay in the
POTM-AA has been energized and now connects the DC main power supply
to the logging cable. The DC Main on the TPU is now enabled and you will
have ten seconds from the moment you issued the “SHOOT” command to
turn up the variac on the DC Main and fire the gun. If you wait for more than
10 seconds, DC Main will be disabled, the shoot relay in the POTM-AA will
drop out and the red LED on the POTM-AA will stop blinking. To re-enable
shooting simply reissue the shoot command and follow the same procedure
as before. Once again you will have only 10 seconds to fire the gun. When
you are finished shooting, issue the stop command “STOP”.
If you wish to log away from the shot then issue the command “LOG”.
Push the “LOG” button on the POTM-AA. You will now be able to log the CCL.
3.3.5.4 Common Problems
POT
An incorrect interpretation of the POT (POT-C, WPP, etc.) results can result in a
fiasco and perforating both strings. To avoid problems of this kind always design
and simulate a job in the shop before running in the well. The results can be
particularly difficult to interpret if the POT is partially in and partially out of one
tubing string. One predictable problem in this case occurs when the detector coil
is left outside the SS, while the exciter coil still remains inside. This distorts the
signal and gives a wrong indication.
Private
One other situation to avoid is that of making a measurement opposite a casing

centralizer as this is likely to distort the result.
One final case where it is difficult to determine the direction is that of a

measurement in a blast joint, possibly because of the large thickness of the joint.
MPDs
Some MPD-Hs have reportedly split after firing at temperatures greater than
350°F. The problem is caused by the thermal expansion rate of the polymer
compound used as potting for the large magnet. The MPD splits at the tungsten
carbide inserts. Nothing much can be done except examining MPDs used
in hot wells.
Old MPD-F/Hs had a problem of water leaks. This has been solved by a new
manufacturing process of arc-welding with gas shield replacing the previous
brazing technique. The old MPDs should be systematically replaced. The new
MPDs MPD-LB/MB/NB no longer have polymer pottings for the magnets and
have solid bodies (no welding or brazing that can leak inside).
3.3.6 RITE Maintenance

The RITE maintenance of the positioning devices are given in the following
pages along with assembly diagrams where required.
3.3.6.1 MPD-G/F/H
FIT 1
1. Take off magnetic keeper (1) and thread protectors (2, 3).
2. Clean tool.
3. Check O-rings (4). Replace if worn.
4. Tighten connector plug (5).
5. Check screw (6). When male contact is needed, replace screw (6) with
spring contact (H103229 for MPD-F/G/H and H334864 for MPD-LB/MB/NB).
FIT 2
1. Check continuity between connector plug (5) and screw (6). Multimeter
should read zero.
Private
2. Check insulation between connector plug (5) and housing. Multimeter should
read 20 MΩ.
FIT 3
1. Oil tool and lightly grease O-rings.

2. Install magnetic keeper (1) and thread protectors (2, 3).
3.3.6.2 SPD-AB
FIT 1
1. Take off thread protectors.

2. Clean tool.
3. Check O-rings (10) Replace if worn.
4. Tighten connector socket (2).
5. Check screw (16). When male contact is needed, replace screw (16) by
spring contact (17).
FIT 2
1. Check continuity between connector socket (2) and screw (16). Multimeter
should read zero.
2. Check insulation between connector socket (2) and housing. Multimeter
should read 20 MΩ.
FIT 3

3.3.6.3 SPD-F
FIT 1
1. Take off thread protectors.

2. Clean tool.
Private
3. Check O-rings (1). Replace if worn.

4. Tighten connector sleeve (66).
5. Check screw (63). When male contact is needed, replace screw (63) by
spring contact (59).
FIT 2
1. Check continuity between connector sleeve (66) and screw (63). Multimeter
should read zero.
2. Check insulation between connector sleeve (66) and housing. Multimeter
should read 20 MΩ.
FIT 3

3.3.7 Catalog Drawings & Parts Lists

MPD........................................See Catalog
SPD-AB.....................................See Catalog
SPD-B......................................See Catalog

Private
3.4 Adapters
This section provides general information on the various adapter heads
commonly used in perforation operations. Refer to the Adapters Maintenance
Manual (InTouch ID: 3016829) for detailed assembly and maintenance
information.
Table 3-4: Adapter Specifications
Component Assembly Lenqth Dia. (in.) Weight (lb) Temperature Pressure

Number (in.) (in air) (°F) (psi)
AH-38 H106437 3.36 1 11/16 2 350 20,000
AH-106 H259513 3.36 1 11/16 2 500 25,000
AH-59 H136215 4.28 1 11/16 2 350 20,000
EAH-B H239296 18.66 3-3/8 12 350 20,000
EAH-C H239790 18.66 3-3/8 12 350 20,000
Private
3.5 Heads
This section provides general information on the various heads commonly used
in perforation operations. Refer to the Heads Maintenance Manual (InTouch ID:
3012542) for detailed operational, assembly and maintenance information.
3.5.1 Hardware Description

The different options for perforating heads are given in Table 3-5 Equipment
Information (Heads) .
Table 3-5: Equipment Information (Heads)
Assembly Part OD (in.) Component Conductors Temperature Pressure

Number (° F) (psi)
MH-22 P030796 1-3/8 MH-22 Mono 350 20 kpsi
MH-29 P294174 1-3/8 MH-29 Mono 500 25 kpsi
PEH-E H108785 1-3/8 PEH-E Mono 350 20 kpsi
1
MH-32 H353673 1-11/16 MH-32 Mono 350 20 kpsi
AH-106 H259513 1-11/16 MH-29 + Mono 500 25 kpsi
AH106
AH-38 H106437 1-11/16 MH-22+AH-38 Mono 350 20 kpsi
1-11/16 PEH-E+AH-38 Mono 350 20 kpsi
PEK-E H123293 2-5/8 MH-22+PEK-E Mono 350 20 kpsi
2-5/8 PEH-E+PEK-E Mono 350 20 kpsi
PEK-BB H432221 3-3/8 MH-22+PEK-BB Mono 350 20 kpsi
3-3/8 PEH-E+PEK-BB Mono 350 20 kpsi
PEH-A H105313 3-3/8 PEH-A Ten 350 20 kpsi
Caution:Although any size tool/gun can be adapted to any size cable,
tools/guns 2-5/8 inches or larger should not be connected to 1-22 or smaller
cable.
Note: The PEK-BB replaces the PEK-B. It has a white high temperature
Teflon connector (instead of the black molded one in the PEK-B) and has a
temperature rating of 450°F.
1
Used in place of MH-22 (H030796) and AH-38 (H106437)
3.5.2 Operating Hints

Table 3-6 Female BCC Boots gives the recommended BCC boots for different
cables and wires.
Private
Table 3-6: Female BCC Boots
Boot Liner Plug

Wire Primary
Dummy
Diameter Kalrez Viton Vector Use
Seal
0.062-0.069 H231596 H318170 H400312 H222637 H400320 1-22ZT (Tef rem)
P274520 746P/NT 1-42NT,
7-46NT, 7-52NT
H142548 wire, 7-52NT
0.070-0.085 H245757 H318167 H400312 H245768 H400320 1-18P, 1-23ZT (Tef
P274521 rem), 2-23ZT, 2-22ZT,
7-39P/Z
0.085-0.093 H245757 H318167 H400313 H245764 H400320 H122757 hook up wire
P274521
0.094-0.110 H245758 H318168 H400313 H245765 H400320 1-22P/Z, 1-23P,

P274522 2-32P/ZT 7-46P/V,
7-52P/V
Common socket used is H115576 & common boot retainer used is H245716
Kalrez Recommended above 450°F [232°C] (expensive)

Viton Can be used up to 450°F [232°C] (cheap)
Vector Fluorel Recommended up to 450°F [232°C] (cheap)
Table 3-7: Male BCC Boots
Wire Boot Insulator Pin Dummy Seal

Diameter Kalrez Viton Contact Neoprene Vector
0.062-0.073 H245476 H318171 P274523 H245506 H115642 H141944 H40D325
0.093-0.105 H245477 H318172 P274524 H245414 H245505 H141944 H40D325
Wire Vector Fluorel Boot Insulator Pin Vector Assembly
Contact
0.058-0.083 H400310 None H400299 H400316
0.094-0.110 H245758 None H400299 H400317
Note
No insulator is used in the Vector assemblies. Optionally, instead of the pin
contact, pin H115642 and insulator H122037 can be used for conductor dia
in 0.058-0.073 in.
Private
3.6 WPSA
This section is only a basic description of the WPSA, for detailed information
refer to the:
• Maintenance Manual (InTouch ID: 3016410)
3.6.1 General Description and Specifications

3.6.1.1 Overview and Applications

The Wireline Perforating Shock Absorber (WPSA) is designed to protect
downhole equipment (PGGT*, UPCT, etc.) while perforating wells with wireline
conveyance. The shock associated with the detonation of large perforating
guns can damage sensitive instruments run with the string and can lead to a
premature parting of the wireline weakpoint. It is availible in two sizes:
• 3.38-in WPSA-A for gun systems 3.12-in daimeter and larger

• 1.69-in WPSA-B for gun systems 2.88-in daimeter and smaller
The WPSA enables wireline crews to successfully convey large gun strings;
which in the past were considered beyond their limits (due to perforating shock).
It is placed in the string directly above the top perforating gun. Perforating
shock energy generated from the explosive detonation or subsequent transient
pressure imbalances are absorbed by the WPSA. The tool absorbs bi-directional
energy, which can occur from either tensile or compressive forces acting on
the gun system.
Features and benefits
1. Protects the electronic instrumentation associated with downhole equipment.

2. The shock absorber reduces the weak point failures attributable to perforating
gun shock.
3. When used in conjunction with other best practices for perforating, it
enableds wireline crews to successfully convey large gun strings; which in
the past were considered beyond their limits (due to perforating shock).
4. Multiple descent operation can be accomplished in significantly less rig time
than other means of conveyance, without damaging downhole equipment.
Private
3.6.1.2 Combinability
WPSA-A
Corelation tools: CAL-B, PGGT, WOPT
Gun systems (3-1/8 and larger): HSD, PerfoExpress, PURE, HVO, etc.
WPSA-B
Corelation tools: CCL, PCCL, UPCT, WPP, WOPT

Gun systems (2-7/8 and smaller):
• HSD Version: HSD, PerfoExpress, PURE, HVO

• Wet Connect Version: Enerjet, Pivot gun, HVO, Hyperdome
3.6.1.3 Equipment and Operational Specifications

Table 3-8: WPSA-A Equipment and Operational Specifications
Part number T6015697

Outside diameter (in [mm]) 3.38 [86]
2.63 [67] (optional configuration)
Maximum temperature (degF [degC]) 400 [204]
Maximum pressure (psi [kPa]) 20,000 [137,895]
Weight (lbm [kg]) 83 [37.6]
Make-up length (in [cm]) 42 [106.7]
Maximum load below WPSA-A (lbf [N]) 3000 [13,345]
Initiation Automatic
Vertical make-up Recommended
Horizontal pick up 20 ft [6.1 m] maximum gun length
Connections 3.38-in mono;
UH pin, LH box (same as CAL-B)
Compatible w/ CAL-B, PGGT Yes, single thru-wire (< 5 ohm resistance)
Table 3-9: WPSA-B Equipment and Operational Specifications

1.75 [45] with outer sleeve
Private

Maximum pressure (psi) 20,000 [137,895]
Maximum load below WPSA-B (lbf [N]) X,XXX [XX,XXX]
Make-up length (in [cm])
HSD Version: 25.5 [64.7]
Wet Connect: 27.42 [69.6]
Optional flex adapter: 7.95 [20.2]
Weight (lbm [kg])
HSD Version: XX [X]
Wet Connect: XX [X]
Optional flex adapter: XX [X]

Initiation Automatic
Vertical make-up Recommended
Horizontal pick up XX ft maximum gun length
Compatible w/ CCL, UPCT Yes, single thru-wire (< 5 ohm resistance)
Connections 1.69-in mono
HSD Version: UH pin, LH box (CCL-L)
Wet Connect: UH box, LH pin (CCL-L lower head)
3.6.1.4 Downhole equipment

This section contains details of all major downhole hardware components
required to complete the service.
Private
WPSA-A
Cable head
CAL-B, PGGT, etc.

WPSA-AA
3.12 in or larger gun
Figure 3-5: Typical string configuration
• Correlation tool: CAL-B, PGGT, etc.

• WPSA-AA (T6015697)
• Gun system: 3.12 in or larger
Private
WPSA-B
Cable head
CCL-L, UPCT, etc.
CCL-L
lower head
AH-122
WPSA-BA
Flex adapter
(optional)
Wet Connect WPSA-BA to HSD

lower head lower head
Through Tubing guns 2.88 in. or smaller gun

Enerjet, Pivot Gun, etc.
Figure 3-6: WPSA-B String Configurations
• Correlation tool: CCL, UPCT, etc.

• WPSA-BA (T6040953)
– HSD version: Lower head (T6040969)

– Wet-connect version: Lower head (T6040957) and AH-122 (H341152)
• Optional flex adapter (T6052757): Optional flex adapter can be added

between the WPSA-B lower head and the WPSA-B element mandrel.
• Gun system: 2.88 in or smaller
3.6.1.5 Surface Equipment

This section contains details of all major surface hardware components required
to complete the service (modules, cables, SFTs, etc.).
Private
Table 3-10: WPSA surface equipment
Description Code Part Number

MAXIS Service Unit MAXIS K508401
with MCM
Wireline logging cable (Monocable)
Basic rig-up equipment
Basic surface pressure control equipment
M & S and accessories to perform tool FIT
Wellsite auxiliary hardware

3.6.1.6
WPSA-A
1. CAL-B
2. The 3.38-in wireline gun head is required to connect the gun string to the
bottom of the WPSA-A.
WPSA-B
1. CCL-L
2. The 2.50-in or smaler wireline gun head is required to connect the gun string
to the bottom of the WPSA-B.
Hollow carrier guns
The WPSA-B HSD version is used to connect to hollow carrier casing gun heads
(HSD, PerfoExpress, etc.).
Through-tubing guns
The WPSA-B wet connect version is used to connect to through-tubing or

exposed gun heads (Enerjet guns, Pivot guns, etc.).
3.6.1.7 Workshop auxiliary hardware

This section contains details of all auxiliary hardware components required at
the base to service and maintain the equipment (calibration setup, SFTs for
disassembly/assembly tools, etc.).
Private
WPSA-A
Table 3-11: WPSA-A Workshop Auxiliary Hardware
Part Number Description Notes

H701182 Fluid To Air Conn. 2
H334864 Hi-temp spring, 1
T6015684 Crushable element 1
H432222 Flared connector 2
H543675 Head insert wrench 1
H122757 Downhole wire 16 in
Table 3-12: WPSA-A Handling Equipment

H047988 Thread protector Upper wireline head thread
protector
H048186 Thread protector Lower wireline head thread
protector
WPSA-B
Table 3-13: WPSA-B Workshop Auxiliary Hardware

H701182 Fluid-to-air connector 2
H334864 Hi-temp spring 1
T6015684 Crushable element 1
T6041638 Snap ring (small), 0.70 1
T6041742 Snap ring (large), 1.22 1
H122757 Downhole wire 9 in
Table 3-14: WPSA-B Handling Equipment

HSD Version
H040730 Thread protector, 1-3/8-12 Lower head thread protector
H040731 Thread protector Element mandrel upper head
thread protector
Wet Connect Version
Private

H039331 Thread protector Lower head thread protector
H043975 Plug AH-122 upper thread protector
3.6.1.8 Test Equipment and Facilities

This section contains details of specific lab or test equipment or facilities required
at the workshop to test and repair the equipment.
Table 3-15: Test Equipment


T6005202 Digital Safety Multimeter (DSMM) Insulation and continuity checks
H622622 Analog Safety Multimeter (SFT Insulation and continuity checks
300)
1
7018534 Megohmeter Shop insulation check on wireline head
insert only
1
Use of a Megohmmeter or standard Simpson is not allowed inside the designated explosives loading area.
3.6.2 Theory of Operation
3.6.2.1 Basic physics of service

The WPSA is placed directly above the top perforating gun. The WPSA-A is
compatible with all wireline gun heads 3-3/8 in. and larger. The WPSA-B is
compatible with all wireline gun heads 2-7/8 in. and smaller.
The tool design incorporates an upper mandrel assembly and a lower assembly,
which move independently of each other. A crushable element placed between
these assemblies permanently deforms when subjected to any load. The
standard crushable element’s material composition and length enables it to
deform uniformly within safe limits of the cable-head weak point.
The crushable element is actively deformed during both compressive and

tensile loading of the gun string. The crushable element, deforms to absorb
and dissipate the transient forces generated during perforating. The WPSA
can be easily disassembled in the field when the disposable element needs
replacement. Typical element replacement frequency is one to four descents
depending on well conditions.
Private
Experience from the pilot series tool has shown that the crushable element
has ample energy absorbing capacity to be used on one to five large gun
descents before element replacement is required. The crushable element acts
as a sacrificial “energy absorbing” component. Damage to delicate electronic
downhole tool components and the cable-head weak point, which is a common
occurrence from perforating shock, will be seriously reduced or eliminated when
the WPSA is included in the perforating string.
The external housing of the tool has scribed marks for quick visual measurement
of the element’s remaining usable length. The WPSA design allows for simple
and efficient disassembly of the tool; which enables the crew to replace the
crushable element in a few minutes. They require a minimum amount of common
supplies and hand tools for disassembly. The element replacement procedure
can be performed at the wellsite.
In the event the gun string needs to be fished with pipe, drill-string weight 3-1
on the fish can be used to completely deform the shock absorber’s crushable
element. When the element is crushed, the upper and lower sections of
the WPSA can interlock by engaging a locking key assembly. The locking
mechanism enables right-hand torque to be transmitted below the tool. This
method of grapple engagement during fishing may be required to properly latch
the fishing head.
3-1. 5000 lb for WPSA-A and XXXX lb for WPSA-B.
Private
3.7 WPAT
This section is only a basic description of the WPAT, for detailed information
refer to the:

• Wellsite Reference Manual (InTouch ID: 3333396)

3.7.1.1 Principal applications

The Wireline Perforating Anchor Tool (WPAT) prevents upward or downward
movement of the gun string, relative to the tubing or casing, during perforating
operations. The WPAT was designed for extreme underbalance perforating.
Bidirectional displacement of the gun string in the tubing, is the result of a

sudden release of high energy. One source of high energy is the pressure pulse
generated by the detonation process. Another source is the high inflow from
the reservoir, which can begin immediately after perforating. The inflow can be
extremely high in cases where the reservoir contains high pressure with respect
to the pressure inside the tubing (underbalanced perforating).
The force created by the pressure differential between the bottom and top of the
gun string, as well as high-flow fluid drag, will cause the string to be significantly
displaced. This can result in a costly operation if the string gets tangled with the
wireline (cable) and becomes stuck. The string may also be lost in the well if the
weak-point in the cable head is broken.
The WPAT is conveyed on wireline in combination with a single perforating. It

has a selectable release time ranging from 5 to 40 min. With the ability to anchor
the gun string with respect to the perforating interval, several main applications
are realized:
1. The reduction of fish due to guns blowing up or downhole

2. The ability to perform perforation in underbalance conditions, to improve
cleanup
This is particularly beneficial to some clients as under balance perforating
reduces the skin in the perforated zone. Use of the anchor also enables the
client to flow the well during or directly after perforation without the above
gun displacement occurring.
Private
3. The ability to run memory gauges below the WPAT to monitor well pressure
and temperature prior to, during and after perforating
This data can be invaluable to determine cross-flow and depletion.

Table 3-16: WPAT-A Equipment and operational specifications

Size (in) 2.12 2.60
Slip section WPAS-AA (T6008347) WPAS-AC (T6008340)
Maximum extension of slips (in [mm]) 2.580 [66] 3.046 [77]

Make-Up length (in [cm]) 109.82 [278.9] 110 [279.4]
Overall length (in [cm]) 111.87 [284.1] 112 [284.5]
Weight (lb [kg]) 100 [45] 110 [50]
Casing size (in [cm])
ID 2.58 [6.55] 3.04 [7.72 cm]
OD 2.88 [7.30] 3.5 [8.89]
Minimum operating temperature (degF
[degC]) 100 [37]
Maximum operating temperature 400 [204] with Nobel detonator

(degF [degC]) 340 [171] with Secure detonator
Maximum working pressure (psi [kPa]) 10,000 [68,946]
Minimum operating pressure (psi
[kPa]) 1,000 [6,894]
H2S service No
Shock and vibration Downhole Perforating Equipment, Class 6
Fishing strength (lbf [kN]) 50,000 [222] (Slip housing T6015120)
Fishing strength (lbf [kN]) 8,000 [36] (Tension with slips in set position)
Table 3-17: WPAT-B Equipment and operational specifications
Part Number T6008356

OD (in [mm]) 3.38 [86]
Maximum extension of slips (in [mm]) 4.125 [105]
Make-Up length (in [cm]) 118.16 [300]
Overall length (in [cm]) 133.07 [338]
Weight (lbm [kg]) 250 [113]
Minimum operating temperature (degF
[degC]) 100 [37]
Private

ID 4.125 [10.5]
OD 4.50 [11.4]
Maximum operating temperature (degF 400 [204] with Nobel detonator

[degC]) 340 [171] with Secure detonator
Maximum working pressure (psi [kPa]) 10,000 [68,946]
Minimum operating pressure (psi [kPa]) 1,000 [6,894]
H2S service No
Shock and vibration Downhole Perforating Equipment, Class 6
Breaking strength (lbf) 80,000 [356] (Slip housing)

This tool comprises two main sections— the WPAP (Well-Pressure-Actuated
Power section) and the WPAS (Well-Pressure-Actuated slip section). These
sections can be further broken down to the following four major sections:
1. Activating section (WPAP)

This section provides the mechanism to activate the sequential process of
anchoring. Mainly, it includes the gun adapter, the upper head, and the
arming adapter.
2. Power and metering section (WPAP)
This section provides a means to transfer the well pressure to a useful power
source for anchoring and a time-delay process to shut down the power and
stop anchoring. Mainly, it includes the power piston housing and the power
piston.
3. Actuating section (WPAP)
This section transforms pressure into a force to actuate the anchor and
retract the anchor with a retraction spring. Mainly, it includes the retraction
spring adapter, the retraction spring housing, the piston rod actuator, and
the actuation housing.
4. Anchoring section (WPAS)
This section converts longitudinal force to radial force by the wedge-slip
mechanism. It mainly includes the upper threaded-ring wedge adapter, the
slip housing, the lower threaded-ring wedge adapter, the weight adapter with
sucker rod threads, and the bottom nose.
Private
Upper wireline head
2.00, 2.25 or 2.50-in gun
Adapter with Twist-Lok

connection
WPAP-AA WPAP-AB
2.12-in Well Activated 2.12-in Nitrogen Activated
Power Section Power Section
WPAS-AA WPAS-AC
2.12-in Slip Section 2.60-in Slip Section
Figure 3-7: WPAT-A Configurations
Private
Upper wireline head
2.88-, 3.12- or 3.38-in gun

Twist-Lock Adapter
WPAP-BA WPAP-BB
3.38-in Well Activated 3.38-in Nitrogen Activated
Power Section
Power Section
Not Available
WPAS-AA WPAS-AB
3.38-in Slip Section 4.00-in. Slip Section
Not Available
Figure 3-8: WPAT-B Configurations
Private
3.7.1.4 Explosives
Table 3-18: Detonators
Part Number Description Temperature Rating (°F [°C])

1
T6005040 Secure detonator 340 [171]
P448696 Nobel detonator 350 [177]
Standard wireline detonators can be used with the gun. Refer to OneCAT catalog
(InTouch ID: 4030670)
for explosive listing.
1
RF safe, must be used in with deto-cord assembly (100176487 or T6008341).
Table 3-19: Deto-Cord Assembly

H447381 HMX booster Two required
H448369 Detonating cord 60 gr/ft HMX, low shrink 3.70 in
3.7.1.5 Selectivity
Table 3-20: Selective Switches and Dual Diode
Part Temperature Pressure

Description Notes
Number Rating Rating
P247856 Dual diode plug 400°F (205°C) 20,000 psi
H432064 (137,895 kPa)
100048404 High voltage 340°F (171°C) 15,000 psi Not tested, contact
addressable (103,421 kPa) SRC InTouch
switch 1 before using.
1
High voltage addressable switch for use with Secure detonator.
3.7.1.6 Wellsite auxiliary equipment
WPAT-AA
The Upper Selective Adapter is required to connect the WPAT-A upper head to
the gun.
• 2.00-in upper selective adapter (T6008026)

• 2.25-in crossover adapter (T6008352)
• 2.50-in crossover adapter (T6008353)
Private
WPAT-BA
The Twist-lock adapter is required to connect the WPAT-B selective adapter to

the gun.
• 2-88-in HSD Twist-lock adapter (100099212)

• 3.38-in HSD Twist-lock adapter (H421732)
3.7.1.7 Workshop Auxiliary Equipment

Table 3-21: Orifice Options
H608370 ORIFICE K FACTOR 0.4 - 0.6 HDF

Table 3-22: Special tools and equipment
Part Description Notes

Number
H543675 Head insert wrench Installing head insert in wireline head
3/8-in. Hex driver Installing wireline head port plug
B013591 Adjustable face spanner Installing adapter port plugs
wrench
Adjustable wrench WPAT assembly and disassembly
B040459 3/8-16 SST threaded rod 0.3125-in threaded rod for aligning dovetails
during redress (18-in SST)
B040534 5/16-18 reg hex nut 0.3125-in hex nut for threaded rod
B029754 1000 centistokes silicone oil Silicone oil used to lubricate WPAT and fill power
DC-200 piston housing
100131678 High temp heavy duty Thread locking compound
grease
Private

Number
100174215 CRC SP-350 corrosion Corrosion inhibitor for internal parts, used when
inhibitor storing WPAT
100174224 CRC SP-400 corrosion Corrosion inhibitor for exterior parts, used when
inhibitor storing WPAT
Table 3-23: WPAT-A Redress Kits

T6008236 2.125 WPAT redress kit 2.12-in WPAT-A power section redress kit.
T6008237 2.12 slip spare parts kit 2.12-in WPAT-A anchor (slip) section redress kit.
T6008662 2.6 slip spare parts kit 2.60-in WPAT-A anchor (slip) section redress kit.
Table 3-24: WPAT-B Redress Kits

100104158 3.38 WPAT redress kit 3.38-in WPAT-B power section redress kit.
100104162 3.38 slip section spare 3.38-in WPAT-B anchor (slip) section redress kit.
parts kit
Table 3-25: WPAT-A Handling Equipment

T6008041 2.00 twist-lock handling Handling plug for WPAT-A upper head
plug (T6008225)
T6008351 2.12 male handling plug Handling plug for WPAT-A actuator housing
(T6015134)
T6008292 2.12 handling cap Handling cap for WPAT-A anchor (slip) sections
Table 3-26: WPAT-B Handling Equipment

T6008354 3.38 male handling plug Handling plug for WPAT-B actuator housing
(T6015134)
H421160 3.38 handling cap Handling plug for 3.38-in twist-lock adapter
(H421735)
H421110 2.88 handling cap Handling plug for 2.88-in twist-lock adapter
(100099212)
T6008355 3.3/8 female handling cap Handling cap for WPAT-B anchor (slip) section
100123960 WPAT-BA handling cap Handling cap
Private
Table 3-27: Wiring Equipment

E038546 Shooting wire 24 AWG solid 250 V Teflon conductor wire, white
and black twisted pair
E035146 Scotchlok connector, Wiring guns ≤280 degF, wire connector
two-way
three-way
E017372 Splice connector Wiring guns >280 degF, wire connector
B025273 Scotchlok crimping pliers Scotchlok connector crimping tool

Hazard Category: electrical, explosives
Use Scotchlok connectors for temperatures up to 280 degF [138degC]. For

temperatures over 280 degF [138 degC] use twisted wire and splice connector.
Table 3-28: Arming Equipment

H041901 Safety loading tube Arming Detonator
H432334 Deto cord cutter
H432091 Crimping pliers Crimping detonator and booster
3.7.1.8 Test Equipment


300)
1
insert only
1
Private
3.7.2 Theory of Operations
3.7.2.1 Basic Physics of Service

This section contains a basic level review of the physical principles of the
techniques used in the service or equipment.
Tool Description
The WPAT (well pressure activated version) uses well pressure as the energy
source to set the anchor. The tool is connected to the bottom of a perforating
gun and is designed to be used in a single gun run with a single setting. The
anchor is activated by an electrical signal sent through the wireline cable which
initiates the time-delay process. While the anchor is set, it will prevent any
movement of the toolstring. When the predetermined time delay is reached, the
anchor will automatically retract and release itself from the wellbore. The anchor
can then be retrieved.
Another important feature is that the tool contains only one part, the orifice, that
needs to be changed to achieve a wide range of time delays for anchoring. The
time-delay range can vary from 0.1 to 30 min.
Nomenclature
This tool consists of the following four major sections:
• Activating Section - This section provides the mechanism to activate the

sequential operating process of the anchor. It includes the Selective Adapter
(or Upper Head) and Arming Adapter.
• Power and Metering Section - This section provides the means to transfer
the well pressure to a useful power source for the anchor and a time-delay
process to shut down the power and release the anchor. It includes the
Power Piston Housing and Power Piston.
• Actuating Section - This section transforms the well pressure into a force
to actuate and retract the anchor with a retraction spring. It includes the
Retraction Spring Adapter, Retraction Spring Housing, Piston Rod Actuato
and Actuation Housing.
Private
• Anchoring Section - This section converts the longitudinal force to a radial

force by the wedge-slip mechanism. It includes the Upper Threaded Ring
Wedge Adapter, Slip Housing, Lower Threaded Ring Wedge Adapter, Weight
Adapter with Sucker Rod threads and Bottom Nose.
3.7.2.2 Advanced Physics of Service

This section contains a detailed (advanced level) review of physical principles
of the techniques used in the service or equipment.
Sequence of Operations
Refer to Figure 3-9 WPAT Principle of Operation.
The sequence of the operation for the WPAT is as follows:
1. Activation - The detonator is fired to break the Release Bolt. From this point
the Piston is free to move inside of the Power Piston Housing.
2. Setting - Well pressure pushes on the Power Piston, which forces the
Silicone Oil into the Actuating Section which causes the Retraction Spring
Housing, Actuator Housing and Slip Housing to move upward. This forces
the slips up the Wedges causing them to move outward and contact the
tubing (or casing).
3. Metering - When the Silicone Oil is under pressure (from well pressure),
it starts to flow through the HDF Orifice into the atmospheric air chamber,
which is the air space between the two sets of seals on the Piston.
4. Retraction - At the end of the metering, when all the Silicone Oil is in the air
chamber, at this point pressure is remove from the Actuating Section and the
Retraction Spring will provide the force to retract the slips back into the tool
and detach the tool from the tubing.
Private
Head, Upper
Dual Diode
Housing, Releasing Bolt
Deto, Nobel
Nut, Release Bolt
Housing, Power Piston
Air Chamber
Piston, Power
Orifice
Oil
Adapter, Retraction Spring

Green parts are stationary
all the time, while Blue parts
Housing, Retraction Spring will move up to push the slips
Spring, Retraction out when the anchor is set.
Housing, Actuation
Adapter, Upper Wedge
Wedge, Upper
Housing, Slips
Slips (3)
Wedge, Lower
Adapter, Lower Wedge
Nut, Retainer
Nose, Bottom
Figure 3-9: WPAT Principle of Operation
Private
Functions and Operations of the Anchor
Multimedia 3-1: WPAT Operations

NOTE: Multimedia is currently available only in HTML publications.
This tool is connected to the bottom of a perforating gun by the Twist-Lock Gun
Adapter and the Upper Head of the Activating section. Before activating the tool,
the Power Piston is fixed in position by Retaining Nut through the Release Bolt.
Inside the Release Bolt, the Detonator is electrically connected to the wireline
cable through the Dual Diode Plug.
When the tool reaches the desired depth for anchoring, an electrical signal
(positive) will fire the Detonator to break the Release Bolt. Once the Release Bolt
is broken, the Power Piston is free to move inside the bore of the Power Piston
Housing. Thus activating the WPAT is just like firing a lower gun selectively.
In the Power and Metering Section, the well pressure can reach the upper end
of the Power Piston through the four 0.340-in. diameter holes on the upper
end of the Power Piston Housing. The lower end of the Power Piston is filled
with Silicone Oil. The middle of the Power Piston contains an atmospheric air
chamber.
When the tool is activated (the Release Bolt is broken by firing of the detonator),
the well pressure pushes the Power Piston downward which in turn applies
pressure against the Silicone Oil. Thus, the piston separates the well fluid from
the oil, while transmitting the power of the well pressure to the oil.
Before the activation of the tool, two O-rings on the upper side of the Power
Piston seal off the Arming Adapter from downhole environment and the Release
Bolt is isolated from the downhole fluid. After the activation, the Power Piston
moves down and the O-rings clear the bore and the downhole fluid will run
into the Arming Adapter. The dual diode plug provides a seal to prevent the
downhole fluid from entering the gun string.
At the bottom of the Power Piston is an HDF Orifice. The function of the orifice is
to meter the flow of Silicone Oil into an atmospheric air chamber, thus creating
the duration of the time-delay.
The “K factor” of the orifice is available in a wide range of values from 0.4 to 2.8
(the larger the K value, the longer the time delay). Note that the time delay is a
function of pressure and temperature and K-factor.
Private
Example
At 10,000 psi and 400°F, the time delay has a range from 0.1 min (K = 0.4) to
30 min (K= 2.8). At 1,000 psi and 200°F, the time delay has a range from 9 min
(K = 0.4) to 22 hr (K = 2.8).
As the well pressure forces the Silicone Oil to flow through the orifice and into
the atmospheric air chamber, the Power Piston moves toward the bottom of the
Power Piston Housing. Therfore, selecting the proper orifice will provide the
desired duration (time delay) for the piston to reach the end of its travel.
When the piston reaches the end of the housing, the seals on the lower end
of the Power Piston will clear the recess on the bore and enable the oil to be
dumped into the atmospheric air chamber completely and quickly. This design
allows automatic retraction of the anchor without a control signal. It also achieves
a fast retraction of the anchor at the end of time delay by providing a direct
passage for the oil to escape instead of just metering oil through the orifice. An
audible knock will be heard when the Power Piston strikes the Retraction Spring
Adapter at the end of its stroke.
In the Actuating Section, during the metering period, the oil transmits pressure
from the Power Piston into the Piston Rod Actuator and the Retraction Spring
Housing. The force on the oil in this area will push the Retraction Spring Housing,
the Actuating Housing and every part below it upward. This force will overcome
the force of Retraction Spring because there is only atmospheric air pressure in
the spring chamber. It is essential to maintain the seal of this air chamber and
make the area between the shaft of Piston Rod and the ID of the Retraction
Spring Housing the same as area between the shaft of Piston Rod and the ID of
the Actuating Housing. At the end of the metering period, the Retraction Spring
will force the Actuating Housing to move downward and push the oil back into
the atmospheric air chamber.
In the Anchoring Section, the Slip Housing, the Lower Wedge Adapter and
Weight Adapter are connected to the Upper Wedge Adapter and move with the
Actuating Housing and Retract Spring Housing. The Upper Wedge is connected
to the Piston Rod and is stationary all the time during the setting and unsetting
of the anchor. Therefore, when the tool is actuated and the Actuating Housing
moves upward, the Lower Wedge moves upward toward the Upper Wedge and
pushes the slips outward to contact the inside of the tubing. The swivel slips are
designed with teeth that bite into tubing to prevent relative movement between
tool and tubing. The slips are swivel slips and, by design, swivel from end-to-end
along the axis of the tool.
Private
At the end of the metering period when the tool is deactivated, the Retraction
Spring pushes the Actuating Housing and Lower Wedge downward. This
separates the Lower Wedge from the Upper Wedge and retracts the slips back
into the Slip Housing. At this time, the tool is released from the wellbore and
ready to be retrieved.
Private
3.8 POT-C
This section is only a basic description of the POT-C, for detailed information
refer to the:

• Wellsite Reference Manual (InTouch ID: 3333404)
3.8.1 Description
3.8.1.1 Introduction
The Powered Orienting Tool (POT) is designed to allow oriented perforating in
multiple string completions. An electromagnetic measurement will, in many
situations, permit the operator to establish the orientation of the gun-string
relative to other pipe(s) in the hole. The gun is rotated downhole and stopped in
the desired orientation.
The POT-CA is a replacement for the POT-B. The advantage of the POT-CA over
the POT-B is that the POT-CA uses electromagnetism to detect the presence of
adjacent tubing strings rather than a downhole radioactive source. In addition,
the POT-CA has increased temperature and pressure operating capabilities.
The torque output of the motor has also been increased. This toolstring is not
combinable with other tools.
Testing at SRC indicates that, as a general guideline, the POT-CA detection

circuitry can reliably detect two other tubing strings when not in casing, and
one other tubing string when in casing.
Table 3-30: POT-CA Specifications
Part number H546100

OD (in [mm]) 1.69 [43]
Operating temperature (degF [degC]) 350 [177]
Working pressure (psi [kPa]) 15,000 [103,421]
Head PEH-E and AH-38
Collar locator CCL-LB
Centralizer CME-BA
Shock absorber POSA-AA
Maximum gun length 20 ft of 2.12-in EJ or SCG
Private
Tool configuration
The POT-CA toolstring consists of the following:
• PEH-E and AH-38 – This or another combination, connects the wireline to

the monocable tools below.
• CCL-LB – Detects collars for depth control. Contains a four-diode circuit
board.
• CME-BA – Resists the torque of the POT-CA motor to prevent twisting
wireline.
• POT-CA – Rotates the perforating guns and detects the presence and
direction of adjacent tubing strings.
• POSA-AA – Absorbs the shock of detonating guns. Protects thte POT-CA
cartridge.
• POGS-AA – Used to vary the spacing from the detector in the POT-CA to
the top shot.
Figure 3-10 System Components illustrates a complete POT-CA toolstring. The

CCL-LB is a modification of the CCL-LA in which a four-diode circuit board
is substituted for the zener diode. This does not impair the collar locator’s
functionality when used in non-POT-CA jobs. The CME-BA is a monocable
version of the CME-AC. Its use is necessary to resist the torque of the POT-CA
and prevent twisting the cable while rotating the guns downhole. The POSA-AA
is used to protect the POT-CA electronics from damage due to the shock of
detonating perforating guns. It is a modification of the tool saver (used with the
PGGT) so it will transmit torque. The POGS-AA may be necessary to vary the
spacing between the Detector Coil and the top shot.
Private
SRC-Wireline\SRC-Wireline\InTouch ID 3013565\3.1\Release Date:10-Jun-2004\EDMS UID: 274896043\Produced: 13-Jul-2006 20:55:42 3-58 WL FOM / Perforating Accessories 3-58
Figure 3-10: System Components
3.8.1.2 General Theory and Applications

The downhole portion of the tool, the POT-CA, consists of three major
components. They are the Motor Section, the Detection Section (Signal
Processing) and the Gun Firing Section.
The uphole portion is comprised of the POTM-AA, a CSU double wide module.
The Module face is equipped with analog Volt and Amp meters which display
both logging and shooting voltage and current and a Proximity meter which
indicates relative proximity. In addition, the module has panel lights for monitoring
Log or Shoot mode and tool rotation.
The Motor Section is composed of a DC Motor, Drive Shaft coupler with an eight
(8) lobe cam and a Micro switch for detecting tool rotation. The Motor runs on
positive 60V DC and approximately 100 mA current. The Motor rotates at about
one revolution per minute and is capable of producing about 200 in.-lb of torque.
This torque is capable of rotating a 20 ft 2-1/8 in. Enerjet gun, along with
the cartridge section of the tool. The system is ruggedised to withstand the
detonation of the guns. Shear Pins between the Motor and the Drive Shaft
Private
protect the Motor Assembly from damage in case the tool becomes wedged.
This would also protect the tool from damage in the case of improper assembly
(putting pipe wrenches on either side of the Motor Section during tool assembly).
The Detector Section is discussed in the Theory of Operations chapter and the
Motor Section is discussed in the Circuit Description chapter.
The response of the tool is discussed in detail in the Theory of Operations

chapter. As a general guideline, the quality of the result is likely to deteriorate in
the following situations:
• Damaged or badly corroded pipe.

• Perforated pipe (tool will place new perforations in old perforations).

• Collars opposite the coil section (external collars are not a problem).
• Casing patches.
• Splits.
• Pipe too far apart from each other.
If it is determined that the Coil Array will be within 2 or 3 ft of a collar at time of

perforating, a spacer needs to be inserted. A weight (POGS) placed between the
gun and tool will be sufficient.
Figure 3-11 POT-CA in Dual String illustrates a Dual String Completion.
Private
Figure 3-11: POT-CA in Dual String
Figure 3-12 Module Front Plate illustrates POTM-AA Front Panel.
Private
Figure 3-12: Module Front Plate
Private
3.8.1.3 CCL-LB Collar Locator
Description
The CCL-LB is basically the same as the old CCL-LA collar locator except that
the old zener diode has been replaced by a conventional four-diode bridge. This
change was needed because of the power requirements and data transmission
of the POT-CA.
The CCL-LB can be used in any applications where the CCL-LA was formerly
used. The modification consists of cutting a window in the Housing Top (old part
number H123383, new part number after modification H546192) after removing
the old zener diode. The new four-diode circuit board (H546210) and insulating
pad (H546202) are then attached to the modified Housing Top and wired
according to the schematic shown on the assembly drawing (H546103).
Table 3-31: CCL-LB Collar Locator Specifications
Make-up Length 18 in.

Overall Length 20.65 in.
Length with Thread Protectors 23.2 in.
Diameter 1.69 in.
Weight 12 lb
Pressure Rating 15,000 psi
Temperature Rating 350°F
Private
Figure 3-13: CCL-LB Collar Locator
Private
3.8.1.4 CME-BA Centralizer
Description
The CME-BA is a monocable version of the CME-AC. The Centralizer Core

(H546105) and head components have been changed so it will attach directly
between the CCL-LB and POT-CA without the need for adapters.
The main functions of the CME-BA is to resist the torque of the motor in
the POT-CA to prevent twisting the cable. For this reason, the Upper Collar
Assembly (H546197) is keyed to the Centralizer Core so they will not rotate with
respect to each other. Special Rollers are provided in .535, .575 and .615 in.
diameters to grip the inside of tubing. Various diameters, configurations, and
materials can be had for these Rollers upon request.
Tests at SRC with new Rollers indicate that the .535 diameter Rollers (H546108)
will resist 60 in.-lb static and 54 in.-lb dynamic torque in 2-7/8 EU N80 tubing.
The .615 diameter Rollers (H546109) will resist 90 in.-lb static and 66 in.-lb
dynamic torque in the same tubing. Other Roller designs have been tested at
108 in.-lb static and 72 in.-lb dynamic torque.
In the same 2-7/8 EU N80 tubing, tests were run to determine the torque
necessary to rotate various guns. For 20 ft of 2-1/8 Enerjet gun with Rollover
Sleeves (including Upper Head, Bottom Nose, 89 charges, and 20 Rollover
Sleeves) a maximum torque of 24 in.-lb was required. The same gun without
the Rollover Sleeves required a maximum torque of 36 in.-lb. For 20 ft of 2-1/8
scalloped gun, 48 in-lb was the maximum torque required. The above tests were
performed with the tubing lying horizontal.
The Rollers are made of tool steel. They should last several jobs depending
on the depth to which they are run. For maximum benefit, inspect the Rollers
before each run and replace them if dull. This maintenance requires only a few
minutes and a small flat-blade screwdriver.
The CME-BA is inverted in the POT-AA tool string unlike the conventional CME.
Table 3-32: CME-BA Centralizer Specifications
Makeup Length 48.4 in.

Overall Length 51.1 in.
Length with Thread Protectors 53 in.
Diameter Min. 1.7 in.
Max. 12 in.
Private
Weight 20 lb
Figure 3-14: CME-BA Centralizer
Private
3.8.1.5 POSA-AA Powered Orienting Shock Absorber
Description
The POSA-AA Flex Hose (H546203), Upper Shock Head (H546113), and Lower
Shock Head (H546114) have been specifically designed so the POSA-AA
transmits torque from the POT-CA to the perforating guns, as well as protects
the POT-CA from shock. For this reason no other shock absorber should be
substituted.
The function of the POSA-AA is to protect the POT-CA from the shock generated
when the perforating guns are detonated. Tests at SRC with 20 ft of 2-1/8 Enerjet
and scalloped guns indicate that the POSA-AA will successfully perform its task.
Extensive field testing under varied conditions is required, however, before this
evaluation is complete.
It is recommended the Flex Hose be visually inspected for broken strands or

fraying of the jacket or broken welds between each job.
Table 3-33: POS-AA Powered Orienting Shock Absorber Specifications
Make-up Length 22.25 in.

Overall Length 25 in.
Diameter 1.7 in.
Weight 20 lb
Private
Figure 3-15: POS-AA Powered Orienting Shock Absorber
Private
3.8.1.6 POGS-AA Powered Orienting Gun Spacer
Description
The POGS-AA is used to vary the spacing from the Detector Coil (H546220) in
the POT-CA to the top shot. This may be necessary at times when the desired
top shot depth places the Detector Coil in a collar. The collar can distort the
magnetic field produced by the POT-CA, making orientation difficult.
The POGS-AA is installed between the POSA-AA (Tool Saver) and the top gun.
It adds 36 in. to the tool string. More than one POGS-AA may be added to
the string if necessary.
Table 3-34: POGS-AA Powered Orienting Gun Spacer Specifications
Make-up Length 36 in.

Overall Length 38 in.
Diameter 1.7 in.
Weight 25 lb
Private
Figure 3-16: POGS-AA Powered Orienting Gun Spacer
Private
3.8.2.1 Description
The POT-CA is designed to permit directing the shots from a perforating gun
relative to a mass of metal detected downhole. In multiple string completions it
may be necessary to perforate in the presence of another string or strings, and
the gun must be oriented to avoid perforating the other string(s).
As the cartridge (and gun) are rotated downhole, the electromagnetic metal
detector generates a metal proximity profile. When the relative direction of the
other string(s) of tubing is determined, the gun is rotated so the charges are
pointed away from the other string(s).
Tests at SRC indicate that the POT-CA is capable of orienting with respect to
one other string of tubing while in casing and two other strings of tubing in a
casingless completion (total of two and three tubing strings respectively).
A maximum gun length of 20 ft is recommended due to the tendency of multiple

strings of tubing to intertwine downhole. With longer guns the top shot could be
oriented correctly but the bottom shot could be directed toward another string
of tubing.
Figure 3-17 POT-CA in Dual String illustrates a typical configuration where the
system is used in a Dual Completion with an outer protective casing string. The
gun is positioned along the side of the lower string, and it is necessary to avoid
perforating the lower string.
Also illustrated is an example of the general shape of the Proximity response

over a complete revolution. In the over simplified example the response
approaches sine wave shape. In actual examples the response will not be
that simple. However, we must be able to identify the points of maximum and
minimum response without any ambiguity.
Private
Figure 3-17: POT-CA in Dual String
Figure 3-18 Shop Example illustrates a shop example where the tool was
positioned in a 2-7/8 in. tubing string and another identical length of tubing
was placed 2.0 in. away. It is highly recommended that, whenever possible, a
simulation shop test be conducted using sample pieces of the tubing and casing
contained in the well to be perforated. Keep the location of the tool in mind
as well.
Private
Figure 3-18: Shop Example
3.8.2.2 Types of Completions
Casingless Completions
In this configuration, as shown in Figure 3-19 Casingless Completion, there is no

outer or protective casing string. A number of tubing/casing strings are cemented
directly. This type of completion is very common in the United States.
Private
Figure 3-19: Casingless Completion

Testing at SRC indicates that the POT-CA detection circuitry can reliably detect
up to two additional pipe strings (POT-CA inside the third) in an interval without
casing. This is often a simpler measurement - due to the absence of an outer
casing string.
Cased Completions
In the cased completion configuration (see Figure 3-20 Cased Completion) the
tubing strings are inside an outer casing string which is cemented. The tubing
strings are normally positioned by tubing hanger and downhole packers.
Figure 3-20: Cased Completion
Tool response in this configuration is more difficult to determine, and depends

on the position of the tool, the position of the other string(s), the weight of the
casing, and the quality of the tubing/casing strings.
Two of the major factors that can alter or influence the behavior of the system are:
• the position or location of the tool in the downhole configuration, and

• the relative mass or metal bulk surrounding the tool.
Private
Figure 3-21 Casingless Completion with Heavy Strings illustrates an example of

the type of scenario that we must understand in order to interpret the response
of the system. This is an example of a casingless completion with two heavy
strings which are far apart.
Figure 3-21: Casingless Completion with Heavy Strings
In this example, where the tool is centralized, the maximum reading is obtained
when the tool is pointing towards the other string (the small arrow). The rotation
would be stopped at this point and the gun will perforate in the opposite direction
(the direction of the heavy arrow), which is the result that we want to achieve.
In Figure 3-22 Excentered Positioning (unacceptable), the tool is excentered,

the system response is predominantly influenced by the excentered position of
the tool. In this example, the perforations would miss the other string, but this is
not an acceptable outcome.
Figure 3-22: Excentered Positioning (unacceptable)
In Figure 3-23 Excentered Positioning (acceptable), the tool is excentered in

such a way that we would perforate the other string. This example illustrates the
need for a thorough understanding of the measurement process and the need
for centralization.
Private
Figure 3-23: Excentered Positioning (acceptable)

In a completion with outer casing, opposite results can be seen if the casing is
considerably heavier (thick wall) than the tubing. Such is the case with 2-3/8
in. tubing inside 7 in., 23 lb/ft casing versus the same tubing inside 9 in., 40
lb/ft casing.
3.8.2.3 Detector System

See Figure 3-24 Coil Array.
The Detector Section contains three different coils. They are the Exciter Coil, the
Reference Coil, and the Detector Coil.
The Exciter Coil is driven by 90V DC at 40 Hz with 180 mA current. The Exciter
Coil is a bifilar wound inductor (two windings in parallel) with each coil’s polarity
180° from the other. When the inductor is toggled between its two windings by
the electronic switching circuit, an AC magnetic field results.
The Exciter coil establishes a magnetic field around the casing as shown in the
Figure 3-24 Coil Array. This magnetic field is then distorted by the metal mass
due to the surrounding tubing and/or casing strings.
The distorted magnetic field is received by both the Reference and Detector
Coils. For discussion in this manual, these coils will be referred to as the
Detector Coil Array. These Coils are located in the lower section of the tool and
are at 90° angles to each other. The ratio of these two signals is taken and this
is compared to the reference signal.
The phase shift and amplitude changes of these signals are established and are
transmitted to a processing circuit. That circuit converts these changes into a
frequency modulated pulse output. As the tool rotates, the greater the external
metal mass which comes in close proximity to the focused detector coil array, the
higher the frequency. This output is driven on line to the POTM-AA up hole.
Private
The resulting CSU monitor (and film) display will be a sinusoidal curve, the right
edge representing higher frequency or close proximity to greater metal mass.
For discussion in this manual, this edge will be referred to as the high side.
3.8.2.4 Module
The POTM-AA is a double-wide CSU tool module for use in the TIU. The module
is designed to detect casing collars, detect tool rotation, indicate metal proximity,
and apply negative only current to fire a detonator. The module can serve
“stand alone” to power the POT-CA for bench testing by a qualified Electronic
Technician. There is a DC power supply in the POTM-AA so the POT-CA may be
tested on the bench without the benefit of a CSU. This allows easy functional
testing of the POT-CA’s rotation and metal detection circuits. The shooting
function is disabled in this mode. A fused power cord receptacle and switch are
located in the back of the module for the convenience of bench testing.
The POTM-AA contains much of the same signal processing circuitry as found in
the SMM module. For detecting casing collars the standard CSU casing collar
processing circuitry is used. All of the POT-CA (CCL, Rotation and Proximity)
signals can be displayed by the CRT of the OMU and recorded on film.
Tool rotation is shown on the module front panel by a blinking amber LED labeled
“Rotation”. This LED will continue blinking as long as the microswitch in the
POT-CA is actuated periodically by shaft rotation. If the LED burns continuously,
it is an indication the tool is not rotating.
Private
The proximity of metal to the window of the detector coil array in the POT-CA
is indicated by an analog meter labeled “Proximity” on the module front panel.
As the greater mass of metal gets closer to or farther from the window of the
detector coil array, the meter pointer will reflect proximity by changing position.
Meter zero and span may be adjusted from the front panel as required. Proximity
is also indicated on the CSU OMU screen and raw counts are displayed on
the status register of the CSU.
Activation of the firing circuit is by pressing and holding the “Shoot” button on
the front panel and simultaneously turning up the DC Main Variac on the CSU
after all the software interlocks are satisfied. See Surface System (CSU/POTM)
DC. Voltage Control (Figure 3-25 Surface System (CSU/POTM) DC Voltage
Control). Each box with a switch symbol in it is a software interlock and must be
functionally closed in order for K2 to energize and reverse the tool power polarity
in order to shoot a gun. When all safety conditions are satisfied and the shoot
button is pressed, the RED LED next to the shoot button will light and blink
indicating it is now possible to shoot the gun. When the 10 second software timer
times out or an unsafe condition occurs, the RED LED will extinguish. A more
detailed description of the POTM-AA can be found in the Description chapter.
Private
Figure 3-25: Surface System (CSU/POTM) DC Voltage Control
Private
3.9 WOPT
This section is only a basic description of the WOPT, for detailed information
refer to the:
• InTouch Reference Page (InTouch ID: 3285530)

This section gives an overview of the tool and describes the equipment and
operational specifications, measurement specifications, surface equipment,

downhole equipment, wellsite and workshop auxiliary hardware, and test
equipment and facilities.

The Wireline Oriented Perforating Tool (WOPT) was developed to allow
wireline-conveyed, azimuth-oriented perforating in vertical or near-vertical wells.
This system is utilized to perforate the PFP (Preferential Fracture Plane) to
improve hydraulic fracture treatments as well as for sand prevention in weak
but consolidated formations. PFP direction must be known prior to perforating.
Various open-hole tools and methods are currently used to determine PFP
direction, including:
• Borehole Ovality Logs (BOL) using the four-arm caliper tool

• Dipole Sonic Imager (DSI*), particularly for the Sand-Prevention application
• Ultra-Sonic Borehole Imager (UBI*)
• Vertical Seismic Profile (VSP)
• Formation Micro-Imager (FMI*)
• Flow test
The WOPT is based on the simple principle that the path of travel of a toolstring
within any section of a given well is very repeatable as long as all conditions
are kept reasonably constant, especially the direction of travel. This “natural
orientation” method requires two trips in the well. The first trip is with an unarmed
gun and a gyroscope (provided that there is no prior gyroscope data for the well
and there is little well deviation, less than 5°) to determine the natural orientation
of the gun string. The second trip is made with the gyroscope removed from the
tool string and the gun armed and “indexed” in the desired direction.
Private
There are numerous applications for oriented perforating. The following is a

summary of the different categories.
1. Azimuth-Oriented:
• Perforate the PFP for improving hydraulic fracture treatments and sand
prevention
• Oriented core sampling (CST*) for rock analysis and verification
• Increase shot density with good phasing
• Directional cement squeeze jobs
• Improve near-wellbore tortuousity for natural completions (Maraven
request)
• Set shipstocks
• Perforate adjacent well (from relief well) for well control
2. Relative Bearing Oriented:
• Shoot high-side/low-side of well
Tool configuration
The WOPT toolstring is composed of the following:
• Cable head
• Swivel adapter - The swivel adapter head (SAH) allows the WOPT to rotate
to its natural orientation and maintain electrical continuity.
• Inclinometer tool - The WPIT allows detects collars and the relative bearing
of the toolstring.
• Gyro carrier - The gyro carrier is used to hold the gyroscope and provides
communication from the WPIT to the gyroscope.
• Weighted Spring Positioning Device (WSPD) - The upper WSPD provides
bias gravity force and spring force to decentralize and prevent rotation of the
toolstring. It also provides electrical continuity to the guns.
• Orienting adapter (indexing sub) - The orienting adapter index the perforating
gun to the PFP.
• Gun string
• Orienting adapter (indexing sub) - The orienting adapter index the perforating
gun to the PFP.
Private
• Weighted Spring Positioning Device (WSPD) - The lower WSPD provides

bias gravity force and spring force to decentralize and prevent rotation of
the toolstring.
PEK-E
PEK-E
SAH-L
SAH-L
WPIT
w/CCL
WPIT
3 3/8-in w/CCL
Gyro Carrier
3 3/8-in 3 3/8-in
WSPD - upper WSPD - upper
Indexing sub Indexing sub

upper upper
3 3/8-in HSD 3 3/8-in HSD

6 spf, 180 phased 6 spf, 180 phased
Indexing sub Indexing sub

lower lower
WSPD-lower WSPD-lower
Gyro Trip Perforating

String String
Figure 3-26: WOPT String Configuration
Private

This section contains basic equipment specifications (weight, dimensions,
temperature/pressure ratings, holesize range) with a description of the major
assets or components of the tool. This section also contains basic details on
service combinability.
Table 3-35: WOPT-AC Equipment and Operational Specifications
1
Minimum OD (in [mm]) 3.38 [86]
Maximum OD (in [mm]) 4.50 [114]

Operating Temperature (degF [degC]) 350 [177]
Working Pressure (psi [kPa]) 20,000 [137,895]
1
Replaces WOPT-AA and WOPT-AB.
Table 3-36: WPIT-AC Equipment and Operational Specifications

OD (in [mm]) 3.38 [86]
Temperature rating for 1 h (degF [degC]) 350 [177]
Pressure rating (psi [kPa]) 20,000 [137,895]
Weight (lbm [kg]) 48.5 [22]
Overall length (in [cm]) 30.6 [77.7]
Make-up length (in [cm]) 27.0 [68.6]
Length with thread protectors (in [cm]) 41.4 [105.2]
Table 3-37: Gyro Carrier Equipment and Operational Specifications
Description Gyro Carrier Hi-Temp Gyro Carrier

Size 3-3/8 3-3/8
Part number H359850 T6008796
Make-up length (in.) 77.9 77.9
Overall length (in.) 84.1 84.1
Length with thread protectors (in.) 95.8 95.8
Diameter (in.) 3.4 3.4
Weight (lb) 101.0 101.0
Pressure rating (psi) 20,000 20,000
Temperature rating for 1 hr (°F) 350 350
Private
Table 3-38: Upper WSPD Equipment and Operational Specifications
Size 3-3/8 4-1/2

Part number H348695 H348694
Weight (lb) 65 116
Temperature rating (°F) 350 350
Table 3-39: Orienting Adapter with Ports equipment and operational specifications
Size 2-7/8 3-1/8 3-3/8 4 4-1/2 5

Part
T6009086 T6009151 H348577 T6009166 H348650 T6009119
Number
Make-up
11.9 11.9 11.1 12.2 10.6 12.9
length (in.)
Overall
15.0 15.0 14.2 15.3 14.2 17.0
Length (in.)
Length with
Thread
16.1 NA 15.4 NA 15.4 NA
Protectors
(in.)
Dia (in.) 2.88 3.12 3.4 4.0 4.5 5.0
Weight (lb) 20.0 22.0 23.0 39.0 38.5 46.0
Pressure
20,000 20,000 20,000 20,000 20,000 20,000
Rating (psi)
Temp (°F) 350 350 350 350 350 350
Table 3-40: Orienting Adapter equipment and operational specifications
Size 2-7/8 3-1/8 3-3/8 4 4-1/2 5

Part Number T6009087 T6009153 H359829 T6009168 H359834 T6009124
Make-up
9.9 6.9 5.7 7.9 6.4 6.4
length (in.)
Overall Length
10.0 10.0 8.8 11.0 10.0 11.0
(in.)
Length with
Thread
11.1 NA 10.0 NA 11.2 NA
Protectors
(in.)
Diameter (in.) 2.88 3.12 3.4 4.0 4.5 5.0
Private
Size 2-7/8 3-1/8 3-3/8 4 4-1/2 5

Weight (lb) 12.0 17.0 15.5 33.0 30.0 33.0
Pressure
20,000 20,000 20,000 20,000 20,000 20,000
Rating (psi)
Temperature
350 350 350 350 350 350
(°F)
Table 3-41: Indexing Adapters equipment and operational specifications
Size 2-7/8 3-1/8 4 5

Part number T6009089 T6009165 T6009171 H348672
Make-up length (in.) 4.2 4.5 4.2 6.0
Overall length (in.) 7.3 7.6 7.3 9.8

Length with thread protectors (in.) NA NA NA NA
Diameter (in.) 2.88 3.12 4.0 5.0

Weight (lb) 5.0 6.0 7.0 29.0
Pressure rating (psi) 20,000 20,000 20,000 20,000
Temperature rating (°F) 350 350 350 350
Table 3-42: Lower WSPD Equipment and Operational Specifications
Size 3-3/8 4-1/2

Part number H348696 H348697
Weight (lb) 64 118.5
Temperature rating (°F) 350 350
Telemetry and Power Requirements

Table 3-43: Telemetry and Power Requirements
Tool WPIT-AC
LES group Explosive Services
Tool module Virtual SHM
Power supply DC
Private
Tool WPIT-AC
Voltage DC 250 V (gyro)
1
Current (mA) 120 to 420 (gyro)
1
The gyroscope requires a temperature of approximately 60 degC [140 degF] for initial calibration. Current
will vary between approximately 420 mA when the gyro heaters are running to approximately 120 mA (gyro
logging current).
Tool Strength

WPIT-AC
The Wireline Perforating Inclinometer Tool (T6009203), WPIT-AC, contains two

major parts: the inclinometer and the CAL-B. The inclinometer detects the relative
bearing of the tool string, while the CAL-B detects collars for depth control.
Gyro carrier
The gyro carrier is used to hold the gyroscope (about 1.5 in OD) and also
provides communication from the WPIT to the gyroscope (first path only) and
perforating guns (second path only). There are two gyro carriers, the standard
gyro carrier (H359850) and the hi-temp gyro carrier (T6008796).
Upper WSPD
The Upper Weighted Spring Positioning Device (H348695 for 3.38, H348694
for 4.50) provides bias gravity force and spring force to decentralize and help
prevent rotation of the tool string in the casing. It also provides electrical
continuity to the guns below.
Note
Between the 3.38-in Upper WSPD and the 3.38-in Lower WSPD, there are parts
to accommodate 2.88-, 3.12- and 3.38-in HSD gun systems. Between the 4.50
Upper WSPD and the 4.50 Lower WSPD, there are parts to accommodate 4.00-,
4.50- and 5.00-in HSD gun systems.
Private
Orienting adapter with ports
This adapter (T6009086 for 2.88 in; T6009151 for 3.12 in; H348577 for 3.38 in;
T6009166 for 4.00 in; H348650 for 4.50 in and T6009119 for 5.00 in) provides the
function of indexing the perforating gun to the preferential perforating direction.
Ports on the adapter facilitate arming of guns. This adapter will be used above
the gun when the gun is going to be shot top-down and below the gun when
the gun is going to be shot bottom-up.
Orienting adapter
This adapter (T6009087 for 2.88 in; T6009153 for 3.12 in; H348445 for 3.38 in;
T6009168 for 4.00 in; H348461 for 4.50 in and T6009124 for 5.00 in) provides the
function of indexing the perforating gun to the preferential perforating direction.
The pressure bleed plug on the adapter can be used to bleed off possible
trapped pressure in the guns and adapters after firing. This adapter will be used
above the gun when the gun is going to be shot bottom-up. It will be used below
the gun when the gun is going to be shot top-down.
Indexing adapter
This adapter (T6009089 for 2.88 in, T6009165 for 3.12 in, T6009171 for 4.00 in
and H348672 for 5.00 in) provides the function to offset the size of the Orienting
Adapter to the size of the gun. In this case, the low side of the tool string,
including the gun, always touches the casing. Consequently, two of them will
be used in each tool string: one on top of the gun and the other below the gun.
When they are used, indexing should occur between the indexing adapters and
orienting adapters. When they are not used (for 3.38 and 4.50-in HSD gun
systems), indexing occurs between the WSPDs and orienting adapters.
Lower WSPD
The Lower Weighted Spring Positioning Device (H348696 for 3.38 in and
H348697 for 4.50 in) provides bias gravity force and spring force to decentralize
and help prevent rotation of the toolstring in the casing.

Private
Table 3-44: WOPT surface equipment

with MCM
WAFE Integrated Tool Module WITM C300409
Wireline logging cable (Monocable)
Table 3-45: Gyro Surface Equipment

H359915 Modified Elco plug The Elco plug is used by Gyrodata to
communicate with their tool. The Elco plug is
connected to the lower bank of the TIU.
NA Level or bubble tube For finding "high side" of the tool
3.9.1.5 Wellsite Auxiliary Hardware

This section contains details of all auxiliary hardware components required to
complete the service at the wellsite (adapters, centralizers, cables, etc.).
PEK-E & MH-22
The combination of PEK-E and MH-22 connects the wireline to the SAH-L
(T6009097).
SAH-L
The SAH-L (T6009097) is a heavy-duty perforating swivel designed to maintain

electrical continuity and decouple cable torsion to prevent interference to the
natural orientation of the WOPT-A string in the casing while running in and out of
the hole.
AH-166
This adapter head, AH-166 (T5019350) connects the single-pin contact at the
lower end of the WPIT-A to the upper 31-pin head of the Gyro Carrier.
Private
AH-283
This adapter head, AH-293 (T6009492) connects the lower 31-pin head WOPT-A
Gyro Carrier to the upper single-pin contact of the Upper Weighted Spring
Positioning Device.
Note
Below the Gyro Carrier, the size of the tool string can be either 3-3/8 or 4-1/2.
The 3-3/8 tool string is designed for perforating gun sizes of 2-7/8, 3-1/8, 3-3/8,
3-1/2 and 3.67 in.; the 4-1/2 tool string is designed for perforating gun sizes
of 4.0, 4-1/2, 4-5/8, 4.72 and 5.0 in.
3.9.1.6 Workshop Auxiliary Hardware

3.9.1.7 Third-party equipment

Table 3-46: Gyro Third-Party Equipment
Part Number Description Use

NA Gyrodata gyroscope Operated by Gyrodata personnel
NA Gyrodata Octopus jumper cable Supplied by Gyrodata, connects
surface equipment to Schlumberger
Elco plug

at the workshop to test and repair the equipment (scopes, pulse generators,
pumps, test pits, etc.).

WOPT is based on the principle that the path of travel (and position) of a given
tool string within a given section of a well is very repeatable as long as all
conditions are kept reasonably constant, especially:
• Direction of travel
Private
• Cable torque is sufficiently decoupled using a cable swivel

• Overall tool string length and configuration are constant between trips into
the well
This “natural orientation” method normally requires two trips in the hole, the
first with a gyroscope and an unarmed gun. Several passes are made over the
interval to get a relative bearing (RB) and azimuth log of down passes and up
passes. Since gun position will differ for up and down passes, it is important
to select and use a direction to position the gun when perforating. A direction
with closer repeats is preferred.
It may be possible to omit the gyro if the well has enough angle in the interval (for
example, greater than 5°) and if there is good wellbore directional information
that can be correlated back to the stress direction.
Two WSPDs (Weighted Spring Positioning Devices) are used for improving
repeatability: one above and one below the gun. Their offset weight provides a
“bias force” to help the string locate its preferred position (RB). The bow spring
forces the gun against the casing and minimizes the degree of freedom (prevents
transverse movement).
Two indexing adapters are used (one above and one below the gun) to allow
rotating the gun with respect to the WSPD in 5° increments. One of the indexing
adapters has two side ports to allow arming. The ports are interchangeable and
permit top or bottom arming.
For the second trip, the gyro is removed from its carrier but the gyro
power/telemetry jack is reconnected to the female jack, which is mounted inside
the gyro carrier, thereby allowing power on line 7 to the gun. The gun is “indexed”
to the desired direction with respect to the established “natural orientation”
(established in the first trip). The gun is then armed. The WPIT (Wireline
Perforating Inclinometer Tool), which provides real-time relative bearing (RB),
remains in the string and gives verification that the string is indeed repeating its
directional position (previously determined).
While it is true that repeatability can be affected by significant changes in the tool
string (length, center of mass, diameter, etc), there appear to be no appreciable
effects from changes in our procedure. The single biggest effect comes from
changes in cable direction, that is, RIH vs. POOH (as one might expect).
Orienting accuracy or reliability improves as wellbore inclination increases. The
WOPT has presently achieved a positioning accuracy of ±10° (and better) in
deviations of greater than 1°.
Private
3.10 WPP
This section is only a basic description of the WPP, for detailed information
refer to the:


This section provides a general description of the equipment/service, giving
the function and principal utilization. It includes a short tool history on the
service evolution as well as basic information on telemetry class and service
compatibility.
Overview
The Wireline Perforating Platform (WPP*) is a ruggedized arsenal of sensors

and actuators for optimizing productivity of the well when perforating.
The WPP allows extreme flexibility in positioning perforating guns, and also
permits monitoring of results in real time. By allowing intelligent control of the
downhole power supply, the system provides a safer and more reliable method
of perforating.
The platform can be used to orient perforating guns conveyed on wireline, coiled
tubing or a MaxTRAC* tractor system. An inclinometer/relative bearing sensor
determines the orientation of the guns with respect to the high side of the hole.
WPP is used with the Secure* firing system.
In its completion imaging configuration, the WPP is used to shoot through a

tubing string in a multiple completion without hitting parallel strings. This allows
perforation and production access to reservoirs that would otherwise only be
possible after a workover involving significant cost.
Data collected include borehole temperature and pressure before, during, and
after perforating. With appropriate interpretation, real-time data can be used
to obtain a good indication of formation pressure and reservoir parameters
(permeability and skin).
Private
Features
• Real time monitoring of pressure and temperature changes during perforating.

• Detection of second string and positioning perforating guns to avoid damage.
• Capability to determine orientation with respect to high side of the hole.
When coupled with gyro survey, the perforations can be aligned to maximize
productivity and minimize production costs (less and production/more
efficient frac jobs)
• CCL and gamma ray correlation.
• The system is designed to be used with Secure detonators. 3-2 Secure

detonators improve operational efficiency by eliminating the need of radio
silence during perforating operation.
• Compatible with ASFS (Addressable Switch Firing System) and Secure Plus.
• Allows selective firing of multiple guns in a single run.
• Combinable with all through tubing and hollow carrier gun systems up to
2.5 in. diameter.
Tool configuration
The WPP is a modular tool, different modules can be added or removed

depending on the service required.
• Telemetry (WPTET) – this module provides the interface between the

logging cable and the downhole tools (WPP modules and guns).
• Motor (WPMOT) – this module rotates the tool string and guns below the
motor sonde to allow directional perforating.
– Centralizers – allows the string to rotate while remaining centralized

in the well or tubing.
• Pressure and temperature (WPPTT) – this module records pressure and

temperature measurement while perforating.
• Completion mapper (WPPCM) – this module allows the detection of other
completion strings present in the wellbore to be able to shoot away or into
them.
• Gyro carrier (WPGYT) – this module is a pressure housing specifically
designed to carry a third-party gyro.
3-2. The WPP cannot be used with conventional electric detonators or SAFE-BA hardware.
Private
• Shooting (WPST) – this module is an “Intelligent” shooting module that

allows measurements while perforating and selective perforating.
• Gamma-ray (WPGRT) – this module is used for general-purpose depth
correlation.
Wireline Head
Swivel
(SAH-G)
Anti-Rotation
Centralizer
Motor
(WPMOT)
Telemetry + Inclinometer
(WPTET)
Completion Mapper
(WPPCM)
Pressure and
Temperature Tool
(WPPTT)
Gamma Ray Tool

(WPGRT)
Gyro Carrier
(WPGYT)
Shooting Tool
(WPST)
Gun
Figure 3-27: Wireline Perforating Platform (WPP)
Applications
There are three main services provided by the WPP:
• Pressure and temperature while perforating
Private
• Oriented perforating
• Completion mapping
The WPP can also combine any or all of these services.
Pressure and temperature while perforating
The WPP can acquire borehole temperature and pressure information before,
during and after perforating. With appropriate interpretation, real-time data
can be used to obtain a good indication of formation pressure and reservoir
parameters (Permeability and Skin). Simultaneous downhole measurement is
possible through the use of software controlled WPP shooting tool.
Oriented perforating
Orienting a perforation means selecting the best direction for the shot(s) to
optimize fracture jobs or minimize sand production. The WPP in its oriented
perforating configuration is used to orient perforating guns conveyed on wireline.
Multimedia 3-2: Oriented perforating

Completion mapping
The WPP in its completion mapping configuration, is used to perforate a tubing

string in a multiple completion and not hit parallel string(s). This allows access
to a reservoir that would otherwise only be available to perforate and produce
after a work-over.
Private
Multimedia 3-3: Completion mapping. Cased hole and open hole multiple string completions

Specifications
Table 3-47: WPTET Equipment and Operational Specifications

Fishing strength @ 75% minimum yield (lbf [N]) 39,000 [173,480]
Table 3-48: AH-295 Equipment and Operational Specification

Maximum temperature 1 h (degF [degC]) 350 [177]
Weight (lbm [kg]) 2.5 [1.13]
Private
Table 3-49: WPMOT Equipment and Operational Specifications

Maximum pressure (psi) 15,000 [103,421]
1
Weight (lbm [kg]) 29 [13.15]
Fishing strength @ 75% minimum yield (lbf 23,000 [102,309]

[N])
2
Rotation speed (rpm) 0-2
Torque (in.lbf [N.m]) 200 [22.59]
1
WPMC: 38.4 [97.5], WPMS: 24.9 [63.1]
2
Software controlled clockwise rotation.
Table 3-50: Anti-rotation Centralizer Equipment and Operational Specifications
1
Closed diameter (in [mm]) 1.69 [43]
Make-up length (in [cm] ) 33 [83.8]
Weight (lbm [kg]) 12.5 [5.67]
Maximum working pull (lbf [N]) 14,200 [63,164]
Operating diameter 2.875-in tubing to 9.625-in casing 2
1
Required directly above WPMOT.
2
Optional restriction for 7.00-in casing.
Table 3-51: WPST Equipment and Operational Specifications

Fishing strength @ 75% minimum yield (lbf) 39,000 [173,480]
Maximum gun voltage (V) 510
Private
Maximum gun power (W) 50

Maximum number of addressable devices 20
Table 3-52: WPPTT Equipment and Operational Specification
Version Slow gauge (WPPTT-A) Fast gauge (WPPTT-B)

Part number T6009800 T6009563
Outside diameter (in [mm]) 1.69 [43] 1.69 [43]
Maximum pressure with
standard housing (psi [kPa]) 15,000 [103,421] 15,000 [103,421]
Maximum pressure with high
pressure housing (psi [kPa]) 22,000 [151,685] 22,000 [151,685]
Maximum temperature 1 h 350 [177] 350 [177]

(degF [degC])
Make-up length (in [cm]) 44.57 [113.2] 44.57 [113.2]
Weight (lbm [kg]) 21 [9.53] 21 [9.53]
Fishing strength @ 75% 23,000 [102,309] 23,000 [102,309]
minimum yield (lbf [N])
DC bus voltage (V) 200 ±25 200 ±25
Table 3-53: BH-3 Equipment and Operational Specification
1
Part number H256169
Weight (lbm [kg]) 3.5 [1.59]
1
Required directly above WPPTT.
Table 3-54: WPPCM Equipment and Operational Specifications

Weight (lbm [kg]) 24 [10.89]
Private
Table 3-55: WPGYT Equipment and Operational Specifications

Weight (lbm [kg]) 30 [13.61]
Table 3-56: WPGRT Equipment and Operational Specifications

Part number 100043322

Outside diameter (in) 1.718
Maximum pressure (psi) 15,000
Maximum temperature 1 h (degF) 350
Make-up length (in) 40.3
Weight (lbm) 18
Fishing strength strength @ 75% minimum 39,000
yield (lbf)
Minimum tubing size (in) 2.375
Telemetry and power requirements

Characteristics Ratings
Telemetry MTS telemetry, composed of WITM card in the MCM and WPTET
downhole.
Power DC Main 200 V, 1.69 in, 22-pin
The data is transmitted uphole using a Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM)

scheme with a carrier frequency of 13.26 or 52 kHz. Downhole commands are
sent as bi-phase at 26 kHz with preemphasis done at surface to cancel the
cable transmission characteristics.The symbol rate for uplink transmission is 35
ksymbol/s (for 26 kHz). From 3 up to 6 bits can be coded per symbol.
Tool strength
The overall tool fishing strength will be equal to the lowest tensile rating (or
fishing strength) of the individual modules. This will normally be the centralizer
when it is used.
Private
3.10.1.3 Measurement Specifications

This section contains detailed specifications of measurements supplied by the
service or technique.
Table 3-57: WPTET Measurement Specifications
Maximum well deviation (dega) 30

Deviation measurement repeatability (dega) ±0.2
1
Provides relative bearing (RB) of the tool.
1
Clockwise displacements are positive, while counterclockwise displacements are negative.
Table 3-58: WPPTT Measurement Specifications
1
Slow Gauge Version Fast Gauge Version
Pressure resolution (psi [kPa]) 0.1 [0.69] 3.2 [22.1]
Pressure accuracy (psi) ±20 [138] ±20 [138]
Pressure sampling rate 15 Hz 12.5, 25 or 50 kHz
Pressure recording length NA 256 kb (5.2 s @ 25 kHz
sampling rate)
Pressure (psi [kPa]) 0 [0] to 20,000 [137,895]
Pressure sensor type Strain gauge
Temperature (degF [degC]) -13 [-25] to 400 [204]
Temperature resolution (degF < 0.05 [-17.8]
[degC])
Temperature accuracy (degF ± 1.8 [16.8]
[degC])
Temperature sampling rate 15
(Hz)
Temperature sensor type Platinum RTD
1
The fast gauge also provides slow pressure data

The following is the typical WPP oriented perforating string configuration:
1. Cable head: One of the following or equivalent:
• MH-32 ⇒ SAH-G or
Private
• MSH-A
2. Fixed arm centralizer - Anti-rotation centralizer

3. WPMOT - Wireline perforating motor tool
• CMIR-AE – Fixed arms centralizer

• WPMOT – Wireline perforating motor tool
4. WPTET - Wireline perforating telemetry tool

5. WPST - Wireline perforating shooting tool
6. Gun System - one of the following or equivalent
• Enerjet – 2.50 in and smaller

• HSD – 2.50 in and smaller
• Most guns 2.50 in and smaller
MH-32
SAH-G
Fixed Arm
Centralizer
WPMOT
WPTET
WPST
Gun
Figure 3-28: Typical String Configuration
Private
Optional equipment
The following are optional WPP modules and string configurations:
1. Cable head:
• MH-32 ⇒ AH-295
2. WPPTT – Wireline perforating pressure and temperature tool

3. WPGYT – Wireline perforating gyro carrier tool
4. WPGRT – Wireline perforating gamma-ray tool

5. WPPCM – Wireline perforating platform completion mapper
6. Free-spin centralizer – Recommended directly below WPGYT.
• AH-96
• CMIR-AH – Free-spin centralizer
• Bottom nose
Private
MH-32
SAH-G
Fixed Arms
Centralizer
MH-32
MH-32 SAH-G
WPMOT
SAH-G
MH-32
Fixed Arms
SAH-G Fixed Arms Centralizer
MH-32
centralizer
AH-295
Fixed Arms WPTET
Centralizer WPMOT
WPMOT
WPTET
WPMOT BH-3
BH-3
WPPTT
WPTET
WPTET
WPPTT
WPTET
WPGRT
WPST
WPPCM
Gun
WPST WPGYT *
Gun
WPPCM
Pressure and AH-96 WPST
temperature Oriented perforating Free-spin

configuration configuration centralizer
Gun
Bottom nose WPST
Gyro run Damage avoidance

configuration (completion imaging) Gun
configuration
Complete toolstring
* WPGYT is removed for the perforating run.
Figure 3-29: Optional String Configurations

to complete the service.
Table 3-59: WPP Surface Equipment

with MCM
2
1
with latest software and WPP application kit
Wireline logging cable
1
WPP will not operate on baselines prior to OP11
Private
2
WITM acquisition board is mandatory for the MTS telemetry system
Table 3-60: WPGYT surface equipment

H359915 Modified Elco plug Connects to the lower bank of WAFE module
connectors. The Elco plug is used by Gyrodata
to communicate with their tool. The Elco plug
is connected to the lower bank of the TIU.
N/A Level or Bubble tube For finding "high side" of the tool
If ASFS or Secure Plus is used, additional test equipment is required (Table 3-71
Addressable Switch Test Equipment).
3.10.1.6 Wellsite auxiliary hardware

1. Wireline adapter
• Monocable swivel head, MSH-A (T5013530) or

• Monocable head, MH-32 (H353637) + Swivel adapter head, SAH-G
(H712960)
2. WPP Fixed-arms centralizer (T6009501): When the motor module WPMOT

is used, the fixed-arms centralizer must be directly above it.
3. Adapter head, AH-295 (T5019330): If WPMOT is not used, AH-295 must
be used in its place.
4. Pressure bulkhead, BH-3 (H256169): Whenever the WPPTT is used, the
BH-3 must be directly above it.
5. Crossover adapters: Required to connect guns to the WPST.
• Universal shooting adapter (T6009407) or

• Enerjet lower index adapter (T6008848)
6. Standard heads and gun adaptors for the specific gun being used. Refer to
WPST maintenance manual (InTouch ID: 3844157)
Private

Table 3-61: WPP workshop equipment

P787063 Dynometric screwdriver Torque screws 8 in-lb
B044789 Loctite 242 Thread locking compound
Spanner wrench Threaded ring

H256138 1-11/16 Cartridge Removal Tool Cartridge installation and extraction
tool
Table 3-62: WPP handling equipment

H256767 1-11/16-in. Female Thread Protector Upper handling cap and thread
protector
T6008752 1-9/16-12 Thd Lower Handling Plug Lower handling plug and thread
protector
Table 3-63: WPMOT workshop equipment

T6009781 Oil-fill adapter Motor sonde oil filling
B033556 J-26 Hydraulic Oil Motor sonde oil filling
E021394 Kapton tape Tape BLDC motor
H740398 Hydraulic Pump Assembly Motor sonde oil filling
Vacuum pump Motor sonde oil filling
T6008651 Jam nut wrench Jam nut installation
T6008653 Retaining nut wrench Retaining nut installation
Special equipment
T6008745 1-3/8-12 Thd Upper Handling Plug WPMS upper head thread protector
Table 3-64: WPGYT workshop equipment

E021394 Kapton tape Insulating tape
PEEK film Insulating film
Private
Table 3-65: WPPTT workshop equipment

H259182 Oil injection syringe Sonde oil filling
B025352 Hydraulic oil Pressure gauge fluid
Rubber tape Syringe seal
Hex wrench set Hex head screws
Pressurized air source Flushing buffer tube
1 in. 6-32 screw Seal spacer removal
Table 3-66: WPST workshop auxiliary equipment


1-11/16 to CCL crossover adapter (T6009407)
T6009406 Connector Rod Adapter contact assembly
H030142 Brass Washer Adapter contact assembly
H125979 Bevelled Insulator Adapter contact assembly
H329909 Contact Spring Adapter contact assembly
P125542 CCL lower head Optional crossover adapter
(T6009407) lower head
Enerjet lower index adapter (T6008848)
H432222 Flared Connector Adapter contact assembly
H304333 Connector Enerjet Plug Adapter contact assembly
B026011 Size 2-011 O-ring Adapter contact assembly
H701182 Fluid-To-Air Connector Adapter contact assembly
H448511 Vent Screw Adapter pressure bleed
B029691 Socket head screw Adapter connector screw
Table 3-67: WPST Handling Equipment

H256767 1-11/16-in Female Thread Protector Upper handling cap and thread
protector
H040730 1-3/8-12 UNF-1A Thread Protector Lower handling plug and thread
protector for crossover adapter
(T6009407)
H348495 1.56 HSD Female Protector Upper handling plug and thread
(T6009407 and T6008848)
Private
3.10.1.8 Third-party equipment

This section contains details of any third-party equipment or components
required to run the service or maintain the service or tool.
Table 3-68: Gyro Third-Party Equipment

NA Gyrodata gyroscope Operated by Gyrodata personnel
NA Gyrodata Octopus jumper cable Supplied by Gyrodata, connects
surface equipment to Schlumberger
Elco plug
3.10.1.9 Test equipment and facilities

Table 3-69: WPP Test Equipment
Part number Description Notes

H146588 ASC-EB dummy cable Operational checks
H622622 Safety Multimeter (SFT 300) Insulation and continuity checks
P695840 Inter-tool box Q-checks and troubleshooting
electronics
P481891 Micro-D to 22-socket insulator Troubleshooting electronics
extender
T6009317 WPP harness test equipment Troubleshooting electronics
Table 3-70: WPPTT Test Equipment

NA Deadweight tester (DWT) Calibration
NA Tool oven Calibration
Periodic calibration of the pressure and temperature sensors is necessary. A

deadweight tester and oven are required for calibration along with a WAFE/WITM.
Private
Table 3-71: Addressable Switch Test Equipment

T6041781 Addressable switch tester (field Tests switch circuitry and provides an
tester) address list.
B046409 Personal Digital Assistant (PDA) Downloads data and stores data from
switch tester.
T6041782 Addressable switch gun simulator Allows WAFE systems to be checked
without any explosives.
Table 3-72: WPPCM Test Equipment

1
NA 10 ft tubing Simulate completion during
operational checks
NA 10 ft casing Simulate cased completion during
operational checks
NA 10 ft pvc pipe Simulate completion string locations
during operational checks
1
Same type of tubing used in well recommended.
Table 3-73: WPGRT test equipment
Part number Description Use

1
H329467/P297200 GSR-U/Y Calibration
1
Note that a SFT-260 adapter (for use on 1-11/16 in OD) is required.
3.10.2.1 Basic physics of service and measurement

This section contains a basic level review of the physical principles of the
measurement or techniques used in the service or equipment.
WPP modules and adapters
WPP is a modular tool. Depending on the service required different modules can
be added or removed.
Private
WPP modules
AH 96 Arming
MSA -H Adapter Non-WPP
Gamma-Ray modules
Tool
WPGRT
MH -32
-22 Pressure bulkhead
Centralizer 1.69 mono

Centralizer
-fixed arms
-free-spin Interm 1.69 22-pin
BH-3 Adapter
2 in. gun thread
SAH-G
Pressure &
Temperature AH 295
Tool
WPPTT
Gun
Motor Tool
AH-295
WPMOT
Completion Shooting
Mapper Tool
WPPCM WPST Bottom
Nose
Telemetry Gyro Lower

Tool Carrier Tool Indexing
WPTET WPGYT Adapter
Figure 3-30: WPP modules
Centralizers – Two types of centralizers are used, spinning and non-spinning.

The non-spinning is used as an “anchor” for the motor sonde, allowing it to be
able to rotate the WPP and the guns; the free spinning centralizer allows the
string to rotate while staying centralized (as necessary).
Motor (WPMOT) – This module rotates the complete tool string down-hole to
allow directional perforating. It is composed by the WPMOS (Wireline Perforating
motor Sonde) and the WPMOC (Wireline Perforating motor Cartridge).The
WPMOS contains a Brushless DC motor, a gearbox and the pressure
compensating piston. The WPMOC contains the motor driver electronics.
Telemetry (WPTET) – This module performs the following functions. (1)

Bi-directional cable communication using MTS (monocable telemetry system)
and inter-tool communication using CAN-bus. (2) Pass-through connection
for running non-platform tools, third-party tools such as gyros and other CIS
(Customer Instrument Service) tools. (3) Inclination and relative bearing for
perforating with respect to high-side of hole or for confirming previously establish
azimuth (with gyro) CCL for correlation
Pressure and temperature (WPPTT) – This module records pressure and

temperature measurement while perforating. The temperature sensor is a
Platinum RTD (Resistance temperature device) and the pressure sensor is a
strain gauge.
Private
Completion mapper (WPPCM) – This module allows the detection of other

completion strings present in the wellbore to be able to shot away or into them.
It uses magnetic anisotropy around wellbore to detect other well components
(long production string, pump cables, control lines, etc). This sonde replaces
POT-C and MOD-E.
Gyro carrier (WPGYT) – This is a pressure housing specifically designed to

carry a third-party gyro for the purpose of orienting guns with respect to azimuth
(true North). The gyro is removed for the perforating trip. When the Gyro
measurement is required, the 3rd party gyro is installed inside the WPGYT.
Since the Gyro is not rated for perforating shock, WPGYT and the gyro inside
must be removed from the toolstring in the subsequence runs when the guns are
fired. The gyro is powered up with negative polarity while the WPP is powered
with positive polarity.
Shooting (WPST) – This is an “Intelligent” shooting module that allows

measurements while perforating and selective perforating. It generates the 500 V
power required to fire the Secure detonators and uses the 200 V present to power
up the telemetry, without the need to shutdown the tool. This way the telemetry is
constantly running while perforating. It can talk to addressable switches, Secure
Plus devices and any other device using the addressable switch technology.
Gamma-ray (WPGRT) – This module is used for general-purpose depth

correlation. It allows for accurate depth control, even when it is difficult to get a
good CCL signal. The tool uses the ruggedized GR detector module developed
by PTC (Princeton Technology Center).
Adapters – WPP requires some adapters depending on the configuration:
• AH-295 is a 1-pin upper head to 22-pin lower head adaptor. It is NOT the
same as the AH-95 since it has different wiring.
Figure 3-31: AH-295 wiring diagram
Private
• AH-96 is a 22-pin upper head to 1-pin lower head.

• BH-3 is a 22-pin upper head to 22-pin lower head. It is required directly
above the WPPTT to prevent flooding.
• Swivels: SAH-G can be used or the MSH-AA (monocable swivel head).
Both are 1-11/16 in. diameter
• Crossover adapters: The Universal shooting adapter (T6009407) connects
to the bottom of the WPST and provides a CCL-L type thread. The Enerjet
lower index adapter (T6008848) connects provides a enerjet connection on
the lower head. There is an index adapter on the WPST, making it possible to
align the gun phasing to the tool reference, for oriented perforating purposes.
Basic services
There are three main services provided by the WPP:
• Pressure and temperature while perforating

• Oriented perforating
• Completion mapping
The WPP can also combine any or all of these services.
Pressure and temperature while perforating
Data collected include borehole temperature and pressure before, during, and
after perforating. With appropriate interpretation, real-time data can be used
to obtain a good indication of formation pressure and reservoir parameters
(permeability and skin). The shooting tool communicates to the appropriate gun
and sends the required power to initiate the Secure detonator without interrupting
data acquisition.
The WPP is able to record data while firing any of several guns. Up to 20 guns
can be connected below the toolsting and selectively fired using addressable
switches or percussion switches. All guns are fired while the telemetry is
operational, thus, providing pressure and temperature measurements before,
during and after the perforating operation.
Private
MH-32
AH-295
WPTET
BH-3
WPPTT
WPST
Gun
Figure 3-32: Minimum required configuration. The minimum required toolstring

configuration to run pressure and temperature service
Oriented perforating is perforating in the desired azimuth or relative to the high

side of the hole. An inclinometer and relative bearing sensor determines the
orientation of the guns with respect to the high side of the hole. If the preferred
perforating direction is known, then the WPP will rotate the gun(s) into position
for firing.
The WPP orients guns up to 2.5 in. diameter and is capable of shooting multiple
guns per descent. The tools can be run through tubing and can be combined
with thr gamma-ray tool for depth correlation.
Private
Multimedia 3-4: Oriented perforating

Multimedia 3-5: Perforating in the desired azimuth

Private
MH-32
SAH-G
Fixed Arm
Centralizer
WPMOT
WPTET
WPST
Gun

configuration to run oriented perforating service
An additional gyro survey is required if HAZI (hole azimuth) and deviation at

the shooting depth are NOT known.
Private
MH-32
SAH-G
Fixed Arms
centralizer
WPMOT
WPTET
WPGYT *
AH-96
Free-spin
centralizer
Bottom nose
Figure 3-34: Recommended configuration. The recommended toolstring

configuration to run gyro survey service with WPP
The free-spin centralizer can be replaced by any production tool centralizer as

long as the mandrel can rotate with respect to the arms. It is not possible to run
any telemetry tool below the WPGYT since it has no thru-wires. In the following
perforating runs, the WPGYT is not included in the toolstring.
Completion mapping
In its completion-mapping configuration, the WPP is used to shoot through a

tubing string in a multiple completion and not hit the parallel string(s). This allows
perforation and production access to reservoirs that would otherwise only be
possible using a workover rig.
The tool induced an electromagnetic signal which penetrates the first string and
uses a focused detector to determine the presence of the second string. The gun
string is rotated downhole and stopped at the desired orientation.
Private
Multimedia 3-6: Completion mapping

MH-32
SAH-G
Fixed Arms
Centralizer
WPMOT
WPTET
WPPCM
WPST
Gun

configuration to run completion mapping service
3.10.2.2 Advanced Physics of Service/Measurement

This section contains a detailed (advanced level) review of physical principles of
the measurement or techniques used in the service or equipment.
Private
Pressure and temperature measuments
Temperature: The temperature is measured in the well fluid by a platinum

resistance temperature detector (RTD) immersed in the fluid. This detector is
sealed to the WPPTT body with a metal-to-metal coupling without an O-ring. The
fundamental parameter being measured is resistance.
Figure 3-36: Resistance Temperature Detector
Pressure: Sets of strain wire are wrapped around a force-summing cylinder. As

pressure increases, the cylinder bore is stretched causing a change in the wire
resistance. The strain wires on the outside of the cylinder are kept in nitrogen at
atmospheric pressure.
Well Pressure
Well Temperature
The temperature is measured in the well fluid by a 500 ohm (@ 0°C) platinum
Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) immersed in the fluid. This detector is
sealed to the WPPTT body with a metal-to-metal coupling without an O-ring.
The fundamental parameter being measured is resistance. The power supply
to the sensor is 1 mA constant current. It also comes from PTAIB board. Set
Temperature Calibration Switch telemetry command drives the Sensor Select
Multiplexer. This involves no circuit changes, but is merely a signal designation
change on the PTAIB.
Private
Table 3-74: Temperature Calibration
TMUX1 TMUX0 Mode

0 0 Well temperrature
0 1 Pressure sensor temperature
1 0 590 ohm calibration resistor
1 1 698 ohm calibration resistor
Voltage drop on the RTD is amplified by a gain of 7.5. The amplified signal is
applied to the 10 bit ADC built in with DSP chip on PTUAB. Both well temperature
and pressure sensor temperature are sampled at 50 kHz and averaged over 64
data points for each measurement (15 Hz) sent updole.
The temperature elements increase in resistance with increases in temperature

as follows:
RT = RO (1 + aT)
where, RT is resistance at temperature T (°C),
RO is resistance at T = 0°C,
RO = 500 ohm for both well temperature RTD and for Paine pressure sensor
temperature RTD,
a = 0.00385 ohm/ohm/degC is the temperature coefficient for both well

temperature and sensor temperature RTDs.
Perforating in the desired azimuth
The minimum information required to perform an oriented perforating job is the

hole-azimuth and deviation. This information may be available from openhole
logging if a GPIT (General Purpose Inclinometer Tool) was run or from any
deviation survey run on the well.
Run an directional gyro survey, if hole-azimuth and deviation data is not available
prior to the perforating job. An extra run with the WPP including the WPGYT
(Figure 3-34 Recommended configuration), can be performed to acquire a
directional survey of the well. The WPGYT will be used only during the first run
to determine the well deviation at the shooting depth and the direction of the
well’s high side (which is equivalent to well azimuth).
Private
Multimedia 3-7: Directional survey

On the second run (perforating run) the WPGYT should be removed from
the toolstring since the 3rd party gyro is not designed to survive shock from
perforating guns (Figure 3-33 Minimum required configuration).
Note
It is not possible to combine the Gyro run with a perforating run since the
WPGYT, which carries the gyro inside, has no thru-wires.
Multimedia 3-8: Perforating

Private
Definitions
Relative Bearing (RB)
Relative Bearing is the angle between the tool-zero reference mark on the tool
and the high side of the tool about the tool axis (Tool High Side). It is measured
in the plane (looking from the top of the tool down) perpendicular to the axis
of the tool. Looking downhole, clockwise displacements are positive, while
counterclockwise displacements are negative.
Figure 3-37: Relative Bearing
Azimuth (AZI)
Azimuth is the angle between the vertical projection of a line of interest onto a
horizontal surface and true north, typically measured clockwise from north.
Hole Azimuth (HAZI)
Hole Azimuth is the angle between the downhole trajectory of the well, projected
up onto a horizontal plane, and True North (typically measured clockwise from
north).
Private
Figure 3-38: Hole Azimuth
Preferential Fracture Plane (PFP)
Preferential Fracture Plane is the vertical plane intersecting the well bore along
the axis of maximum Horizontal stress. It’s position is described by an angular
displacement relative to True North in a horizontal plane (PFP Azimuth).
Figure 3-39: Preferential Fracture Plane
Multimedia 3-9: PFP

Private
Inclination and Deviation (DEV)
The deviation of the well is the angle from the downhole trajectory of the well
bore to the vertical (the direction of gravity), irrespective of compass direction,
expressed in degrees.
Figure 3-40: Deviation
Relative Bearing of PFP
Relative Bearing of PFP (RB_PFP) is defined as the angle between the PFP and
the vertical plane containing the well axis, measured in a plane perpendicular
to the well axis. Is defined as zero for the direction containing the high side of
the well.
Figure 3-41: Relative Bearing of PFP
Private
Oriented perforating with the WPP is based on positioning the gun referenced to
the high-side of the hole, this measurement is called Relative Bearing (RB). The
preferred fracture plane (PFP) and hole-azimuth are both referenced to the North
direction and they are measured in a horizontal plane.
Figure 3-42: The preferred fracture plane and hole-azimuth
Multimedia 3-10: Preferred Fracture Plane

In order to shot the direction of the PFP, the gun RB must be correlated to the
gun azimuth. This can be achieved by knowing that the direction from the center
of the casing cross-section to the high side of that cross-section is coincident
with the Hole-Azimuth (HAZI) direction. This means that when the tool is reading
RB = 0 the tool-azimuth is equal to HAZI.
Private
Figure 3-43: Relative bearing scale
Based on the direction of the HAZI the scale for RB can be defined and the
relative bearing of the PFP (RB_PFP) can be calculated. Now the required gun
orientation is expressed in units that WPP can measure.
Note
The calculation of the RB_PFP is not the simple difference between HAZI and
PFP azimuth (which is a good approximation as long as the well is near vertical)
since RB is measured in a different plane than Azimuth. The formula used to
compute the RB_PFP is:
RBshoot = RB _PFP = atan(tan(PFP – HAZI) x cos(Dev))
Choosing the side of PFP closer to HAZI.
The hole-azimuth direction MUST be known in order to perform an oriented

perforating job. This orientation can be obtained from open hole log if the GPIT
was run, any open hole or cased hole deviation survey or from directional drilling
information. If no HAZI information is available then a gyro run has to be made
before running the guns in the well.
Private
Multimedia 3-11: Directional Survey

Figure 3-44: Relative bearing of PFP
When the gun is run in the hole, the correlation done and the gun is brought to
the right depth to perforate, its RB is random.
Private
Figure 3-45: Toolstring and gun position
Multimedia 3-12: Orient and perforate

Using the tilt sensor in the WPTET, the RB of the tool and the relative bearing of
the gun are known. They are the same since tool and gun phasing are aligned
on surface before running in the hole.
Private
Figure 3-46: Relative bearing of toolstring and gun
Now by comparing the relative bearing of the PFP and gun, how much rotation is
required to orient the gun in the direction of the PFP can easily be determined.
Figure 3-47: Rotation needed to position the gun
Private
Using the WPMOT, the toolsting and guns are rotated to the PFP direction and
the final position is verified using the RB measurement.
Figure 3-48: Orient the gun in the direction of the PFP
When verified that the gun has the right orientation, the well is perforated. Then
the toolstring and remaining guns are moved to the next zone to be perforated.
Perforating in multiple string completions
Description
The completion mapper (WPPCM) is designed to permit directing the shots

from a perforating gun with respect to a mass of metal detected downhole. In
multiple string completions it may be necessary to perforate in the presence
of another string or strings, and the gun must be oriented to avoid perforating
the other string(s).
As the cartridge (and gun) are rotated downhole, the electromagnetic metal
detector generates a metal proximity profile. When the relative direction of the
other string(s) of tubing is determined, the gun is rotated so the charges are
pointed away from the other string(s).
Private
Tests indicate that the WPPCM is capable of orienting with respect to one other
string of tubing while in casing and two other strings of tubing in a casingless
completion (total of two and three tubing strings respectively).
Multimedia 3-13: Completion mapping

A maximum gun length of 20 ft is recommended due to the tendency of multiple

strings of tubing to intertwine downhole. With longer guns the top shot could be
oriented correctly but the bottom shot could be directed toward another string
of tubing.
Note: Align guns with toolstring

During oriented perforating operations, the gun phasing should be aligned with
the 0° mark on the WPST index adapter, which has the same orientation as
the key mark on each WPP module.
The WPP locates adjacent completions and indicates the actual (or preferred)
shooting position. When perforating away from a completion or into a fracture
plane the direction of the perforations will be the same as the tool string direction.
Please double check gun orientation while physically measuring the TZDD, Tool
Zero (CCL) to Device (top shot) Distance.
Private
Note: Warning POT-C users

With the POT-C, the gun string can only be positioned with its phasing 180° from
the orientation indicated by the tool sensor.
With WPP, it is possible to orient the gun in any direction at 5° increments. But it
is strongly recommended to align the gun phasing with the tool sensor, i.e., the
key mark on WPP tool module.
If the user prefers to see results with the same polarity as the POT-C, ensure the
gun phasing is oriented 180° away from the tool sensor.
Figure 3-49 WPP in Dual String illustrates a typical configuration where the
system is used in a Dual Completion with an outer protective casing string. The
gun is positioned along the side of the lower string, and it is necessary to avoid
perforating the lower string.
Also illustrated is an example of the general shape of the Proximity response over
a complete revolution. In the over simplified example the response approaches
sine wave shape. In actual examples the response will not be that simple.
Private
Figure 3-49: WPP in Dual String
Figure 3-50 Shop Example illustrates a shop example where the tool was
positioned in a 2-7/8 in. tubing string and another identical length of tubing was
placed 2.0 in. away.
Private
Figure 3-50: Shop Example
Types of Completions
Electromagnetic Sensing System
See Figure 3-51 Coil Array.
The electromagnetic sensing system contains three different coils. They are the
Exciter Coil, the Reference Coil, and the Detector Coil.
Private
The Exciter Coil is driven by square wave AC voltage between 0 V and 200 V.
The frequency of this AC voltage is adjustable, generally between 8 Hz to 300
Hz. The nominal (default) frequency is set to 50 Hz.
The Exciter Coil is a bifilar wound inductor (two windings in parallel) with each
coil’s polarity 180 from the other. The two windings are connected in series at
the terminal wires. When the inductor is powered by the electronic switching
circuit, an AC magnetic field results.
Multimedia 3-14: Electromagnetic Sensing System

The Exciter coil establishes a magnetic field around the casing as shown in the
Figure 3-51 Coil Array. This magnetic field is then distorted by the metal mass
due to the surrounding tubing and/or casing strings.
The distorted magnetic field is received by both the Reference and Detector
Coils. For discussion in this manual, these coils will be referred to as the
Detector Coil Array. These Coils are located in the lower section of the tool and
are at 90° angles to each other. The ratio of these two signals is taken and this
is compared to the reference signal.
The phase shift and amplitude changes of these signals are established and are
transmitted to a processing circuit. That circuit converts these changes into a
frequency modulated pulse output. As the tool rotates, the greater the external
metal mass which comes in close proximity to the focused detector coil array,
the higher the frequency. This frequency is recorded by WPP as FREQ_CM and
transferred real-time to the up hole.
Private
The resulting Maxis (and print) can either display the information as normal
station log or correlate it with relative bearing in a polar graph manner. In
case of station log, the display will be close to sinusoidal curve, the right edge
representing higher frequency or close proximity to greater metal mass. In case
of polar graph, the farthest point away from the origin represent the orientation of
the greater metal mass.
3.10.3 References
WPP InTouch Reference Page (InTouch ID: 3839627). This page contains links
to the WPP reference manual, maintenance manuals and trainings.
Multimedia 3-15: WPP (animation)

Multimedia 3-16: Oriented perforating (animation)

Private
Multimedia 3-17: Completion mapper (animation)

3.11 WPST
This section is only a basic description of the WPST, for detailed information
refer to the:

The Wireline Perforating Shooting Tool (WPST) is designed to allow shooting of
the gun while Monocable Telemetry System (MTS) and tool power is applied.
The operation of the WPST is controlled by surface software, and firmware
installed in the WPST circuit boards. The WPST measures the gun voltages
generated which can presented in depth logs and Station Logs. This gives a
real time record of WPST performance.
The WPST is compatible with all WPP modules but it has to be run at the
bottom of the WPP toolstring and above the gun string. The threaded lower
head connector is designed to prevent accidentally connecting other WPP tools
directly to the gun string.
Note
This should be apparent to the engineer when exiting session configuration, as
an incorrect toolstring configuration notification will be seen.
The WPST is also compatible with the PSTT (MaxTRAC* tractor) telemetry tool
to enable selective tractor-conveyed perforating operations.
The WPST is only compatible with Secure detonators. Secure detonators can be
run with either percussion type switches or addressable switches (ASFS).
Private

Table 3-75: WPST Equipment and Operational Specifications

Fishing strength @ 75% minimum yield (lbf) 39,000 [173,480]

Maximum gun voltage (V) 510
Maximum gun power (W) 50
Maximum number of addressable devices 20
3.11.1.3 Downhole Equipment

The following is the typical WPP string downhole equipment:
1. Wireline Adapters - One of the following or equivalent:
• MH-32 ⇒ SAH-G
• MSH-A
2. WPMOT – Wireline Perforating Motor Tool
• Fixed arms centralizer

• WPMOT – Wireline Perforating Motor Tool
3. WPTET – Wireline Perforating Telemetry Tool

4. WPST – Wireline Perforating Shooting Tool
5. Gun Adapter
6. Gun System
• HSD – 2.50 in. and smaller

• Enerjet – 2.50 in. and smaller
Private
3-3
• Most guns 2.50 in. and smaller
MH-22
SAH-G
Fixed Arms
Centralizer
WPMOT
WPTET
Shooting tool (WPST)
Gun adapter
Gun
Figure 3-52: Typical string configuration
Optional Equipment
The following are optional WPP modules and string configurations:
1. Wireline Adapters - One of the following or equivalent:
• MH-32 ⇒ AH-295
3-3. The WPSA is required when running guns larger than 2.50 in., contact SRC-InTouch.
Private
2. WPPTT – Wireline Perforating Pressure and Temperature Tool

3. WPGRT – Wireline Perforating Gamma-Ray Tool
4. WPPCM – Wireline Perforating Platform Completion Mapper
5. PSTT – Production Services Tractor Tool
• TTSA – Tractor Tension Sub Adapter

• PSTE – Production Services Tractor Electronics
• PSTS – Production Services Tractor Sonde
• WPSA – Wireline Perforating Shock Absorber
• ATPS – Addressable Tractor Protection Switch

• ASFS – Addressable Switch Firing System
MH-32
SAH-G
MH-32
SAH-G
Fixed Arms TTSA

Centralizer
MH-32
SAH-G
PSTE
MH-32 WPMOT
Fixed Arms
SAH-G Centralizer
MH-32
AH-295
Fixed Arms
Centralizer WPMOT
MH-32
WPTET
AH-295
WPTET PSTS
WPMOT
WPTET BH-3
BH-3
WPTET
WPPTT
WPPTT
WPST WPTET
Gun adapter
WPST
Gun WPGRT
WPPCM PSTS
Gun adapter
WPST
Minimum Gun Gun adapter

configuration
Gun WPST
Pressure and temperature Gun adapter WPPCM
configuration
Oriented perforating WPST
Gun
configuration Gun adapter
WPSA
Completion mapping WPST
configuration Gun
Gun adapter
Gun Tractor conveyed

perforating
configuration
Complete WPP toolstring
Figure 3-53: Optional string configurations
Private

to complete the service.
Table 3-76: WPP Surface Equipment

with MCM
2
1
with latest software and WPP application kit
Wireline logging cable
1
WPP will not operate on baselines prior to OP11
2
WITM acquisition board is mandatory for the MTS telemetry system
If ASFS or Secure Plus is used, additional test equipment is required (Table 3-71
Addressable Switch Test Equipment).
3.11.1.5 Wellsite auxiliary hardware

1. Cable head

• MH-32 (H353637) + SAH-G (H712960)
2. WPTET (T6008941) or PSTE

3. Gun adapter
• 1-11/16 to CCL crossover adapter (T6009407) or

• Enerjet lower index adapter (T6008848)
4. Standard heads and gun adapters for the specific gun being used.
Private
Gun connections
WPP module
or
PSTT
WPST
1.69 Enerjet lower

index adapter
(T6008848)
1-11/16 HSD to CCL-L
2-1/8 ATPS
crossover adapter
housing assembly
(T6009407)
(100137165)
Enerjet
gun assembly
CCL-L
lower head 1-11/16 to 2-5/8 Any wireline
1.56 - 2.50 HSD
(P027388) wireline heads mono adapter head compatible
(H712643) with CCL-L
Pivot gun,
Enerjet gun, Hollow carrier
Hyperdome gun gun string
Figure 3-54: Gun Connections. Standard gun connections for HSD and Enerjet guns.

Private
Table 3-77: WPP workshop equipment

P787063 Dynometric screwdriver Torque screws 8 in-lb
B044789 Loctite 242 Thread locking compound
Spanner wrench Threaded ring
H256138 1-11/16 Cartridge Removal Tool Cartridge installation and extraction
tool
Table 3-78: WPST workshop auxiliary equipment

1-11/16 to CCL crossover adapter (T6009407)

T6009406 Connector Rod Adapter contact assembly
H030142 Brass Washer Adapter contact assembly
H329909 Contact Spring Adapter contact assembly
P125542 CCL lower head Optional crossover adapter
(T6009407) lower head
Enerjet lower index adapter (T6008848)
H432222 Flared Connector Adapter contact assembly
H304333 Connector Enerjet Plug Adapter contact assembly
B026011 Size 2-011 O-ring Adapter contact assembly
H701182 Fluid-To-Air Connector Adapter contact assembly
H448511 Vent Screw Adapter pressure bleed
B029691 Socket head screw Adapter connector screw
Table 3-79: WPST Handling Equipment

H256767 1-11/16-in Female Thread Protector Upper handling cap and thread
protector
H040730 1-3/8-12 UNF-1A Thread Protector Lower handling plug and thread
(T6009407)
H348495 1.56 HSD Female Protector Upper handling plug and thread
(T6009407 and T6008848)
Private
3.11.1.7 Test equipment and facilities

Table 3-80: WPP Test Equipment

H146588 ASC-EB dummy cable Operational checks
H622622 Safety Multimeter (SFT 300) Insulation and continuity checks
P695840 Inter-tool box Q-checks and troubleshooting
electronics
P481891 Micro-D to 22-socket insulator Troubleshooting electronics
extender
T6009317 WPP harness test equipment Troubleshooting electronics

switch tester.

The WPST can be run in either Percussion Mode or ASFS Mode.
3.11.2.1 PERC Mode

PERC (Percussion) Mode is used to fire guns configured with red and green
piston switches or with dual diodes. In percussion mode the WPP gun voltage
has a default of +500 V. After the first gun (GUN #1), detonates the polarity is
automatically reversed. When initiated, this allows perforation of the next gun,
GUN #2 with -500 V. This is the firing convention when a gun string is configured
for percussion (or dual diode) switches, that is why positive polarity is default for
the bottom gun (GUN #1). See Figure 3-1 for details.
Private
The STUAB receives all the necessary commands for PERC Mode from the
Modular Configuration Maxis (MCM) via MTS. They are invoked in Log phase,
PERFO2 and Perforate Set Activate commands.
Type I Type II Type I
Gun #4 (Red) Switch Gun #3 (Green) Switch Gun #2 (Red) Switch Gun #1
Detonator Detonator Detonator Detonator
Figure 3-55: Firing Order

Note
• If operations require firing GUN #1 on negative polarity, this is selectable via
device string configuration command in the setup phase.
• All firing modes require that standard perforating practices be adhered to.
3.11.2.2 ASFS Mode

ASFS (Addressable Switch Firing System) mode requires two independent
voltages. One voltage communicates to the Addressable Switch and the other
fires the Secure detonator. The communication voltage has a selectable working
range of -20 V to -100 V with the default being -50 V. The firing voltage has a
default setting of -500 V, this can also be changed but it is advised to leave it
at the default.
In ASFS mode, to fire a Secure detonator, three distinct criteria have to be

confirmed by the WPST and by surface OP before the Addressable Switch
routes firing voltage to the detonator.
• OP must have a valid ASFS inventory report from the WPST

• OP and the WPST must receive a ARM status from the targeted ASFS
• The WPST must receive a FIRE status from the targeted ASFS before
changing from communication voltage to firing voltage
Private
Gun 3 Gun 2 Gun 1
Detonator Detonator Detonator
Red Black Red Black Red Black
White White Blue White White Blue White White Blue

Black Black Black Black Black Black
Switch 3 Switch 2 Switch 1

3.11.3 References
WPST Maintenance Manual(InTouch ID: 3844157)
WPP Reference Page (InTouch ID: 3839627)
Tractor Reference Page (InTouch ID: 3264207)
ATPS Operations Reference Manual (InTouch ID: 3883820)
Addressable Switch Field Tester Manual (InTouch ID: 3770540)
3.12 ATPS
This section is only a basic description of the ATPS, for detailed information
refer to the:
• Reference Manual (InTouch ID: 3883820)

This section gives an overview of the tool and describes the equipment and
operational specifications, measurement specifications, surface equipment,
downhole equipment, wellsite and workshop auxiliary hardware, and test
equipment and facilities.
Private

This section provides a general description of the equipment/service, giving
the function and principal utilization. It includes a short tool history on the
service evolution as well as basic information on telemetry class and service
combinability.
Overview
The Addressable Tractor Protection Switch (ATPS) uses Addressable Switch

Firing System (ASFS) technology to electrically isolate the explosive devices

from the tractor and wireline. Therefore all explosive devices in the gun string
used in conjunction with the ATPS must use ASFS technology. Communication
is engaged by the WITM to the ATPS to allow further communication with the
ASFS and Secure detonators and igniters, or Secure Plus devices. In case
of a tractor failure, any power surge that might be observed at the top of the
gun string will either be blocked (positive polarity) or routed to blow a fuse thus
physically disconnecting the gun string from the wireline.
Multimedia 3-18: ATPS Introduction

ASFS technology specifies the telemetry standard used by the ATPS. Refer to
the WRM for more information regarding the Addressable Switch Firing System
software operation.
Advantages of using ASFS for firing the gun string include:
• Devices cannot be accidentally fired by just applying power

• Each switch is identified by a unique address
• Internal electronic switch eliminates mechanical piston switches
• Provide skip-over capability in case of a misfire
• Provide means of shot indication by means of re-query
• Switch circuitry can be tested after installation in the gun
Private
• Secure devices are compatible with ASFS, and meet the mandatory
requirement for a S.A.F.E. firing system for tractor conveyed explosive
devices. Secure devices are RF safe and also require high voltage to
detonate.
Application
The Addressable Tractor Protection Switch (ATPS) is designed to prevent

accidental off-depth perforation during tractor conveyed explosives operations.
ATPS can only be used with tractors on which it has been specifically tested
and qualified. This approved list consists of the tractor manufacturer, a well
as the version of the electronics. Any tractors not on this list cannot be used
for perforating with the ATPS. Refer to the Tractor Approval list (InTouch ID:
4010810) for a detailed list of approved tractors and how to identify them.
All tractor explosives operations are still required to use S.A.F.E. initiating
devices.

Private
Table 3-82: ATPS equipment and operational specifications
1
Part Number 100056070
Length (in) [cm] 5.9 [15.0]
Width (in) [cm] 1.2 [3.0]
Maximum voltage rating (V) –1500 V to +1500 V DC,
2
1060 Vrms AC
Allowable shooting voltage (V) 540 V
Maximum pressure (psi)
Operating temperature (°F)[°C] 340 [170] for 5 hr, or
300 [150] for 24 hr3
Operating telemetry ATPS uses the same communication scheme

as ASFS, and thus all guns below the ATPS
must use ASFS. Negative polarity power is
used for communication, and shooting to the
ASFS. Must use Secure firing devices
Usage The ATPS is disposable and must be replaced
after every use.
4
Allowable storage temperature (°F)[°C] -30 [-35] to 140 [65]
Electrical connections Three wires are used to connect the ATPS:
input line (White), grounds (Black), and
downhole output (Blue).
1
The ATPS consists of two circuit boards.
2
Do not attempt to combine ATPS with any tractor capable of greater operating voltages.
3
Limited by electronics
4
when contained in its original hermetic sealed bag with desiccant.

Voltage spikes, transients, or surges sometimes occur during tractor operation.

Any peak voltages that can possibly occur must be below the 1500 V ATPS
specification at all times.
The boards are normally installed in downhole equipment folded together in a

side-by-side orientation but may be used in a lengthwise orientation in smaller
ID housings. Each board is packaged separately in shrink tubing for protection,
similar to Addressable Switch packaging.
The ATPS must be installed in a pressure housing independent of the gun

system. If the ATPS was installed in a gun and it flooded, there is no guarantee
that the ATPS would prevent an unintentional firing of the gun.
Private
There are two pressure housings (2-1/8 in. and 3-3/8 in.) specifically designed to
accommodate the ATPS. However, if an ATPS carrier is not available, an empty
CCL housing may be used. The ATPS carrier is recommended since it makes
replacement of the ATPS much easier.
Table 3-83: 2.12-in. ATPS Carrier Assembly

Outside diameter (in. [mm]) 2.12 [53.8]
Maximum temperature (°F [°C]) 350 [177]
Make-up length (in. [cm]) 19.0 [48.3]
Weight (lbm [kg]) 3.5 [1.59]

Fishing strength @ 75% minimum yield (lbf) 39,000
Table 3-84: 3.38-in. ATPS Carrier Assembly

Outside diameter (in. [mm]) 3.38 [85.9]
Maximum temperature (°F [°C]) 350 [177]
Make-up length (in. [cm]) 23.9 [60.7]
Weight (lbm [kg]) 3.5 [1.59]
Fishing strength @ 75% minimum yield (lbf) 39,000
3.12.1.3 Downhole Equipment

1. MSH - Monocable swivel head

2. PSTT - Production Services Tractor Tool
• TTSA - Tractor Tension Sub Adapter

• PSTE - Production Services Tractor Electronics
• PSTS - Production Services Tractor Sonde
3. WPST - Wireline Perforating Shooting Tool
• 1-11/16 to CCL crossover adapter
4. ATPS - Addressable Tractor Protection Switch
Private
5. The ATPS Carrier Assembly
• 3.38-in. ATPS Carrier Assembly

• 2.12-in. ATPS Carrier Assembly
6. Gun Systems
• Long wireline head assembly

• ASFS - High Voltage Addressable Switch
• Secure detonator
7. CPST - Casing Packer Setting Tool

• ASFS - High Voltage Addressable Switch

• Negative polarity Secure igniter
• Plug-and-shoot adapter, optional for setting a plug (or packer) and firing
multiple guns.3-4
MSH-A
TTSA
PSTE
PSTS
PSTS
WPST
ATPS housing assembly ATPS housing assembly ATPS housing assembly ATPS housing assembly
(ATPS) (ATPS and ASFS) (ATPS) (ATPS)
Long wireline head assembly Wireline head assembly Wireline head assembly
CPST
(ASFS and Secure detonator)
(Secure igniter) Gun carrier Gun carrier
Gun carrier
Selective adapter Selective adapter - optional *
Bottom nose Plug (or packer)
(ASFS and Secure detonator) (ASFS and Secure detonator)
Top down configuration Gun carrier Plug-and-shoot adapter
Single gun or setting tool Setting tool configuration Bottom nose (ASFS)
Setting plug or packer (ASFS and Secure detonator)
Bottom up configuration CPST
Multiple guns (Secure igniter)
Plug (or packer)

* If selective adapter is not used, two addressable switches (ASFS) and
a Secure detonator must be installed in the plug-and-shoot adapter.
Plug-Shoot configuration
Multiple guns and setting tool
Figure 3-57: Basic string configurations
3-4. Additional adapter(s) may be required to connect plug-and-shoot adapter to selective

adapter and\or gun.
Private

Table 3-85: Surface equipment

with MCM
1
with latest software and ATPS application kit
1
Will not operate on baselines prior to OP11
3.12.1.5 Wellsite Auxiliary Hardware

1. Wireline adapter

• Monocable head, MH-32 (H353637) + Swivel adapter head, SAH-G
(H712960)
3-5
2. Electrical Release Sub, ERS-A (T5011980)
3. Production Services Tractor Tool (PSTT)
• Tractor Tension Sub Adapter, TTSA-A (T5014190)

• Production Services Tractor Electronics, PSTE-S (T5012200)
• Production Services Tractor Sonde, PSTS-S (T5012500)
Table 3-86: PSTT Specifications
OD (in. [cm]) Casing size Temperature Pressure rating Maximum

(in.) rating (psi [MPa]) Tractoring speed
(°F[°C]) ( ft/hr [m/h])
2.13 [5.40] 2.38 to 9.63 302 [150] 15,000 [103] 2500 [762 ] 1
1
With 300-lbm [136-kg] load.
4. Wireline Perforating Shooting Tool, WPST (T6009512)
3-5. The ERS is optional.
Private
• 1-11/16 to CCL crossover adapter (T6009407) or 2.12 in. ATPS carrier

assembly3-6
3-7
• Adapter head, AH-39 (H108696)
5. High Voltage Addressable Switch, ASFS (100048404) 3-8

6. Detonator
• Secure detonator (T6005040)

3-9
• Secure Plus (100034412)
7. Igniter
• Negative polarity Secure igniter (T6005390)

3-10
• Secure Plus igniter (100071245)

Other that Scotchlok connectors and wire cutters, there is no specific auxiliary
hardware this tool. Every ATPS must be tested before used, refer to 3.12.1.8
Test Equipment and Facilities for required test equipment.
3.12.1.7 Third-Party Equipment

This section contains details of any third-party equipment or components
compatible with the service or tool.
3-6. 1-11/16 HSD to 1-11/16 CCL-L mono adapter required to connect guns. The crossover
adapter (T6009407) can be replaced by the 2.12-in. ATPS Carrier Assembly.
3-7. 1-11/16 CCL-L monopin to 2-5/8 monopin adapter.
3-8. One switch per explosive device (detonator and/or igniter).
3-9. Detonator and switch combination replaces ASFS (100048404) and Secure detonator
(T6005040).
3-10. Igniter and switch combination Replaces ASFS (100048404) and Secure igniter (T6005390).
Private
Table 3-87: Third Party Tractors
Description Casing Pressure Temperature (°F Notes

size (in.) (psi) [°C])
2.12-in. Welltec NA 20,000 400 [204] 130 and 140 electronics
Well Tractor only. 124 electronics are
not supported.
3.12-in. Welltec NA 25,000 400 [204]
Well Tractor
3.35-in. Aker 3.5 to 7.0 NA 350 [177] Relay Mounting Board
Maritme Well P100515 Rev.2, Relay
Tractor Switch BoardP100487
(i.e., no rev number)
Refer to the Tractor Approval List (
InTouch ID: 4010810

) for the most current list of approved tractors and how to identify them.


switch tester.

This section gives an overview of the theory of operations.
3.12.2.1 Overview
The ATPS uses Addressable Switch Firing System technology to electrically
isolate the explosive devices from the tractor and wireline. It relies on
Addressable Switches (ASFS) to arm and detonate Secure detonators/igniters in
the gun string, or Secure Plus may be used.
Private
A microprocessor is embedded into each ATPS, ASFS and Secure Plus to allow
the surface computer to both send commands to the processor and to receive
uplink data. This data contains information about the switch address, operating
condition and switch status.
The only way enough power can reach an addressable detonator to initiate it is if
Maxis software sends a command downhole requesting the desired switch (one
switch per gun) to arm. Then after confirmation from the switch, software allows
the operator to send another command to route power to the armed switch.
3.12.3 References
Reference Page, Tractor (InTouch ID: 3264207)
Operations Reference Manual, Addressable Tractor Protection Switch (InTouch

ID: 3883820)
Wellsite Tractor Perforating Checklist (InTouch ID: 4037085)
Technology Based Training, Addressable Tractor Protection Switch (InTouch

ID: 3916474)
Maintenance Manual, Shooting Tool (WPST) (InTouch ID: 3844157)
Addressable Switch Field Tester Manual (InTouch ID: 3770540)
Reference Page, Addressable Switch Firing System (ASFS) (InTouch ID:

3624996)
Multimedia 3-19: ATPS Communication and Firing

Multimedia 3-20: Addressable Shot-by-Shot Communication and Firing

Multimedia 3-21: Addressable Shot by Shot Gun Loading

Private
SRC-Wireline\SRC-Wireline\InTouch ID 3013565\3.1\Release Date: 10-Jun-2004\EDMS UID: 274896043\Produced: 13-Jul-2006 20:55:42 3-152 WL FOM / Perforating Accessories 3-152
Intentionally Blank
Private
4-i WL FOM / Selectivity 4-i
4 Selectivity
4.1 Addressable Switch ____________________________________________ 4-1
4.1.1 Addressable Switch Firing System ____________________________ 4-1
4.1.1.1 Principal applications _____________________________________ 4-1
4.1.1.2 General hardware information _____________________________ 4-1
4.1.1.3 Test Equipment __________________________________________ 4-2
4.1.2 Switch Function ______________________________________________ 4-4
4.1.3 Specifications ________________________________________________ 4-5
4.1.4 Wellsite gun test procedure ___________________________________ 4-5
4.1.5 Troubleshooting the gun string ________________________________ 4-6
4.1.6 Troubleshooting the Unit/Cable/Head/CCL _____________________ 4-7
4.2 Selective Switches _____________________________________________ 4-8

4.2.1 Switch Function ______________________________________________ 4-8
4.2.2 Selective Switch Specifications ______________________________ 4-10
4.2.3 Selective Switch Tips ________________________________________ 4-10
4.2.4 Selective Switch Troubleshooting ____________________________ 4-12
4.2.5 Selective Switch Checks ____________________________________ 4-13
4.2.5.1 Intercarrier Condition ____________________________________ 4-13
4.2.5.2 Check a Selective Switch or Monoswitch After Installation in Selective
Adapter with SFT 300 (SSMM H-622622) _________________ 4-13
4.3 Dual Diode ____________________________________________________ 4-14
4.3.1 Dual Diode Specifications ___________________________________ 4-16
4.3.2 Check a Dual Diode Plug or Enerjet Dual Diode Switch with SFT
300 ________________________________________________________ 4-16
4.3.3 Electrical Check for Dual Diode with Plug out of Gun __________ 4-17
4.4 Setting Tool to Gun Adapters __________________________________ 4-18
Private
SRC-Wireline\SRC-Wireline\InTouch ID 3013565\3.1\Release Date:10-Jun-2004\EDMS UID: 274896043\Produced: 13-Jul-2006 20:55:42 4-ii
Private
WL FOM / Selectivity
Intentionally Blank

4-ii
4-1 WL FOM / Selectivity 4-1
4 SELECTIVITY FOM, SRC
4.1 Addressable Switch
4.1.1 Addressable Switch Firing System

4.1.1.1 Principal applications

The Addressable Switch Firing System (ASFS) serves as a replacement for the
percussion switches used for selective perforating. Additional benefits include
“Skip Over”, shot indication, definitive gun identification and an additional layer
of safety.
4.1.1.2 General hardware information
Potential Severity: Major

Potential Loss: Personnel
Hazard Category: explosives
When using the AS Firing System all current Schlumberger Explosive Safety
procedures must still be followed.
Primary advantages of the ASFS switches include:
• Detonator cannot be accidentally fired by just applying power

• Unique address for each switch
• Internal electronic switch eliminates mechanical shock switches
• Provide skip over in case of a misfire
• Provide means for shot indication
• Switch circuitry can be tested before arming the gun
Private
Feed-thruoughs
Individual guns must be isolated from each other to avoid flooding when adjacent
guns are shot. Refer to ASGS maintenance manual (InTouch ID: 3770545) for
hardware listing.
Tool limitations
Although lab tests show successful operation with cable lengths ranging from 0
to 30K-Ft, limited verification testing has been performed using H2S cable and
COAX. Very long NT heptacables, especially at higher temperatures, present a

particular telemetry problem at this stage of development.
4.1.1.3 Test Equipment

Addressable Switch Tester (Field Tester)
The Addressable Switch Tester (T6041781) determines the number of guns on

a gun string and provides a valid address list. It also helps troubleshoot a gun
string by detecting switch communication failures. The field tester is considered
to be a “Safety Meter” used to test the gun string (without CCL).
Personal Digital Assistant (PDA)
The iPaq PDA (B046409) initiates Field Tester, operates the Field Tester
program, downloads data and stores data.
Private
SRC-Wireline\SRC-Wireline\InTouch ID 3013565\3.1\Release Date:10-Jun-2004\EDMS UID: 274896043\Produced: 13-Jul-2006 20:55:42 4-3 WL FOM / Selectivity 4-3
Figure 4-1: Addressable Switch Tester and PDA
Gun Simulator Test Box
The Gun Simulator Test Box (T6041782) allows WAFE systems to be checked
out without any explosives being involved. This confirms proper operation of the
WAFE systems before connecting any guns. Powering up the simulated gun
string with OP and performing a Gun Check will check the CCL, cables, the head
and MCM. It is attached to the lower head of the CCL during system testing.
Private
Figure 4-2: Gun Simulator Test Box
4.1.2 Switch Function

Uplink telemetry is a digital signal similar to an NRZ (non-return to zero) scheme
using 10-mA variations in communication current. Telemetry words are of 3.3-ms
width. The 16-bit hexadecimal switch address is transmitted using two of the
8-bit words.
Downlink telemetry is an FSK (frequency shift key) scheme using 3-kHz and
6-kHz signals in 3.3-ms words. The 16-bit address is transmitted down using two
of the 8-bit words. The command word consists of 8 bits to digitally send arm,
fire, or W/L on commands to the microprocessor in the addressable switch.
A gun string using addressable switchs will be wired and fired as in Figure 4-3
Armed Multi-gun String, all switches connected one after another.
Private
Gun 3 Gun 2 Gun 1
Detonator Detonator Detonator
Red Black Red Black Red Black
White White Blue White White Blue White White Blue

Black Black Black Black Black Black
Switch 3 Switch 2 Switch 1
Figure 4-3: Armed Multi-gun String

Switch white wire - to white (hot) wire from top of this gun
Switch black wire - to gun ground wire
Switch blue wire (or blue/white stripe) - to white (hot) wire going to lower gun. On
the very bottom gun in the string, just clip the blue wire off.
Switch red/white wire – to detonator wire (positive side if applicable)
Switch black/white wire – to detonator wire (ground side if applicable)
Table 4-1: Addressable Switch Specifications
1
Part Number T6005241 (100048404)
Maximum temperature 340°F (171°C)
Number of guns 1 to 40
2
Maximum pressure rating for 1 hr (psi) 15,000
1
The High Voltage Addressable Switch (100048404) is required for use with Secure devices.
2
With optional high pressure feed-thru. 5000 with standard low pressure feed-thru.
4.1.4 Wellsite gun test procedure
Tip
The gun string MAY be checked with the Field Tester AFTER arming all the guns.
Private
At the wellsite, or during troubleshooting, install the Addressable Switch Field

Tester and test the gun string again, using steps 1 through 12 (see Addressable
Switch Field Tester Manual at InTouchSupport.com).
At the wellsite or during troubleshooting, install the Addressable Switch Field

Tester (T6041781) and perform a gun test.
1. Confirm that the number of addresses read corresponds with the number of
devices physically present. There must be no duplicate addresses
2. Save the address listing in a gun file (*.gun) or print out a copy. If a previous
gun file has been saved, a troubleshooting file can be saved as a test file
(*.tst).
3. After launching OP and communicating with the gun string in the well,
compare the switch address lists. There should be no discrepancy. OP
software will use the switch addresses it finds, regardless, and will not allow
shooting unless a good gun check is obtained.
4.1.5 Troubleshooting the gun string
Tip
If a misrun occurs, retest the gun string using the Addressable Switch Tester.
Detonating devices DO NOT have to be removed from the gun string before
testing with the Field Tester.
1. Install the Addressable Switch Tester (T6041781) and check the gun string.
Feedback from the tester will indicate which devices are responding and
which are not.
Private
Figure 4-4: Addressable Switch Tester and PDA
2. If there is a switch problem or a gun wiring problem, it will most likely be just
below the bottom-most device that returned a correct address.
Tip
Remember that communication begins with the gun at the top of the string and
progresses downward. If the Field Tester only finds 3 devices in a longer gun
string, the PDA will display information for guns 1, 2 and 3, but that information is
really for the only guns found, which are at the top of the gun string. The problem
will be in the area between the 3rd and 4th guns from the top of the gun string.
Possible problems:
• The 4th device from the top could be bad or have a bad ground.
• A portion of the 3rd device from the top could be bad.
• The Feed-thru connection between the 3rd and 4th devices could be open or
shorted to mass.
4.1.6 Troubleshooting the Unit/Cable/Head/CCL

1. Follow all applicable hot check procedures.
Private
2. Attach the Addressable Switch Gun Simulator test box (T6041782) to the
lower head of the CCL.
Figure 4-5: Addressable Switch Gun Simulator
3. Power up the simulated gun string and perform a Gun Check.
4.2 Selective Switches

The multi-carrier selective firing system permits shooting any number of
random length carrier guns on a single trip to the well. Limitations are wellhead
equipment, cable working strengths, and rig height. The selective firing feature is
provided by expendable, polarity discriminating switching devices. Two switches,
Type I and Type II indicated by color coded lead wires are employed.
4.2.1 Switch Function

As shown schematically below, the selective switch is essentially a single pole,
double throw switch coupled with a polarity discriminating system. The switch
is shock wave actuated, in Hyperdome guns by blast from the detonating cord,
and in hollow carrier guns by the shock wave from the detonating charges. The
electrical switching element in the switch is the piston. Shock action drives this
Private
piston, thereby actuating the switch. By alternating the polarity discriminating

switches and alternately applying electrical power of the correct polarity,
selectivity is assured.
Diode Connection to Gun below
Colored Lead (Red) NO NC

Switch Piston
White Lead
Type I Switch
Diode Connection to Gun below
Colored Lead (Green) NO NC
Switch Piston
White Lead
Type II Switch
NO = Normally Open
NC = Normally Closed
Figure 4-6: Type I and Type II Switch
The bottom gun is always fired first by applying positive voltageto the shooting
circuit. Note that the bottom gun will fire on either polarity and caution must
be exercised. The switches in the gun string route current to the detonator in
the bottom gun firing the gun.
Private
When the bottom gun fires, it actuates the piston in the contact switch between
the bottom and second guns, connecting the detonator in the second gun to the
shooting circuit. The diode in the switch immediately above the lowermost gun,
however, prevents positive voltage from firing the second gun.
Negative voltage is then applied to fire the second gun. When negative voltage
is applied, the diode in the switch allows current to flow through the detonator
in the second gun, firing the gun. Subsequent guns in the string are fired in the
same manner by alternately applying positive and negative voltage.
Gun #4 (Red) Switch Gun #3 (Green) Switch Gun #2 (Red) Switch Gun #1
4.2.2 Selective Switch Specifications

Table 4-2: Selective Switch Specifications
Description Temperature Pressure Type I Type II Shock MonoSwitch

Rating Rating (Red) (Green) Disc Sub (Yellow)
Assembly
EPS 340°F 15,000 psi P282520 P282522 P247610 P429997
(171°C) (103,421
kPa)
US 340°F 15,000 psi H523636 H523637 N/A H354050
(171°C) (103,421
kPa)
4.2.3 Selective Switch Tips

DO DO NOT
Store in dry place. Remove from container tube until ready to
install.
Handle with care (no shocks). Remove paper washers.
Take special care not to damage the very thin Apply more than 300 V DC without current flow.
insulating anodized coating and the one way
operating contact brushes.
Change retainer nut each time. Check for Start the firing operation on the wrong polarity;
burrs. File bore if needed. this can fire two successive guns.
Private
For Hyperdome guns, use H247290 to tighten Let switch turn while tightening nut.
nut while holding switch.
Load second shot in port plug guns. Do not load top shot in port plug guns.
Cut detonating cord so that boot on cord is Violate the power polarity-color code system.
flush with top charge on carrier guns. For example, failure to alternate the Type I and
Type II switch units may result in “machine
gunning” of successive carriers.
Insulate lead covered detonating cord on
Hyperdome guns.
Private
4.2.4 Selective Switch Troubleshooting

Bad contact brushes (Switch actuated)
Corrosion, moisture inside (Storage problem)

Shock on switch while installing
Piston slid off from body
Piston rotated while screwing retainer
Piston rotated while handling
Open Circuit
Insufficient piston movement (Switch actuated)
Shaped charge not at top (Hyperdome gun only)

Piston bent by too close detonating cord
Used obsolete shock disc
Defective intercarrier or retainer
(retainer nut used twice)
Short Circuit
Insulating coating damaged

Retainer nut over tightened
Paper washers removed
Intercarrier hole dirty or damaged
Retainer nut already used
Too high voltage
Defect in insulated coating (inspection)
Leak inner O-ring piston
Blow Out Retainer nut not tightened enough

Retainer or intercarrier thread damaged
(retainer used twice)
Private
4.2.5 Selective Switch Checks
4.2.5.1 Intercarrier Condition

1. Bad threads: Retainer nut will not be tight enough resulting in poor seal
of switch.
2. Bad seat for switch O-ring may cause fluid from lower gun to leak past switch
O-ring and desensitize upper gun.
3. Burrs, scratches or oxide in intercarrier cavity will damage switch insulating
coating.
4. Running detonating cord through intercarrier (composite gun without
selectivity) damages the bore. An intercarrier that has been used for this
technique should never be used with a selective switch.
5. Use Go - No Go gauge to check seat.
4.2.5.2 Check a Selective Switch or Monoswitch After Installation

in Selective Adapter with SFT 300 (SSMM H-622622)
2. Connect RED lead probe to WHITE wire and press BLACK lead probe into
CONNECTOR hole in switch piston (end for attaching Shock Disk or Wire
Connector). There must be continuity of less than ≈ 1 ohm.
3. Disconnect BLACK lead probe from CONNECTOR hole in switch piston, but
leave RED lead probe attached to WHITE wire.
CHECK.
5. Leave RED lead probe attached to WHITE wire and hold BLACK lead probe
against Selective Switch/Monoswitch metallic BODY. Resistance must be
6. Leave RED lead probe attached to WHITE wire and connect BLACK lead
probe to COLORED wire (either Red or Green). Resistance must be infinite
(∞ ohms). Change polarity to Negative (-) DC. The resistance must remain
Private
7. Leave BLACK lead probe connected to COLORED wire and Function Switch
set to Negative (-) DC position. Disconnect RED lead probe from WHITE
wire and hold RED probe against Selective Switch/Monoswitch metallic body.
Resistance must be infinite (∞ ohms). Change polarity to Positive (+) DC
position. The resistance must remain infinite (∞ ohms).
8. No provision for checking diode circuit, as it is open until switch is actuated
by shock wave.
4.3 Dual Diode

The dual diode provides a reliable alternative to selective switches when shooting
only two guns. Unlike piston type selective switches, the dual diode provides
selectivity only by means of diodes, not pressure actuated contacts.
Diode
Blue Lead
Connection to
Diode Gun below
White Lead
Figure 4-8: Dual Diode
Note
The Enerjet Dual Diode functions electrically the same as the Dual Diode Plug
but physically appears different. The upper end has a single (white) wire. The
lower end has a white wire (for the bottom gun) and a blue wire (for the top gun).
The diode arrangement provides continuity to the lower gun detonator with
positive polarity and the upper gun detonator with negative polarity.
Private

Unlike a selective switch which has an open circuit to the top gun detonator lead
prior to switch actuation, the dual diode plug has continuity between the power
lead and both gun connections. Therefore, neither gun is to be armed before
the cable head is connected.
Dual Diode
Upper Gun Plug Lower Gun
Detonator Detonator
Figure 4-9: Circuit Diagram
When more than two guns are run the dual diode plug can be used to replace
the bottom Type I (red) switch.
Type I Type II Dual Diode
Gun #4 (Red) Switch Gun #3 (Green) Switch Gun #2 Plug Gun #1
Private
4.3.1 Dual Diode Specifications

Table 4-3: Dual Diode Specifications
Description Temperature Pressure Rating Part Number

Rating
Dual Diode Plug 400°F [204°C] 20,000 psi [137,895 P247856
kPa]
Dual Diode Plug (low cost) 400°F [204°C] 20,000 psi [137,895 H432064
kPa]
Enerjet Dual Diode Plug 400°F [204°C] 20,000 psi [137,895 H304818
kPa]
4.3.2 Check a Dual Diode Plug or Enerjet Dual Diode

Switch with SFT 300
It is preferred that the plug is already installed in the selective adapter so the
following checks will cover installation.
Figure 4-11: Dual Diode Plug and Enerjet Dual Diode Circuit Diagram
1. Set Range Switch to the R x 100 position and perform a ZERO-OHMS

CHECK.
2. Connect RED lead probe to the UPPER WHITE plug wire.
3. Place BLACK lead probe on the LOWER TERMINAL (OR LOWER WHITE
WIRE). The resistance should be between 600 and 700 ohms.
4. Set Function Switch to Negative (-) DC position. The resistance must be
infinite (∞ ohms). Set Range Switch to R x 10,000 position. Resistance
must remain infinite (∞ ohms).
Private
5. Set the Range Switch to R x 100. Leave Function Switch in the Negative (-)
DC position and RED lead probe connected to the UPPER WHITE plug
wire. Connect the BLACK lead probe to the BLUE wire. Resistance should
measure between 600 and 700 ohms.
6. Leave both lead probes connected as described above, set Function Switch
to Positive (+) DC position. The resistance must be infinite (∞ ohms). Set
Range Switch to R x 10,000 position. Resistance must remain infinite (∞
ohms).
7. Leave the Function Switch set to Positive (+) DC position and the Range
Switch set to the R x 10,000 position, as well as the RED lead probe
connected to the UPPER WHITE plug wire. Disconnect the BLACK lead
probe from the BLUE wire and hold the BLACK lead probe against Dual
Diode metallic BODY. The resistance must measure infinite (∞ ohms).
8. Leaving both lead probes connected as described above, set Function Switch
to Negative (-) DC position. The resistance must remain infinite (∞ ohms).
4.3.3 Electrical Check for Dual Diode with Plug out of Gun
Checks shown in use Safety Meter. Checks shown in Figure 4-12 Electrical
Checks using Schlumberger Safety MultiMeter SFT-300 or a Conventional
Multimeteruse a conventional multimeter.
Private
∞ 0 Continuity of Upper Gun
+
Alligator clips
10K
Blue
- +
White
∞ 0
Reverse Polarity of Upper Gun Diode
10K
Blue
- +
White
∞ 0
Continuity of Lower Gun Diode
10K
Blue
- +
White
∞ 0
Reverse Polarity of Lower Gun Diode
10K
Blue
- +
White
∞ 0
Insulation of Wires to Plug Body
+ Note: Both ends of the body must be grounded,

as they are insulated by the rubber.
3
10K
Blue
- + 2
1
White
Figure 4-12: Electrical Checks using Schlumberger Safety MultiMeter

SFT-300 or a Conventional Multimeter
4.4 Setting Tool to Gun Adapters

These special adapters allow the user to set a plug or packer and then shoot a
string of carrier guns on the same trip into the well. Two adapters are available:
Private
Table 4-4: Baker Setting Tool to Gun Adapters
Adapter Assembly Part Number

4 in. Casing Gun to CPST-AA or BST #20 H247629
3-3/8 in. Casing Gun to CPST-CB or BST #10 H247630
The Dual Diode Module (T6015701) is electronically identical to the dual diode
plug. It allows activation the setting tool and shooting the guns above it on
negative polarity.
Private
Private
WL FOM / Selectivity
Intentionally Blank

4-20
5-i WL FOM / Depth Control 5-i
5 Depth Control
5.1 Perforating Depth Control ______________________________________ 5-1
5.2 Procedures for Perforating Depth Control ______________________ 5-2
5.2.1 Correlation/PDC Log _________________________________________ 5-2
5.2.2 Perforating the Well __________________________________________ 5-3
Private
SRC-Wireline\SRC-Wireline\InTouch ID 3013565\3.1\Release Date:10-Jun-2004\EDMS UID: 274896043\Produced: 13-Jul-2006 20:55:42 5-ii WL FOM / Depth Control 5-ii
Intentionally Blank
Private
5-1 WL FOM / Depth Control 5-1
5 DEPTH CONTROL
5.1 Perforating Depth Control

When perforating, depth control is second in importance only to Safety. No
matter how high the shot density, how deep the penetrations, how large the
entrance hole, how sophisticated the phasing or how great the operational
efficiency, if the perforations aren’t at the depth interval the client has requested
the well will not achieve its full potential production.
The desired depth interval to perforate will typically have been selected from a
formation evaluation log. Commonly this will be an openhole log but in older
wells it may be a casedhole log (RST, TDT, etc.). As all perforating depths must
be referenced to this evaluation log it is commonly called the Reference Log.
The most accurate method of positioning the perforating gun will be to tie its
depth to the Reference Log using casing collars as depth markers. Since the
Reference Log generally will not include a casing collar curve an intermediary
survey must be ran. This service will include a casing collar measurement and at
least one other measurement that can be correlated to the Reference Log. Often
a gamma ray or other nuclear measurement will be used for this correlation. The
resulting log is often refereed to as a Perforating Depth Control (PDC) Log if this
is its only function. However, in many cases this objective is combined with the
desire to make other well parameter measurements. When this is the case the
log will include the output of additional well parameter sensors and for purposes
of perforating depth control it will be referred to as a Correlation Log. A PDC log
is generally recorded using a GR-CCL or Neutron-CCL. Correlation logs will be
GR-CCL combined with USIT, CBT, RST, TDT, etc.
When a perforating gun is being positioned across the desired depth interval a
perforating casing collar log (also called a tie-in strip) is ran and compared to
the Correlation/PDC Log to confirm that the gun’s depth corresponds to the
clients desired interval to perforate.
Private
Formation
Evaluation Perforating
Correlation Collar log
Reference Log (PDC)
Log (Tie-in Strip)
Effectively Tie-in log depth is adjusted to

match the reference log depth.
Figure 5-1: Reference Log
5.2 Procedures for Perforating Depth Control
5.2.1 Correlation/PDC Log

All casedhole logs should be treated as potential perforating depth control logs
(GR-CCL or GR-CCL w/CBL, CET, CBT, CNT, TDT, etc.). These services
usually serve both as a Correlation Log for perforating and a formation or
casedhole parameter measurement service. It is therefore critical that you not
only pay close attention to the quality of the sensor measurements but also to
the accuracy of the recorded depth while recording a casedhole log that may be
used as a perforating depth control log.
1. Ask the client to identify the formation evaluation log used to pick perforating
depths. This is the Reference Log. Obtain a copy of the log complete with
header information from the client. Confirm the well identification, date it was
recorded and zones of interest. When overlapping, be within 0.5 ft of the
appropriate log at the bottom most zone of interest.
2. Physically verify your tool string configuration and measure points of the tools
used for the correlation log. Make sure the software is correct for the physical
tool string. Where possible, verify the log response (VDL collars on depth
with CCL, GR on depth with VDL formation response in good cement).
Private
3. While tying in, check the Reference log for any pulls or other anomalies that
may affect the log response. Be within 0.5 ft of the Reference log at the
bottom most zone of interest.
4. Do not correct for depth while logging. If depth corrections must be made,
stop logging, make the correction, and start a new log overlapping the first
section. In cases where downhole markers such as short joints or DV tools
are not available, small differences in the casing joint lengths may be critical
when comparing the perforating tie in collar log with the Correlation/PDC
Log.The unit’s measuring wheel must be calibrated to minimize its differences
with the openhole unit’s. All depth corrections should be discussed with the
client and noted clearly on the log header.
5. When overlaying prints to correlate depths verify that the 50-ft. and 100-ft.
(25 and 50 m) depth lines overlay properly. It is easy to mistakenly be a
whole division off.
6. Use curve scales the client has requested but keep in mind that track
coverage of 70 to 90% is ideal when the curve will be used for depth
correlation. Note that gamma ray and neutron responses will differ behind
cement or in centralized pipe. Take this into account when choosing scales
and while tying in.
7. Record a log across all zones of interest. Discuss any log quality or depth
control problems with the client. Repeat any anomalies.
8. With the client’s permission, include a short or long casing joint or other depth
marker (DV tool, liner top, packers, or TD) if available within 500 ft. of the
planned perforating interval. If a depth marker is available further up the hole,
log a strip through it on the way out. When logging to TD, be cautious of green
cement, sand plugs, and other debris on bottom, which may cause sticking.
9. When perforating is planned on subsequent descents using the same rigup,
flag the line (Carillon of marks) or mark the flange depth at the zone of
interest as a secondary depth measurement.
5.2.2 Perforating the Well

1. Obtain copies of both the Reference Log and the Correlation Log (Perforating
Depth Control) from the client. Check the log headers to verify well
identification, location, run date and run number. Confirm the perforating
interval with the client. Review the Reference Log and ask yourself:
• Would I perforate here?

• Is there any short collar in the correlation log?
• Is there any marker (eg. Perfs, top of liner, etc) in the correlation log?
Private
• In general: Could I have any problems to correlate my depth?

If there is any question discuss it further with the client. Confirm that the
Correlation Log was properly recorded and that all curves are on depth with
each other and with the Reference Log.
2. If a depth discrepancy exists, discuss this with the client and confirm that the
perforating depths provided have already been adjusted to compensate for
the difference. If this adjustment has not been made you will need to either
record a new Correlation (PDC) Log, one that is on depth with the Reference
Log, or adjust the perforating interval depths to match the Correlation Log.
The preferred method should be to run a new Correlation Log (eg.GR-CCL).
However, if the depth discrepancy is simple enough it may be possible to
adjust the perforating interval depth.

When adjusting perforating interval depths to compensate for a Correlation
Log depth mismatch overlay the logs and transcribe the interval from the
Reference Log to the depth adjusted Correlation Log.
Do not estimate the depth offset and then mentally add or subtract this from
the requested interval to perforate. This type of mental gymnastics leaves
you open to simple errors.
Do not replay the Correlation Log with a depth offset.
Always review any adjustments with the client and get their approval before
proceeding.
If the correction is more complex than a simple depth offset contact the
operations manager to review the options. A fresh PDC Log may be the
best corrective procedure.
3. Draw a gun sketch. Measure and record the distances from the collar locator
measure point to top shot of each gun as well as the distance from the collar
locator measure point to the bottom of the gun string. Visually inspect each
gun to ensure that it has been loaded as marked. Visually confirm that the
guns are connected in the proper order with the proper switches.
4. Manually calculate the CCL stop depths and record them and the perforation
interval depths on the gun sketch. Enter the interval depths and measured
distances into the data acquisition computer. Cross check the computed stop
depths with your manually calculated values.
5. Zero the tool string at the collar locator. Note any differences between the
log datum’s of the Reference Log, the Correlation/PDC log and this descent
to determine the expected downhole adjustment that will be required to
compensate for datum differences.
6. While descending monitor the two depth systems (if available). If one lags
or fails, note it and disallow it in the software. A correctly functioning depth
measuring system is critical to perforating depth control. A depth system
Private
check should have been part of your pre-departure check before leaving the
base. Do not proceed to a job with anything less than a completely functional
depth system.
7. Tie into collars or downhole markers. If the actual downhole correction
differs from the expected correction, stop and resolve the differences before
proceeding. When zeroing the collar locator between runs, be consistent.
Remember to account for any corrections made when coming back out of the
hole, especially when adding depth to tie into logs that used the openhole
Kelly bushing as the log datum. Use secondary depth measurement
techniques for shallow depth warning in addition to the primary depth system.
8. Log and record any downhole markers (packers, DV tools, etc.)
9. Record at least 6 collars (approx. 200’) across the desired perforation

interval. If obvious downhole markers are not available overlay the collars
of the tie-in log with the Correlation Log and slide them up and down one
joint to determine if another tie-in exists. If in doubt, find a section on the
Correlation Log with irregular length joints and log these collars. Be careful
to avoid sections on the Correlation and Reference logs that exhibit depth
corrections or tool sticking.
10. Print out your Correlation pass and compare to the original log. Make sure
you shift one collar up and then one collar down to verify the log matches
one position only.
Figure 5-2: Correlation
Private
Drop below the desired stop depth and record a CCL log while slowly pulling
the gun into position. Record the 3 nearest collars below the CCL stop depth.
Keep the logging speed low (~2500 fph) to minimize the effects of creep.
Note: Very Important

As you pull the gun into position confirm that your CCLs collars are still on
depth as they appear on the monitor screen. Something could have changed
when you went down and up again.
In situations where a unique casing collar signature cannot be identified

and other indicators are not available a Gun Gamma Ray should be used
to correlate the depth.
11. Confirm again that the computer provided stop depth matches the manually
calculated stop depth on the gun sketch. After allowing the shot, confirm the
polarity of the shot with the system’s displayed polarity.
12. Prepare the crew and client for positive shot detection.
• Hold the line

• Monitor tension
• Observe the shooting current.
If the status is in doubt, do not proceed to the next gun.
13. After the gun has fired, with the permission of the client, record a CCL log
across each perforated interval to verify the original tie-in. A well-maintained
collar locator will often respond to casing perforations.
Note
If you are perforating through tubing or other restrictions and the clearance is
limited this may not be a desirable step. Gun debris may be picked up by the
magnet of the CCL or other gun accessories that may make it difficult to get
past a the restriction when pulling out of the well.
Private
6-i WL FOM / Gun Systems 6-i
6 Gun Systems
6.1 Hollow Carrier Gun Systems ___________________________________ 6-1
6.1.1 High Shot Density (HSD) _____________________________________ 6-1
6.1.1.1 HSD Guns General _______________________________________ 6-1
6.1.1.2 HSD Exploded-View Drawings and Parts Lists _____________ 6-2
6.1.1.3 HSD-L Wireline Gun Exploded-View Drawings and Parts
Lists _____________________________________________________ 6-4
6.1.2 High Efficiency Gun System (HEGS) __________________________ 6-4
6.1.2.1 Description _______________________________________________ 6-4
6.1.2.2 Exploded-View Drawings and Parts Lists __________________ 6-10
6.1.3 2-1/8 in. Hyperdome Gun (TTSG-BA) ________________________ 6-11
6.1.3.1 Description ______________________________________________ 6-11

6.1.4 PerfoExpress Gun System (Provisory) ________________________ 6-19
6.1.4.1 Description ______________________________________________ 6-19
6.1.4.2 References _____________________________________________ 6-21
6.1.5 PURE Gun System _________________________________________ 6-21
6.1.5.1 General Description and Specifications ___________________ 6-21
6.1.5.2 Theory of Operations ____________________________________ 6-24
6.1.5.3 Assembly _______________________________________________ 6-32
6.1.5.5 References _____________________________________________ 6-38
6.1.6 2.00-in FRAC Gun System __________________________________ 6-39
6.1.7 3.12-in. FRAC Gun System (Provisory) _______________________ 6-46
6.1.7.3 References _____________________________________________ 6-55
6.2 Port Plug Gun Systems _______________________________________ 6-55
6.2.1 Addressable Shot-by-Shot Gun System (ASGS) ______________ 6-55
6.2.1.1 Description ______________________________________________ 6-56
6.2.1.3 References _____________________________________________ 6-59
6.2.2 End Loaded Carrier Gun (SCG) ______________________________ 6-60
6.2.2.1 Description ______________________________________________ 6-61
6.2.3 3.12-in Port Plug Gun (PPG) System _________________________ 6-64
6.2.3.3 References _____________________________________________ 6-73
6.2.4 3.12-in Shot-By-Shot (SBS) Gun System _____________________ 6-73
6.2.4.3 References _____________________________________________ 6-82
Private
6-ii WL FOM / Gun Systems 6-ii
6.3 Exposed Gun Systems ________________________________________ 6-83

6.3.1 Enerjet Guns _______________________________________________ 6-83
6.3.1.1 Description ______________________________________________ 6-83
6.3.1.2 Exploded-View Drawings and Parts Lists _________________ 6-100
6.3.2 Pivot Gun (TTPG) __________________________________________ 6-100
6.3.2.1 Description _____________________________________________ 6-100
6.3.2.2 Exploded-View Drawings and Parts Lists _________________ 6-109
Private
6-1 WL FOM / Gun Systems 6-1
6 GUN SYSTEMS
6.1 Hollow Carrier Gun Systems
6.1.1 High Shot Density (HSD)

This section is provided as a reference only. The complete and latest version of
this manual can be found at InTouch ID: 4210637.
6.1.1.1 HSD Guns General
HSD Gun Systems Mechanical Data and Ratings Summary
This information is available at InTouch ID 2024546. It has been provided here

for your convenience.
HSD liquid only guns
The HSD liquid-only guns (HSD-L) eliminate the cost associated with the
alignment features and scallops in the standard HSD gun to provide a lower
cost system. The HSD-L should only be used in wells with liquid (SG > 1) in
the borehole, and in applications where gun alignment is not required and/or
downhole completion restrictions are not a major concern. High performance
PowerJet Omega charges cannot be used in HSD-L guns because these
charges may split the scallop free carriers.
The HSD-L guns utilize existing HSD adapters and detonation transfer
components, PerfoExpress gun carrier material and corresponding PerfoExpress
shaped charge configurations. Therefore, gun loading instructions for the HSD
guns also apply to the HSD-L guns. Refer to the exploded-view drawing and
parts list document listed in the Equipment and Hardware section of the HSD-L
InTouch Reference Page (InTouch ID 4050168).
Private
HSD gun-to-gun transfers
Booster position gage (H352014)
The booster position gage (Figure 6-1 Booster Position Gage (H352014))
measures the booster position at the upper and lower end of all HSD guns while
simultaneously checking that the donor booster is not too large in diameter and
that there is space available for it in the detonation transfer module.
The gage is marked with full traceability information including sequential serial
numbers.
Green Blue Lettering

Lettering
Shaft Round Plate

Figure 6-1: Booster Position Gage (H352014)
6.1.1.2 HSD Exploded-View Drawings and Parts Lists

1.56 in. HSD Catalog Drawings and Parts Lists
Refer to InTouchSupport.com for the most current exploded-view drawings and

parts lists InTouch ID: 3997089.
Private


2.50 .in HSD Catalog Drawings and Parts Lists






4.50/4.72 in. HSD Catalog Drawings and Parts Lists

Private

6.1.1.3 HSD-L Wireline Gun Exploded-View Drawings and Parts

Lists
2.88 in. HSD-L Wireline Gun Catalog Drawings and Parts Lists



6.1.2 High Efficiency Gun System (HEGS)

this manual can be found at InTouchSupport.com (Content ID: 3012750).
6.1.2.1 Description
The 3-1/8 and 4 in. Low Pressure Gun Systems (LPGS) are economical, wireline
conveyed perforating systems designed to address the lower pressure (4000
psi), lower temperature (210°F) Casing Gun markets. Known more commonly
by their marketing name, High Efficiency Gun System (HEGS), both systems
possess the same basic features. Optional enhancements allow the 3-1/8
system to be used up to 6200 psi pressure at 340°F.
The 4 in. HEGS (LPGS-AB) is run with the 3-3/8 in. CAL-B for depth correlation.
The 3.38 MONO to 4.00 HEG Adapter (H523090) is used between the Upper
Head of the gun and the CAL-B. An alternative method is to replace the standard
CAL-B Lower Head with Adapter Head (H429512). This enables the CAL-B to
make up directly to the Upper Head.
Private
The 3-1/8 in. HEGS (LPGS-BB) can be run with either the CAL-B or the 3-1/8 in.
CAL-G. The CAL-G was designed for the 3-1/8 in. HEGS and makes up directly
to the Upper Head. 3.38 MONO to 3.12 HEG Adapter Head (H523081) must be
run between the CAL-B and the Upper Head.
Features
(See Figure 6-2 3-1/8 in. LPGS Gun System Configuration and Figure 6-3 4
in. LPGS Gun System Configuration)
• Low cost
• Carriers cut to desired length (variable, up to 40 ft) at loading shop, minimal

machining required
• Molded foam Loading Tubes for very fast and easy loading
• New, “bolt-on” heads require minimal maintenance
• Expendable Carrier reduces casing damage and assures maximum debris
removal
• Fluid desensitized (bottom armed)
• Minimal cleanup time required
Private
Specifications for 3-1/8 in. LPGS
PEK-B
PEK-E
CAL-B
CAL-GA
P046158
H523045
Upper Head
Assembly
Adapter H712665
H523081
Gun Carrier Foam Optional

3-1/8 in OD Loading Steel
Tube Loading
(2 ft Section) Tube
Lower Head
Assembly
H712668
Long Bleed Plug

H429334
Figure 6-2: 3-1/8 in. LPGS Gun System Configuration
Private
Table 6-1: Specifications for 3-1/8 in. LPGS
Pressure Rating 0 to 4000 psi

0 to 6200 psi, with optional equipment 1
Temperature Rating 210°F for 1 hr
2
340°F for 1 hr with optional equipment
Combinable CAL-G, CAL-B
Outside Diameter of Gun 3.12 in.
Max. After Shot in Fluid Due to Swell = 3.38 in. Over Burrs = 3.58 in.
Max. After Shot in Air Due to Swell = 3.65 in. Over Burrs = 3.66 in.
Gun Lengths Carrier stock available in 40 ft random lengths. Specific guns
are cut to length at loading shop.

Multiple Guns Selective with GA Switches
Head Coupling New Single Twist-Lok with locking screw
Charge 34B HJ RDX
(H523005)
34B Performance - API Penetration = 16.07 in. Entrance Hole = 0.39 in.
Section 1
Optional Charge 34C CP
(H447228)
34C Performance - API Penetration = 6.5 in. Entrance Hole = 0.60 in.
Section 1
Phasing 90°
Optional 60°, 120°, 180°
Shot Density 4 shots/ft, can be loaded for less if required
6 shots/ft with the 38C charge
Detonator C Detonator, DFC10, Explo.
Optional Detonators Any wireline detonator (at higher cost)
Detonating Cord 80 gr/ft PETN Detonating Cord
Loading Tube 2 ft Styrofoam half sections, each with 8 shots
Optional Steel Tube
Lubricant Molykote, (Molybdenum Disulfide) B029076
Carrier Weight 8.0 lb/ft (without charges)
Upper and Lower Head Torque 300 ft-lb
Special Tools Head Removal Tool
(Figure 6-4 Special Tools) 2-3/4 in. Socket
Torque Wrench, 0 to 150 ft-lb for upper and lower heads
Torque Multiplier and Adapters
Torque Wrench, 0 to 120 in.-lb for wire seal compression screw
1
Pressure rating increases requires the use of the modification of each gun head body (H712650 rev AD or
later) with HT/HP Seals (H432328) and wire (E027787).
2
Temperature rating increases require the use of RDX detonating cord and steel loading tubes.
Private
Specifications for 4 in. LPGS
PEK-B
CAL-B
P046158
Remove
Cal-B Lower Adapter
Head H523090
Adapter Upper Head

Assembly
H712671
Foam
Gun Carrier Loading
4 in OD Tube Optional
(2 ft Section) Steel
Loading
Tube
Lower Head
Assembly
H712672
Long Bleed Plug

H429334
Figure 6-3: 4 in. LPGS Gun System Configuration
Private
Table 6-2: Specifications for 4 in. LPGS
Pressure Rating 0 to 4000 psi, suitable for gas wells

Temperature Rating 210°F for 1 hr
Optional 235°F
Combinable CAL-B
Outside Diameter of Gun 4.00 in.
Max. After Shot in Fluid Due to Swell = 4.28 in. Over Burrs = 4.76 in.
Max. After Shot in Air Due to Swell = 4.50 in. Over Burrs = 4.81 in.
Gun Lengths Carrier stock available in 40 ft random lengths. Specific guns
are cut to length at loading shop.
Multiple Guns Selective with GA Switches

Head Coupling New Single Twist-Lok with locking screw
Charge 41B HJ II, SX1
(H429606)
Performance - API Section 1 Penetration = 21.43 in. Entrance Hole = 0.46 in.
Charge 43C Hyperpack, RDX
(H523022)
Performance - API Section 1 Penetration = 10.53 in. Entrance Hole = 0.50 in.
Phasing 90°
Optional 120°
Shot Density 4 SPF, can be loaded for less if required
Detonator C Detonator, DFC10, Explo.
Optional Detonators Any wireline detonator (at higher cost)
Detonating Cord 80 gr/ft PETN Detonating Cord.
Loading Tube 2 ft Foam half sections, each with 8 shots
Optional Steel Tubes
Lubricant Molykote, (Molybdenum Disulfide) B029076
Carrier Weight 12.6 lb/ft (without charges)
Upper and Lower Head Torque 300 ft-lb
Special Tools 3-1/2 in. Socket
(Figure 6-4 Special Tools) Torque Wrench, 0 to 150 ft-lb for upper and lower heads.
Torque Multiplier and Adapters.
Torque Wrench, 0 to 120 in.-lb for wire seal compression screw
Private
Special Tools
Drill Jig H430812 Head Removal Tool

4 in LPGS-AA - H430727 4-in Pilot Drill Bushing (for 4 in LPGS-AA) - H429338
3 1/8 LPGS-BA - H430802 (for 3-1/8 in LPGS-BA) - H523030
3/4 to 1 in Adapter 1 in x 1-1/2 in Adapter

B034311 B034313
3-1/2 in Socket (4 in LPGS-AA) - B034312

2-3/4 in Socket (3-1/8 in LPGS-BA) - B034384
1/2 in Torque Wrench

30 to 150 ft.lbf
B034309
6:1 Torque Multiplier

B034310
Figure 6-4: Special Tools
6.1.2.2 Exploded-View Drawings and Parts Lists

Private
6.1.3 2-1/8 in. Hyperdome Gun (TTSG-BA)

This section is provided as a reference the complete and latest version of this
manual can be found at InTouchSupport.com (Content ID: 3012749).
6.1.3.1 Description
The 2-1/8 in. Hyperdome Gun System is a through-tubing gun system which
utilizes an expendable hollow carrier. This system offers three different types of
phasing: 0°, 60°, and 180°, a maximum service capability of 500°F and 25,000
psi and leaves virtually no debris in the well after perforating. This system
also is more rugged and more tolerant of hostile wellbore fluids compared to
capsule-type perforators.
Many new improvements have been made to the existing system. These
improvements include:
• Uses only finished-end, high-pressure gun carriers.

• Universal upper, intermediate and selective adapters, plus a universal bottom
nose for all phases of the 2-1/8 in. Hyperdome Gun System.
Note
The old Selective Adapter (H115019) is not compatible with the new 60°
loading tube. Use either H712439 or H712449 as a replacement.
Note
A Mod Recap (MR01) has been issued for an existing Upper Head (H178994)
making it compatible with the 180° system as well as the 0° and 60°. A copy
of this Mod Recap can be found in the Mod Recap section of this manual.
• The 60° twisted strip has been replaced by a more precise loading tube.
• All charges are assembled with a universal charge retainer which can used
on any type of new or old style Hyperdome gun regardless of phasing.
Note
Old Retainer Ring (H429790) will not fit new 60° loading tube.
• A new universal channel holder for 0° and 180° guns.
Private
• New non-selective intermediate adapters have been optimized for extended

gun life.
• Replaces booster/detonators with more reliable crimp-on detonators.
Principle of Operation
Selective Firing System
The selective firing system permits shooting any number of guns on a single trip
in the well. Limitations are wellhead equipment, cable working strengths and
rig height. Selective firing is provided by expendable, polarity discriminating
switches. Two types of switches are required; Type I (red) and Type II (green)
indicated by color coded lead wires.
Selective Switch Function
The selective switch is essentially a single pole, double throw switch coupled with
a polarity discriminating system (See Figure 6-5 Type I and II Selective Switches).
The switch is shock wave actuated by a blast from the detonating cord. The
electrical switching element in the switch is the piston. Shock action shears a
retaining flange on this piston, thereby actuating the switch. By alternating Type
1 and Type II switches in the gun string and alternately applying positive and
negative DC electrical power, each gun in the string can be fired selectively.
Private
Diode
Red Lead NO NC
Connection to
Gun Below
Switch Piston
White Lead
Type I (Red Switch)

Diode
Green Lead NO NC
Connection to
Gun Below
Switch Piston
White Lead
Type II (Green Switch)

Figure 6-5: Type I and II Selective Switches
Switch Operation in Gun String
The bottom gun (gun #1) must always be fired first by applying positive voltage
to the shooting circuit (Figure 6-7 Dual Diode Plug Function).

DO NOT apply negative voltage to fire the bottom gun as gun #2 may also fire.
Private
Firing of the bottom gun actuates the piston in the switch between the bottom
gun and gun #2. This connects the detonator in gun #2 to the shooting circuit but
the diode in the switch prevents the positive voltage from firing gun #2.
Applying negative voltage to the detonator will fire gun #2. This connects the
detonator in gun #3 to the shooting circuit. However, the diode in the switch
prevents the negative voltage from firing gun #3. Remaining guns are fired in the
same manner by alternately applying positive and negative voltage.
Gun #4 (Red Switch) Gun #3 (Green Switch) Gun #2 (Red Switch) Gun #1

Figure 6-6: Selective Switch Function
When two or more guns are used, a dual diode plug can be used to replace
the bottom Type I (red switch).

Unlike a selective switch which has an open circuit to the top gun detonator lead
prior to switch actuation, the dual diode plug has continuity between the power
lead and both gun connections. Therefore, neither gun is to be armed before
the cable is connected.
Type I Type II Dual

Gun #4 (Red Switch) Gun #3 (Green Switch) Gun #2 Diode Plug Gun #1
Figure 6-7: Dual Diode Plug Function
Private
Configurations
MH-22 (H030796)
AH-38 (H106437)
EQF-46 (H132600)
CCL-L (H024737)
MPD-H
(H123181)
Upper Head
(H712440)
0/180 60
Intermediate Head
(H712401)
Detonator Sleeve
Selective Adapter (H448816) Selective Adapter
(H712449) (H712449)
Intermediate Selective
Adapter
(H712439)
0/180 60
Intermediate Head
(H712401)
Bottom Nose
(H712441)
Figure 6-8: String Diagram - Standard Service (350°/20,000 psi)
Private
MH-29 (P294015)
AH-106 (H259513)
EQF-54 (H223666)
CCL-AT (P654260)
MPD-M
(H654140)
Upper Head
(H712440)
0/180˚ 60˚
19.25 in. Intermediate Head

(H712401)
0/180˚ 60˚
Intermediate Head
(H712401)
Bottom Nose
(H712441)
Figure 6-9: String Diagram - High Temperature Service (500°/1hr/25,000 psi) PEGS Verified
Private
Specifications
Table 6-3: 2-1/8 in. Scallop Gun (TTSG-BA) Specifications
DESCRIPTION 0° 60° 180°

Max Pressure Rating (@500°F) 25,000 psi (172,369 kPa)
HNS Temperature Rating (1 hr) 500°F (260°C)
HMX Temperature Rating (1 hr) 400°F (205°C)
RDX Temperature Rating (1 hr) 330°F (165°C)
Max Gun Swell in Air (@ 80°F) 2.18 in. 2.18 in. 2.18 in.
Max Gun Swell in Liquid (@ 80°F) 2.18 in. 2.16 in. 2.18 in.
Weight per 10 ft Gun 58 lbm 61 lbm 58 lbm
Weight per 20 ft Gun 100 lbm 103 lbm 100 lbm
Length per 10 ft Gun 156 in. 162 in. 156 in.
Length per 20 ft Gun 276 in. 279 in. 276 in.
Tensile Strength of Gun String 20,000 lbf
Max Shot Density (shots per ft) 4
Explosives
Table 6-4: Explosives
Detonators 0° 60° 180°

Standard Detonator 475°F (246°C) E-161 Crimp-on
(B033720)
Optional Hi Temp Detonator 500°F (260°C) E-126 DuPont - end fire
(B031138)
Detonating Cord 0° 60° 180°
RDX 330°F (166°C) RDX 40 gr/ft H106960
HMX 400°F (204°C) HMX 35 gr/ft B027846
HNS 500°F (260°C) HNS 40 gr/ft H304114
Hyperdome Charges 0° 60° 180°
RDX 330°F (166°C) 25A H224470
HMX 400°F (204°C) 25A H304623
Ultrajet Charges 0° 60° 180°
RDX 330°F (166°C) 25A H304920
HMX 400°F (204°C) 25A H334542
HNS 500°F (260°C) 25A H334544
Private

Selective Switches and Dual Diode

Temperature Type I Type II Shock

Description Pressure Rating
Rating (Red) (Green) Disc
EPS Selective 15,000 psi
340°F (171°C) P282520 P282522 P247610
Switch (103,421 kPa)
US Selective 15,000 psi
400°F (205°C) H432191 H432192 H432078
GA Selective 15,000 psi
340°F (171°C) H523636 H523637 NA
US Dual Diode 400°F (205°C) 20,000 psi P247856 NA NA
Plug (137,895 kPa) H432064
Addressable 340°F (171°C) 15,000 psi T6005241 NA NA
Switch (ASFS) (103,421 kPa)
(Obsolete) 1
High voltage 340°F (171°C) 15,000 psi 100048404 NA NA
addressable (103,421 kPa)
switch (ASFS)
1
Replaced by high voltage addressable switch (100048404).

Private
6.1.4 PerfoExpress Gun System (Provisory)

this manual can be found at InTouch ID: 4211054.
6.1.4.1 Description
Overview and applications

The PerfoExpress Gun System is a standard tier gun family introduced by

the Perforation Gun Systems group at SRC. It has better reliability and
similar performance as current HSD systems. Existing shaped charges, such
as the PowerJet*, UltraJet* and HyperJet* families can all be used in the
PerfoExpress system. The prices for PerfoExpress guns are 10% to 30% less
than corresponding HSD guns.
Features
The following design features are included in PerfoExpress gun systems:
1. It will have 10-ft, 20-ft and 30-ft lengths. This allows for fewer connections
for long perforated intervals.
2. Extensive testing has determined that the end-to-end transfer design is more
reliable than the previous side-by-side transfer assembly. This end-to-end
configuration will provide our connectors with a longer life in terms of number
of runs.
3. Adapters with C-clamp grooves allow field to use C-clamp for quick
connection at rig floor.
4. Gun carriers without scallops are used in this system.
5. The thread engagement is longer so that after the O-ring is removed from the
sealing bore, there will be several threads engaged. This will help release
trapped pressure.
6. To prevent mixing of the end-to-end and side-by-side transfer styles,
PerfoExpress adapters were designed to be incompatible with HSD guns.
7. PerfoExpress guns are only qualified for water application.
8. PerfoExpress is available in sizes 2.88-in, 3.50-in and 4.50-in.
Private
Specifications
OD (in. [mm]) 2.88 3.50 4.50
Shot density (spf), 4, 60 4, 60 5, 72
Phasing (deg) 6, 60 6, 60 12, 135/45
Maximum OD due to 3.19 3.91 4.85 (5 spf)
burr (in. [mm]) 5.06 (12 spf)
Nominal lengths (ft 5, 10, 20, 30 [1.5, 3.0, 6.1, 9.1]
[m])
Maximum 400 [204] 400 [204] 400 [204]
temperature for 1
hr (degF) [degC] 1
Maximum pressure at 20,000 [137,895] 20,000 [137,895] 10,000 [68,900]
400 degF (psi [kPa])
Minimum pressure 100 [689] 100 [689] 100 [689]
(psi [kPa])
Tensile load rating (lbf 110,000 [489] 140,000 [623] 180,000 [801]
[kN]) 2
Loaded gun weight 3
10-ft gun (lbm [kg]) 130 [59] 183 [83] 259 [118] @ 5 spf
265 [120] @ 12 spf
20-ft gun (lbm [kg]) 253 [115] 354 [161] 505 [230] @ 5 spf
517 [235] @ 12 spf
30-ft gun (lbm [kg]) 377 [171] 526 [239] 751 [341] @ 5 spf
770 [350] @ 12 spf
Intermediate adapter 12 [5.5] 19 [8.6] 35 [15.9]
weight (lbm [kg])
Short lower head 8 [3.6] 15 [6.8] 25 [11.4]
weight (lbm [kg]
Adapter make-up 2.14 [54] 2.14 [54] 2.14 [54]
length (in [mm])
Distance between 17.04 17.05 18.40
charges of two 16.11
adjacent guns (in)
4
1
With high temperature explosives and seals.
2
Safety factor of 1.6.
3
Gun weight at maximum shot density.
4
The unloaded charge at the bottom of the gun is counted in unshot section.
Private
6.1.4.2 References
The PerfoExpress section in the TCP Field Operations Manual (InTouch ID:
3012737).
REW On-line Training Domains (InTouch ID: 3525008)
6.1.5 PURE Gun System

this manual can be found at InTouchSupport.com (Content ID: 3896245).
6.1.5.1 General Description and Specifications
Overview
PURE (Perforating for Ultimate Reservoir Exploitation) delivers clean perforations

and thus better productivity and injectivity in old or new wells. This is achieved
utilizing the dynamic underbalance transient phenomena immediately after
perforating.
PURE perforating jobs require specific planning using the PURE Job Planner
and SPAN software along with specific PURE gun and possibly other hardware
to achieve the optimum results. Training is required to be competent in the
PURE perforating techniques. PURE is a “game changing” technology that
brings a whole new set of rules to perforating job design. PURE covers a broad
range of perforating applications in all parts of the world and is applicable to
all conveyance methods including TCP, Wireline, Coiled Tubing, Tractor and
Slickline.
The information in this manual will help get an understanding of what PURE is
and how it is deployed and will be a good reference once training is completed.
This manual will not provide enough information for you to plan and execute a
PURE job for the first time. Specific training is required and can be obtained
from the local PURE expert.
Private
Applications
PURE Gun Systems
The PURE perforating and completion method delivers clean perforations and
improves productivity or injectivity in old wells or new, using TCP and Wireline,
in sandstones and carbonates and in many different completion configurations.
Over 250 jobs have been completed to date. PURE covers a broad range of
perforating applications in all parts of the world. The PURE reference page in
InTouch is the main source of PURE and PURE related information. Below is a
summary of PURE gun equipment and information about ordering. Also below
are links to the PURE gun datasheet, exploded views for many of the PURE gun
systems and other parts lists.
Information about TCP accessories and pressure gauges to be run with PURE
are also available on the Reference page under different headings.
Equipment and Operational Specifications

Table 6-6: PURE Gun System Ratings and Physical Data
Gun Size (in.) 2 2-1/2 2-7/8 3-3/8 3-1/2 4-1/2

Nominal outside 2 2.44 2.802 3.375 3.5 4.5
diameter (in.)
(before firing)
Nominal OD 2 2.52 2.88 3.50 PE1 3.50 PE1 4.5
for intercarrier 3.375 HSD 3.375 HSD
adapters, nose
end etc. (in.)
Max outside 2.26 2.71 3.07 (PJ 3.75 (PJ 3.83 (PJ 4.87 (PJ 4512)
diameter after (PJ (PJ 2906) 3406) Omega 4.83 (PJ 4505)
firing (in.) 2006) 2506) 3506)
including PURE
charges
Max outside N/A N/A 3.01 (PJ 3.6 (PJ 2906 N/A N/A
diameter after 2506 in in water)
firing (in.) at water)
6spf N-1 chg.
including PURE
charges
Typical spf, 6, 60° 6, 60° 6, 60° 4, 6, 60° 4 or 6, 72° 12, 135/45°
phasing 4,180° 4,180° 180° 5, 180° 5, 72°
Nominal lengths 5,10, 20 5,10, 5, 10, 5, 10, 20, 302 5, 10, 20, 5, 10, 20, 302
(ft) 20 20, 302 302
Private
Gun Size (in.) 2 2-1/2 2-7/8 3-3/8 3-1/2 4-1/2

Maximum 400°F 400°F 400°F 400°F [204°C] 400°F 400°F [204°C]
temperature [204°C] [204°C] [204°C] [204°C]
(with high
temperature
explosives
and seals)
dependant
on charge
specification
Maximum 25,000 25,000 25,000 20,000 25,000 10,000
pressure (psi)
at 400°F [204°C]
Minimum 100 100 100 100 100 100
pressure (psi)
Rated tensile 70,000 90,000 100,000 115,000 PE3 150,000 180,000 PE3
load for PURE 150,000 HSD 150,000 HSD
gun systems
(lbf)*(Safety
factor - 2.0)
Weight of 120 190 240 330 390 501 (12 spf)
Loaded 20 446 (5 spf )
ft Gun (lb)
excluding
adapters
PowerJet Yes Yes Yes NO Yes Yes
Omega
compatible
PE = PerfoExpress compatible system
HSD = High Shot Density compatible system
1PerfoExpress TCP connectors are 3.5-in. OD for the 3-3/8-in. size PURE gun.
This OD is less than swell diameter.
2 The 30-ft option is only available for PURE PerfoExpress.
3 The tensile load of the PURE PerfoExpress compatible guns are different from
those of the PURE HSD compatible guns of the same size.
Explosives
Table 6-7: Charges
Description Explosive Type Notes

PURE Charge HNS PURE charge (100059594) used in all gun sizes
Private
Note
The PURE charge is adapted for use in 2.50-in., 2.88-in., 3.38-in., 3.50-in. and
4.50-in. PURE guns with the use of a cap or a combination of cap and standoff
as listed in the PURE Specific Hardware table below and in the Exploded-View
contents in InTouch. Links to the Exploded-View contents in InTouch are located
in chapter 7 .
PURE Specific Hardware

Table 6-8: PURE specific hardware

PURE carriers are required for all PURE guns. Refer to the InTouch content links in the chapter.
2.50-in. Guns
100020450 CAP, 2006 PURE TO PJ 2506 Standoff not required for 2.50-in. guns.
2.88-in. Guns
100166210 ASSEMBLY, PURE, PJ2906, Includes cap (100056376) and standoff
CAP AND STANDOFF (100056378).
100140608 2906 INSERT, RING Insert ring for 2506 charges.
3.38/3.50-in. Guns
100166308 ASSEMBLY, PURE PJ3406, Includes cap (100057040) and standoff
100057612 JACKET, PJ2906 IN 3.38 TUBE
4.50-, 4.62- and 4.72-in. Guns
6.1.5.2 Theory of Operations
Overview
PURE is a technology discovered by Schlumberger and is used to deliver

clean perforations when perforating with conventional shaped charges. Clean
perforations mean better performing wells which help our customers get the
best performance from their reservoirs.
PURE is the biggest discovery in perforating since the development of the shaped
charge. This technology has the potential to completely change the approach
to completion design with regard to perforating job planning and execution.
Private
The results of PURE are providing wells with much better performance than
previously possible with conventional techniques and are leading our customers
to consider new completion strategies and techniques.
The PURE system optimizes the dynamic underbalance (the transient

underbalance just after creating the perforation cavity).
Underbalanced perforating
Underbalanced perforating is the technique of choice for removing perforation

damage and producing productive perforations. The required degree of
underbalance depends primarily on rock properties such as permeability
and strength. For example, hard, tight rocks need a large amount of
underbalance, sometimes greater than 4,000 psi. In conventionally designed
static underbalanced perforating operations, the wellbore pressure is set below
the reservoir pressure before the guns are fired.
Perforating using static underbalance has been and, for many in the industry,
continues to be the most widely accepted technique to optimize perforated
completions. This method alone, however, still delivers many underperforming
wells due to perforation induced skin that has not been adequately removed.
The explosive shaped charges used when perforating create a tunnel in the
reservoir through the cement sheath and casing. This tunnel is the conduit for
production or injection fluids. The tunnel creation process is rapid and violent
and results in the reservoir rock being pulverized and crushed or damaged in the
region of the tunnel. In this damaged region, a low permeability crushed zone is
created surrounding the perforations (refer to Figure 6-10 Perforation tunnel).
Loose crushed rock debris left inside the perforation tunnels can also seriously
impair injection. For a perforation tunnel to be 100% effective, both of these
damage types have to be remediated.
Private
SRC-Wireline\SRC-Wireline\InTouch ID 3013565\3.1\Release Date:10-Jun-2004\EDMS UID: 274896043\Produced: 13-Jul-2006 20:55:42 6-26 WL FOM / Gun Systems 6-26
Figure 6-10: Perforation tunnel. When the Perforation tunnel is created, the
rock in and around the tunnel is pulverized creating damage. The micrographs
show undamaged rock and the damaged zone.
Static underbalanced perforating is a method where by the static pressure in the

wellbore before perforating is less than the adjacent formation pressure at the
time the guns fire. The theory is that soon after perforating the reservoir flows
into the well due to the underbalance, cleaning up the perforation tunnels and
removing the perforation damage. Research performed at the Schlumberger
Productivity Enhancement Research Facility (PERF) in SRC, however, indicates
that static underbalance alone does not ensure clean perforations. The research
further indicates that previously neglected fluctuations in wellbore pressure
immediately after the perforating guns detonate actually govern the effectiveness
of perforation cleanup.
Perforating for Ultimate Reservoir Exploitation
PURE technology provides control over the degree of true underbalance or

overbalance affecting the reservoir while perforating, whereas classic perforating
design fails to account for the transient and dynamic period immediately following
detonation. The PURE system takes into account the gun design and completion
characteristics and ensures that the desired condition, the transient or dynamic
underbalance, is achieved following detonation.
This dynamic underbalance will deliver clean perforations much more effectively
than conventional static underbalance perforating techniques. Clean perforations
mean wells with better productivity or injectivity versus wells completed using
the traditional underbalance or overbalance approach. Although understanding
the basics of PURE design is straight forward many other factors must also be
considered when designing a PURE job. This makes the perforating job planning
process more involved than it has been in the past for our field organization
and our customers.
Private
Every well is different. There are no "cookie cutter" solutions for PURE. PURE is
applicable in many wells in many different parts of the world and each well will
need to be run through the PURE design process.
All wells are potential PURE candidates and should be evaluated as such. SPAN
will help with this. Each perforation interval in each well has to be looked at in
detail, the well environment understood and then a perforation and completion
design recommendation made.
The intention is to have all PURE jobs done with PURE gun systems and run
with a pressure gauge to verify that the PURE dynamic underbalance has been
achieved as designed.
Research
During studies and testing conducted by Schlumberger at the PERF, researchers

collected pressure data under simulated downhole conditions in an effort to
better understand the resulting pressure transients.
During the first series of tests, four standard Berea sandstone cores were
perforated using identical shaped charges and an initial static underbalance of
1,000 psi. Another series of tests included three Berea cores similar to the first
four cores but were perforated with a 500-psi static overbalanced pressure. The
results confirmed that wellbore pressure varies significantly immediately after
detonation and that perforation clean up is highly dependent on these variations
as reported in SPE paper 71642.
Figure 6-11 Pressure vs time illustrates the wellbore pressure increased

immediately after shooting for a few milliseconds due to extremely rapid
transients associated with shock wave propagation. Then a dynamic
underbalance is established over the next 1/2 sec or so due to the interaction
between the pressures in the wellbore and the reservoir. The tests that were
designed on PURE principles exhibited a large dynamic underbalance pressure
like that seen in this plot. These tests resulted in highly productive perforations
and it is these design principles that are applied in the field to achieve PURE.
Private
2500
Dynamic underbalance
1500
Differential pressure, psi 500
-500
-1500
-2500
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
Time, sec
Figure 6-11: Pressure vs time. The pressure versus time plot above illustrates the dynamic
underbalance achieved in one of the lab tests. Note the very short time duration.
This dynamic underbalance cleanup can be achieved whether the initial state
was static under or overbalanced – well to reservoir. Furthermore, this initial
state on its own was no indicator of future productivity. For example, depending
on the job design, an initial static underbalance could result in poorly producing
perforations, and an initial static overbalance could result in highly productive
perforations.
This research and improved understanding of perforation cleanup resulted in the

patented PURE perforating process. The process uses customized perforating
designs, special shaped charges and fit-for-purpose gun configurations to
generate a large dynamic underbalance in a modest static underbalanced,
balanced or even overbalanced environment. PURE guns can be run using any
conveyance means (Wireline, TCP, Coiled Tubing, Slickline, etc.) and the job
design incorporates parameters from the reservoir, wellbore and completion
configuration.
Perforation damage can be consistently minimized or eliminated by carefully

designing the completion to benefit from the PURE perforating method. This
method optimizes the dynamic underbalance when perforating a reservoir,
resulting in clean perforations and thereby increasing the productivity or injectivity
of a well. The PURE method also considers what happens to the perforation
tunnel from the time it is created until the time it is used and ensures that the
tunnel does not get damaged again after it has been cleaned up.
Private
Along with clean perforations, jobs designed using the PURE method can also
improve wellsite efficiency and may replace the need for costly post-perforation
cleanup operations like perforation acid wash or a near wellbore skin frac.
The technique has been utilized in hundreds of wells globally, in hard and
soft rock formations, high and low permeability reservoirs, sandstones and
carbonates, oil and gas reservoirs and producer and injector wells. Most wells
have yielded much better than expected results. PURE success stories are
available on the PURE reference page (InTouch ID: 3455775).

PURE delivers clean perforations and that means better well productivity or
injectivity.
Because the PURE effect is so quick and takes place all along the gun string at
the time of firing, the resulting perforation tunnels will cleanup along the entire
gun length. This means that in a TCP scenario, with a long gun string, all of the
perforations will clean up rather than just those in the higher perm intervals. Also,
we can now ensure clean perforations when making multiple runs on wireline
at balanced conditions.
PURE does not require the high static underbalance pressure often required
for perforation cleanup in many formations. This makes well preparation for
perforating much more efficient thus saving rig time and material costs.
Since the PURE perforations are clean, there is no need for secondary
perforation cleanup by acid wash or other means resulting in additional cost
savings.
These are just a few of the benefits PURE brings to our customers.
Schlumberger also benefits from PURE as a new way to truly differentiate our
perforating systems in the market and improve margins from perforating. Also
we can now focus on well performance as the main criteria for perforation job
design utilizing other areas of Schlumberger expertise to get the best reservoir
performance possible.
Summary:
• Dynamic underbalance cleans up perforations
– Kc/K close to 1 versus the 0.1 to 0.3 range with static underbalance
– Improved productivity or injectivity
– May negate the need for a near wellbore acid wash of perforations
Private
• Minimal underbalance requirement
– Leads to more efficient well preparation

– Savings on fluids and pumping costs
• Control of downhole pressures
– Less shock on the well and completion
• High data-rate pressure gauge - verify job design – reservoir parameters
Candidate Well Selection

Many wells, including both producers and injectors, are potential candidates for
the PURE perforation method.
Pore pressure and permeability are key considerations during candidate

selection. As of October 2004 wells have been successfully perforated using
the PURE process in reservoirs with pressures as low as 1,000 psi in 13 md
gas and permeability as low as 0.07 md gas with 9,600 psi reservoir pressure.
The lower permeability candidates tend to be higher pressure while the lower
pressure candidates tend to be higher permeability. There are many cases of
PURE successes in lower perm (0.5 to 2 md gas) with reservoir pressures in the
2,500 psi to 4,000 psi range.
Most injection wells are candidates for the PURE process as clean perforations
are essential for optimal injectivity. The PURE method can help assure sufficient
surge flow to remove loose crushed rock material from the perforation tunnels
prior to injection and prevent debris and fine formation particles from being
injected and sealing off the formation pore throats.
During the introduction of PURE, the approach is to consider all wells as potential
PURE candidates and then, after evaluating the well data, determine if PURE will
deliver improved well performance. This takes the customer out of the selection
process for the introduction phase and allows a quick evaluation to be done with
respect to the applicability of PURE for all wells.
Job Design
A PURE job design begins with the determination that the well is a good
candidate and will benefit from the PURE process. Reservoir and completion
data are collected along with any constraints the customer may have regarding
the well completion being considered. After evaluating this information and
Private
considering previous experience, local job practices and customer expectations,

a first pass is made at choosing an optimal gun system, conveyance method and
well environment in which to achieve PURE.
Once the job has been outlined, it is then planned in more detail. The
PURE Planner, proprietary Schlumberger software, is used to determine
gun configurations that will achieve the PURE effect (dynamic underbalance
immediately after perforating). SPAN Schlumberger Perforation Analysis
software is also used to help justify the proposed PURE gun system in terms of
impact to productivity. This is sometimes an iterative process between the PURE
planner and SPAN. To achieve PURE there may be compromises made to the
PURE versus conventional gun system in terms of charge density or charge
size/type, which SPAN helps to reconcile from a productivity standpoint.
A key component of a PURE job design is to consider the impact of how the
entire completion process (including fluid manipulations and kill requirements
along with other factors) will impact the perforation tunnels from the time they are
created up to the time they are actually used. Recommendations will be made
on how to minimize damage (or skin) to the tunnels from these processes. We
want to avoid the case where a clean perforation tunnel is created using the
PURE dynamic underbalance and then the tunnel is damaged by some action
later on in the completion process.
The PURE gun systems use conventional perforating charges and have PURE
charges added along the length of the perforated interval as well as through any
blank sections of gun, which are called PURE chambers. The PURE charges
produce a hole in the gun body about 9 times the area of a conventional charge
exit hole (see picture below) and help optimize the dynamic underbalance
transient by increasing the area open to flow into the gun. The PURE charge
does not damage the casing nor perforate into the reservoir.
Private
2906 Exit Hole
PURE Charge Exit Hole

Figure 6-12: PURE charge exit hole
After this information has been compiled a job proposal is put together outlining
the perforating system that will be used, any special accessories that may be
required to execute the job, the completion requirements and anything else to be
considered by the customer as part the perforating program.
6.1.5.3 Assembly
Instructions for Loading PURE Charges
Multimedia 6-1: PURE charge installation

Loading a PURE gun follows the same procedure as loading an HSD or

PerfoExpress gun. The only difference is that the PURE charge requires special
parts for guns larger than 2.00 in. The only exception is loading a 2-7/8-in. gun
using PowerJet Omega and PURE charges which require special instructions.
1. Install the appropriate charge jackets into the loading tube.

2. Feed detonating cord through charge jackets and out the hole in the upper
alignment plate.
3. Cut the detonating cord from the roll.
Private
Note
When the charges are loaded, detonating cord will spiral in the tube. The
overall length of the detonating cord will be longer than the tube length. Make
sure enough cord is left at the tube end.
4. Transfer parts for TCP guns must be installed at this time. Refer to Gun
Loading instructions in the TCP FOM (InTouch ID: 3012737).
5. Begin installing charges into the jackets. Refer to the following for PURE
charge installation procedures.
a. For 2.00-in. guns: Install the PURE charge and make sure it locks in
the two ears on the charge jacket.
Note
The PURE charge and the 2006 charges have the same outer case
profile. Do not get these perforating charges mixed up with the PURE
charges.
b. For 2.50-in. guns:
i. Install the PURE charge and make sure it is straight.

ii. Press the cap over the PURE charge. Make sure it locks in with the
two ears on the charge jacket.
Tip
It may be easier to turn the loading tube sideways and press the
PURE charge and cap in at the same time.
c. For 2.88-in. to 4.72-in. guns:
i. Install a standoff in the bottom of the charge jackets under the

detonating cord.
Note
Make sure the detonating cord sits in the cord groove on the standoff.
Private
Loading tube
Standoff and
Feed detonating cord through
charge jacket
standoff and charge jacket
Figure 6-13: Insert standoff. 2.88-in. PURE assembly shown
ii. Place the PURE charge on the standoff. Make sure it is straight.
iii. Press a cap over the PURE charge. Make sure it locks in the two
ears on the charge jacket.
Tip
It may be easier to turn the loading tube sideways and press the
PURE charge and cap in at the same time.
Cap
PURE Loading tube

charge
Standoff and
charge jacket
Figure 6-14: Install PURE charge and cap. 2.88-in. PURE assembly shown
Instructions for Loading 2.88 PURE gun with PowerJet Omega

Charges
1. For standard loading tube with PJOmega 2906 charges and PURE punchers,
follow the steps below.
a. Install PJ2906 jacket (H543023) into the loading tube where the PURE
punchers are planned.
Private
b. Starting at lower end, feed detonating cord through the loading tube and
out the hole in the upper alignment plate. t may be useful to leave the
detonating cord on its roll to minimize cord waste and ensure that the
cord is not cut too short. Care must be taken to not overly twist the cord.
c. Load PowerJet Omega 2906 charges as instructed by steps 2-7.
d. When a PURE puncher is required, load the standoff (10056378) in the
bottom of the jacket with the detonating cord in the groove. Put a PURE
puncher on the top of the standoff and press the cap (10056376) in the
jacket. This locks the PURE puncher in place.
e. After all charges are loaded , install upper transfer components as
needed.
2. For standard loading tube with PJOmega 2906 charges only, follow the
steps below.
a. Starting at lower end, feed detonating cord through the loading tube and
out the hole in the upper alignment plate. It may be useful to leave the
detonating cord on its roll to minimize cord waste and ensure that the
cord is not cut too short. Care must be taken to not overly twist the cord.
b. Install the lower plastic transfer part as needed.
c. Insert charge in the loading tube as shown in Figure below.
Note
All the photos in this section are taken with charge case only.
Figure 6-15: Insert charge to the loading tube
Private
d. Make sure the detonating cord is inserted into the slot at the end of the
charge.
Figure 6-16: Charge back with cord
e. Pick up a jacket and align the two locking ears that have flat surfaces with
the two deep cut outs on the loading tube. These are the only two cut
outs that the jacket ears can fit through.
Figure 6-17: Insert jacket
f. Press the charge down while applying force to the two outer ears 90
degree from the locking ears.
Private
Figure 6-18: Press down and turn
g. Turn the jacket clockwise until the locking ears are under the shallow
cuts fully.
Figure 6-19: Turn and lock in place
h. Follow the same steps 2-7 to finish the whole gun.

i. Install upper transfer parts as needed.
Private
Figure 6-20: Loaded loading tube

parts lists:
• 2.00-in. PURE (InTouch ID: 3915242)

6.1.5.5 References
PURE reference page (InTouch ID: 3455775)
TCP FOM (InTouch ID: 3012737)
Wireline Perforating FOM (InTouch ID: 3013565)
eFire reference page (InTouch ID: 3289028)
Unigage (WTQR, WCQR) reference page (InTouch ID: 3258326)
TCP reference page (InTouch ID: 3250913)
Private
Multimedia 6-2: PURE (Perforating for Ultimate Reservoir Exploitation) . Perforating system
for clean perforations
Multimedia 6-3: PURE charge installation

6.1.6 2.00-in FRAC Gun System
Overview
The 2.00-in FRAC Gun System is an expendable hollow carrier gun system
with a straight, push-in style connection. The system’s hardware is neither
compatible with the 2.00-in HSD Gun system nor the 2-1/8-in Hyperdome Gun
System. The guns are usually conveyed by wireline either one at a time or can
be combined and selectively fired.
Features
• Expendable carriers do not have scallops.

• The guns and hardware have a straight, push-in connection.
• Connections are secured with 4 bolts.
• Compatible with third party 2.00-in & 2-1/8-in Retrievable Tubing Guns (RTG).
• Compatible with 40 & 60 gr/ft round detonating cord.
Applications
The 2.00-in FRAC system is a through-tubing gun system designed for 2-7/8-in
tubing (or casing) in air or liquid. The system offers various phasing options and
a maximum service capability of 330 degF and 15,000 psi. There is virtually no
Private
debris in the well after perforating. The system is also more rugged and more
tolerant of hostile wellbore fluids when compared to capsule-type perforating
guns.
Combinablility
Firing systems: Guns can be selectively fired using either conventional

percussion switches and addressable switches (ASFS). Conventional detonator
and RF safe Secure detonators are compatible with this gun system. Be aware
that Secure requires the use of a special high-voltage Addressable Switch
(100048404). Secure Plus devices, which combine Secure and ASFS, can also
be used to selectively fire guns.
Correlation tools: The Powered Gun Gamma Ray Tool (PGGT) or the Universal
Perforating Correlation Tool (UPCT) can be used with perforating guns to
correlate depths. The Wireline Perforating Shock Absorber (WPSA) should be
used with the PGGT, to protect the electronic instrumentation.
Perforating tools: The WPP, WOPT, POT-C and MWPT are compatible with
this gun system. Be aware that the addressable switch software (ASFS) will not
work with POT-C or MWPT.
Setting tools: The Baker 5 setting tool can be combined with this gun system
for plug-and-shoot operations. Conventional igniters and RF safe Secure igniters
are compatible with this gun system. Be aware that the addressable switch is
not compatible with the standard Secure igniter, the negative polarity Secure
igniter (T6005390) must be used instead.
Private
MH-32
EQF-46/53 (optional)
CCL-L
Adapter head
Detonator sleeve
Intermediate adapter
Carrier Assembly
Selective adapter
Carrier assembly
Detonator sleeve
Bottom nose
Cossover
Figure 6-21: 2.00-in FRAC Gun Configuration
Private
Table 6-9: 2.00-in FRAC Gun Specifications
OD (OD) (in [mm]) 2.00

Shoot density (spf), Phasing ( ° ) 6, 60
Maximum pressure rating (psi [kPa]) 15,000 psi
Maximum temperature rating for 1 hr (°F [°C]) 330 [165]
Maximum tensile strength carrier (lbf [kN]) 20,000 lbf
Maximum gun swell (in [mm])
Air @ 80°F 2.27 [58]
Liquid @ 80°F 2.27 [58]
Minimum restriction in air w/o burr (in [mm]) 2.165 (no go)/2.175 (go)
Gun lengths (ft [m]) 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 10, 14, 15, 20

Loaded gun weight
5-ft (lbm [kg])
10-ft (lbm [kg])
15-ft (lbm [kg])
20-ft (lbm [kg])
Selectivity Yes
Explosives

1
T6005040 Secure Detonator 340 [171]
H448887 DFC-10 Detonator 350 [177]
Most standard wireline detonators can be used with this system. Refer to OneCAT catalog
1
RF safe
Table 6-11: Igniters

1
T6005090 Standard Secure igniter 340 [171]
1 2
T6005390 Negative polarity Secure igniter 340 [171]
Most standard igniters can be used with this system. Refer to OneCAT catalog (
InTouch ID: 3269220
) for explosive listing.
1
RF safe, fluid
2
The standard positive polarity Secure igniter is not compatible with addressable switches.
Private
Table 6-12: Detonating Cord
Part Number Description Temperature Rating (°F)

H106960 RDX 40 gr/ft 330°F [166°C]
B027846 HMX 35 gr/ft 400°F [204°C]
H304114 HNS 40 gr/ft 500°F [260°C]
Table 6-13: Charges

H348370 Charge, HyperJet, 2006 RDX 330°F [166°C]
H447623 Charge, UltraJet, 2006 HMX 400°F [202°C]
H348591 Charge, PowerJet, 2006 HMX 400°F [202°C]

H447608 Charge, PowerFlow, 2006 HMX 400°F [202°C]

Wellsite Auxiliary Hardware

1. Wireline adapter
• Monocable head, MH-32 (H353637) or

• Monocable head, MH-22 (H030796) + Adapter head, AH-38 (H106437)
2. Correlation tool
• CCL-L (P024737) or
• PCCL-L (P495650)
Private
Workshop Auxiliary Equipmentt

disassembly/assembly tools, etc.). Most of the tools listed in this section are
also required at the wellsite.
Table 6-14: Special tools and equipment

Number

100253468 4 pin round port plug wrench Installing adapter port plugs
B013366 Lubriplate grease Thread locking compound
B035155 Krytox Thread locking compound
Table 6-15: Handling Equipment

B022375 Cap Sleeve
H047988 Thread Protector Adapter head thread protector

two-way
three-way


Private

Selectivity
Temperature Type I Type II Shock

Description Pressure Rating

Rating (Red) (Green) Disc
EPS Selective 15,000 psi
340°F (171°C) P282520 P282522 P247610
US Selective 15,000 psi
400°F (205°C) H432191 H432192 H432078
GA Selective 15,000 psi
340°F (171°C) H523636 H523637 NA
US Dual Diode 400°F (205°C) 20,000 psi P247856 NA NA
Plug (137,895 kPa) H432064
Addressable 340°F (171°C) 15,000 psi T6005241 NA NA
Switch (ASFS) (103,421 kPa)
(Obsolete) 1
High voltage 340°F (171°C) 15,000 psi 100048404 NA NA
addressable (103,421 kPa)
switch (ASFS)
1
Replaced by high voltage addressable switch (100048404).
Test Equipment

300)
1
insert only
1
Private

switch tester.
Optional Equipment
Table 6-21: Perforating accessories

H432223 MPD-H Magnetic positioning device
H132600 EQF-46 1-11/16 tungsten high density weights
H223662 EQF-53 1-11/16 tungsten high density weights,
H2S

6.1.7 3.12-in. FRAC Gun System (Provisory)
Overview
The 3.12-in FRAC Gun System combines the HSD* and HEGS* gun systems.
Guns are usually conveyed by wireline one at a time or can be combined and
selectively fired using the Addressable Switch Firing System (ASFS*). The FRAC
gun system utilizes an expendable hollow carrier. The FRAC gun is compatible
with multiple plug and shoot adapters, which provide the option to set a plug (or
packer) and shoot multiple guns in the same descent.
Private
The 3.12-in FRAC and accessories, with 3106 PowerFrac charge, have been
verified by the American Petroleum Institute (API) standard 19B for operation
in liquid. It is rated to 15,000 psi and 300°F for 1 hr. The API-19B specifies
the standards and procedures for verifying the gun system performance of
penetration and casing entrance hole under concrete targets.
Features
• Compatible with the plug-and-shoot adapters.

• Can use steel loading tubes or foam (HEGS) loading tubes.
• Compatible with the CAL-G and CAL-B.
• Uses addressable switch technology.

• Unused detonators can be disarmed without cutting off detonating cord.
• No threaded connections, for quick wellsite assembly.
Applications
The 3.12-in FRAC gun is a low cost casing gun system, designed for 4.50- to
5.00-in casing, in air or liquid. This system offers multiple phasing options (0°,
60°, 90° or 120°), a maximum service capability of 300°F and 15,000 psi, and
leaves virtually no debris in the well after perforating. This system also is more
rugged, more reliable and more tolerant of hostile wellbore fluids compared
to the old HEGS perforating guns. There are two main 3.12-in FRAC gun
configurations:
• Standard FRAC gun, with steal loading tube

• HPLT FRAC gun, with foam loading tube
Combinablility
Firing systems: Guns can only be selectively fired using addressable switches
(ASFS), conventional percussion switches are not compatible with this gun
system. Conventional detonator and RF safe Secure detonators are compatible
with this gun system. Be aware that Secure requires the use of a special
high-voltage Addressable Switch (100048404). Secure Plus devices, which
combine Secure and ASFS, can also be used to selectively fire guns.
Correlation tools: The Powered Gun Gamma Ray Tool (PGGT-D) can be
used with perforating guns to correlate depths. The Wireline Perforating Shock
Absorber (WPSA-A) should be used with the PGGT-D, to protect the electronic
instrumentation.
Private
Perforating tools: Be aware that the addressable switch software (ASFS)

will not work with POT-C or MWPT. The WPP, PSTT 6-1 and WOPT-AC are
compatible with this gun system, contact SRC InTouch for more information.
Setting tools: The CPST or the Baker 10 setting tool can be combined with
this gun system for plug-and-shoot operations. Conventional igniters and RF
safe Secure igniters are compatible with this gun system. Be aware that the
addressable switch is not compatible with the standard Secure igniter, the
negative polarity Secure igniter (T6005390) must be used instead.
6-1. Must be combined with the ATPS (addressable tractor protection switch).
Private
MH-22
w/PEK-B MH-22
w/PEK-E
CAL-B CAL-G
CAL-B CAL-G
Wireline head assembly Wireline head assembly
(100009070) (100055309)
Gun carrier
Gun carrier
(with steel or foam
(with steel or foam
loading tube)
loading tube)
Selective adapter Selective adapter *
Utility adapter Crossover adapter
Gun carrier Plug and shoot adapter

(CPST-A or BST 10)
Bottom nose
Setting tool
(CPST-A or BST 10)
Plug (or packer)
* Connector or selective adapter are options for CPST-A.

Utility adapter is an option for BST 10.
None are required.
Figure 6-22: 3.12-in FRAC gun system configuration
Private
Table 6-22: 3.12-in FRAC gun specifications
Outside Diameter (in ) 3.12

Pressure Rating (psi) 15,000
Temperature Rating Steel Tube - 300 degF
Foam Tube - 210 degF
Shots per foot (spf), Phasing ( ° )
Steel loading tube 4, 0
4, 120
6, 60
Foam loading tube 4, 90
4, 120
Carrier Weight 8.78 lbm/ft (without charges)
Gun Lengths (ft) 1, 5, 10, 15, 20
Head Coupling Plug-in with locking screws
1
Selectivity Yes
1
Selective with addressable switches only.
Explosives

1
T6005040 Secure Detonator 340 [171]
H448887 DFC-10 Detonator 350 [177]
1
RF safe
Table 6-24: Igniters

T6005390 1 Negative polarity Secure igniter 2 340 [171]
Most standard igniters can be used with this system. Refer to OneCAT catalog (
InTouch ID: 3269220
1
RF safe
2
Standard Secure igniter not compatible with addressable switches
Private
Table 6-25: Detonating cord

1
H543021 LSHV RDX 80 gr/ft Detonating Cord 340 [171]
B017597 Nylon RDX 80 gr/ft Detonating Cord
H304843 80 gr/ft LS RDX Detonating Cord
H447045 PVCJACKET 80 gr/ft PETN Detonating
Cord
1
High velocity, low shrink braid detonating cord
Table 6-26: Charges


Steel loading tube
1
100026541 PowerFrac 3106 RDX 330 [166]
Foam loading tube
H447228 38C CleanPACK RDX 2 330 [166]
3
H523005 34B HyperJet RDX 330 [166]
1
Penetration = 20.00 in. Entrance Hole = 0.44 in. Can be shot in liquid or air. Can only be shot in liquid.
2
Penetration = 6.5 in. Entrance Hole = 0.60 in. Can be shot in liquid or air.
3
For foam loading tube only. Penetration = 16.07 in. Entrance Hole = 0.39 in. Can be shot in liquid or air.

1. Wireline adapter
• Perforating equipment head, PEH-E (H108785) + Perforating equipment

kit, PEK-B (H432221)
• Monocable head, MH-22 (P030796) + Perforating equipment kit, PEK-B
(H432221) or
• Monocable head, MH-22 (P030796) + Perforating equipment kit, PEK-E
(H123293)
2. Correlation tool
• CAL-B or
• CAL-G
Private
Workshop Auxiliary Equipment

Table 6-27: Special Tools

3/8-in hex driver Installing wireline head and utility adapter port
plug
B013591 Adjustable face spanner Installing selective port plug
wrench
7/32-in hex driver Installing special cap head screws

100009060 Handling plug Handling plug for FRAC gun carrier and
utility adapter
Handling cap Handling cap for FRAC gun selective
and utility adapter
H047988 Handling cap Handling cap for CAL-B wireline head
100114703 Lifting cap Lifting cap for CAL-B wireline head
H048368 Handling cap Handling cap for CAL-G wireline head

two-way
three-way
Private




Selectivity
Table 6-31: Switch and feed-thrus
Part Number Description Note

T6005241 Addressable switch One switch required for each
detonator or igniter.
100048404 High voltage addressable switch High voltage addressable switch for
use with Secure detonator.
T6041792 Bulkhead retainer 0.50-in Bulkhead retainer nut
T6052701 Molded feed-thru Low temparature (250°F) low
pressure (5000 psi) feed-thru
T6040967 SBS Bulkhead Feed-thru High temparature (340°F) high
pressure (15,000 psi) feed-thru
B036199 HT3 Viton O-ring Size 009 viton SH607894 O-ring
for SBS bulkhead feed-thru
Test Equipment

300)
1
insert only
1
Private

switch tester.
Optional Equipment
Table 6-34: Plug-and-shoot equipment

T6015701 Dual diode plug Option for single gun plug-and-shoot
operations only. Multi-gun operations
require addressable switches.
CPST
H247630 3.38 CPST to gun adapter CPST plug-and-shoot adapter
assembly
100009065 3.12 HVO connector Gun-to-Crossover or Gun-to-Gun
connections
100015297 3.12 HVO to 3.38 twist lock crossover 1 Connects HVO connector to 3.38-in
CPST plug-and-shoot adapter
100034902 3.12 HVO to 3.38 twist lock adapter Connects gun to 3.38-in CPST
plug-and-shoot adapter
Baker 10
100055775 2-5/8 mono (Baker 10) to gun adapter Baker 10 plug-and-shoot adapter
assembly
100021929 3.12 HVO to 3.12 twist lock adapter Connects gun carrier to 3.12-in Baker
10 plug-and-shoot adapter
1
Must be used in conjunction with connector or selective adapter.
Table 6-35: Foam loading tubes (15k HEGS)

H523004 TUBE, LOADING 38B
H523531 TUBE, LOADING, 34B, 225 DEG F
H523714 LOADING TUBE, 3.12 DIA, 4 SPF-120
DEG
Private

6.1.7.3 References
Reference Page, Frac Gun Systems (InTouch ID: XXXXXXX).
Maintenance Manual, 3.12-in FRAC Gun System (InTouch ID: 3975531).

FRAC TBT: 3.12 in FRAC Gun System (InTouch ID: 3976883).
ASFS: Reference Manual, Addressable Switch Firing System (InTouch ID:

3333395).
ASGS TBT: The Addressable Shot-by-Shot Gun System (InTouch ID: 3635874).
Addressable Switch Firing System training.
Addressable Switch Field Tester Manual (InTouch ID: 3770540).

Multimedia 6-5: Addressable Shot-by-Shot Misfire Recovery Technique

6.2 Port Plug Gun Systems
6.2.1 Addressable Shot-by-Shot Gun System (ASGS)

Private
6.2.1.1 Description
General Description
The Addressable Shot-by-Shot perforating gun system was designed to use the
addressable switch in extremely short 3-1/8 in., 3-3/8 in. or 4 in. port plug guns.
The system takes advantage of a short detonator which arms through a side port
in casing gun strings and a simple one-wire bulkhead feed-through between
each gun carrier. There is no exposed version available.
The addressable switch is normally installed in the gun during gun loading.
However, it is small enough to install through an open gun port plug hole
afterwards. The detonator clip must be installed through the end of the carrier.
Primary advantages of the Addressable Shot-by-Shot Sun System include:
• Uses Addressable Switch technology

• Eliminates mechanical piston switches
• Switches require no maintenance
• Unused detonators can be disarmed without cutting off detonating cord
• Feed-throughs are simple one-wire parts
Addressable Switch Firing System
Description
Description The Addressable Switch Firing System (ASFS) is a smart gun

system that uses a micro-processor controlled electronic switch attached to
each detonator. Each electronic switch has a unique address, so that each gun
is identified prior to shooting. Two-way communication is required to shoot any
gun, so inadvertent detonation is limited. Bulkheads between guns are simple
one-wire feed-throughs. A safety surface gun tester exercises all the circuits
prior to use and enables fast set-up and troubleshooting, if needed.
The addressable switch system is available for all hollow carrier perforating gun
systems and is compatible with conventional and Secure detonators. Benefits
Up to 40 guns can be combined per descent. These electronic switches are fully
expendable, so maintenance is eliminated. Switch electronics and gun wiring
can be tested just before running in the well.
Private
The addressable switch is a reliable, cost-efficient replacement for pressure

actuated switches. It provides complete skip-over capability, so a dead gun or
pressure switch no longer kills the whole gun string. Shot indication is a benefit
where single shot detonations are difficult to observe.
Primary advantages of the ASFS switches include the following:
• Detonator cannot be accidentally fired by just applying power.

• ASFS provides a unique address for each switch.
• ASFS eliminates mechanical piston switches.

• ASFS provides skip-over in case of a misfire.
• Switch queries provide shot indication.
• Switch circuitry can be tested before arming the gun.
Principal applications
The Addressable Switch Firing System serves as a replacement for the

percussion switches used for selective perforating. Additional benefits include
“Skip Over,” shot indication, definitive gun identification, and an additional layer
of safety.
Tool history
Microprocessor technology has evolved to a state where intelligence can now

be embedded at an affordable price. The microprocessor allows the surface
computer to both send commands to the switch and also receive uplink status.
This status contains information about the detonator’s address, operating
condition, and switch positions.
Principles of Operation
Feed-throughs between guns provide a single wire electrical connection. A

ground is achieved in each individual gun. To replace 3/4-in E&B switches
in existing Schlumberger or third party intermediate heads, use a one-piece
adapter with O-rings. Insert either a high-pressure bulkhead feed-through or a
low-pressure molded feed-through, then install a retainer screw.
Private
To replace 1/2-in Schlumberger-type piston switches, a smaller version of the

adapter is available. Insert a high-pressure molded feed-through and install a
retainer nut.
Standard detonators (A-140) do not crimp onto the detonating cord. They side
fire the cord and are held in place by the detonator clip. The clip is installed as
the gun is loaded or it can be inserted later through the bottom end of the gun. A
collet and nut arrangement hold the clip onto 80 grain detonating cord.
After electrical arming with a standard detonator, the ballistic connection is made
by simply snapping it into the detonator clip. Disarming is just as easy, without
damaging any of the components, so they are reusable.
Be aware that the addressable switch software (ASFS) will not work with POT-C
or MWPT.
Specifications
Table 6-36: Shot-by-Shot Gun Specifications and Components
Description 3.12-in ASGS 3.38-in ASGS 4-in ASGS

Gun OD 3-1/8 in 3-3 /8 in 4 in
Carrier/adapter type Schlumberger Port Plug Guns or third party
Shooting section lengths 1 shot to 20 ft
Shot density 1 to 4 spf
Number of guns 1 to 40
Selectivity High Voltage Addressable Switches (100048404) 1
Maximum temperature 250°F [121°C] with LP feed-thru, 340°F [171°C] with HP
feed-thru
Maximum pressure 5000 psi with LP feed-thru, 15,000 psi with HP feed-thru
Gun isolation 3/4-in or 1/2-in adapters with bulkhead feed-through or molded
feed-through. See Section catalog page for part numbers.
Standard detonator 2 A-140 (100026475), 340°F [171°C]
Optional detonators Crimp-on: DFC-10 (H448887)
Secure (T6005040)
3
Detonating cord 80 grain RDX
Depth correlation CAL-B, CAL-G, PGGT-C/D
1
Replaces obsolete addressable switch (T6005241).
2
Standard detonators use detonator clip (T6041047).
3
PETN can be used if temperature is below 210°F
Private

switch tester.


6.2.1.3 References
Maintenance Manual, Addressable Shot-by-Shot Gun System (InTouch ID:
3770545).
ASFS: Wellsite Reference Manual, Addressable Switch Firing System (InTouch

ID: 3333395).
Reference Page, Addressable Shot-by-Shot Gun System (InTouch ID: 3624996).
Addressable Shot-by-Shot Gun System and Addressable Switch Firing System
training.


Private
Multimedia 6-8: Addressable Shot-by-Shot Gun Loading

6.2.2 End Loaded Carrier Gun (SCG)

Private
6.2.2.1 Description
Head
+
CAL-B
Upper
Head
Carrier Shaped Charge Port Plugs

(Twist Lock-
Retrievable) - Standard Plugs
2000 - 25,000 psi
- Dry Hole Plugs

Single Gun 0 - 10,000 psi
Selective Gun 0 - 5000 psi
Intermediate
Selective
Adapter
Carrier
(Twist Lock-
Retrievable)
Bottom
Nose
Inspection
Plug
Figure 6-23: Port Plug Gun (SCG)
Private
Specifications
Table 6-38: Specifications
SCG-81 SCG-93
Description
3-3/8 in. 4 in.
Gun OD 3-3/8 in. 4 in.
Shooting section lengths 1 to 20 ft
Standard gun length 10 ft - 41 shot
Phasing 90° - 4 spf
180° - 2 spf
0° - 1 spf
22.5° - 4 spf (Squeeze gun)
Shot density 1 to 4 spf
Debris none
Selectivity Selective switch & dual diode
Firing system Bottom up - Fluid desensitized cap
Table 6-39: Conditions of Use
SCG-81 SCG-93
3-3/8 in. 4 in.
Maximum Pressure 25,000 psi [172,369 kPa]
Maximum Temperature 330°F [166°C]
Maximum Temperature w/ Hi Temp
Expl. 400°F [204°C]
Minimum Pressure 0 psi w/ dry hole plug
Minimum Passage 3.83 in. 4.5 in.
Well fluid limitation none
Minimum cable size 5/16 in.
Private
Table 6-40: Explosives
SCG-81 SCG-93
3-3/8 in. 4 in.
Standard detonator 475°F [246°C] E-161 (H523621)
Optional detonator 340°F [171°C] DFC-10 (H448887)
Standard detonating cord 330°F RDX 80 gr/ft (H304843)
[166°C] RDX 80 gr/ft Nylon (B017597)
RDX LSHV Zytel (H543021)
HiTemp detonating cord 400°F [204°C] HMX 80 gr/ft (H304800)
HMX LSHV Zytel (H543012)
Hyperjet charges
RDX 330°F [166°C] 38B HJ II (H247247) 41B HJ II (H523002)

HMX 400°F [204°C] - 41B HJ II (H334534)
Ultrajet charges
HMX 400°F [204°C] 38A UJ (H304637) -
Ultrapack Charges
RDX 330°F [166°C] - 41B UP (H247778)

Table 6-41: Associated Equipment
SCG-81 SCG-93
3-3/8 in. 4 in.
Cable Heads MH 22 with PEK-B
PEH-E with PEK-B
PEH-B
LEH-Q/V with AH83 LEH-Q/V with AH84
PEH-A with EAH-B
Depth correlation CAL-B, GPT-A CAL-B, GPT-A
Private
Table 6-42: Carriers
Number of Phasing Ports per Shooting Overall SCG-81 SCG-93

Ports Foot Zone Length 3-3/8 in. 4 in.
Length (ft) (in.)
5 90° 4 1 26.24 H132370 H132400
11 90° 4 1.5 44.24 H132371 H132401
17 90° 4 4 62.24 H132372 H132402
29 90° 4 7 98.24 H132373 H132403
41 90° 4 10 134.24 H132374 H132404
61 90° 4 15 194.24 H132375 H132405
81 90° 4 20 254.24 H334529
15 90° 2 7 98.24 H132409

Squeeze
gun
17 22.5° 4 4 62.24 H341416 H341348

6.2.3 3.12-in Port Plug Gun (PPG) System

Overview and applications
The 3.12-in Port Plug Gun (PPG) system is designed to use the mechanical
percussion switch or the addressable switch (ASFS) within short to medium
interval 3.12-in end-loaded casing guns. The PPG preferentially utilizes the
Addressable Switch Firing System (ASFS), which serves as a replacement for
percussion switches used for selective perforating.
The system takes advantage of a short detonator that is armed through a port
within the gun and a simple one-wire bulkhead feed-through that is housed within
a selective intermediate adapter between each gun.
Private
The addressable switch is small enough to install through an open port in the
gun. However, the detonator clip must be “end-loaded” like the shooting wires,
detonating cord, and shaped charges.
Primary advantages of the 3.12-in Port Plug Gun include:
• Adapters and guns are semi-expendable.

• Guns are compatible with third party 3.12-in port plug guns adapters.
• Hardware is competitively priced.
• Low explosive weight shaped charge allows extended gun lifetime.
• Uses Addressable Switch technology.
• Addressable switches require no maintenance.

• Feed-throughs are simple one-wire parts.
• Additional benefits associated with the ASFS include “Skip Over,” shot
indication, definitive gun identification, and an additional layer of safety.
Private
MH-22
w/PEK-E
CAL-G
Wireline head
Carrier
Arming port
Selective intermediate adapter
Carrier
Arming port
Bottom nose
Figure 6-24: 3.12-in Port Plug Gun
Private
Combinablility
(ASFS), conventional percussion switches are also compatible with this gun
with this gun system. Be aware that Secure requires the use of a high-voltage
Addressable Switch. Secure Plus devices, which combine Secure and ASFS,
can also be used to selectively fire guns.
instrumentation. Use of the gamma ray reduces the maximum number of
switches that may be used to ten.

Private
Equipment and operational specifications
MH-22
MH-22 w/PEK-B
w/PEK-E
CAL-G CAL-B
CAL-G to PPG CAL-B to PPG

head assembly head assembly
(100143336) (100174443)
Carrier Carrier
Selective intermediate adapter Selective intermediate adapter
Carrier Carrier
Bottom nose PPG to Twist-lock adapter
Plug and shoot adapter

(CPST-A or BST 10)
Setting tool
(CPST-A or BST 10)
Plug (or packer)
Figure 6-25: 3.12-in Port Plug Gun Configurations
Table 6-43: 3.12-in Port Plug Gun specifications

Pressure rating (psi [kPa]) 5000 [34,473] with Molded feed-thru,
10,000 [103,421] with SBS feed-thru
Temperature rating (degF [degC]) 250 [121] with LP feed-thru, 340 [171] with HP feed-thru
Shots per foot (spf), Phasing ( ° ) 1, 0
4, 120
4, 180
Gun lengths (ft) 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 10, 15
Selectivity Yes
Private
Table 6-44: Theoretical Gun Weight
Gun Length (ft) Weight (lbm)

1 28
2 43
3 58
4 73
5 87
6 102
7 117
10 161
15 234
Explosives
Part Number Description Temperature Rating (degF

[degC])
100026475 A-140 detonator 340 [171]
T6005040 Secure detonator 340 [171]

[degC])
Standard Detonating Cord
H543021 LSHV RDX 80 gr/ft detonating cord 1 340 [171]
B017597 Nylon RDX 80 gr/ft detonating cord 330 [166]
H304843 80 gr/ft LS RDX detonating cord 330 [166]
1
Table 6-47: Charges

[degC])
100166491 PP3104 RDX 330 [166]
Private
Wellsite auxiliary hardware

1. Wireline adapter

(H123293) or PEK-B (H432221)
2. Correlation tool
• CAL-G or CAL-B
Workshop auxiliary equipment


H247549 3.38 loading tool head Charge installation tool
H224450 Charge aligning tool Aligns charge with port hole
100253468 4 pin round port plug Installing carrier port plug
wrench
H133028 Wire installation tool Feeding wire through gun
H247236 Port thread cleaning tool
B024783 Screw extractor Removes port plug
P194467 Stepped gage Verifying port dimensions

100188406 Handling plug Handling plug for carrier
100188407 Handling cap Handling cap for adapter
H048368 Handling cap Handling cap for CAL-G wireline head
H047988 Handling cap Handling cap for CAL-B wireline head
Private

two-way
three-way



Selectivity
Table 6-52: Switch and Feed-thrus

100048404 High voltage addressable switch High voltage addressable switch,
one switch required for each
T6040967 SBS bulkhead feed-thru High temparature (340°F) high
B036199 HT3 Viton O-ring Size 009 Viton SH607894 O-ring
T6041790 Bulkhead retainer 0.75-in Bulkhead retainer nut
Private

T6041789 0.75-in bulkhead seal Adapter Feed-thru insert
B012075 HT3 Viton O-ring Size 113 Viton SH607894 O-ring for
0.75-in bulkhead seal adapter
Test equipment


300)
1
insert only
1

switch tester.
Optional equipment
Table 6-55: Optional Equipment

100122044 3.12 PPG Tandem intermediate Intermediate adapter with out feed-thru
adapter bore
100207385 3.12 PPG to 3.38 twist lock adapter Connects PPG to 3.38-in CPST
plug-and-shoot adapter (H247630)
100206052 3.12 PPG to 3.12 twist lock adapter Connects PPG carrier to 3.12-in
Baker 10 plug-and-shoot adapter
(100055775)
Private

6.2.3.3 References
Maintenance Manual, 3.12-in Port Plug Gun System (InTouch ID: 4096106).
PPG TBT: 3.12-in Port Plug Gun System (InTouch ID: 4096120).
ASGS TBT: The Addressable Switch Gun System (InTouch ID: 3635874).
Addressable Switch Gun System and Addressable Switch Firing System training.

ID: 3333395).
Reference Page, Addressable Switch Gun System (InTouch ID: 3624996).
Multimedia 6-9: Addressable Switch Communication and Firing

Multimedia 6-10: Addressable Switch Misfire Recovery Technique

Multimedia 6-11: Addressable Switch Gun Loading

6.2.4 3.12-in Shot-By-Shot (SBS) Gun System

Private
The Shot-By-Shot (SBS) gun system is a perforating gun designed to use the
addressable switch in short interval 3.12-in end-loaded casing guns. Unlike
the 3.12-in Port Plug Gun, carriers thread into one another and do not require
a selective adapter. The system utilizes the Addressable Switch Firing System
(ASFS), which serves as a replacement for percussion switches used for
selective perforating.
The system takes advantage of a short detonator that is armed through a port
within the gun and a simple one-wire bulkhead feed-through that is housed within
a baffle plate between each gun. There is no exposed version available.
The addressable switch is small enough to install through an open port in the
gun. However, the detonator clip must be “end-loaded” like the shooting wires,
detonating cord, and shaped charges.
Primary advantages of this gun system include:
• No selective adapters required.

• Baffle plates require less maintenance than selective adapters.
• Quick and easy gun string assembly.
• Adapters and guns are semi-expendable.
• Guns are compatible with third party 3.12-in port plug guns adapters.
• Hardware is competitively priced.
• Low explosive weight shaped charge allows extended gun lifetime.
• Uses Addressable Switch technology.
• Eliminates mechanical piston switches.
• Switches require no maintenance.
• Feed-throughs are simple one-wire parts.
• Additional benefits associated with the ASFS include “Skip Over,” shot
indication, definitive gun identification, and an additional layer of safety.
Private
Figure 6-26: Shot-By-Shot (SBS)
Private
Combinablility
(ASFS), conventional percussion switches are also compatible with this gun
with this gun system. Be aware that Secure requires the use of a special
high-voltage Addressable Switch (100048404). Secure Plus devices, which
combine Secure and ASFS, can also be used to selectively fire guns.
instrumentation.

Private
MH-22
MH-22 w/PEK-B
w/PEK-E
CAL-G CAL-B
CAL-G to PPG CAL-B to PPG

head assembly head assembly
(100143336) (100174443)
Upper adapter
Carrier
Carrier
Carrier
Carrier
Bottom nose
Figure 6-27: Addressable Shot-By-Shot Gun (SBSG)
Private
Table 6-56: 3.12-in. SBSG specifications
Outside Diameter (in [mm]) 3.12 [79]

Pressure Rating (psi [kPa]) 5000 [34,473] with LP feed-thru,
15,000 [103,421] with HP feed-thru
Temperature Rating (°F [°C]) 250 [121] with LP feed-thru, 340 [171] with HP feed-thru
Shots per foot (spf), Phasing ( ° ) 1, 0
2, 0
2, 120
2, 180
3, 0
3, 120
3, 180
Gun Lengths (ft) 1, 2, 3
1
Selectivity Yes
1
Selective with addressable switches only.
Table 6-57: Theoretical Gun Weights
Gun Type Weight (lbm)

(Number of Shots)
1 16
2 18
3 22
Explosives

100026475 A-140 340 [171]
Most standard wireline detonators can be used with this system. Refer to OneCAT catalog (
InTouch ID: 3269220

Standard Detonating Cord
H543021 LSHV RDX 80 gr/ft Detonating Cord 1 340 [171]
Private

B017597 Nylon RDX 80 gr/ft Detonating Cord 330 [166]
H304843 80 gr/ft LS RDX Detonating Cord 330 [166]
1
Table 6-60: Charges

Steel loading tube
100166491 PP3104 RDX 330 [166]

1. Wireline adapter

(H123293)
2. Correlation tool
• CAL-G or
• CAL-B
Workshop Auxiliary Equipment


H247549 3.38 loading tool head Charge installation tool
H224450 Charge aligning tool Aligns charge with port hole
100253468 4 pin round port plug Installing carrier port plug
wrench
H133028 Wire installation tool Feeding wire through gun
H247236 Port thread cleaning tool
B024783 Screw extractor Removes port plug
P194467 Stepped gage Verifying port dimensions
Private

100188409 Handling plug Handling plug for carrier
100188410 Handling cap Handling cap for adapter
H047988 Handling Cap Handling cap for CAL-B wireline head
H048368 Handling Cap Handling cap for CAL-G wireline head


two-way
three-way



Private
Selectivity
Table 6-65: Switch and feed-thrus

T6005241 Addressable switch One switch required for each
100048404 High voltage addressable switch High voltage addressable switch for
use with Secure detonator.
T6040967 SBS Bulkhead Feed-thru High temparature (340°F) high

B036199 HT3 Viton O-ring Size 009 Viton SH607894 O-ring
T6041790 Bulkhead retainer 0.75-in. Bulkhead retainer nut
T6041789 0.75 in. Bulkhead Seal Adapter Feed-thru insert
B012075 HT3 Viton O-ring Size 113 Viton SH607894 O-ring for
0.75 in. bulkhead seal adapter
Test Equipment

300)
1
insert only
1

switch tester.
Private

6.2.4.3 References
Maintenance Manual, Shot-By-Shot (SBS) Gun System (InTouch ID: 4098920).
Addressable Shot-by-Shot Gun System (ASGS) and Addressable Switch Firing

System training.

ID: 3333395).
Reference Page, Addressable Shot-by-Shot Gun System (InTouch ID: 3624996).


Multimedia 6-14: Addressable Shot-by-Shot Gun Loading

Private
6.3 Exposed Gun Systems
6.3.1 Enerjet Guns

6.3.1.1 Description
General
The Enerjet Gun is a through-tubing gun system available in sizes of 1.63,

1-11/16 in., 2-1/8 in. and 2-1/2 in. Retrievable Enerjet Guns are available
in configurations of 0° or 90° Bi-Phased, while Expendable Enerjet Guns
are available in configurations of 0°, 45° tri-phased and either a 45° or 60°
continuous spiral. Both Retrievable and Expendable Enerjet Guns are available
in 4, 5 or 6 SPF.
Refer to the General Specification tables (Table 6-69 1.63 in. Unidirectional (0°)
System - General Specifications , Table 6-71 1-11/16 in. Enerjet Gun - General
Specifications, Table 6-73 2-1/8 in. Enerjet Gun - General Specifications and
Table 6-75 2-1/2 in. Enerjet Gun - General Specifications) and catalog drawings
and part lists (located in separate documents) for the configurations available
for each size.
Enerjet Guns can be used in hostile environments (acid and H2S) with special
precautions. Refer to “Hostile Environment” of the Assembly section.
Private
19 in. MH22
AH-38 3.4 in.
Optional EQF-41 = 45.8 in. EQF-38 = 48.4 in.

EQF-34 = 49.4 in.
Weights EQF-47 = 72 in. EQF-43 = 72 in.
17.8 in. +++ CCL-N 18 in. +++ CCL-L

8 in. 8 in.
Tool Saver Assy

H341022
MPD-G (20k) MPD-F (20k) MPD-H (20k) = 21.2 in.

19.4 in. MPD-NB (25k) 19.4 in. MPD-LB (25k) MPD-MB (25k) = 19.4 in.
Enerjet Enerjet Enerjet

Enerjet
Gun Gun Gun
Gun
1.63 in. Enerjet 1-11/16 in. Enerjet 2-1/8 in. Enerjet 2-1/2 in. Enerjet
Figure 6-28: Enerjet Gun Configurations
Private
1.63 in. Enerjet Gun

Table 6-68: 1.63 in. Unidirectional (0°) System Options
Pressure Temp Detonating Cord Detonator Charge1

(°F/°C)
15k 300/150 80 gr RDX Nylon - H304843 HMX -
H448401
15k 300/150 80 gr RDX PA - B073382 HMX -
2
H448401
Nobel - P190860
15k 300/150 80 gr HMX PVDF - B077062 HMX -
H448401
15k 300/150 80 gr HMX Nylon - H304800 HMX -

H448401
15k 355/180 80 gr HMX FEP - H352944 Nobel - P581311 HMX -
or 80 gr HMX PVDF - H448401
B077062
20k 365/185 80 gr HMX PVDF - B077062 Hi-Temp - P285784 HMX -
H448401
20k 330/165 80 gr HMX Nylon - H304800 Hi-Temp - P285784 HMX -
H448401
20k 365/185 80 gr HMX FEP - H352944 Hi-Temp - P285784 HMX -
H448401
Acid, H2S or other 80 gr HMX FEP - H352944 Hi-Temp - P285784 HMX -
hostile conditions H448401
(20k, 365°F)
1
RDX 1.63 in. Enerjet charges are no longer made.
2
All P190860 Detonators with a date shift code prior to Jan. 1997 should be downrated from 330°F to 300°F
and 15,000 psi for 1 hour. If the date shift code is not visible, the pre-1997 detonators can be identified by a
soft, transparent insulation while the newer detonators have wires with hard, gray colored insulation.
Table 6-69: 1.63 in. Unidirectional (0°) System - General Specifications
File Code TTCG-C

Size/Type 1.63 in. Retrievable
Phasing 0° (Unidirectional)
Available Charges HMX – H448401
Gun OD 1.630 in.
Gun Weight (fully loaded – 10 ft) 19 lb
4 SPF 25 lb
6 SPF
Minimum Passage 1.71 in.
Minimum Casing ID 4 in.
Shooting Interval (maximum) 47 ft
Private
Bending Radius (minimum) 10 ft

Shot Density 6 SPF or less
Selectivity Yes
Individual gun firing system Top-Down
Debris material Steel chips
Debris mass (per charge) 65 g
Debris fill up (per charge)
4-1/2 in. Casing 0.11 in.
7 in. Casing 0.05 in.
Well Fluid limitations

Acid Special protection required.
H2 S Special protection required.
Dry holes Special procedures required to avoid large
strip deformations.
Rollover Sleeve None available for 1.63 system.
1-11/16 in. Enerjet Gun

Table 6-70: 1-11/16 in. Enerjet Gun System Options
Unidirectional (0°)
1
Pressure Temp Detonating Cord Detonator Charge
(°F/°C)
15k 300/150 80 gr RDX Nylon - Nobel - P190860 2 HMX - H447489
H304843 or H448246
15k 300/150 80 gr RDX PA - B073382 HMX - H447489
or H448246
15k 300/150 80 gr HMX PVDF - HMX - H447489
B077062 or H448246
15k 300/150 80 gr HMX Nylon - HMX - H447489
H304800 or H448246
15k 355/180 80 gr HMX FEP - Nobel - P581311 HMX - H447489
H352944 or H448246
or 80 gr HMX PVDF
- B077062
Private
20k 365/185 80 gr HMX PVDF - Hi-Temp - P285784 HMX - H447489

B077062 or H448246
20k 330/165 80 gr HMX Nylon - Hi-Temp - P285784 HMX - H447489
H304800 or H448246
20k 365/185 80 gr HMX FEP - Hi-Temp - P285784 HMX - H447489
H352944 or H448246
20k 450/232 80 gr. HNS Lead - Hi-Temp - P285784 HNS - H448884
H448845
Acid, H2S or other 80 gr HMX FEP - Hi-Temp - P285784 HMX - H448246
(20k, 365°F)
Spiral Expendable (0°, 45°/0°/-45°, 45°)
1
(°F/°C)
15k 300/150 60 gr HMX Nylon - Nobel - P190860 2 HMX - H447792
H448369
15k 330/165 60 gr HMX FEP - HMX - H447792
H354673
H354673
(20k, 365°F)
Phased Retrievable (±45°)
1
(°F/°C)
15k 300/150 60 gr HMX Nylon - Nobel - P190860 2 HMX - H447792
H448369
20k 330/165 60 gr HMX Nylon - Hi-Temp - P285784 HMX - H447792
H448369
H354673
(20k, 365°F)
1
Standard 1-11/16 in. RDX Enerjet charges are no longer made.
2
All P190860 Detonators with a date shift code prior to Jan. 1997 should be down-rated from 330°F to 300°F
Table 6-71: 1-11/16 in. Enerjet Gun - General Specifications
File Code SCG-114 TTCG-B TTCG-BB

Size/Type 1-11/16 in. 1-11/16 in. Phased 1-11/16 in. Phased
Retrievable Spiral Expendable Retrievable
Private
Phasing 0° 0°, 45° continuous ±45°

& 45°/0°/-45°
Available Charges HyperCap RDX Hypercap RDX – HyperCap RDX –
– H448403 H448403 H448403
HMX – H447489 HMX – H447792 HMX – H447792
or H448246
HNS – H448884
Gun OD 1.687 in. 1.687 in. 1.687 in.
Gun Wt. (fully loaded – 10 ft) 19 lb 15 lb 21 lb
4 SPF 25 lb 20 lb 27 lb
6 SPF
Minimum Passage 1.78 in. 1.78 in. 1.78 in.
Minimum Casing ID 4 in. 4 in. 4 in.
Shooting Interval (maximum) 47 ft 30 ft 40 ft

Bending Radius (minimum) 10 ft 10 ft 10 ft
Shot Density 6 SPF or less 6 SPF 6 SPF (4 max with
(fully loaded only) HMX) or less
Selectivity Yes No Yes
(Dual Diode Switch)
Individual gun firing system Top-Down Top-Down Top-Down
Debris material steel chips Steel chips steel chips
Debris mass (per charge) 65 g 115 g 85 g
Debris fill up (per charge) 0.11 in. 0.18 in. 0.15 in.
4-1/2 in. Casing 0.08 in. 0.12 in. 0.10 in.
5-1/2 in. Casing 0.05 in. 0.06 in. 0.06 in.
7 in. Casing
Acid Special protection Special protection Special protection
required. required. required.
H 2S Special protection Special protection Special protection
required. required. required.
Dry holes Special procedures No special Special procedures
required to procedures required to
avoid large strip required. avoid large strip
deformations. deformations.

Table 6-72: 2-1/8 Enerjet System Options
Unidirectional (0°)
(°F/°C)
Private
10k 300/150 HyperCap -

80 gr RDX Nylon - H448774
H304843
15k 300/150
15k 300/150 80 gr RDX PA -
Nobel - RDX -
B073382 1
P190860 H429563
15k 300/150 80 gr HMX PVDF - RDX BH -
B077062 H448170
15k 300/150 80 gr HMX Nylon -
H304800
15k 355/180 80 gr HMX FEP - HMX Power EJ
H352944 - H447384
or 80 gr HMX PVDF - HMX -
Nobel - P581311
B077062 H448085
HMX BH -
H448415
20k 365/185 80 gr HMX PVDF - RDX -
B077062 H429563
20k 330/165 80 gr HMX Nylon - RDX BH -
H304800 H448170
Hi-Temp -
20k 365/185 80-gr HMX FEP - HMX Power EJ -
P285784
H352944 H447384
HMX -
H448085
HMX BH -
H448415
20k 450/232 87 gr HNS Lead - HNS -
H448845 H448644
Acid, H2S or other 80 gr HMX FEP - HMX Power EJ -
hostile conditions H352944 Hi-Temp - H447384
(20k, 365°F) P285784 HMX -
H448085
HMX BH -
H448415
1
Spiral Expendable (0°, 45°/0°/-45°, 45°)

(°F/°C)
60 gr HMX Nylon - H448774
H448369 Nobel -
1
15k 300/150 P190860
15k 300/150 HMX -
H447055
15k 365/185 PowerSpiral EJ,
60 gr HMX FEP -
Acid, H2S or other H354673 Hi-Temp - HMX –
hostile conditions P285784 H447419
(15k, 365°F)
Private
Phased Retrievable (±45°)

(°F/°C)
60 gr HMX Nylon - H448774
H448369 Nobel -
15k 300/150 RDX -
P190860 1
H448680
15k 330/165
HMX -
15k 365/185 H447055
60 gr HMX FEP -
Hi-Temp - PowerSpiral EJ,
Acid, H2S or other H354673
P285784 HMX –
hostile conditions
H447419
(15k, 365°F)
1
File Code SCG-106 TTCG-A TTCG-AB

Size/Type 2-1/8 in. Retrievable 2-1/8 in. Phased Spiral 2-1/8 in. Phased
Expendable Retrievable
Phasing 0° 0°, 45°, continuous ±45°
and 45°/0°/-45°
Available Charges HyperCap – H448774 HyperCap – H448774 RDX – H448680
RDX – H429563 HMX – H447055 HMX - H447055
RDX BH – H448170 PowerSpiral EJ, HMX PowerSpiral EJ, HMX
HMX – H448085 – H447419 – H447419
Power EJ HMX –
H447384
HMX BH – H448415
HNS – H448644
Gun OD 2.125 in. 2.125 in. 2.125 in.
Gun Wt. (fully 29 lb 24 lb 31 lb
loaded – 10 ft) 39 lb 34 lb 41 lb
4 SPF
6 SPF
Minimum Passage 2.25 in. 2.25 in. 2.25 in.
Minimum Casing 4-1/2 in. 4-1/2 in. 4-1/2 in.
ID
Shooting Interval 42 ft 30 ft 40 ft
(maximum)
Bending Radius 10 ft 10 ft 10 ft
(minimum)
Shot Density 6 SPF or less 4 or 6 SPF 6 SPF or less (4 max
with HMX) or less
Selectivity Yes No Yes
(Dual Diode Switch)
Private
Individual gun Top-Down Top-Down Top-Down

firing system
Debris material steel chips Steel chips steel chips
Debris mass (per 85 g 145 g 137 g
charge)
Debris fill up (per
charge)
4-1/2 in. Casing 0.15 in. 0.23 in. 0.19 in.
5-1/2 in. Casing 0.10 in. 0.15 in. 0.12 in.
7 in. Casing 0.07 in. 0.10 in. 0.09 in.
Well Fluid
limitations

H 2S Special protection required.
Dry holes Special procedures required to avoid large strip deformations.

Table 6-74: 2-1/2 Enerjet System Options
Spiral Expendable (0°, 45°/0°/-45°, 45°, 60°)

(°F/°C)
10k 300/150 60 gr HMX Nylon - PowerEJ HMX –
H448369 H447325
15k 300/150 60 gr HMX Nylon - PowerEJ HMX –
Nobel - P190860 1
H448369 H447325
15k 300/150 60 gr HMX FEP - PowerEJ HMX –
H354673 H447325
15k 365/185 60 gr HMX FEP - Hi-Temp - PowerEJ HMX –
H354673 P285784 H447325
Acid, H2S or other 60 gr HMX FEP - Hi-Temp - PowerEJ HMX –
hostile conditions H354673 P285784 H447325
(15k, 365°F)
1
Size/Type 2-1/2 in Phased Spiral Expendable

Phasing 0°, 60°, 45° continuous & 45°/0°/-45°
Available Charges PowerEJ HMX – H447325
Private
Gun OD 2.50 in.

Gun Wt. (fully loaded – 10 ft) 35 lb
4 SPF 42 lb
5 SPF
Minimum Passage 2.63 in.
Minimum Casing ID 4½ in.
Shooting Interval (maximum) 30 ft
Bending Radius (minimum) 10 ft
Shot Density 4 or 5 SPF
Selectivity No
Individual gun firing system Top-Down
Debris material Steel chips

Debris mass (per charge) 200 g
Debris fill up (per charge)
7 in. Casing 0.14 in.
H 2S Special protection required.
Dry holes Special procedures required to avoid large strip
deformations.
PowerSpiral Retrievable Enerjet Gun
The PowerSpiral Retrievable Enerjet system is designed for thru-tubing wireline

perforating operations. This system offers a technological break through with
a shock-absorbing material (Spacer Material) located between the charges.
This material attenuates shock waves during detonation, which reduces
charge-to-charge interference and minimizes shock waves in the wellbore. This
is significant since it increases the performance of shots across the wellbore.
With the features of multiple phasing, high shot densities and utilization of Power
Enerjet charges, the PowerSpiral Enerjet system generates perforations capable
of the highest well productivity in its size. Another feature of Power Enerjet’s
energy absorbing material is that it generates a momentary underbalance effect
during the explosion, which allows for cleaner perforations. In addition, the
shock-absorbing material (Spacer Material) virtually disappears after detonation,
leaving a negligible amount of environmentally-friendly debris in the well.
Private
Table 6-76: Specifications
1-11/16 in. 2-1/8 in. 2-1/2 in.

Shot Density (SPF) 7.5 6 5
Phasing (°) 45 45 (pendulum) 45
(pendulum) (pendulum)
1
Maximum Gun Length
4 to 5 in. Casing (ft) 20 20 20
Greater than 5 in. Casing (ft) 30 30 30
Minimum Restriction (in.) 1.78 2.25 2.62

2
Maximum Gun Swell (in.) 2.00 2.50 2.75
Estimated Tension through Minimum 100 or less 200 or less 300 or less
Restriction (lb)
Minimum Pull Strength of Gun Strip (lb) 8,000 12,000 15,000
Pressure Rating (psi) 15,000 15,000 15,000
Debris Fill (in.) per Charge; 4-1/2 in., 11.6 0.15 0.22 0.653
lb casing
Debris Fill (in.) per Charge; 5-1/2 in., 17.0 0.09 0.14 0.469
lb casing
Debris Fill (in.) per Charge; 7 in., 32.0 lb 0.07 0.09 0.284
casing
Debris Weight (g) per Charge 201 266 790
Temperature Rating – HMX (°F) for 1 hr 365 365 365
Selectivity Capability No No No
1
An MPD must be used on all guns. An improperly positioned gun will bend during detonation.
2
Although gun swell may exceed minimum restriction, it will pass through with some resistance. (Refer to
“Estimated Tension through Minimum Restriction.”)
Explosives
Detonators
Description Rating (1 hr)

1
Standard Detonator Nobel - P190860 15,000 psi (103,421 kPa), 300°F
(149°C)
2
RF Certified Detonator Secure- T6005130 15,000 psi (103,421 kPa), 340°F
(171°C)
Private
Medium Temperature Nobel - P581311 15,000 psi (103,421 kPa), 355°F

Detonator (179°C)
High Temperature Nobel - P285784 25,000 psi (172,369 kPa), 480°F
Detonator (249°C)
1
2
Requires the use of a special Secure Exposed booster (100043871).

Hazard Category: pressure
Exceeding a charge’s pressure rating, either at surface during the pressure

test or downhole, can cause it to collapse with enough force to detonate. This
detonation will generally be low order, but a chain reaction can result with some
charges going high order. (Never exceed 80% of charge’s pressure rating when
testing at surface.)
Detonating Cord
Note
Ratings for detonating cords may vary on other gun systems.
Table 6-78: Detonating Cord
Description Part Rating (1 hr) Prepackaged Chemical

Number Shipping Resistance
Classification
80 gr. RDX H304843 15,000 psi (103,421 kPa) 1.4D Poor
Nylon 300°F (149°C)
80 gr. RDX PA B073382 15,000 psi (103,421 kPa) 1.4S Fair
300°F (149°C)
60 gr. HMX H448369 15,000 psi (103,421 kPa) 1.4D Poor
Nylon 330°F (166°C)
80 gr. HMX B077062 20,000 psi (137,895 kPa) 1.4S Good
PVDF 330°F (166°C)
1
80 gr. HMX H304800 20,000 psi (137,895 kPa) 1.4D Poor
Nylon 1 330°F (166°C)
60 gr. HMX FEP H354673 20,000 psi (137,895 kPa) 1.4S Excellent
365°F (185°C)
Private
80 gr. HMX FEP H352944 20,000 psi (137,895 kPa) 1.4S Excellent
365°F (185°C)
87 gr. HNS Lead H448845 20,000 psi (137,895 kPa) 1.4D Poor
preshrunk 450°F (232°C)
The 80 gr HMX Rylsan (H304800) cords cannot be used with the Nobel mid-range detonator (P581311)
1
or the Nobel High Temp detonator (P285784) unless an HMX booster (B077451) is used.

Charges
Refer to the API 19B Performance Summary in a separate document.

Hazard Category: pressure
Exceeding a charge’s pressure rating can cause it to collapse with enough force
to detonate. This detonation will generally be low order, but a chain reaction can
result with some charges going high order. (Never exceed 80% of charge’s
pressure rating when testing at surface.)
Associated Equipment
Table 6-79: Associated Equipment
1-3/8 in. (for 1.63) 1-11/16 in. 2-1/8 in. 2-1/2 in.
Positioning devices MPD-NB MPD-LB MPD-MB MPD-MB
H432240 H432202 H432223 H432223
Collar Locators CCL-N CCL-L CCL-L CCL-L
P030462 P024737 P024737 P024737
Private
Options
Selectivity
Two guns can be selectively fired using Dual Diode Switch (H304818). This gives
two zone capability or up to 12 SPF by shooting both guns in the same zone.
Strips
Table 6-80: Strips
Shooting Interval (ft)

Strips Single Additional 1.63 in. 1-11/16 in. 2-1/8 in. 2-1/2 in.
Gun Gun
4 SPF 0° 9.75 11.5 P191249 P191249 P186401 NA
Enerjet
6 SPF 0° 9.75 11.5 P298577 P298577 P295338 NA
Enerjet
4 SPF 0° Spiral 10 10 N/A N/A T6008006 H352876
Expendable
4 SPF 10 10 N/A N/A T6008007 H352880
45°/0°/-45°
Spiral
Expendable
4 SPF 45° Spiral 10 10 N/A N/A T6008008 NA
Expendable
4 SPF 60° Spiral 10 10 NA NA NA H352914
Expendable
6 SPF 0° Spiral 10 10 N/A H352881 H352872 NA
Expendable
6 SPF 10 10 N/A H352882 H352873 NA
45°/0°/-45°
Spiral
Expendable
6 SPF 45° Spiral 10 10 N/A H352883 H623064 NA
Expendable
5 SPF 0° Spiral 10 10 N/A N/A N/A H352887
Expendable
Expendable
5 SPF 10 10 N/A N/A N/A H352889
45°/0°/-45°
Spiral
Expendable
Private

Expendable
4 SPF ±45° 7 8 N/A P623066 P712476 NA
Retrievable
4 SPF ±45° 10 11 N/A P623067 P712477 NA
Retrievable
4 SPF ±45° 16 17 N/A P623068 P712478 NA
Retrievable
4 SPF ±45° 20 21 N/A P623069 P712479 NA
Retrievable
6 SPF ±45° 7 8 N/A P712521 P712471 NA
Retrievable
6 SPF ±45° 10 11 N/A P712522 P712472 NA

Retrievable
6 SPF ±45° 16 17 N/A P712523 P712473 NA
Retrievable
5 SPF 5 5 N/A N/A N/A T6008549
PowerSpiral
5 SPF 10 10 N/A N/A N/A T6008550
PowerSpiral
6 SPF 5 5 N/A N/A 100125869
PowerSpiral
6 SPF 10 10 N/A N/A T6008475
PowerSpiral
7.5 SPF 5 5 N/A 100125867
PowerSpiral
7.5 SPF 10 10 N/A H432881
PowerSpiral
Potential Severity: Serious Potential Loss: Assets Hazard Category: machinery

equipment hand tools
Never run 2-1/8 in. charges on a 1-11/16 in. strip.
Rollover Sleeves
Rollover sleeves are used on 0° Enerjet Guns only. They are required on top
and bottom charges of each strip for wells deviated more than 30° and on every
tenth charge when perforating in gas.
Private
Table 6-81: Rollover Sleeves
1.63 in. 1-11/16 in. 2-1/8 in. 2-1/2 in.

Rollover Sleeves (zero phased only) N/A H276592 H276612 NA

The use of rollover sleeves on the 1.63 Enerjet Gun will increase the diameter
to more than 1.63 in.
Enerjet Release System
The Enerjet Release System is designed to drop off the gun carrier after the gun
has been detonated. It can be released automatically or on-command from the
surface. The Release Device has a built-in fishing neck for optional retrieval at
a later time.
Dual Diode
Switch
Release
System
Release
Detonator
Gun
Detonator
Figure 6-29: Standard Enerjet Release System
Types of Release Devices are listed in Table 6-82 Standard Enerjet Release
System:
Private
Table 6-82: Standard Enerjet Release System
Type Gun Part No. Current Status

1.63 Standard Retrievable Enerjet (0°) H354658
1-11/16 Standard Retrievable Enerjet (0°) H354658
2-1/8 Standard Retrievable Enerjet (0°) H354658
In Field Test (Contact
1-11/16 PowerSpiral Enerjet H354658 SRC InTouch
)
2-1/8 PowerSpiral Enerjet H354658
1-11/16 Bi-Phased Retrievable Enerjet (±45°) T6008164
2-1/8 Bi-Phased Retrievable Enerjet (±45°) T6008165
Hostile Environment
The use of Hyperdome scallop guns to perforate in acid or H2S environments is

generally recommended whenever possible; however, the Enerjet Gun can be
shot under the following conditions:
Table 6-83: Hostile Environment
Hostile Environment Recommendation

Acetic Acid Standard Enerjet Gun with no special protection.
Hydrochloric and mud acid
Below 365°F (140°C) Enerjet Gun with special protection. Refer to instructions in
“Hostile Environment” of Assembly chapter in the Enerjet
maintenance manual.
Above 365°F (140°C) Run Hyperdome or carrier guns only.
Hydrogen Sulfide gas - H2S
Less than 35% Enerjet Gun with special protection. Refer to instructions in
“Hostile Environment” of Assembly chapter in the Enerjet
maintenance manual.
More than 35% Hyperdome or carrier guns are recommended 1
1
Enerjet Guns have been successfully run at higher concentrations. See 6.3.1.1 High H S Concentrations
2
and Acid Environments.
Note
It is preferred to use post-1997 Nobel Detonators (P190869) in jobs with CO2 as
the wiring in pre-1997 detonators may react to CO2, causing loss of insulation. If
the date shift code is not visible, the pre-1997 detonators can be identified by
a soft transparent insulation while the newer detonators are made with a hard
gray colored insulation.
Private
High H2S Concentrations and Acid Environments
Note
Refer to Assembly chapter in the Enerjet Maintenance Manual for special
instructions required to protect the charges and detonators when running in
Acid/H2S.
Enerjet Guns have been successfully run in wells with 60% H2S in gaseous
phase and 30% H2S in solution. Well conditions were approximately 250°F
and 9000 ft.
The Enerjet Gun can be run in high H2S and acid concentrations if special
precautions are taken (Refer to instructions in the Assembly chapter of the
Enerjet Maintenance Manual).
Note
Use 80 gr HMX FEP detonating cord (H352944) when running in acid, H2S or
any other hostile condition at 365°F or less for 0° Enerjet guns and 60 gr FEP
detonating cord (H354673) for phased Enerjet guns.

6.3.2 Pivot Gun (TTPG)

6.3.2.1 Description
General
The Pivot Gun* is a Through-Tubing Gun System which outperforms any

Through-Tubing gun presently on the market. It has a charge performance
comparable to a casing gun and can pass through restrictions as small as
Private
1.78 in. The Pivot Gun accomplishes this by using large charges which are
assembled parallel to the gun axis (Figure 6-30 Pivot Gun). When the gun is at
the proper depth, the charges are pivoted 90° (deployed) before firing.
The Pivot Gun consists of a fully expendable gun and a Deployment Head which
provides control of the gun. The system is designed so only the Deployment
Head is recovered after the gun is fired. The system also includes a safe
retrieval capability which enables the gun to be pulled (for any reason) after
it has been deployed.
The following file codes have been assigned to the Pivot Gun System:
TTPG-BA H623071 Through-Tubing Pivot Gun (Top Assembly)

TTDH-BA H712500 Through-Tubing Deployment Head

TTCG-DA H448542 Through-Tubing Capsule Gun
Figure 6-30: Pivot Gun
Private
Theory of Operation
Expendable Gun
The expendable gun consists of a gun Carrier, two Actuator Rods, Capsule
Charges, Pivoting Screws, Rod-to-Charge Linkage, Linkage Screws, Bottom
Nose, Detonating Cord, Detonator, Window Support and an Electric Wire.
The Detonating Cord and the Electric Wire are routed inside the Carrier in a
serpentine pattern as shown in Figure 6-31 Expendable Gun. The Cord and the
Wire are kept fixed with respect to the Carrier.
The Capsule Charges are attached to the gun Carrier by Pivoting Screws.
Two Actuator Rods run along the Carrier, one on each side of the charges,
as shown in Figure 6-31 Expendable Gun. The Charges and Actuator Rods
are connected together by a Linkage. When the Rods are pulled upward, the
Charges rotate about the Pivoting Screws and the back of the Charges come
in contact with the Detonating Cord. The Carrier has built-in tabs called the
Cord Tab and Cord Guide which ensure proper contact between the back of
the Charge and the Detonating Cord.
An electrical Detonator is placed at the lower end of the gun since the gun shoots
bottom-up. The Carrier, Rods, Bottom Nose and Charges shatter into small
harmless pieces which fall to the bottom of the well.
Private
Detonating
Cord
Actuator
Rod
Capsule
Charge
Carrier
Charge
Linkage
Pivot
Screw
Cord Cord Electric Detonating

Tab Guide Wire Cord
TOP VIEW OF CARRIER

Figure 6-31: Expendable Gun
Private
Deployment Head
The Deployment Head provides the mechanism to pull the Rods in the
expendable gun which causes the Charges to rotate. The Head controls a switch
that arms the gun only after it has been deployed. Deployment is triggered by
sending positive current. After deployment, the gun is detonated by sending
negative current.
Deployment is accomplished by upward movement of the Deployment Piston

which pulls the Actuator Rods. The energy to move the Piston is provided by a
spring (Belleville Washers). Before deployment, the spring is kept compressed
by a Release Bolt. When the Release Bolt is “fired” (with positive current
polarity), the spring relaxes, exerting a force on the Piston and Rods. The
movement of the Piston is controlled by restricting the flow of oil, Univis J-26
(B033556), on the other side of the Piston. It takes 3 to 10 sec to fully deploy
the charges (90°). Once the Charges have been deployed, they are shot using
negative polarity. In the event of a misfire, the gun can be easily retrieved by
pulling up in the tubing. The Linkage of each Charge breaks and the open
charges close one-by-one as the gun enters the tubing.
Gun is Closed
Port #1 Port #2 Port #3
Restrictor
Actuator Rods
Switch Check Valve Release Bolt
Gun is Deployed
Figure 6-32: Deployment Head Schematic
Private
String Diagram
PEH-E MH-22
H030796
AH-38
H106437
EQF-43
H131630
CAUTION
Use of CCL-L prevents CCL-AG
verification that gun P125542
has deployed.
SAH-G Swivel Head

H712960
Tool Saver Assy

H341022
MPD-F (Obs.) MPD-LB

H115519 H432202
TTDH-BA
Deployment Head
H712500
TTPG-BA
Top Assembly
TTCG-DA H623071
Expendable Gun
H448542
Figure 6-33: String Diagram
Private
Detailed Circuit Description

Release
+ Blue Wire Bolt
#1 Fluid-to-
air Connector
Deployment Piston
C1
White Wire
#2 Fluid-to-
air Connector
RUNNING-IN POSITION (Closed)
Release
+ Blue Wire Bolt
#1 Fluid-to-
Deployment Piston air Connector
C1
+
White Wire
#2 Fluid-to-
air Connector
DEPLOYED POSITION (Open)
Figure 6-34: Detailed Circuit Diagram
Test Equipment
Special test equipment required for the Deployment Head includes:
• Safety Meter SF-109 (H123080)

• Hydraulic Kit for Pivot Gun (H448543)
• Vacuum Pump with J-26 Oil Reservoir and Pump
• Megohmmeter
• Oil Fill Adapter (H448512) or (H712561)
• Set of Dial Calipers or a Scale
• Stop Watch
Hostile Environment
As a general rule, it is recommended to use Hyperdome scallop guns, whenever

possible, to perforate in sour service environments. In an emergency, the Pivot
Gun can be shot under the following conditions:
Private
Acetic Acid Standard Pivot Gun with no special protection

Hydrochloric and Mud Acid
Below 175° F [79°C] Standard Pivot Gun with no special protection
Between 175° F and 284°F Protection as outlined in Section 6.3.2.1 High H2S
[79°C and 140°C] Concentrations
Above 284° F [140°C] Run Hyperdome or Carrier guns only
Hydrogen Sulfide Gas - H2S
Less than 2% Protection as outlined in Section 6.3.2.1 High H2S
Concentrations
More than 2% Run Hyperdome or Carrier guns are recommended 1
1
Pivot Guns have been successfully run at higher concentrations. See Section 6.3.2.1 High H S
2
Concentrations.
High H2S Concentrations
Also refer to gun loading for a hostile environment in Section .
Pivot Guns have been successfully run in wells with 60% H2S in gaseous phase
and 30% H2S in solution. The well conditions were about 250°F and about
9000 ft.
The Pivot Gun can be run in high H2S concentrations if the following special
precautions are taken.
1. After loading, fill the entire gun with DC-111 Silicone Grease (B023642).
2. At the wellsite after arming, thoroughly spray the following areas with red
Glyptal paint (B026626).
a. Detonator and exposed ground wire.

b. Booster area underneath Detonating Cord for each Charge.
c. Copper case of Nobel Detonator (P190860). Steel case of Manuhrin
Hi-temp Detonator (P285784) is H2S safe.
Note
These areas must be dry and free from oil (if necessary, thoroughly clean
with Freon) before painting.
3. Use Release Bolt for H2S service (H448668), Compression Adapter for H2S
service (H712551) and H2S Retainer Plate (H712560).
Private
Special Hardware for Use in Acid

Special Hardware for use in Acid Part Number
Neoprene Tubing B009211
Connector B075206
Glyptal Red B026626
PTFE Tubing E015573
Coupling Seal P075985
Glyptal Thinner B009269
Specifications
Pivot Gun
Penetration (API Sec. 1, 5th Ed) 27.78 in.
Entrance Hole (API Sec. 1, 5th Ed) 0.38 in.
Shot Density 4 SPF only
Phasing 180°
Maximum Gun Length 15 ft (61 Shots)
Minimum Gun Length 1 ft (4 shots)
Minimum Restriction 1.78 in.
Minimum Casing Size 4-1/2 in., 3.83 in. min. ID, (Deployed OD = 3.79 in.)
Maximum Running Speed 12,000 ft/hr
Vibration and Shock SWS Transport Standards
1
1
Weight of Deployment Head 32 lb
Weight of 10 ft Gun 25 lb
Debris 100%
Typical Carrier Debris 1.0 in. x 2.0 in.
Typical Actuator Debris 0.5 in. x 3.0 in.
Debris Quantity 2.2 in./ft of gun in 5-1/2 in. casing
Loading Time 2 Man-Hours (10 ft gun)
Misfire Retrieve Safe and Reliable
Private
Max. Well Deviation 90°

Gun OD Fully Deployed 3.79 in.
1
Pressure and temperature ratings vary depending on type of explosives (detonators, detonating cord and
charges) being used.
Detonators
Detonator Part No. System Rating (1 hr)
1
Nobel P190860 280°F / 10,000 psi
1
Hi-Temp P285784 330°F / 12,000 psi
E-1532 P448696 365°F / 12,000 psi
1
Used in the Pivot Gun Assembly.
2
Used in the Deployment Head.
Note
Rating with Pivot Gun System; may be higher with other exposed systems.
High Temperature Application
Pivot gun system temperature rating can be upgraded to 365°F for 1 hr using the
following components:
• 1-11/16 in. HMX Power Pivot Charge (H447008)

• Nobel High Temp Detonator (P285784)
• E-153 Deployment Detonator (P448696)
• HT Halar HMX Detonating Cord (H352945)
• Special HMX booster for the cord (B077451)

Private
SRC-Wireline\SRC-Wireline\InTouch ID 3013565\3.1\Release Date: 10-Jun-2004\EDMS UID: 274896043\Produced: 13-Jul-2006 20:55:42 6-110 WL FOM / Gun Systems 6-110
Intentionally Blank
Private
7-i WL FOM / Setting Tools 7-i
7 Setting Tools
7.1 CPST ___________________________________________________________ 7-1
7.1.1 CPST-AA ____________________________________________________ 7-1
7.1.1.1 Description ______________________________________________ 7-1
7.1.2 CPST-BC ____________________________________________________ 7-7
7.1.2.1 Description _______________________________________________ 7-7
7.1.3 CPST-CB ___________________________________________________ 7-15
7.1.3.1 Description ______________________________________________ 7-15
Private
SRC-Wireline\SRC-Wireline\InTouch ID 3013565\3.1\Release Date:10-Jun-2004\EDMS UID: 274896043\Produced: 13-Jul-2006 20:55:42 7-ii WL FOM / Setting Tools 7-ii
Intentionally Blank
Private
7-1 WL FOM / Setting Tools 7-1
7 SETTING TOOLS
7.1 CPST
This section is only a basic description of the Casing Packer Setting Tool (CPST),
for detailed information refer to the:

7.1.1 CPST-AA
7.1.1.1 Description
CPST-AA Features
The CPST-AA Casing Packer Setting Tool provides a reliable method of setting
compatible plugs and packers.
It contains the following features:
• Gas over hydraulic setting operation

• Pressure balanced design which does not have to overcome well pressure
when setting
• Does not require secondary igniter
• Spirol pins prevent the tool from "presetting" while running in the hole
• Does not require special alignment or orientation of components during
assembly or disassembly
• Low rebuilding cost
Private
SRC-Wireline\SRC-Wireline\InTouch ID 3013565\3.1\Release Date:10-Jun-2004\EDMS UID: 274896043\Produced: 13-Jul-2006 20:55:42 7-2 WL FOM / Setting Tools 7-2
Figure 7-1: CPST-AA Casing Packer Setting Tool
Private
CPST-AA Description
CPST-A setting tool configuration
Refer to Figure 7-2 CPST-AA Configuration.
The CPST-AA Casing Packer Setting Tool requires the following system
components:
• Monocable head
Either an MH-22/PEK-B or a PEH-B 3-3/8 in. perforating equipment head

can be used.
• Collar locator
The CAL-B 3-3/8 in. diameter Casing Anomaly Locator.
• Plug or packer adapter kit
Any plug or packer adapter kit which is compatible with the Baker Model 20
setting tool will be compatible with the CPST-AA.
• Plug or packer
Any plug or packer which can be set with a Baker Model 20 setting tool can
be set with the CPST-AA.
• Accessories
Any accessories which can be adapted to the packer.
Private
Figure 7-2: CPST-AA Configuration
Private
Setting Tool Operation
1. Electric power (15 V) fires an igniter in the firing head which initiates the
burning of a power charge in the burn chamber.
2. The combustion of the power charge produces a gas which acts upon one
side of a free floating piston in the oil-filled power cylinder.
3. The gas pushes the piston downward forcing the oil in the power cylinder to
flow through an orifice in the jack sub. The jack sub is ported so that the oil is
directed to the space between the intermediate head and the jack sub.
Note
A rigid assembly exists from the power cylinder through the jack sub to
the tension mandrel and adapter kit. The setting assembly consists of the
jack cylinder, intermediate head and setting sleeve. Spirol pins connect the
setting assembly to the rigid assembly (jack cylinder to jack sub).
4. When the force caused by the oil bends the spirol pins (3600 lb), the jack
cylinder, intermediate head and setting sleeve move downward.
Note
Before the pins have bent, forces caused by the hydrostatic pressure acting
on the open ends of the jack cylinder and setting sleeve are balanced (A1 =
A2). Thus hydrostatic pressure has no effect on the setting operation.
5. The plug or packer begins to set. When fully set, the tension member in the
plug or packer will shear and free the setting tool.
Note
The setting tool will stroke 10.4 in. (maximum) in approximately 5 sec. However,
it will take longer to shear the tension member. During the setting operation,
cable tension should be monitored. Wait 3 min before pulling out of the hole.
Never set back down on the plug or packer.
Private
CPST-AA Specifications
Table 7-1: CPST-AA Specifications
Part number H345410

Length (ft [m]) 7.50 [2.3]
Weight (lbm [kg]) 180.0 [82]

Minimum 5.000 [12.7]
Maximum 13.375 [33.0]
Table 7-2: CPST-AA General Data
Power Charge H447292

Igniter B028827
Igniter Current 0.3 to 0.7 A
Igniter Resistance 57 ± 10% ohms
Max. Setting Force 83,000 lb
Spirol Pins Preset Value 3600 lb
Stroke 10.4 in.
Oil 2 Quarts (SAE 30)
Top Threads 3 in. 5 NS
Bottom Threads 3-1/2 in. 6 Acme (Sleeve)
2 in. 6 Acme (Mandrel)
Table 7-3: CPST-AAWeights and Dimensions
Length (in [cm])

- Makeup 79.125 in.
- Overall 90 in.
- With Thread Protectors 101 in.
- Stroke 10.41 in.
Weight
- Firing Head 15 lb
- Piston 3 lb
- Burn Chamber 25.5 lb
- Power Cylinder 21 lb
Private
- Tension Mandrel 24 lb
- Setting Sleeve 22 lb
- Jack Cylinder 18 lb
- Jack Sub 23 lb
- Intermediate Head 16 lb
- Upper Thread Protector 5 lb
- Lower Thread Protector 8 lb
Total Dry Weight 180.5 lb (approx.)
7.1.2 CPST-BC
7.1.2.1 Description
Features
The CPST-BC Casing Packer Setting Tool provides a reliable method of setting
compatible plugs and packers (primarily Pengo plugs and packers).
Private
Figure 7-3: 2-1/8 in. Casing Packer Setting Tool (CPST-BC)
• Gas over hydraulic setting operation.

when setting.
Private
• Twin piston design to obtain adequate setting force.

• Two shear pins prevent the tool from “presetting” while running in the hole.
• All housing threads are 2.7 in. long. This ensures threads are still engaged
when 0-ring seals are broken during disassembly. Safety hazards are
minimized. Pressure vent ports are provided (Figure 7-4 Pressure Vent
Screw and Lock Nut and Pressure Relief Port on Housing). 0-ring seals
disengage after unscrewing 1 in. Another 1.7 in. of travel is needed before
parts separate.
assembly or disassembly.
• Low rebuilding cost.
• Adapter kit is available for plugs and packers designed for Baker Model 5
Setting Tool.
Figure 7-4: Pressure Vent Screw and Lock Nut and Pressure Relief Port on Housing
Configuration and Operation
CPST-B setting tool configuration
The CPST-BC Casing Packer Setting Tool requires the following system
components (Figure 7-5 CPST-BC Configuration).
Monocable head - An MH-22/AH-38 monocable head or a PEH-E/AH-38

perforating head can be used with the CCL-L.
Collar locator - The CCL-L 1-11/16 in. diameter Casing Collar Locator.
Plug or packer adapter kit - Any plug or packer adapter kit which is compatible
with the Pengo setting tool will be compatible with the CPST-BC. In addition,
an adapter kit is available for plugs and packers designed for Baker Model 5
Setting Tool.
Plug or packer - Any plug or packer which can be set with the Pengo setting tool
can be set with the CPST-BC.
Private
Accessories - Any accessories which can be adapted to the packer.
PEH-E MH-22
AH-38
CCL-L
Optional
Upper Head
for CCL-L
(H430297)
CPST-BC
Setting Adapter
Plug or Packer
Figure 7-5: CPST-BC Configuration
Refer to Figure 7-6 CPST-BC Operation.
Private
3. The gas pushes the (free floating) piston downward forcing the oil in the
power cylinder to flow through an orifice in the jack sub.
4. The jack sub is ported so the oil is directed to the space between the upper
intermediate head and the jack sub. This forms the first stage of a two stage
hydraulic piston assembly. The rod is ported to bring oil down to a second
piston (actually on the rod) that forms the second stage.
Note
A single piston does not have enough area in this small diameter tool to
develop sufficient setting force. Therefore, a second stage piston is ported
to operate in parallel with the first. Together, the pair develops adequate
setting force.
There are two rigid assemblies that move with respect to each other as
follows:
• Internally: Jack sub, rod and tension mandrel attached to tension stud
inside plug/packer and thus bottom of plug/packer.
• Externally: Jack cylinder, intermediate head, intermediate cylinder,
intermediate head and setting sleeve located against top of plug/packer.
Two spirol pins (in the jack cylinder) connect the external assembly to the
internal assembly and prevent presetting while running in the hole.
5. When the force caused by the oil breaks these spirol pins (6200 lb), the
external assembly moves downward.
Note
Before the pin has sheared, forces caused by the hydrostatic pressure acting
on the open ends of the jack cylinder (at the top) and the setting sleeve (at
the bottom) are balanced (A1 = A2). Refer to Figure 7-6 CPST-BC Operation.
Thus hydrostatic pressure has no effect on the setting operation, other than
O-ring friction.
6. The plug or packer begins to set. When fully set, the tension stud in the
plug/packer will shear and free the setting tool.
Private
Note
The setting tool will stroke 12 in. (maximum) in approximately 10 to 15 sec.
However, it will take longer to shear the tension stud. During the setting
operation, cable tension should be monitored. Wait three minutes before pulling
out of the hole. NEVER SET BACK DOWN ON THE PLUG OR PACKER.
Private
Figure 7-6: CPST-BC Operation
Private
Specifications
Table 7-4: CPST-BC Specifications
Part number H546344

Length (ft [m]) 11.25 [3.4]

Minimum 3.5000 [8.9]
Maximum 5.000 [12.7]
Table 7-5: CPST-BC General Data
Power Charge H447493

Igniter (B028827)
Current 0.7 amps
Resistance 60.00 ohms
Oil Approx. 1 pint or 1/2 litre
Top Threads 1-3/8 in. - 12 UN (CCL-L Type)
Bottom Threads
Setting Sleeve 2 in. - 10 Stub Acme
Tension Mandrel 11/16 in. - 16 UN
Table 7-6: CPST-BC Weights and Dimensions
Length 11 ft 1 in. (133 in.)

Makeup 11 ft 3 in. (135 in.)
Overall 11 ft 4 in. (136 in.)
With Thread Protectors
Weight
Intermediate Cylinder 8.1 lb
Firing Head 4.7 lb
Piston 1.0 lb
Burn Chamber 10.7 lb
Power Cylinder 9.9 lb
Tension Mandrel 7.5 lb
Setting Sleeve 7.7 lb
Private
Jack Cylinder 6.5 lb

Jack Sub 8.9 lb
Intermediate Head (2) 5.5 lb
Upper Thread Protector 0.1 lb
Lower Thread Protector 0.1 lb
Rod 5.5 lb
Lock Ring 0.1 lb
Total Dry Weight 81.8 lb (approx.)
7.1.3 CPST-CB
7.1.3.1 Description
Features
The CPST-CC Casing Packer Setting Tool provides a reliable method of setting
compatible plugs and packers that can be set with the Baker Model 10 Tool.
Private
Figure 7-7: Casing Packer Setting Tool (CPST-CC)
• Gas over hydraulic setting operation.

when setting.
Private
• Spirol pins prevent the tool from “presetting” while running in the hole.
• All housing threads are 2.7 in. long. This ensures threads are still engaged
when 0-ring seals are broken during disassembly. Safety hazards are
minimized. Pressure vent ports are provided (Figure 7-8 Pressure Vent
Screw and Lock Nut and Pressure Relief Port on Housing). 0-ring seals
disengage after unscrewing 1 in. Another 1.7 in. of travel is needed before
parts separate.
assembly or disassembly.
• Low rebuilding cost.
• Can be connected directly to CCL-L or CAL-B.
Figure 7-8: Pressure Vent Screw and Lock Nut and Pressure Relief Port on Housing
Note
Optional Head (H430297) for use with CCL-L is shown.
Configuration and Operation
CPST-C setting tool configuration
The CPST-CC Casing Packer Setting Tool requires the following system
components (Figure 7-9 CPST-CC Configuration).
Monocable or perforating head - An MH-22/AH-38 monocable head or a

PEH-E/AH-38 perforating head can be used with the CCL-L. A PEH-E or MH-22
in combination with a PEK-B can be used with the CAL-B. In addition, a PEH-B
can be connected directly to the CAL-B.
Collar locator - The CCL-L 1-11/16 in. diameter or the 3-3/8 in. CAL-B Casing
Collar Locators can be used.
Private
Plug or packer adapter kit - Any plug or packer adapter kit which is compatible
with the Baker Model 10 setting tool will be compatible with the CPST-CC.
Plug or packer - Any plug or packer which can be set with the Baker Model 10
setting tool can be set with the CPST-CC.
Accessories - Any accessories which can be adapted to the packer.

Private
PEH-B PEH-E MH-22
PEK-B
AH-38
CAL-B
CCL-L
Upper Head Optional

for CAL-B Upper Head
(H430295) for CCL-L
(H430297)
CPST-CC
Setting Adapter
Plug or Packer
Figure 7-9: CPST-CC Configuration
Refer to Figure 7-10 CPST-CC Operation.
Private
3. The gas pushes the (free floating) piston downward forcing the oil in the
power cylinder to flow through an orifice in the jack sub.
4. The jack sub is ported so the oil is directed to the space between the upper
intermediate head and the jack sub. There are two rigid assemblies that
move with respect to each other as follows:
• Internally: Jack sub and tension mandrel attached to tension stud inside
plug/packer.
• Externally: Jack cylinder, intermediate head and setting sleeve located
against top of plug/packer.
5. When the force caused by the oil breaks these spirol pins (6200 lbf), the
external assembly moves downward.
Note
Before the pin has sheared, forces caused by the hydrostatic pressure acting
on the open ends of the jack cylinder (at the top) and the setting sleeve
(at the bottom) are balanced (A1 = A2). Refer to Figure 7-10 CPST-CC
Operation. Thus hydrostatic pressure has no effect on the setting operation,
other than O-ring friction.
6. The plug or packer begins to set. When fully set, the tension stud in the
plug/packer will shear and free the setting tool.
Note
The setting tool will stroke 12 in (maximum) in approximately 10 to 15 s.
However, it will take longer to shear the tension stud. During the setting
operation, cable tension should be monitored. Wait 3 min before pulling out
of the hole. NEVER SET BACK DOWN ON THE PLUG OR PACKER.
Private
Before Setting After Setting
Orifice
Pressure Bleed
Spirol Pin
(6200 lb)
Burn Chamber
contains Igniter Jack Sub
and Power Charge
Jack Cylinder
Piston Area A2
Oil Expansion
Chamber
Intermediate
Head
Piston
Mandrel
Oil
Setting Sleeve
Piston Area A1
Figure 7-10: CPST-CC Operation
Private
Specifications
Table 7-7: CPST-CC Specifications
Part number H546345

Outside diameter (in [mm]) 2.75 [70]1
Length (ft [m]) 7.35 [2.2]

Minimum 4.500 [11.4]
Maximum 5.500 [14.0]
1
Maximum OD is 3.38 in when upper head (H420295) is used.
Table 7-8: CPST-CB General Data
Power Charge (H447292)

SRC igniter (B028827)
Current 0.7 amps
Resistance 60.00 ohm
Shear stud 35,000 lbf (typical)
Stroke 8 in
Shear pins preset value 6,200 lbf
Oil 585 cc or approx. 1 pint SAE 30 wt Motor Oil
Top threads 3 in – 5 UN
Upper head for CAL-B (H420295) 1 3/8 in - 12 UN
Upper head for CCL-L (H430297)
Bottom threads
Setting sleeve 2.50 in - 6 Acme
Tension mandrel 1 in - 8 UN
Private
Table 7-9: Weights and Dimensions
Length 88.2 in
Makeup 91.0 in
Overall 92.0 in
With thread protectors
Weight
Upper head 5.0 lbm
Piston 2.5 lbm
Burn chamber 15.0 lbm
Power cylinder 10.0 lbm
Tension mandrel 15.0 lbm
Setting sleeve 10.0 lbm

Jack cylinder 7.0 lbm
Jack sub 15.0 lbm
Intermediate head 10.0 lbm
Upper thread protector 1.0 lbm
Lower thread protector 1.0 lbm
Rod
Lock ring
Total dry weight 91.5 lbm (approx.)
Private
SRC-Wireline\SRC-Wireline\InTouch ID 3013565\3.1\Release Date: 10-Jun-2004\EDMS UID: 274896043\Produced: 13-Jul-2006 20:55:42 7-24 WL FOM / Setting Tools 7-24
Intentionally Blank
Private
8-i WL FOM / Pipe Recovery 8-i
8 Pipe Recovery
8.1 Punchers _______________________________________________________ 8-1
8.1.1 Tubing Puncher Selection Chart and Test Summary ____________ 8-1
8.1.1.1 Operational Techniques ___________________________________ 8-1
8.1.1.2 Selection Chart ___________________________________________ 8-1
8.1.1.3 Tubing Puncher Summary ________________________________ 8-3
8.2 Backoff ________________________________________________________ 8-4
8.2.1 Description __________________________________________________ 8-4
8.2.1.1 Backoff Equipment Options _______________________________ 8-5
8.3 FPIT ____________________________________________________________ 8-7
8.4 Cutters and Severing Tools _____________________________________ 8-7
8.5 PRS Chemical Cutters __________________________________________ 8-7
Private
SRC-Wireline\SRC-Wireline\InTouch ID 3013565\3.1\Release Date:10-Jun-2004\EDMS UID: 274896043\Produced: 13-Jul-2006 20:55:42 8-ii WL FOM / Pipe Recovery 8-ii
Intentionally Blank
Private
8-1 WL FOM / Pipe Recovery 8-1
8 PIPE RECOVERY
8.1 Punchers
8.1.1 Tubing Puncher Selection Chart and Test Summary

Note
For the latest tubing puncher selection chart and test summary refer to the Tubing
Puncher Performance page (InTouch ID: 2024205) at InTouchSupport.com.
8.1.1.1 Operational Techniques

• Use of a positioning device is essential as puncher performance is strongly
affected by stand-off.
• Position the gun as close to a collar as possible to take advantage of
additional clearance between strings. Hole size is reduced if less than
0.25-in. clearance exists between the inner and outer strings. Tests have
indicated that if these strings are touching no holes will be made.
• Position the gun in order to avoid shooting through a string collar.
• Determine the fluid level inside and outside the string to be punched. Using
WHE may be necessary due to pressure differential.
8.1.1.2 Selection Chart

Table 8-1: 1.38-in. HNS PUNCHERS
Maximum
Tubing / Casing wall Average Exit Hole penetration in outer
thickness Size in inner pipe pipe
in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm]
16DS PUNCHER H448255
Minimum 0.19 [4.8] 0.30 [7.6] 0.10 [2.5]
recommended wall
Maximum 0.375 [9.5] 0.23 [5.8] 0.05 [1.2]
recommended wall
16CL PUNCHER H448254
Private
Maximum
thickness Size in inner pipe pipe
in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm]
Minimum 0.375 [9.5] 0.22 [5.5] 0.10 [2.5]
recommended wall
Maximum 0.50 [12.7] 0.13 [3.3] 0.05 [1.2]
recommended wall
Table 8-2: 1.69-in. HNS PUNCHERS
Maximum
1.69-in. HNS thickness Size in inner pipe pipe

PUNCHERS in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm]
20ES PUNCHER H429595
Color Code PINK
Minimum 0.19 [4.8] 0.32 [8.1] 0.10 [2.5]
recommended wall
Maximum 0.375 [9.5] 0.24 [6.1] 0.05 [1.2]
recommended wall
20DM PUNCHER H429596
Color Code BLACK
Minimum 0.375 [9.5] 0.30 [7.6] 0.10 [2.5]
recommended wall
Maximum 0.50 [12.7] 0.23 [5.8] 0.05 [1.2]
recommended wall
20DL PUNCHER H429597
Color Code PURPLE
Minimum 0.50 [12.7] 0.25 [6.3] 0.10 [2.5]
recommended wall
Maximum 0.58 [14.7] 0.17 [4.3] 0.05 [1.2]
recommended wall
Private
Note
• Data applies to Tubing and Casing Grade L-80, 0 to 15,000 psi, 75°F to
500°F in fluid with 0.25-in. [6.35 mm] clearance between inner and outer
pipe. Refer to Test Summary (InTouch ID: 2024205).
• Use standard or high-pressure Domed Scallop guns, with shots through
the scallop.
• Holes through J55 will be approximately 10% larger; through P110
approximately 10% smaller.
Tubing Puncher Summary

8.1.1.3
For the latest tubing puncher test summary (pnchsum.pdf ) refer to the Tubing
Puncher Performance (InTouch ID: 2024205) at InTouchSupport.com.
Private
8.2 Backoff
can be found at InTouchSupport.com (Content ID: 3013434).
8.2.1 Description
During the course of drilling a well, the drill assembly may get stuck in the
borehole due to hole conditions, formation characteristics, mud properties,
choice of assembly components, mechanical failure and human error. To save
the well and minimize costs, the recovery of stuck drill assemblies is a major
concern of our customers.
The Backoff shot provides a reliable method of unscrewing connections as long

as left-hand torque can be transmitted to the joint in question. When the stuck
point is unknown, it may be necessary to run a Free Point Indicator Tool (FPIT)
to determine where the pipe is free. Under certain circumstances a Backoff
shot can be combined with the FPIT to reduce the number of descents. Refer
to FPIT manual for information on how to run the FPIT alone or in combination
with Backoff.
All thread connections are held together by the frictional forces created by the
torque used to screw the parts together. In the case of drillstring assemblies,
a certain amount of right-hand torque is applied to make up the various types
of connections, i.e., a 4-1/2 in. IF thread is made up to a higher torque than a
3-1/2 in. IF thread. To unscrew the same connection, an equal or higher amount
of left-hand torque must be applied. If the thread is subjected to axial forces,
i.e., overpull or overpush (the connection is in tension or in compression) the
frictional forces in the thread are increased and a higher amount of torque is
needed to unscrew the thread. The frictional forces are higher when static (not
moving) than when kinetic (moving).
The basic theory behind the Backoff shot is to first put the connection in question
in such a state that it almost unscrews by itself, i.e., no axial forces applied to the
thread (buoyant weight at joint). Next, apply as much left-hand torque that can
be transmitted to the joint without risking a mechanical Backoff somewhere else
in the drillstring. Then, unsettle the static frictional forces in the thread by giving
the connection a shock. This is usually done by firing a number of primacord
strands at the connection.
If these points are all fulfilled, a Backoff will work on any thread connection.
However, if just one of them has not been fulfilled, the thread will not unscrew.
Private
8.2.1.1 Backoff Equipment Options

Figure 8-1 Backoff Equipment Options shows the various options of the Backoff
equipment, the figure does not show all the possible equipment configurations
but the ones most commonly used.
When using a Heptacable a Shooting Bridle is needed to cross over to the MH-22.
Private
MH-22
AH-38
C CCL-N CCL-NB
C
L
CCL-L
AH-59
W AH-38
E
I 1-11/16 in.
G EQF-38, 46
H
T 1-3/8 in. 1-11/16 in.

S EQF-41 EQF-51
2 in. EQF-39, 46
A
D
A
P-102617
P
T P-030487 P-027388
E
R P-186792
S P-091513 P-126524
H P-186271
O
T P-186470 P-291989 P-294999
H
E
A
D
Standard 1-3/8 in. Standard 1-11/16 in. Backoff

Backoff Backoff (25 kpsi) Equipment Chart
1-3/8 in. OD with 1-3/8 in. connections
Figure 8-1: Backoff Equipment Options
Private
8.3 FPIT
The Free Point Indicator Tool (FPIT) uses a stretch and a torque sensor to
accurately determine the free point in stuck drill pipe, drill collars, tubing or casing.
The latest versions of the FPIT manuals can be found at InTouchSupport.com:
• Operations Manual (Content ID: 3013446).

• Maintenance Manual (Content ID: 3016135).
Cutters and Severing Tools

8.4
Cutters and severing tools are used to sever tubing or casing in a variety of
circumstances. Jet cutters and severing tools cut the casing in a flat plane
perpendicular to the casing wall. The latest version of the Cutters and Severing
Tools manual can be found at InTouchSupport.com (Content ID: 3981467).
8.5 PRS Chemical Cutters

The chemical cutter is a mechanical/chemical pressure actuated device that is
based on the oxidation/reduction process. The latest version of the Chemical
Cutters Manual by Pipe Recovery Systems can be found at InTouchSupport.com
(Content ID: 3015875)
Private
Private
WL FOM / Pipe Recovery
Intentionally Blank

8-8
A-i WL FOM / Perforating Gun Vertical Make-Up A-i
A Perforating Gun Vertical Make-Up

A.1 Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) __________________________ A-1
A.2 Vertical Make-Up Instructions __________________________________ A-2
A.2.1 Guns with make-up plate groove ______________________________ A-2
A.2.2 Guns without make-up plate groove ___________________________ A-2
Private
SRC-Wireline\SRC-Wireline\InTouch ID 3013565\3.1\Release Date:10-Jun-2004\EDMS UID: 274896043\Produced: 13-Jul-2006 20:55:42 A-ii WL FOM / Perforating Gun Vertical Make-Up A-ii
Intentionally Blank
Private
A-1 WL FOM / Perforating Gun Vertical Make-Up A-1
A PERFORATING GUN VERTICAL MAKE-UP SRC, Wireline FOM
A.1 Standard Operating Procedure (SOP)

All operations conducted shall comply with the following standards:
• OFS Standard 13 – Mechanical Lifting

• OFS Standard 20 – Hazard Analysis and Risk Control
Guidelines for vertically making up perforating guns
1. All general procedures for making up wireline tools shall be followed as

per the Schlumberger Rig-up Equipment Maintenance Manual (InTouch
ID: 3012539).
2. Use a certified lifting cap when lifting guns for vertical make-up.
3. When hanging perforating guns during vertical make-up, a primary and a
secondary barrier to falling shall be maintained.
4. Due to the nature of wireline conveyance the gun string length will be limited
to no more than three 20-ft guns. However, total gun weight must not exceed
the rating of the vertical make-up plate in use.
Barrier Definition
1. The primary barrier for hanging perforating guns is a vertical make-up plate
such as SFT-159 (H542225) or make-up plate (T5018922).
• Should the gun system not have a make-up plate groove an acceptable
alternative to engage the gun into the make-up plate is to use one of
the following devices.
• An appropriately sized Safety Clamp and a gun hanging sleeve
(100129027).
2. The secondary barrier for hanging perforating guns is the enclosed

mouse-hole in which they are hung.
When a proper secondary barrier is not available a Pre-Job Safety Analysis
should identify this issue and a HARC performed to assess the risk and
identify appropriate steps to mitigate it.
Private
A.2 Vertical Make-Up Instructions
A.2.1 Guns with make-up plate groove

1. Guns that fit a standard Wireline Vertical Make-Up Plate should be made up
using the same techniques as standard wireline tools.
2. All standard Schlumberger Explosives Field Safety Procedures must be
followed.
3. 2.88-in. HSD guns require a special Make-Up Plate Adapter (100156393).
A.2.2 Guns without make-up plate groove

The following instruction are for guns without make-up plate grooves (maximum
gun size 2.50 in.).
1. Lay down guns to be used for the job on the catwalk

2. Prepare the gun as appropriate for the intended arming procedure (depending
on whether top or bottom arming will be performed).
3. Install an upper firing head on the gun if not already done.
4. Install a certified Lifting Cap (100114703 for CAL-B type or 100114733 for
CCL-L type connection) on the firing head or MPD.
5. Install the gun-hanging sleeve (100129027) onto the vertical make-up plate
(3500-lb rated H542225 or 5000-lb rated T5018922) and attach safety chain
of the gun-hanging sleeve to one of the handles of the make-up plate. Refer
to Figure A-1 Vertical Make-up Plate with Gun Hanging Sleeve.
Figure A-1: Vertical Make-up Plate with Gun Hanging Sleeve
Private
6. Place the vertical make-up plate, with gun-hanging sleeve (100129027)

installed, over the mouse hole.
7. Pick up gun to the rig floor using wireline or air hoist and lower it through the
gun-hanging sleeve, into mouse-hole.
8. Position the gun so that the firing head is above the gun-hanging sleeve at a
convenient height (about 1 to 2 ft).
9. Prepare a Safety Clamp (Access Oil Tools Type “T”, part # 11-127) to attach to
the gun. Make sure the teeth are not blunt and that they are not stuck. Push
down on each one with your thumb. They should spring back to the original
position freely with spring force. The clamp needs to be configured to the
manufacturers specifications with the correct number of links for the diameter
of gun being hung. The correct number of links for the “make” clamp are:
• 1.12 to 2.00 in. OD, 4 links required

• 2.12 to 2.50 in. OD, 5 links required
10. Install the Safety Clamp on the gun as follows,
• Remove the end link pin (the one with the chain). Refer to Figure A-2
Safety Clamp.
• Wrap the clamp around the gun and re-install the end link pin.
• Tighten the clamp nut using the supplied wrench, apply 100 to 200 ft-lb
torque. The supplied wrench is one foot long, therefore weight (lb) put
onto wrench will be the applied torque in ft-lb.
Figure A-2: Safety Clamp
11. Lower gun and let the clamp rest on the gun-hanging sleeve. Visually verify
that the clamp holds the gun before removing the lifting line (air hoist or
wireline), Refer to Figure A-3 Safety Clamp Attachment.
Private
SRC-Wireline\SRC-Wireline\InTouch ID 3013565\3.1\Release Date:10-Jun-2004\EDMS UID: 274896043\Produced: 13-Jul-2006 20:55:42 A-4 WL FOM / Perforating Gun Vertical Make-Up A-4
Figure A-3: Safety Clamp Attachment
12. Remove the lifting line from the gun and uninstall the lifting cap.
13. Lower the wireline with the winch until the last tool in the string is close to
the head of the gun to be attached.
14. Make up the connection between the gun hanging in the make-up plate and
the bottom of the tool string.
15. Pick up on wireline winch to take the weight off of the safety clamp before
removing the safety clamp.
16. Remove the safety clamp by loosening the nut and removing the End Pin.
Place the safety clamp out of the way.
17. Pick up on the wireline until either the top arm sub or bottom of the gun
is available as appropriate.
18. Arm gun through top arm sub or bottom nose as appropriate.
19. Pull the gun into the lubricator and “bump up” the string into the tool catcher.
20. Equalize as appropriate and run in the hole.
Private
Note: Arming
All standard Schlumberger Explosives Field Safety Procedures must be followed.
For guns that are not armed through a port, the gun(s) will be hung with the
safety clamp during arming.
For selective guns, follow the arming sequence provided in Schlumberger

Explosives Safety Procedures Placard and gun system manual.
Private
SRC-Wireline\SRC-Wireline\InTouch ID 3013565\3.1\Release Date: 10-Jun-2004\EDMS UID: 274896043\Produced: 13-Jul-2006 20:55:42 A-6 WL FOM / Perforating Gun Vertical Make-Up A-6
Intentionally Blank
Private
B-i WL FOM / Detonating Cord Cutter Instructions B-i
B Detonating Cord Cutter Instructions

Private
SRC-Wireline\SRC-Wireline\InTouch ID 3013565\3.1\Release Date:10-Jun-2004\EDMS UID: 274896043\Produced: 13-Jul-2006 20:55:42 B-ii WL FOM / Detonating Cord Cutter Instructions B-ii
Intentionally Blank
Private
INSTRUCTION SHEET
Detonating Cord Cutter (H432334) Maintenance and Care
1. REPLACEMENT PARTS:
H432358 Blade, Single Edged, Special , pkg of 5 H432339 Guide Block, Det Cord Cutter
B018582 Screw, Bdg Hd 10-32 x .3/4 inch SST Molded
B013062 Washer, #10 Ext Tooth Lock SST H432333 Rod, .125 Dia x 10.5 inches lg
B012209 Nut, Reg Hex 10-32 SST B012707 Screw, Soc Hd 6-32 x 3/16 lg
Notes: Due to adjustments made at assembly, purchasing cutter handles from other than SRC is not
recommended.
Use only approved blades H432358 (pkg of 5). Commercial razor blades tested for this cutter
make only 2-3 clean cuts, the recommended blades will make about 100 clean cuts in each
hole.
Removable Slot for Nylon Ribbon Cord
Upper Jaw
H432358
(pkg of 5)
Groove for
quick cut
H432339 Hole for precision cuts
Fig. 1
2. Description
The enclosed tool is the new SRC designed detonating cord cutter based on a commercially available
handle mechanism. This cutter is considered an alternative to the razor blade and wooden block
method of cutting detonating cord.
The cutter is based on a Sears Handi-Cut TM handle, with a special SRC designed anvil and a special
cutting blade. The anvil design has an open groove at the front for quick cutting of detonating cord.
The holes on the side should be used for more precise cutting. Two holes were provided so that more
of the blade could be used, - this means less blade changes are required. A slot is also provided for
cutting nylon covered ribbon cord. (Refer to Fig 1). To make measurements easily, a gage rod has been
added to the anvil and the distance between the blade and the outer edge of the blade was fixed at ½ in.
For lead covered cords(flat or round) the recommended procedure is to score the cord and then break
it. This procedure is still the recommended one for all lead sheathed cords. The front section (open
groove) of the cutter allows the scoring of round lead cord. No provision for scoring flat lead cord is
provided.
Special blades are furnished with this cutter. Please use only these blades. They are identifiable by the
absence of the metal backing normally found on razor blades and the black color on the cutting edge
(due to the coating). Five replacement blades are included with each cutter. Additional blades
(H432358 – pkg of 5), can be ordered from SRC.
Schlumberger Well Services - Schlumberger Perforating & Testing Center

File Code: Page 1 of 2 Part Number: SH432357 Rev: AD
INSTRUCTION SHEET
Detonating Cord Cutter (H432334) Maintenance and Care
3. MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
3.1.1. After every job, use an air hose to spray out any powder which may accumulate on the anvil or
blade.
3.1.2. Cutter blade and molded block should be checked regularly and immersed in alcohol to remove
residual particles of explosive powder that may collect in crevices.
3.1.3. Change out blades whenever you notice any damage to the blade or experience difficulty cutting
the cord.
3.2. BLADE REPLACEMENT
Caution: These blades are extremely sharp. Be very careful during the handling and
cleaning of the blades.
3.2.1. Remove clamp holding blade by loosening two screws on “removable upper jaw.
3.2.2. Dispose of old blade in a safe manner.
3.2.3. Position new blade (H432358 – pkg of 5) on cutter such that the edge of the top of the blade is
positioned against the stop on the handle. Put the holding clamp back on-loosely fastened.
3.2.4. Close the cutter so the blade is in the anvil. Slide the blade so the end is flush with the front part
of the anvil block. Tighten down the clamp. Blade should be totally encased in molded block
when the assembly is closed
3.2.5. Confirm the cutter is making a square cut by using it to cut several small sections of cord.
B LA D E U P P E R JA W
F IX E D
S E C T IO N
M A S K IN G T A P E
B LA D E
C LA M P
P O S IT IO N T IL L
SU RFA CES TOU CH
R E T A IN E R S C R E W S
Fig. 2
Blade alignment and sharpness of the edge should be checked regularly. Use only H432358 (pkg of 5)
replacement blades.
Schlumberger Well Services - Schlumberger Perforating & Testing Center

File Code: Page 2 of 2 Part Number: SH432357 Rev: AD
C-i WL FOM / Crimper Instructions C-i
C Crimper Instructions
Private
SRC-Wireline\SRC-Wireline\InTouch ID 3013565\3.1\Release Date:10-Jun-2004\EDMS UID: 274896043\Produced: 13-Jul-2006 20:55:42 C-ii WL FOM / Crimper Instructions C-ii
Intentionally Blank
Private
INSTRUCTION SHEET
Detonating Cord Crimping Tools and Procedures
1. Parts
H432091 Pliers, Detonator Crimp Without Cutting Edge

B039820 Gage, Pin, 0.188 Dia., Class ZZ (GO)
B039821 Gage, Pin, 0.192 Dia., Class ZZ (NOGO)
Note: Gage Pins, Go= 0.188 in. Dia. (B039820) and NoGo= 0.192 in. Dia. (B039821) are
supplied with each single Crimper (H432091).
Figure 1
2. Single Crimper (H432091) – This is the only Crimper recommended by SRC.
2.1 To make strong and reliable crimps with the single Crimper (H432091):
2.1.1 Firmly push the cord (without turning) against the explosive in the booster or detonator.
2.1.2 Always make two crimps at 90° to each other at each crimping location.
2.1.3 Always make the first crimp 5/32 in. (4 mm) from the mouth of the booster/detonator. Rotate the
Crimper 90° and crimp again in the same location. Make the next crimp 1/8 in. (3 mm) from the
first. Rotate the Crimper 90° and crimp again. An easy way to get dimensions correct is to use the
width of one side of the Crimper as a gage for first and second crimps.
2.1.4 Verify crimps are round.
2.1.5 Verify shell of booster or detonator is not split.
2.1.6 Crimping dimensions for Boosters and 80 grain round cord are shown in Figure 2.
Booster Cord
"A" Booster Dimensions (nominal)
Part No. Description A B C
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
0.62 5/32 1/8
H448841 RDX (15.7) (4) (3)
Explosive Mouth of H447381 HMX
0.65 5/32 1/8
Booster (16.5) (4) (3)
"C" "B" 0.68 5/32 1/8
H447624 HP10 (17.3) (4) (3)
Second First
Crimping Location Crimping Location
Figure 2
Schlumberger Well Services - Schlumberger Reservoir Completions Center

Date: 16 January 2001 Page 1 of 2 Part Number: T6009034 Rev: AF
INSTRUCTION SHEET
Detonating Cord Crimping Tools and Procedures
2.1.7 Crimping dimensions for an empty Booster Shell are shown in Figure 3. When using an empty
booster shell, it is very important that the cord be fully inserted into the shell.
Cord
"A"
Empty Booster Shell Dimensions
Part No. A B C
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
1.00 5/32 1/8
B016743 (25.4) (4) (3)
Empty Booster Shell Mouth of
Booster
"C" "B" Note: When using an empty shell (instead of a live
booster) for training purposes, be sure to
Second First Crimping cut the dummy (inert) cord longer to properly
Crimping Location Location position the empty shell.
Figure 3
3. Common Mistakes
3.1 First crimp is too close to the mouth of the booster causing the shell to flare out.
3.2 Second crimp is too close to the booster explosive which creates a gap between the detonating
cord and booster powder. This can split the booster shell and it does not lock the cord cover in
place. Make sure the second crimp is at least 4 mm away from the booster explosive.
4. Double Crimper (B031493), Figure 4, has been obsoleted and is no longer

recommended for crimping applications. Use single Crimper (H432091) instead.
Figure 4
5. Gauging Crimpers
Gage Pins, Go= 0.188 in. Dia. (B039820) and NoGo= 0.192 in. Dia. (B039821), are supplied
with each single Crimper (H432091). These should be used prior to each job to gauge the crimper
hole size. This range of hole sizes has been determined to produce the strongest possible
mechanical connection.
5.1 To use Gages:
5.1.1 Close the Crimper by squeezing on the handle.
5.1.2 Make sure the 0.188 in. Go Gage Pin passes through the Crimp hole.
5.1.3 Make sure the 0.192 in. NoGo Gage Pin does not pass through the Crimp hole.
5.1.4 If Crimpers fail step 5.1.2 or 5.1.3, remove them from service.
Schlumberger Well Services - Schlumberger Reservoir Completions Center

Date: 16 January 2001 Page 2 of 2 Part Number: T6009034 Rev: AF
D-i WL FOM / Hostile Environment (GFE paper, by R. Sonthalia, 1996) D-i
D Hostile Environment (GFE paper, by R.

Sonthalia, 1996)
D.1 Introduction ____________________________________________________ D-1
D.2 Heads __________________________________________________________ D-2
D.2.1 Perforating Equipment Heads (PEH) __________________________ D-2
D.2.1.1 PEH Rebuilding Guidelines (up to 400°F) __________________ D-2
D.2.1.2 HEL PEH Modifications (up to 500°F) ______________________ D-2
D.2.2 BCC Boots __________________________________________________ D-3
D.2.2.1 Gas Cut Muds ____________________________________________ D-3
D.2.3 Monocable Heads ____________________________________________ D-5
D.2.3.1 High Temperature ________________________________________ D-5
D.2.3.2 Hostile Chemicals ________________________________________ D-6

D.2.4 PEGS Verified Heads ________________________________________ D-8
D.3 Perforating Accessories ________________________________________ D-8
D.3.1 High Temperature ____________________________________________ D-8
D.3.1.1 Additional Tips for High Temperature Applications __________ D-9
D.3.2 High Pressure _____________________________________________ D-13
D.3.2.1 O-ring Pressure Seals __________________________________ D-13
D.3.2.2 Seals - Frequency of Replacement ______________________ D-13
D.3.2.3 WellHead Pressure Equipment __________________________ D-14
D.3.3 Hostile Chemical Environment ______________________________ D-15
D.3.3.1 H 2S ___________________________________________________ D-15
D.3.3.2 Precautions ____________________________________________ D-15
D.3.3.3 Acid ___________________________________________________ D-16
D.3.3.4 Additives - Inhibitors ____________________________________ D-16
D.3.3.5 Methanol ______________________________________________ D-16
D.3.4 Perforating in Gas __________________________________________ D-16
D.3.4.1 Safety _________________________________________________ D-17
D.3.4.2 Pressure Equipment ____________________________________ D-17
D.3.5 High Deviation _____________________________________________ D-18
D.3.5.1 Perforating on Coiled Tubing ____________________________ D-19
D.3.5.2 Wireline Fired Perforation on Coiled Tubing ______________ D-20
D.4 Explosives ___________________________________________________ D-21
D.4.1 High Temperature/High Pressure ____________________________ D-21
D.4.1.1 General Rules __________________________________________ D-22
D.4.1.2 HNS-PYX Comparison __________________________________ D-23
D.4.1.3 Detonating Cords, Detonators and Boosters ______________ D-24
D.5 Enerjet Gun Systems _________________________________________ D-26
D.5.1.1 HNS System Specifications _____________________________ D-28
D.5.1.2 Special Procedures for High Temperature Jobs with Enerjet D-29
D.5.2 HT Detonator Arming Hints _________________________________ D-29
D.5.3 HT Detonating Cord Recommended Techniques _____________ D-30
D.5.3.1 Enerjets with Lead Covered Primacord ___________________ D-30
Private
D-ii WL FOM / Hostile Environment (GFE paper, by R. Sonthalia, 1996) D-ii
D.5.3.2 Enerjets with HMX Primacord ___________________________ D-32

D.5.3.3 Enerjets with Halar Primacord ___________________________ D-32
D.5.4 PEGS Verified Systems ____________________________________ D-33
D.5.5 Acid/H 2S __________________________________________________ D-33
D.5.5.1 Special Procedures for Enerjet Jobs in Acid/H 2S
Environments __________________________________________ D-34
D.5.5.2 Charge Protection ______________________________________ D-34
D.5.5.3 Detonator Protection ____________________________________ D-34
D.5.5.4 Miscellaneous Tips _____________________________________ D-35
D.5.5.5 High H 2S Concentrations _______________________________ D-35
D.5.5.6 Special Hardware for Acid/H 2S _________________________ D-36
D.6 Scallop/Hyperdome Gun Systems ____________________________ D-37

D.6.1.1 Scallop Housing Drop-Off: ______________________________ D-38
D.6.1.2 High Temperature Punchers _____________________________ D-38
D.6.1.3 PEGS Verified Systems _________________________________ D-39
D.6.2.1 High Pressure Housings: Minimum Restriction ___________ D-40
D.6.2.2 Trapped Pressure in Scallop Guns _______________________ D-40
D.6.3 Acids/H2S _________________________________________________ D-41
D.7 Pivot Gun Systems ___________________________________________ D-42
D.7.1 High Temperature/ High Pressure ___________________________ D-42
D.7.2 H2S and Acid ______________________________________________ D-42
D.7.3 Deviated Wells/Small Casing _______________________________ D-43
D.7.4 Sand and Scale ____________________________________________ D-44
D.7.5 Gas Wells _________________________________________________ D-44
D.8 HSD Gun Systems ___________________________________________ D-44
D.8.1.1 PEGS Verified Systems _________________________________ D-47
D.8.1.2 Special Procedures for High Temperature Operations _____ D-47
D.8.2 HSD Guns in Gas Environments ____________________________ D-49
D.8.3 Acids/H2S _________________________________________________ D-50
D.8.4.1 HSD Guns Alignment using Roller Adapters ______________ D-50
D.9 Casing Guns _________________________________________________ D-51
D.9.1.1 High Temperature Alignment Sleeves ____________________ D-52
D.9.3 Acids/H2S _________________________________________________ D-53
D.10 Program to Evaluate Gun Systems (PEGS) ___________________ D-54
D.10.1 Good Fundamental Engineering: ____________________________ D-54
D.10.2 Selection __________________________________________________ D-55
Private
D-iii WL FOM / Hostile Environment (GFE paper, by R. Sonthalia, 1996) D-iii
D.10.3 Testing ____________________________________________________ D-55

D.10.3.1 Explosive Components (charges, boosters, detonators, detonating
cord, transfers): ________________________________________ D-55
D.10.3.2 Gun Hardware and Accessories: ________________________ D-56
D.10.4 Verification ________________________________________________ D-57
D.10.5 PEGS and the Field ________________________________________ D-57
D.10.6 PEGS In Summary _________________________________________ D-57
D.11 Pipe Recovery Systems ______________________________________ D-58
D.11.1 Cutters and Colliding Tools _________________________________ D-58
D.11.2 Back-off ___________________________________________________ D-58
D.11.2.1 Comments About Back-off at High Temperature __________ D-58
Private
SRC-Wireline\SRC-Wireline\InTouch ID 3013565\3.1\Release Date:10-Jun-2004\EDMS UID: 274896043\Produced: 13-Jul-2006 20:55:42 D-iv WL FOM / Hostile Environment (GFE paper, by R. Sonthalia, 1996) D-iv
Intentionally Blank
Private
D-1 WL FOM / Hostile Environment (GFE paper, by R. Sonthalia, 1996) D-1
D HOSTILE ENVIRONMENT (GFE PAPER, BY R.

SONTHALIA, 1996) FOM, SRC
D.1 Introduction
Hostile environments usually involve any of the following:
• High temperature.
• High pressure.
• Hostile Chemicals and Well Fluids.
• Perforating in Gas Wells.
• Deviated Hole.
High temperature and high pressure are the most frequently encountered hostile
environments and are also the most dangerous. Exceeding the temperature
rating of a charge, even modestly, can cause low order detonation. Exceeding
the pressure rating of a charge can cause it to collapse with enough force to
detonate. This detonation will generally be low order but a chain reaction could
cause some charges to high order detonate. Even exceeding the pressure
rating of a detonator can cause it to auto detonate a gun. This could happen at
surface or downhole.
Perforating in hostile chemical environments can cause corrosion in the logging

cable used or electrical arming connections if the guns are exposed like in
Enerjets. This could lead to misfires.
Perforating in wells flowing gas can cause guns to split or enerjet strips to deform
leading to a stuck tool string in the well.
In highly deviated wells it can be difficult to go down to the shooting depth.
This document details procedures to be followed to upgrade each component

involved in a HEL perforation string from cables and heads to the specific gun
systems. It includes the latest part numbers, hint letters and procedures for
HEL perforation jobs.
This document also discusses the Program to Evaluate Gun Systems (PEGS)
which is important as a marketing tool for our wireline gun systems in hostile
environments
Private
D.2 Heads
Heads, like cables are required in every wireline operation. When doing HEL
perforating jobs it is absolutely essential to ensure that heads do not fail, and to
do this one must ensure that the correct boots, pins, insulators etc. are used and
are correctly installed. This section deals outlines the procedures to be followed
for upgrading heads for use in hostile environments.
D.2.1 Perforating Equipment Heads (PEH)

D.2.1.1 PEH Rebuilding Guidelines (up to 400°F)

Listed below are the special guidelines to be followed to rebuild the PEH for
use up to 400°F:
1. Use high temperature weak points and feed through connectors listed below.
2. Use only the Viton O-rings, B013113 and B011404 for feed-throughs and
weak points. Never use the Nitrile B26xxx O-rings!
3. OPTIONAL : The following technique will eliminate No. 10 continuity
problems. Drill a hole half way into one side of the six-sided nut at the bottom
end of the weak point. The hole will go through the yellow insulator. Punch in
a spirol pin to give continuity to mass of Weak Point.
4. Put a spring (B074383 from Bolt air gun - WST) inside the weak point
connector that fits on the uphole end of the weak point. The normal spring
(H268749) is too weak. Spring (B074383) has been heat tested to 450°F
and did not lose its strength.
D.2.1.2 HEL PEH Modifications (up to 500°F)

The following lists the extra precautions to be taken for operations up to 500°F:
1. Replace Viton boots with Kalrez or Fluorel boots.

2. Replace weakpoint with appropriate option as listed. Reference weak point
chart (see Table D-2 HEL Weak Point Summary for PEH) for 500°F options.
3. Feed through connector (H245804) may be upgraded to (H256584), for
temperatures approaching or exceeding 400°F.
4. Replace downhole hook-up wire (H122757) with downhole hook-up wire
(H142548).
Private
5. For HSD jobs it is recommended to use the PEK-B (H432180) with the
MH-29 (P294174) which is PEGS verified and rated to 500°F as a high
temperature flexible weak point is not available.
Table D-1: Feed Through Connectors
Part Number Temperature Rating

H222040 Not normally used
H245804 450°F; 20,000 psi; normally used
1
H256584 500°F; 20,000 psi
1
Requires B023671 PARBAK backup ring on the low pressure side of each Viton B013113 O-ring.
Table D-2: HEL Weak Point Summary for PEH
Type Rating Part Number Color

Solid 3000-3400 lb H218756 Gray
Solid 3500-4200 lb H222564 Red
Solid 5450-6900 lbs H222565 Green
HEL weak points are rated to 500°F.
D.2.2 BCC Boots

A common cause of a boot related failures is the use of the wrong boot. When
the hole in the boot for conductor entry is too large, well fluid can enter causing
an insulation leak. When the hole for conductor entry into the boot is too small,
the boot can split along the axis of the conductor causing fluid entry. The split
will look like it was made by pressing a thumb nail through the boot end. A Viton
boot is flexible enough that it may not cause a problem, but Kalrez boots are stiff
and do not tolerate mistakes! Always remember to remove the Tefzel jacket
from the insulator before installing the boot in ZT cables.
D.2.2.1 Gas Cut Muds

Another common cause of boot related failure is that the boot begins to pop off,
usually due to gas absorption, but possibly due to improper installation. Gas
expansion will cause this when pulling out of the hole. Take the time to open the
torpedo and check the boots between runs when gas attack is a possibility (gas
cut mud or gas wells). Also make a hole with a pin in the BCC boot which will
allow the gas to escape while pulling out of the hole.
Private
The problem of boots popping off is most severe after a previous boot failure on
the same job in gas cut mud. Gas will become trapped in the cable conductors
and will slowly percolate out causing the boots to pop loose. When this happens
on a job, the only immediate solution is to change heads after each run in the
hole. The heads can be rotated every other run, which gives enough time for
the gas to escape from the head. Gas can be observed bubbling out of the
conductor ends by spraying on a little WD-40. If the bubbling is too severe, cut
off 100 or 200 ft of cable and rebuild the rope socket. After the job is complete,
cut off the rope socket and let the cable “breathe”. When using a heptacable,
all the conductors not connected in the torpedo must be booted off with a blind
boot (See Table D-3 High Temperature BCC Boots (Pin End) ). This prevents
gas penetrating the core of the insulators. Listed below are Part Numbers of
high temperature BCC Boots:
Table D-3: High Temperature BCC Boots (Pin End)
Wire Diameter Kalrez Boot Fluorel Insulator Pin Blank Boot

(in.) Boot
0.062 to 0.085 H245476 H245414 H115642 P141944
0.095 to 0.110 H245477 H245506 H245505 P141944
1
0.058 to 0.085 H400316 H122037 H115642 H400325
0.083 to 0.105 H400317 H122037 H115642 H400325
1
No insulator is used with conductors of diameters 0.058 to 0.073 in. Pin (H115642) and Insulator
(H122037) are optional.
Table D-4: High Temperature BCC Boots (Socket End)
Wire Diameter Kalrez Boot Fluorel Boot Liner Socket Blank Boot
(in.)
0.062 to 0.069 H231596 H400312 H222637 H115576 H400320
0.079 to 0.085 H245757 H400312 H245768 H115576 H400320
0.085 to 0.093 H245757 H400313 H245764 H115576 H400320
0.093 to 0.110 H245758 H400313 H245765 H115576 H400320
* Kalrez Boots are rated to 500°F and Fluorel boots are rated to 450°F.
Table D-5: Cables and Wires in Size Ranges
Wire Diameter (in.) Cable Type

0.062 to 0.069 7-46 NT; 7-46 PNT; 7-52 NT; 1-22 ZT1; H142548 Hook-up
Wire
0.079 to 0.085 1-18 P; 1-23 ZT1; 2-23 ZT1; 2-32 ZT1; 7-39 P/Z
0.085 to 0.093 H122757 Hook-up Wire
0.093 to 0.110 1-22 P/Z; 1-23 P; 2-32 P/ZT1; 7-46 P/V; 7-52 P/V
1
Remove Tefzel jacket from insulator before installing boot.
Private
D.2.3 Monocable Heads

Monocable heads are a common source of problems in hostile environments.
Since these heads are an integral part of many cased hole services, the most
common problems are reviewed here in detail.
To minimize problems the MH-22 must be attached directly to the cable instead
of attachment by torpedo and shooting bridle. The cable conductor must be
directly attached to the feed-through and downhole hook-up wire must not be
used. If monocable bridle must be used, use the 1-42 ZB monocable (P298437)
or the high temperature option 1-42 ZH. See section on shooting bridle (Cables
chapter).
D.2.3.1 High Temperature

For high temperature applications replace the normal feed-through connector
with the high temperature option as per the table below.
Table D-6: Feed Through Connectors
Part Number Temperature Rating

H222037 Not normally used
1
H245801 450°F; 20,000 psi; normally used
2
H256581 500°F; 20,000 psi
1
Plastic feed through (H701185) can be used to 500°F but may be difficult to remove.
2
Requires B023671 PARBAK backup ring on the low pressure side of each Viton B013113 O-ring.
Problem #1:
Short circuit in the monocable head when temperature approaches or exceeds

300°F. (Most common with multiphase cable).
Cause:
Inner armor is pulled tight when building weak point. When the inner armor is
bent a spring force is directed toward the conductor insulation. As the insulation
heats up in the hot well, it becomes softer and cannot support the spring force
of the bent armor. The armor wires will propagate through the insulation and
eventually short out directly against the conductor.
Private
Solutions:
The inner armors must be kept loose so that the spring force is minimized. The
recommended way to do this is to wrap at least 1/4 in. of white cotton string
around the inner armor from the base of the weak point and then bend three
inner armors loosely over the string and into the holes to complete the assembly.
Implications:
This means that there is no way for the inner armor wires to contribute to weak
point strength. This is an advantage because it reduces the uncertainty of weak

point strength to 10% from 25% when inners are pulled tight. However be careful
reading weak point strength charts. A chart listing zero inner wires is needed,
or recognize that the strength for 7/3 in the chart for example, is the same as
8/0 when the three inner armors are connected as described above (i.e., 8 outer
armors used 3 loose inner armors is equal to the strength of 7/3 in the chart).
Additional Note:
As temperatures get higher (>400°F), the spring tension of the loosely bent inner
armors may still be enough to migrate through the softer insulation and short to
the conductor. It may be necessary not to use any inner armors! An inspection
of the cable condition under the weak point nut must be done after each job to
evaluate the extent of damage! Continue using the three inner armors until
evaluation determines they must be omitted.
D.2.3.2 Hostile Chemicals
Problem #1:
The Kalrez boot has a 1/4 in. split along the axis of the conductor where the
conductor enters the boot. The head, of course has a leak after pulling out of
the hole. (This in the case of the ZT cables normally used when logging in wells
containing H 2S or acid).
Cause:
The correct boot specified for a ZT monocable is incorrectly installed over the
Tefzel jacket, not on the underlying Teflon insulation.
Private
Solution:
The Tefzel jacket must be removed before installing the boot. It is not acceptable
to use a different boot with a larger hole because the Tefzel will split away from
the Teflon between the boot and the weak point which creates a path for fluid
entry into the boot between the Tefzel and the Teflon.
How to remove the Tefzel? The Tefzel jacket is very hard and difficult to remove
without damaging the delicate Teflon underneath. The recommended way to
remove Tefzel is to place the conductor on a flat surface and sand away one side
with emery cloth or sand paper. Once about 1/6 of the Tefzel diameter has been
removed it can be split away using needle nose pliers. (If you sand through the
Tefzel, it will begin to split open by itself. You are very close to damaging the
underlying Teflon at this point.
Problem #2:
While running into the hole in a high H 2S gas well (approx. 35% H 2S) open
circuit is observed. Continuity was re-established when pulling out of the hole,
but repeatedly failed when going back into the well at about the same depth.
Cause:
Kalrez boot swells due to gas absorption and temperature and moves the
connector socket away from the head rod pin contact until an open circuit occurs.
(Only needs to move about 1/4 in. to disconnect socket from pin!). At the surface
the boot is observed to be swollen and elongated. The conductor remains in its
initial position at the end of the boot (not slipping as the boot expands) which
causes the socket to disconnect. This is not a problem of trapped gas under the
boot which someone might be tempted to address by putting pin holes in the
boot (old rubber cable suggestion for ALC manual). The gas is actually absorbed
by the elastomer boot.
Solution:
This problem has only been documented on high H 2S/CO 2 gas wells. The best
solution is to lightly but firmly crimp the socket onto the head rod pin contact
and then slide the liner and boot into place. Efforts to isolate the boot from the
environment using Teflon tubing, Teflon tape, Uskurona tape, or filling the head
with silicone have not been as successful as crimping.
Private
D.2.4 PEGS Verified HeadsD-1

The following heads have been PEGS verified:
• MH-29 - The HEL version of the MH-22 rated to 25,000 psi at 500°F for 1 hr.
• PEK-J - Perforation Equipment Kit (previously verified as PEK-B) rated to
20,000 psi at 450°F for 1 hr.
D.3 Perforating Accessories

There are a lot of accessories involved in perforating operations like weights,

adapters, positioning devices. In hostile conditions it becomes vital that
these accessories do not fail. This section details the accessories involved in
perforating operations in various hostile conditions.
D.3.1 High Temperature

The following table lists the special high temperature accessories used in
perforation operations which are normally used for high temperature operations:
D-1. Please refer to Appendix for further details on the individual parts of these heads.
Private
Table D-7: Special High Temperature Accessories
Temperature Tool Part Description Length Weight

Rating Number (in.) (lb)
500°F EQF-531 H223662 1-11/16 in. Weight (H2S) 72 61
EQF-54 H223666 2-1/8 in. Weight (H2S) 72 105
1
MH-29 1 P294174 1-3/8 in. Monocable Head (H2S) 18.9 5.1

AH-106 H259513 1-3/8 in. to 1-11/16 in. Monocable 3.36 1
1
Adapter
CCL-AG P125542 1-11/16 in. Hi-Temp. Casing Collar 18 12
Locator
CCL-AT P654260 1-11/16 in. Hi-Temp. Casing Collar 18 12

1
Locator (High Pressure Version of
CCL-AG)
MPD-NB H432240 1-3/8 in. Magnetic Positioning Device 19.4 12
MPD-LB H432202 1-11/16 in. Magnetic Positioning 19.4 14
1
Device
MPD-MB H432223 2 in. Magnetic Positioning Device 19.4 22
1
SPD-AB H432216 1-11/16 in. Spring Positioning Device 317 N.A.

1
Other weights EQF-41/47/38/43/46/39/34/33 are rated to 450°F but are not mentioned here as
they are standard weights. Refer to standard perforating accessories chapter.
1
PEGS verified. Please refer to appendix for further details.
D.3.1.1 Additional Tips for High Temperature Applications
CAL-B
The CAL-B is an integral part of perforating with casing guns and plug/packer
setting operations. All new CAL-Bs are made by SRPC. Recent improvements
by SRPC have reduced leakage and improved the high temperature rating from
350°F to 480°F. Refer to the Perforating Accessories chapter for an assembly
drawing of the CAL-B.
Table D-8: CAL-B Specifications
File Part OD Length Weight Pressure Temp.

Code Number (in.) (in.) (lb) Rating Rating
CAL-B P046158 3–3/8 18.0 60.0 20,000 psi 480°F
137, 895 kpa 250°C
Private
500°F High Temperature CAL-B
Some documentation has stated that the CAK-A (H121827) is a kit to convert the
CAL-B for high temperature (500°F) operation. This is not true. The CAK-A was
a kit to convert the CAL-B to zener diodes from the old thyrite stack (this was a
LONG, LONG time ago). The CAK-A has been obsolete for more than 25 years.
All CAL-Bs are now made by SRPC and have new higher ratings. Refer to Table
D-8 CAL-B Specifications .
Casing Collar Locator (CCL-AG)
CCL-AG, the high temperature Casing Collar Locator (P125542), is nearly the
same as the standard CCL-L. All maintenance parts (Springs, O-rings etc.) are
the same. The primary difference is that the CCL-AG has no diode, only a coil
with 70 ohm resistance which is insulated from mass and is in series with the
gun below. It requires continuity below the CCL in order to transmit a signal to
surface. During a run the detonator completes the circuit. Remember to make a
short circuit under the CCL for the surface signal check. A loss of CCL signal will
indicate an open circuit. The CCL-AT (P654260) is the high pressure version
of the CCL-AG and is PEGS verified. The CCL-AG and CCL-AT are ordered
as normal M & S.
New Connector for PEK-B
A new, teflon insulated connector is available for the PEK-B. The connector
improves the reliability at high temperatures. A larger diameter on the bottom end
guides the contact spring on the CAL-B into position. (No more bent springs!)
The earlier “high temperature”, black, molded connector developed a leak to

mass as the temperature increased. Hence use old connectors only up to 300°F.
Table D-9: PEK-B Connectors
Description Part Number Temp. Rating

White Teflon Insulator (New) H432190 Above 300°F
Black Molded Insulator H122966 Below 300°F
Black Molded Insulator (“Hi Temp” lettered on the H125976 Below 300°F (obsolete)
side)
Private
HEL Spring Contacts
Above 300°F old spring contacts in weights, adapters, CCL etc. reduce in
length and cause loose and intermittent contact. All spring contacts must be
replaced with the new options, even in regular environments. Be on guard for
the old versions which can be differentiated from the new versions as the new
ones are identified by a red paint dot on the base of the contact. Furthermore,
the spring material is lighter in color, almost silver, and does not darken with use
as do old contacts. In any case all new orders for weights, adapters, CCL etc.
will contain the new spring contacts.
Table D-10: HEL Spring Contacts
Old New Where Used

H017935 P334867 CCL-L and CCL-AG
H025977 H329909 EQF
H046445 H334866 CAL-B; 4 in. EL; Baker
H103229 H334864 MPD, Adapters
HEL Molded insulator (H/P125979)
This insulator was originally made of Teflon, a high temperature, but soft material
when hot. Hence, unfortunately, Teflon does not hold its shape when under
compression and at high temperatures (greater than 250°F).
Houston Downhole Sensors developed a good replacement; made of the high

temperature material PEEK (light brown color, plastic appearance - H125979).
This replaces about six options of different materials used previously for this
insulator.
Make an active effort to eliminate Teflon (P125979) insulators from all

monoheads, adapters and weights and use the H125979 insulator which is
available from SPC and SPT only!
Cone Insulators and Seals
Use high temperature cone insulators (H432231 - 1-3/8 in. tools and P113422 -
1-11/16 in. tools ) and high temperature seals (P125975) in gun heads and
other perforating accessories. Old high temperature cone insulators are made of
thin anodized coating which can break easily if contact surfaces are not clean
and smooth, or if overtightened. Hold contact cone to arrest its turning while
Private
screwing the connector rod into it. Newly ordered cone insulators are now made
of PEEK. This should improve problems of loss of insulation when the cone
nut is tightened down.
High Temperature Shrink Tubing
FEP tubing is the clear shrink tubing (E046325) that has been used in the field
for years to repair EQF conductor rods, as it is easy to shrink. However, the FEP
has a 400°F continuous service temperature rating.
EQF conductor rods can now be properly repaired with new red high temperature
shrink tubing (E048946). It is rated to 500°F and shrinks like the clear low
temperature shrink tubing. This shrink tubing fits on the 0.168 to 0.170 diameter
connector rod and requires only a standard heat gun (500-750°F range) for
installation.
Pan Head Screw (B022196)
Pan head screw (B022196) is obsolete and has been replaced by 10-32 phillips
bleed screw with O-ring (H432259). This bleed screw is used as a pressure vent
screw on numerous Wireline TCP adapters and gun accessories. For example :
• Enerjet Upper Adapters with Gas Relief.

• Hyperdome Upper Adapters with Gas Relief.
• MPD-LB and MPD-MB, SPD-AB, Baker Firing Head.
Scotchlock Connectors
Scotchlock connectors are rated to 280°F. Use high temperature splicing

insulator (P070926), or connector tube (B075206) covered by Enerjet coupling
seal (P075985) above 280°F.
Selective Switches
The low cost Dual diode plug H432064 is rated 400°F for 1 hr and 20,000 psi. At
higher temperatures it is not recommended to go for selective firing.
Wiring Inside Guns
Use only teflon wiring (E012946 - white) and (E014640 - red), or two ribbon
connector (E031124) for high temperature applications.
Private
D.3.2 High Pressure

High pressures coupled with high temperatures have a great impact on the
elastomers used for pressure seals. These elastomeric seals should be
constructed of strong material with good elastic properties. Also they should
be changed often, since failure to do so will result in catastrophic failure and
possible well damage.
In the cased hole environment, toxic gases can become the major hostile
condition, surpassing concerns about pressure and temperature. It is interesting
to note that metal corrosion inhibitors, which we use for protecting monocables,
rank adjacent to H 2S as aggressive substances which attack elastomers used

for O-rings and boots.
D.3.2.1 O-ring Pressure Seals

Schlumberger uses two O-rings for almost all pressure sealing applications :
• Nitrile - 90 Durometer
• Viton - 95 Durometer
Nitrile was the standard O-ring. It is a compound with superior pressure sealing
characteristics and resists tearing, which is the mode of failure due to excess
pressure. However, it has less resistance to chemical attack from CO 2 and H 2S.
These gases are common to many hostile operations. It also does not return to
its original shape after exposure to pressure at high temperatures, thus could
result in a leak while pulling out of the hole when approaching surface.
In the mid- 1970s, Viton 95 Duro O-rings began taking over as the standard
O-rings. Although its tear characteristics are not as good as Nitrile, it has better
resistance to chemicals at elevated temperatures and recovers to its original
shape better. This allows it to maintain a better seal as pressure is released.
When used near, or above 20,000 psi, Viton needs to be supported on the low
pressure side by a back-up ring, usually made of Ryton.
D.3.2.2 Seals - Frequency of Replacement

This relates only to Viton O-rings and applies to exposure to temperature and
pressure without damaging chemicals such as H 2S, CO 2 and metal corrosion
inhibitors.
Private
Table D-11: Frequency of Replacement of O-ring Seals
Exposure Action
If tool has not seen more than 400°F or 20,000 Change all pressure sealing O-rings at every
psi Q-check or every four months.
If temperature is 400-450°F, or if pressure Change all pressure sealing O-rings and
exceeds 20,000 psi back-up rings after every job.
Above 450°F at any pressure Change all pressure sealing O-rings and
back-up rings after every job.
Exposure to H2S and CO2 at any temperature Change all pressure sealing O-rings and
or pressure. back-up rings after every job.
Regardless of temperature or pressure any O-ring which appears damaged or deformed should
be changed. This includes swelling due to gas.
Good “field practice” still recommends O-rings replacement after temperature

exposure that exceeds 300°F.
Use Viton 95D O-rings for all HEL applications. (Avoid Nitrile - it has less
chemical resistance).
Exception to the above rule is in Methanol where Viton O-rings should not be
used. Nitrile is preferred up to 250°F. Above 250°F use Chemraz or Kalrez
O-rings when Methanol is present.
D.3.2.3 WellHead Pressure Equipment

While doing cased hole operations in conditions of high pressure the use of
wellhead equipment is a must. Refer to the chapter on Perforating Accessories
for further information or to the Schlumberger Well Pressure Control Manual.
Listed below are the pressure ratings of WHE systems:
Table D-12: WHE Systems
WHE System Rating

WHE-A 5,000 psi, Non-H2S
WHE-B 10,000 psi, Non-H2S
WHE-C 15,000 psi, Non-H2S
WHE-D 10,000 psi, H2S
WHE-E 3,000 psi, Non-H2S
WHE-G 5,000 psi, H2S
WHE-H 15,000 psi, H2S
WHE-K 10,000 psi, H2S
Private
WHE-M 5,000 psi, Non-H2S

WHE-N 3,000 psi, Non-H2S
D.3.3 Hostile Chemical Environment
D.3.3.1 H 2S
H 2S attacks steel in three basic ways:
• Corrosive attack
• Carbide attack
• Hydrogen embrittlement
resulting in a considerable loss of strength of steel, causing it to fracture while

under pressure with disastrous results.
H 2S action is strongest in the presence of water.
D.3.3.2 Precautions
• Use of inhibitors will be quite effective for protection of equipment for H 2S
concentrations below 2% in volume (equivalent to 20,000 ppm). Mix 1 part
of inhibitor (Baroid Coat III) with 4 parts of grease for injection. To coat the
lubricator parts before a job, inject some of the mixture in the BOP before
pumping water to fill the riser for pressure testing on the job. Open the BOP
rams for this operation.
• Above 2% concentration in volume, the following equipment should be used :
– WHE-G 5,000 psi H 2S service.

– WHE-D 10,000 psi H 2S service.
– WHE-H 15,000 psi H 2S service.
• Refer to the Schlumberger Well Pressure Control Manual or chapter on

Perforating Accessories for further details.
• The equipment should be allowed to recover for 24 hr after any H 2S
operation.
• Recommend Hyperdome or hollow carrier guns where possible. Enerjets
have however been used in high concentrations of H 2S following careful
technical considerations. See section on Enerjet for further details.
Private
D.3.3.3 Acid
• Remember inhibitors mixed with acid are only a short term protection
• Acid may attack detonator wire insulation, ceramic charge lead shields and
glue, resulting in misfire and high risk of stuck gun.
• CCL-L housing (Titanium Alloy) is likely to be severely corroded.
• Recommend using hyperdome or hollow carrier guns where possible.
D.3.3.4 Additives - Inhibitors

Chemicals used as inhibitors to protect downhole equipment may be detrimental

to our equipment and require special precautions.
• Monoaethylamin which is used as a H 2S inhibitor, attacks detonator wire

insulation, Nitrile O-rings and detonating cords, prohibiting use of Enerjet
guns.
• Recommend using hyperdome or hollow carrier guns where possible.
D.3.3.5 Methanol
Viton O-rings are not recommended against methanol environment. The best
option in this case is to use Chemraz or Kalrez O-rings.
If temperatures are not high then a cheaper option would be to use other
elastomer materials such as:
• Hypalon - rated to 275°F.

• Hytrel - rated to 230°F.
• Nitrile - rated to 250°F. (Standard Schlumberger O-rings and easily available)
D.3.4 Perforating in Gas

At downhole conditions, gas may enter the equipment through any standard
O-ring and pressure may migrate to unexpected places.
Private
D.3.4.1 Safety
• Systematically use the 10-32 bleed screw with O-ring (H432259) provided on
some items (Enerjet, Scallop, Back-off, shooting adapters).
• Take special care after shooting or after a misfire, when disconnecting the
equipment, where pressure may be trapped. When a thread seems hard
to undo, suspect gas pressure to be trapped behind. Chain the gun to
some heavy structure and clear the area of all unnecessary personnel while
attempting to disconnect the equipment.
D.3.4.2 Pressure Equipment

Refer to the Schlumberger Well Pressure Control Manual or chapter on
Perforating Accessories for details on requirements for wellhead equipment on
gas wells. A few important tips are mentioned below:
• BOP
Grease injection BOP necessary to allow sealing gas pressure when BOP
must be closed. Hydraulic actuation highly recommended. BOP can be either
one twin ram BOP or two single ram BOP’s, the lower one upside down, to
allow injection of grease between sets of rams. For pressures above 2,500
psi 3-BOP configuration is recommended.
• HGT
Gas may invade the hydraulic system (stuffing box, hand pump) and more
strokes of the oil pump will be needed in order to pressure up (close the
stuffing box).
Above 3,000 psi gas pressure, a minimum of four flowtubes should be used.
Above 7,500 psi gas pressure, separate hoses should be connected to the
bottom two HGT connections for two grease injection points, and a minimum
of five flowtubes should be used.
• Ball Check Valve
It is absolutely essential to use the ball check valve on top of the risers
in gas wells.
• Common Problems With WHE
Freezing up: Decompression of gas leaking from the pressure equipment
lowers the temperature and may freeze up the cable inside the HGT. As a
precaution in gas wells the riser can be filled with methanol or glycol before
Private
starting the operation. If the cable is still gets frozen, free it by injecting
methanol at a pressure above the Well Head Pressure. This happens usually
when grease seal is not maintained properly in the HGT.
Formation of Hydrates: Hydrates may deposit at the well-head equipment
level, and obstruct the BOPs, preventing them from being closed. As a
precaution test the pressure equipment with glycol as water used in the
lubricator will aggravate the problem. Inject methanol into the BOP or through
the kill line if needed to take care of the problem. Methanol injected on top of
the hydrates already formed will cause them to melt slowly.
D.3.5 High Deviation

When deviations are very high (above 70°) wireline operations become
increasingly difficult and Tubing Conveyed Perforating (TCP) is usually the
preferred technique (See TCP FOM for details on TCP), though wireline
perforating jobs on coiled tubing can be performed (see section below). But
for deviations below this when wireline jobs are run and the gun doesn’t go
down, special slant hole equipment can be used to reduce friction and aid tool
movement. Special hardware consists of weights; rollered pivot and flex joints;
and rollered adjustable centralisers (e.g., CME-AK).
Table D-13: Types and Specifications of Special Slant Hole Equipment
Device Part Makeup Weight Outside Hole Size Temp. Pressure

Number Length (lb) Diameter (in.) Rating Rating
(in.) (in.) (°F) (psi)
Min Max
Rollered Pivot Joint H247298 17 35 3.7 4.2 N.A 340 20,000
(AH-86)
Rollered Flex Joint H247209 36 32 1.71/2.18 2.25 N.A 350 15,000
(AH-88)
Rollered Spring H247210 54 21 1.71/2.18 2.25 6 350 15,000
Positioning Device
(SPD-G)
Rollered Flex Joint H247327 27 14.5 1.41 1.5 N.A 350 15,000
(AH-90)
Rollered Spring H247329 52.4 14 1.41 1.5 6 350 15,000
Positioning Device
(SPD-H)
Adjustable Roller H224993 N.A 34 5.7 5.7 9 N.A N.A.
Assembly (CME-AL)
Adjustable Roller H224991 N.A. 40 5.7 5.7 9 N.A N.A.
Assembly (CME-AK)
3-3/8 in. Monocable H106325 60 150 3.38 3.88 N.A 450 20,000
Weight (EQF-33)
Private
D.3.5.1 Perforating on Coiled Tubing

Using Coiled Tubing to convey perforating guns is an extension of established
CTL services. The rigidity and strength of Coiled Tubing can be used when
perforating highly deviated and horizontal intervals and when long and heavy
gun assemblies are deployed. In addition, the configuration of CT pressure
control equipment allows perforating to be easily and safely performed on live
and underbalanced wells. The most common perforating guns used with CT are
of the through-tubing type (1-11/16 in. to 2-7/8 in. O.D.).
Firing Mechanism
Two means of firing the guns are applicable to Coiled Tubing conveyed
perforating, electrical firing using a Coiled Tubing Logging string or pressure
activated firing initiated by applied internal pressure in the CT string.
To perforate with guns deployed on coiled tubing and fired electrically via an
integral wireline, it must be determined if conventional electrical detonators can
be used or if the SAFE system must be used.
• Either the SAFE system or an electric detonator may be used if an

electric-before-ballistic arming sequence can be followed. This sequence
has three parts:
– Attach the cable head first;

– Attach the detonator electrically; and then
– Make the ballistic connection to the gun.
• If the bottom gun in the string cannot be armed using the

electric-before-ballistic arming sequence (for whatever reason, be it gun
length, lubricator characteristics, or wellhead pressure) then the SAFE
system is the only approved method to electrically actuate the guns.
• If the environment dictates (RF, stray voltage, etc.), then the SAFE system is
the only approved method to electrically actuate the guns.
Top-arming a gun with an electric detonator in the same electric-before-ballistic

manner is also allowed, if there is only one gun or one assembly of
ballistically-connected guns in the string.
Private
Pressure firing systems may be used without the need for a cable in the CT
string, but suffer a significant disadvantage in that correlation logging tools
cannot be run on the same trip to confirm the location of the guns. Only the
wireline conveyed perforating has been discussed below as pressure actuated
perforating is already well documented.

The only way authorized to perforate on coiled tubing using wireline, when it is
not possible to arm a perforating gun electrically before ballistically, is to use
the SAFE system.
D.3.5.2 Wireline Fired Perforation on Coiled Tubing

Wireline fired system require a few special considerations, including rigging up,
deploying and arming the guns. Expendable and semi-expendable gun types are
also more susceptible to damage on CT than on wireline.
S.A.F.E. Systems
The only way authorized to perforate on coiled tubing using wireline, when it is
not possible to arm a perforating gun electrically before ballistically, is to use the
SAFE system. Note however that with the limited space normally available, it
may be very difficult to lift the guns far enough with the lifting frame to enable the
safety barrier to be pulled out. Check the space-out very carefully beforehand.
For Vann perforating systems, a short crossover exists which can be connected
to the CCL lower head with the detonator inside. This makes the electrical
connection prior to lowering the CT and connecting the crossover to the guns,
making the ballistic connection. Extreme care should be taken with this system
since the detonator is the lowest item in the head assembly during connection. If
the detonator were to be crushed while connecting, it could detonate.
Expendable and Semi-expendable Guns
Expendable and semi-expendable guns, such as Enerjets and Pivot guns, are
very fragile in comparison to other gun types. The main concern in running these
guns with the coiled tubing is the possible damage to the gun while running
in hole.
Private
If a gun is broken, the situation could arise where a fish with explosives is left
in the well. The customer should be made aware of this risk before any such
operation is attempted. The operation can be continued only if the customer
understands the implications of the risk and is willing to take it.
If may be advisable to make a dummy run beforehand to check for problems

in accessing the well.
Orientation
Shooting across the casing as opposed to firing straight into the low side,
especially in larger casing sizes, can severely limit the penetration and entry
hole size.
The POT-C has been successfully used to ensure Enerjets are correctly aligned
prior to perforating.
Bear in mind that a swivel is necessary for any standard wireline positioning
device to be effective.
Rig Up Considerations
To rig up perforating guns, a clamp is needed where the gun itself has no
make-up groove. Note that a ring cannot be used as it is not possible to remove it
again. In an emergency a vice can be used but this is not a professional solution.
Check that the correct clamp is available before the job.
D.4 Explosives
D.4.1 High Temperature/High Pressure

The table gives the temperature ratings of explosive materials used by
Schlumberger.
Private
Table D-14: Temperature Ratings of Explosives
1 Hr. Rating 100 Hr. Rating 1 Hr. Rating

Explosive Material Non-Exposed (°F) Non-Exposed (°F) Exposed (°F)
1 1
RDX 340 240 300
HMX 400 300 365
PSF 470 N.A. 415
HNS 500 460 450
1
New revised ratings arrived at after an extensive series of tests, carried out for hollow carrier guns.
The chart gives the Time-Temperature ratings for the explosives mentioned
above inside hollow carriers.
Figure D-1: Time-Temperature Chart for RDX, HMX, and HNS inside Hollow Carriers
D.4.1.1 General Rules

• Explosive components should be used according to the temperature limits
listed above. The overall rating of a gun system is equal to the rating of the
component in the system with the lowest rating.
• Detonating cord and charges may be used up to their maximum rating.
Exceeding the temperature rating of a charge can cause low order detonation.
Private

• Detonators should never be used above their maximum rating. The risk is
self detonation and perforating off depth.
• Exceeding the pressure rating of a charge can cause it to collapse with
enough force to detonate. The detonation will generally be “low order” but a
chain reaction could cause some charges to go “high order.
• Ensure the accuracy of the temperature in the shooting zone. If the expected
temperature is very close to the limits of the explosive used then determine
the temperature by a wireline (Amerada RT7) or using TTT-A 111/16 in.
thermometer carrier (H115975) on a dummy run with 3 maximum reading
thermometers.
• Good job planning is necessary to minimize exposure of explosives to well
conditions. No lengthy correlations.
• Never run a charge back into the well that has been exposed to temperature.
Explosives can self detonate after a short time when exposed to temperature
twice.
D.4.1.2 HNS-PYX Comparison

The SPT Explosive Products group has done a lot of work with both HNS and
PYX and have concluded that HNS is the preferred product to use in a high
temperature perforating system. SPT has no plans to produce a PYX gun
system. The advantages of HNS over PYX are listed below:
• The high temperature gun systems using HNS (developed by Schlumberger)

are superior to the PYX systems developed by Halliburton/Vann.
• PYX does have a thermal stability greater than HNS if high purity PYX
is used. Unfortunately the purity of PYX in detonating cords has been
inconsistent thereby reducing thermal stability. Often the detonator is the
Private
limiting component in TCP systems. The ICI Percussion Detonator that we

commonly use (H429313) is rated to 425°F for 200 hours. Also available
is H542167 which is rated to 440°F for 200 hours. We do not know of a
detonator with a higher temperature rating.
• PYX has low sensitivity which affects detonation transfer between guns using
PYX. The donor capability of PYX detonating cord (i.e. ability to detonate
a transfer booster) is poor. HNS cord is superior and offers more reliable
TCP transfers.
• PYX detonating cord has also proven to be a problem. Explosive purity used
in the cord has lead to the degradation of the ability of PYX cord to initiate
charges in SPT tests while HNS cord would initiate these charges.
• There have also been problems related to the density of the PYX explosive
within the cord which can lead to halting of detonation within the string. The
density of PYX at the end of a fresh cut, when ready to attach to a booster,
is easily reduced just due to the cutting and handling of the cord which will
introduce a gap between cord and booster.
• The lower detonation velocity of PYX cord, compared to HNS, can lead to
charge-to-charge interference in a gun system reducing charge performance.
• According to the suppliers that SPT deals with PYX explosive is almost twice
as expensive as HNS material.
D.4.1.3 Detonating Cords, Detonators and Boosters

Given is a summary of detonating cords, detonators and boosters that can be
used as a quick reference for high temperature jobs. Refer to API data sheets or
the relevant gun system section for data on high temperature charges.
Table D-15: High Temperature Detonating Cord Summary
1 Hr. Temp.
Part Explosive Sheath Rating (°F) Applications
Press. Shrinkage
Number Type Load Type Color Exp. Exp. Non- Allowance Exp. Non-
(gr/ft) (psi) Exp (Max. %) Exp
H304114 HNS 40R Lead Gray N/A N/A 500 1 N/A HD,
27/8
in.-O
H429816 HNS 87 Lead Gray 20,000 420 500 1, 10(E) HEJ, HSD,
BO PPG
H448845 HNS 87 Lead Gray 20,000 450 500 2 HEJ, HSD,
BO PPG
H447050 HMX 50R Rilsan Green N/A N/A 360 1, 1(E) PG 27/8
in. HD
Private
1 Hr. Temp.
Part Explosive Sheath Rating (°F) Applications
Press. Shrinkage
Number Type Load Type Color Exp. Exp. Non- Allowance Exp. Non-
(gr/ft) (psi) Exp (Max. %) Exp
H448706 HMX 35R Lead Gray N/A N/A 400 1 N/A HD,
27/8
in.-O
H448369 HMX 60 Rilsan Green 20,000 330 N/A 1(E) PEJ N/A
H448402 HMX 80 Halar Clear 20,000 365 N/A 2(E) EJ N/A
(P)
H304800 HMX 80 Rilsan Green 20,000 330 360 1, 1(E) EJ, PPG
BO
H543012 HMX 80X Zytel Green N/A N/A 400 2 N/A PPG,
HSD
Legend
R Ribbon cord 27/8-O Old version of 27/8
in. HSD
X Extra high velocity HSD High Shot Density,
except for 27/8-O
BO Back Off PPG Port Plug Gun
EJ Enerjet E Maximum shrinkage
exposed
PEJ Phased Enerjet P Preferred for Enerjet
in acids
PG Pivot Gun HEJ HNS Enerjet.
Special low-shrink
version (H448845)
available through
engineering
HD Hyperdome
Table D-16: High Temperature Detonators
Temp. Rating 1
Description Type Pressure Rating Hr. Applications
B033720 E-161 Fluid disabled N/A 475°F Hollow carrier
Replacement Crimp-on guns, RFTT-N,
Owens cutters only with
added booster
B033721.
H334496 G-21 Fluid disabled N/A 475°F Selective
Goex Clip-on Hyperdome guns
B028464 E-128 Fluid disabled N/A 475°F Hollow Carrier
RF Dupont Crimp-on guns
B031138 E-126 Fluid disabled N/A 480°F Hollow carrier
Dupont Crimpon guns
Private
Temp. Rating 1
Description Type Pressure Rating Hr. Applications
P448696 E-153 Exposed 15,000 psi 375°F Pivot Gun, Dump
Replacement Bailer
Nobel
P291271 Fluid disabled N/A 480°F Hollow Carrier
Manurhin Clip-on guns, TCP wet
connect
P285784 Exposed 25,000 psi 480°F Enerjet, Back-off,
Manurhin Pivot guns
P295340 RF Exposed 25,000 psi 480°F Enerjet, Back-off,
Manurhin Pivot guns
P581311 Nobel Exposed 20,000 psi 400°F Enerjet, Backoff
H429313 ICI Percussion 425°F for 200 TCP

detonator hrs.
Table D-17: High Temperature Boosters
Pressure Temp. Rating 1

Description Type Rating Hr. Applications
P285791 Exposed 25,000 psi 480°F Back-off (allows
initiation of
2-7 strands of
primacord).
B027559 P3A, HNS N/A 480°F HSD, TCP
H334877 P3A, HNS N/A 480°F HSD, TCP
P376362 P3A equivalent N/A 480°F HSD, TCP

Points to be remembered regarding charge performance while perforating in gas:
• Fluid desensitized detonators will usually desensitize when exposed to gas

pressure above 2500 psi, disabling the gun.
When a gun leaks, high pressure directly applied in front of the charge liner
will prevent charge from working properly (might result in “bomb” or low order
detonation).
D.5 Enerjet Gun Systems

This section summarizes the procedures to be followed and special equipment to
be used when doing Enerjet jobs in various hostile environment conditions.
Private

The following table lists the Enerjet gun systems that can be used for high
temperature/high pressure applications.
Table D-18: Enerjet HP/HT Gun Systems
Gun Type Shot Borehole Minimum Minimum Maximum HMX HNS

Density Fluid Restriction Pressure Pressure Temp. Temp.
(spf) (in.) (psi) (psi) 1 hr 1 hr
(°F) (°F)
1.63 in. 0° Enerjet 6 or All 1.72 0 20,000 365 N/A
less
1-11/16 in. 0° 6 or All 1.78 0 20,000 365 N/A
Enerjet less
2-1/8 in. 0° Enerjet 6 or All 2.25 0 20,000 365 450
less
2-1/8 in. 45° 6 or All 2.25 0 15,000 365 N/A
Enerjet less
The table below lists the Explosives that can be used with the gun systems listed
above. Please note that the detonators that should be used for high temperature
Enerjet jobs are:
• P285784 High pressure, high temperature Manurhin detonator rated to

480°F for 1 hr at 25,000 psi.
• P581311 High pressure, high temperature Nobel detonator rated to 400°F
for 1 hr at 20,000 psi.
Charge Part Temp. °F Pressure Detonating Temp. °F

Number (1 hr.) (psi) Cord1 (1 hr.)
1.63 in. EJIII, HMX H448401 365 20,000 H448402 365
HMX
1-11/16 in. EJIII, HMX H448246 365 20,000 H448402 365
HMX
2-1/8 in. EJIII, HMX H448085 365 20,000 H448402 365
HMX
2-1/8 in. EJIII, HNS H448644 450 20,000 H448845 450
HNS2
Private
2-1/8 in. PH EJIII, H447055 365 20,000 H448369 365

HMX HMX
2-1/8 in. BH EJ, HMX H448415 365 20,000 H448369 365
HMX
Halar sheath detonating cord (H448402) is recommended for acids and bromides. Alternatively when
1
acids and bromides are not present HMX cord (H304800) can be used which is rated to 330°F for 1
hour under exposed conditions.
2
Special low-shrink version. If not available, use H429816 which can shrink by up to 10% in exposed conditions.
D.5.1.1 HNS System Specifications

The development of a new HNS primer extends the temperature range of the
Enerjet Perforating System to 450°F.
The preshrunk, lead covered HNS detonating cord complements the charge.
The detonating cord (H448845) replaces H429816 as the cord to use in exposed
conditions.
The improved charges and detonating cord have successfully completed jobs for
Exxon in Mobile Bay, USA. Well temperatures ranged from 385°F to 415°F and
wellbore pressures reached 13,000 psi.
Table D-19: HNS System Specifications
Charge Part Number H448644

Charge Size 2-1/8 in.
Explosive Load 14.0 gm
Penetration (API RP 43-Fifth Edition-Section I) 21.63 in. (5½ in. casing)
Entrance Hole (API RP 43-Fifth Edition-Section 0.30 in. (5½ in. casing)
I)
1 Hour Temperature Rating 450°F
Pressure 20,000 psi
Shot Density 4/6
Phasing 0°
Minimum Restriction 2¼ in.
Debris (5½ in. casing) 0.10 in./charge
Cord Part Number H448845

Explosive Load 87 gr/ft.
Cover Material Lead
Maximum Cord Shrinkage 2%
Strip P186401
Private
Gun Head (Firing Head) H304332

Hi-Temp. Fluid to Air Connector in Firing Head H245801 or H256581 (H2S Proof)
D.5.1.2 Special Procedures for High Temperature Jobs with Enerjet
D.5.2 HT Detonator Arming Hints

The following points are important when using blasting caps (P285784) or
equivalent.
1. A very thin film of silicone can be used on the primacord to help slide on the
rubber sealing boot (Boot supplied with detonator). However do not allow
any excess silicon inside the boot.
2. Cut the primacord to length and place the booster into the primacord end
(Booster supplied with detonator. DO NOT CRIMP THE BOOSTER; it is
unnecessary and crimping may cause detonation of lead azide explosive.
3. Place the blasting cap into place and hold it down firmly against the booster.
(Check that the booster is seated properly inside the detonator. Make a
measurement).
4. Clean the rubber boot with freon if necessary so that there is no grease or
oil on its surface. Then slide the boot as far as possible into the blasting
cap. The boot will not go all the way inside: what is IMPORTANT is that it
does NOT SLIDE OUT BY ITSELF.
5. If you are worried about trapped air preventing the boot from being
completely inserted into the detonator the best way to remove the air is with a
hypodermic needle which can be usually obtained from the rig medic. Place
the needle on the side of the boot while inserting. The air will escape through
the needle and the boot will go inside the detonator housing.
6. Leave some slack in the detonator wires for downward movement due to
cord shrinkage.
7. DO NOT USE THE NORMAL 2 in. BLACK SCOTCH TAPE. This and similar
plastic tapes will melt and hang up on restrictions. Two field tested options
are the:
• 3/4 in. Teflon tape (E016666) or the 2 in. Polyimide tape (E027904).
8. Use high temperature lacing cords (E076969) to string tie boots and
detonator.
Private
Boot (P075903)
Cord
0.5 in.
Booster
End of Booster should be

Detonator
recessed from end of Detonator.
String Tie
Figure D-2: Assembling the High Pressure/High Temperature

Detonator, Booster and Primacord
D.5.3 HT Detonating Cord Recommended Techniques
D.5.3.1 Enerjets with Lead Covered Primacord

If the preshrunk lead covered HNS primacord (H448845) is not available you
might have to use the lead covered HNS primacord (H429816 - that is not
preshrunk) which can shrink by up to 10% under exposed conditions. Given
below are general guidelines to be used for lead covered primacord.
Private
1. Before the job, build a pick up tube out of a piece of pipe or tubing with a
hanging “T” on top and a couple of clamps to hold the top of the gun. This
handling tube is needed to lift the guns from the catwalk to the rat hole. The
gun can then be lifted straight up into the pressure control riser without
bending the primacord. It is important to keep lead covered primacord
straight, otherwise it will bind itself at a charge hole and pinch in half when it
shrinks. When picking the gun up, ensure that the strip does not bend at all.
2. The primacord hole in each Enerjet charge should be beveled open using
a hand reamer (ex. Blue - Point brand, Part No. R-120, size 1/8 in. to 1/2
in. hand reamer) before attaching the charges to the strip. This removes the
sharp edge which would damage the cord when it shrinks. Remember that
you are working with explosives, so take it easy.
3. Each charge must be very carefully aligned. A 5mm to 6 mm diameter rod or

a piece of primacord is helpful as a sight guide for alignment. Turn charges
clockwise only; never counter clockwise. Counter clockwise rotation
will damage the “O” ring seal.
4. Cut a cross section of the primacord. The explosive content may not be
centered in the lead jacket. If off-center, orient the roll of cord so that the
thin lead is toward the shaped charge. (Partial misfires have occurred due
to the inconsistent explosive content within the cord. Optimum orientation
will help prevent this.)
5. Spray the roll of primacord and the charge holes with WD-40.
6. Gun length should be limited to 30 ft.
7. Attach a rollover clip (P276612 for 2-1/8 in. EJ) on the bottom charge. Do not
put on cord protectors. One cord protector will be placed on top later, but not
on the bottom. (It would restrict primacord shrinkage.)
8. Thread the cord through the charges, fine tuning the alignment of any
charges which scrape the lead covering. Smooth any nicks in the primacord
with fine emery cloth. Keep the cord as straight and smooth as possible. Use
the smooth side of a piece of emery cloth to grip the cord to push it through
the charge holes. The cord should slide easily through the charges if the
alignment is correct.
9. Leave at least 15% excess cord at the bottom of the gun. Lead covered
primacord shrinks about 10%.
10. Bend the cord carefully and insert one cord protector on the top charge. Do
not put a cord protector on the bottom charge or in between strips.
11. The cord must be secured at the top charge to prevent cord shrinkage from
pulling off the detonator. Bend the cord down under the cord protector so that
it is against the top charge. String tie around the top charge so the cord is
firmly in place. Bend some extra cord between the second and third charges
for shrinkage, then tie the cord into place around the charge/primacord hole.
Private
Do not use any tape! This step is important to avoid total misfire of the gun.
(This will sacrifice the performance of the top charge, but it normally is not
very critical to lose only one shot.)
12. Bend the lower end of the cord gently down and secure into place using the
springs as usual. It must be almost straight as it enters the lower charge.
Boot off the primacord.
13. Attach the head/MPD and insert the gun into the pick up tube built from a
piece of pipe or tubing. Lift the tube and place it in the rat hole. (The pick up
tube is important to prevent damaging the cord while rigging up the gun).
14. Arm the gun with high temperature blasting cap while on the rig floor. Use
high temperature string to secure blasting cap. Allow it some freedom to
move downward slightly to follow the shrinking primacord. Do not use any
tape anywhere on the gun!
15. Be aware of potential safety hazards if a gun misfires. The explosives will
be less stable after severe temperature exposure and damaged “O” rings on
a charge could cause trapped pressure inside the charge capsule. Never
run a charge back into the well that has been exposed to temperature!
Explosives can self detonate after a short time when exposed to temperature
twice!
D.5.3.2 Enerjets with HMX Primacord

HMX primacord (H304800) may expand as it is run into a well (unlike RDX which
shrinks). One consequence is that the slack formed may bulge out in the gaps
between the 2 strips and may be cut or abraded as the gun descends through
the completion string.
Hence in high temp wells where you might be using HMX primacord remember
to use a little known part - the Plastic cord retainer (H304330), which has loops
enabling the primacord to bulge only downwards towards the strip.
D.5.3.3 Enerjets with Halar Primacord

When running Enerjets at temperatures between 330 and 365°F, cover the
detonating cord with teflon tubing (E015151) at the points where it passes
through the cord protectors. (see Figure D-3 Loading Technique to Protect Halar
Detonating Cord). This is because the Halar detonating cord “hangs” on the cord
protector as it shrinks causing it to be nicked resulting in a mis-run. The tubing
protects the cord and allows the cord to move without interference.
1. Cut two pieces of teflon tubing, each 2½ in. long.
Private
2. After threading the cord through the charges, slide one piece over each
end of the detonating cord.
3. Position the tubing in the cord hole in the protector and against the charge.
4. Continue with standard procedures for loading.
2-1/2 in. length

of Teflon Tubing (E015151)
Figure D-3: Loading Technique to Protect Halar Detonating Cord
D.5.4 PEGS Verified SystemsD-2

The Enerjet Gun systems that are PEGS verified are the:
• 1-11/16 in. Enerjet HMX System rated to 20,000 psi at 365°F, fluid or gas
environment.
• 2-1/8 in. Enerjet HMX System rated to 20,000 psi at 365°F, fluid or gas
environment.
D.5.5 Acid/H 2S
Precautions must be taken when running Enerjets in H 2S or acid. The table
below summarizes the conditions and recommendations for these environments.
Table D-20: Recommendations for Using Enerjets in Acid/H 2S Environments
Acetic Acid Standard Steel strip and retrievable phased strip can be
used without special protection.
Hydrochloric and Mud Acid
Below 175°F Standard Steel strip and retrievable phased strip can be
used without special protection.
D-2. Please refer to appendix for further details of hardware to be used.
Private
Between 175°F & 284°F Follow procedures for Enerjets in acids.

Above 284°F Run Hyperdome or carrier guns only.
Hydrogen Sulfide gas - H2S
Less Than 2% Follow procedures for Enerjets in H2S.
More Than 2% Hyperdome or carrier guns recommended.1
1
Enerjets have been successfully run at higher concentrations. See section on high H S concentrations.
2
D.5.5.1 Special Procedures for Enerjet Jobs in Acid/H 2S

Environments
D.5.5.2 Charge Protection

1. Screw the charges onto the strip but do not tighten.
2. Rotate the charge so that the detonating cord hole is 90° to the strip axis.
3. Clean the inside of the cord hole with a dry cleaner spray (B075457) Kristal
DN-1 or equivalent.
4. Coat the lower part of the cleaned cord hole(near the primer web, towards
the charge body) with glyptal enamel (B074153).
5. After the glue dries load the gun in the usual manner.
6. Protect the detonator at the wellsite when arming the gun.
D.5.5.3 Detonator Protection

1. Cut detonator wires as required, but allow an additional inch for the ground
wire.
2. Thread the detonator wires through PTFE tubing (E015573).
3. Fill a piece of neoprene tubing (B009211) with silicone grease and thread it
onto the detonator wires and lower part of the detonator.
Private
PTFE Silicone Ground

0.591 in. Grease
(15 mm) Tubing Power Wire
Line
Connector Coupling
Nobel Neoprene
Detonator Seal
Tubing
Figure D-4: Detonator Protection
4. Connect the power wire to connector (P095791) as usual.

5. Slide neoprene tubing on coupling seal (P075985).

6. Crimp the detonator to the detonating cord and clip it to the strip. Applying
Teflon tape to the detonator body and all exposed wires will also help protect
against acid corrosion.
D.5.5.4 Miscellaneous Tips

1. After each run, replace and discard all screws used to hold the lower head
to the strip, and the shoulder bolts used to fasten the link to the upper and
lower head.
2. Use 80 gr/ft, HMX detonating cord with the Halar sheath (H448402). Halar
is also recommended for bromides.
3. The Expendable Phased Enerjet should not be used in an acid environment.
Recall however that the retrievable strip can be used in acid.
D.5.5.5 High H 2S Concentrations

Enerjets have been successfully run in wells with 35% H 2S. The well conditions
were 220°F to 240°F, and about 14,000 ft. The secret is to thoroughly spray the
entire gun after loading with Glyptal (B009269), an enamel paint that is red in
color. At the wellsite, the detonator and exposed ground wire are thoroughly
sprayed after arming. The glyptal is allowed to dry before running in hole.
Three areas in particular need protection from H 2S:
1. The booster area underneath the detonating cord for each charge.
2. The exposed detonator wire at the ground screw.
Private
3. The copper case of the Nobel detonator (P190860). The steel cases of the
Manurhin detonators (P285784 and P295340) are H 2S safe.
Ensure these areas are dry and free from oil before applying the Glyptal.
D.5.5.6 Special Hardware for Acid/H 2S

The table below is a reference for special items for Enerjet jobs in Acid/H 2S.
Table D-21: Special Hardware for Acid/H
2S
Acid/H2S Parts List Part Number

Neoprene Tubing B009211
Kristal DN-1 B075457
Glyptal Glue B074153
PTFE Tubing E015573
Glyptal Red Enamel B009269
HMX 80 gr/ft Detonating Cord, Halar Sheath H448402

Shooting Enerjets in gas or high GOR oil wells can result in strip deformation
large enough to prevent the gun from re-entering the tubing. To minimize strip
deformation:
1. No weights below the gun.

2. Whenever possible use 2 MPDs at the top.
3. Use one rollover sleeve every 10 charges.
4. Whenever possible run short guns.
5. Use a 4 spf strip when possible as it is stronger than the 6 spf strip.
6. Never run 2-1/8 in. charges on a 1-11/16 in. strip when perforating in gas. If
you use 2-1/8 in. charges use only 2-1/8 in. strips.

For deviations higher than 30°, mount spherical sleeves on charges at the end of
each strip. This will help to keep the gun properly oriented with respect to the
casing wall. The part numbers of the spherical sleeves are:
Private
• 1-11/16 in. Spherical SleeveH276592

• 2-1/8 in. Spherical SleeveH276612
Special slant hole equipment may be used to aid in the movement of the gun.
See section on perforating accessories/ high deviation for specifications on
various slant hole equipment.
D.6 Scallop/Hyperdome Gun Systems

This section summarizes the procedures to be followed and special hardware to
be used when using hyperdome guns in various hostile environment conditions.

The table below gives lists the specifications of available scallop gun systems.
For part numbers of hyperdome carriers refer chapter on Scallop/Hyperdome
guns.
Table D-22: Scallop HP/HT Gun Systems
Gun Type Shot Borehole Minimum Minimum Maximum HMX HNS

Density Fluid Restriction Pressure Pressure Temp. Temp.
(spf) (in.) (psi) (psi) 1 hr 1 hr
(°F) (°F)
1-3/8 in. 0° 4 or less Gas 1.5 5,000 15,000 400 480
phase Scallop
1-3/8 in. 0° 4 or less Liquid 1.5 500 15,000 400 480
phase Scallop
111/16 in. 0° 4 or less All 1.78 0 20,000 400 480
phase Scallop
2-1/8 in. 0° 4 or less All 2.25 0 20,000 400 480
phase Scallop
2-1/8 in. 180° 4 or less All 2.25 0 20,000 400 480
Phase Scallop
2-1/8 in. 60° 4 or less All 2.25 0 20,000 400 480
phase Scallop
The following table lists the Explosives that can be used with the gun systems
listed above. Please note the primacord and detonators to be used with the high
temperature scallop guns are:
• H448706 HMX 35 gr/ft ribbon detonating cord rated to 400°F for 1 hour.
• H304114 HNS 40 gr/ft ribbon detonating cord rated to 500°F for 1 hour.
Private
• B031138 High temperature E-126 detonator or equivalent rated to 480°F for

1 hour.
• P291271 High temperature Manurhin detonator rated to 480°F for 1 hour.
Table D-23: Explosives Required for HP/HT Scallop Gun Systems
Gun Size Charge Part Number Temp. (1 hr.) °F

1-11/16 in. 20J UJ, HMX H448519 400
20J UJ, HNS H448520 500
2-1/8 in. 25J UJ, HMX H334542 400
25J UJ, HNS H334544 500
2-1/8 in. Phased 25J UJ, HMX H334542 400
(180°) 25J UJ, HNS H334544 500

2-1/8 in. Phased (60°) 25J UJ, HMX H334542 400
25J UJ, HNS H334544 500
D.6.1.1 Scallop Housing Drop-Off:

Several cases of shearing the Allen screws (H045621) that attach the housing to
the head have occurred after shooting in deep, high pressure wells. In all cases,
a long gun was partially loaded with empty housing at the bottom. Normally
after shooting a full gun, well fluid floods the housing in a horizontal direction.
However when there is about 10 ft or more empty housing below the bottom
shot, the inertia of a high velocity jet of well fluid caused by the pressure of the
fluid column is directed downward. When the jet hits the bottom of the housing,
there can be enough force to shear the screws at the head.
To avoid this cut housings near to correct length when possible. Otherwise
remove the excess charges in a ratio of 2/3 from the top, and 1/3 from the
bottom. This will split the energy, with more directed upward. Now, the forces
will be less than the shear strength of the screws.
D.6.1.2 High Temperature Punchers

Punchers H429595, H429596, H429597 are replacements for H304253,
H304254 and H3042555. The new punchers are loaded with HNS and are
rated at 500°F for 1 hr. From 470 to 500°F, primacord (H304114) and detonator
(B031138) or equivalent must be used. The H304... punchers were loaded
with PSF which had been downgraded to about 430°F for wireline times (1 hr),
and are now obsolete.
Private
There are also two HNS 1-3/8 in. punchers which were released, H448254
(large) and H448255 (small) which replaced PSF punchers of the same size
(H304627 and H304628). It is likely to be useful in completion strings with small
nipples.
All HNS punchers require the Domed scallop carriers. RDX punchers use
non-domed carriers.
The table below gives a summary of high temperature puncher charges which
are all rated to 500°F for 1 hour. Please note that the primacord and detonator
to be used for high temperature applications are:
• H304114 HNS ribbon cord rated to 500°F for 1 hour.

• B031138 High temperature E-126 detonator or equivalent rated to 480°F for

1 hour.
• P291271 High temperature Manurhin detonator rated to 480°F for 1 hour.
Table D-24: High Temperature Punchers
Charge Part Color Tubing Entrance Penetration

Number Thickness Hole (in.) (in.)
Range (in.)
20 ES 1-11/16 in. H429595 Pink 0.19 0.32 0.10
0.375 0.24 0.05
20 DM 1-11/16 in. H429596 Black 0.375 0.30 0.10
0.50 0.23 0.05
20 DL 1-11/16 in. H429597 Purple 0.50 0.25 0.10
0.58 0.17 0.05
16 DS 1-3/8 in. H448255 N/A 0.19 0.30 0.10
0.375 0.23 0.10
16 CL 1-3/8 in. H448254 N/A 0.375 0.22 0.10
0.50 0.13 0.05
D.6.1.3 PEGS Verified SystemsD-3

The following Hyperdome gun systems have been PEGS verified:
• 1-11/16 in. Hyperdome HNS Puncher System rated to 25,000 psi at 500°F
for 1 hr, fluid or gas environment.
• 2-1/8 in. Hyperdome HNS System rated to 25,000 psi at 500°F for 1 hour,
fluid or gas environment.
D-3. Refer to Appendix for further details on hardware to be used.
Private

Perforating in gas introduces the added complication of gun carrier swelling and
one must be very careful when perforating in gas as the possibility of getting
stuck is increased. Use only the high pressure guns which are rated for gas or
low hydrostatic pressures as per Table D-22 Scallop HP/HT Gun Systems .
Another precaution that must be taken is that the detonating cord must be
fixed against the strip between charges to avoid splitting or excessive swelling.
RDX Detaflex detonating cord (B024714) could also be used instead of the usual
RDX lead primacord (H106960) to minimize swelling where gas is present but
remember it is rated only to 310°F for 1 hour.
D.6.2.1 High Pressure Housings: Minimum Restriction

Standard scallop housings are pressure rated to 15,000 psi. High pressure
housings are available that are pressure rated to 25,000 psi. In fact the 1-11/16
in. and 2-1/8 in. Hyperdome scallop carriers standard tubes have been phased
out. The high-pressure housings can be used in all conditions from air (0 psi)
to high pressure liquid, so it has an advantage in performance. However high
pressure is not the only reason to use higher rated housings. The burr height
in these carriers is smaller. This can be important to prevent getting stuck after
shooting, when there is a small restriction such as a 2.205 in. Otis X nipple. The
minimum recommended hole diameter for 2-1/8 in. Scallop is 2-1/4 in.
It is important to know about 2.205 in. nipples in advance of the job because the
client should be strongly advised to machine out the diameter to 2 1/4 in. in
addition to ordering special high pressure housings, to prevent getting stuck
after shooting. Painful experience from repeated fiascoes has shown these
precautions to be necessary.
Refer to Table D-22 Scallop HP/HT Gun Systems for available scallop gun
carriers. The table gives the minimum restrictions in which they can be used in
different borehole fluids.
D.6.2.2 Trapped Pressure in Scallop Guns

When perforating in high pressure gas wells that have high concentrations of
H2S of CO2, there is an increased probability of a seal leak that will allow gas
pressure to become trapped inside a scallop gun and result in a misfire. This
will create a safety hazard when the gun is removed from the well because
Private
there is no way to release the pressure from inside the housing. The gun is still
“armed” and it is dangerous due to the trapped pressure. Although not frequent,
this problem has occurred here in the Middle East.
There is a pressure vent bottom nose adapter available from SPT that will avoid
the problem. There is a piston at the bottom that will be held firmly in place as
long as hydrostatic pressure is greater than the atmospheric pressure inside the
gun. However, if pressure gets trapped in the gun, the piston will pop out while
pulling out of the hole when the internal pressure exceeds the pressure outside
the gun. This will solve the safety hazard.
Although this is a good argument to use a vent bottom nose on all scallop
operations, it is unlikely this will occur. However, when nasty gases are present,
O-ring damage from gas absorption is more likely. So, in this case it is advisable
to have a couple of these noses at the wellsite :
Table D-25: Vent Bottom Nose
Gun Size Vent Bottom Nose

1-11/16 in. Scallop H224910
2-1/8 in. Scallop H224911
D.6.3 Acids/H2S
There are no special procedures to be followed in hostile chemical conditions
with scallop guns except with basic equipment including O-rings. Refer to the
section on basic equipment for details.

TCP jobs using coiled tubing can be performed and this option could be used
for wells with high deviation where scallop guns have to be run. This is not
discussed here as it is already well documented in TCP manuals. Another option
available is coiled tubing perforation using wireline. Please refer to section
on perforating accessories/high deviation for further details.
For lower deviations when wireline jobs are run and the gun doesn’t go down
special slant hole equipment can be used to reduce friction and aid tool
movement. Special hardware consists of weights; rollered pivot and flex joints;
and rollered adjustable centralisers (e.g., CME-AK). Please refer to section on
perforating accessories/high deviation for further details.
Private
D.7 Pivot Gun Systems

This section lists the special procedures to be followed when using Pivot Guns in
different types of hostile environments.
D.7.1 High Temperature/ High Pressure

Current pivot gun systems are rated to 330°F for 1 hour at 12,000 psi as they use
RDX charges and hence cannot be used at higher temperatures and pressures.
For through tubing perforations at high temperatures and pressures use either
Enerjet guns or Scallop guns.
D.7.2 H2S and Acid

• Use H2S Explosive Bolt (Release Bolt) - H448868.
• Ensure Deployment Head is upgraded with MR1, MR2, MR3.
• Coat all components inside the Release Bolt Section with DC-III grease.
These components include:
Table D-26: Pivot Gun Components to be Coated with DC-III Grease
Component Part Number

Retainer Nut H448484
Stroke Adapter H448356
Actuator Rod Retainer H448381
Compression Adapter H448385
Retainer Plate H448383
Explosive Bolt (Hostile Service) H448868
• Check these components for cracks and excessive swelling after each run
in hostile conditions.
• Fill Lower Piston Housing (Belleville washer section) with DC-III.
• Drill a small hole (0.125 in.) near the lower end of the bottom nose and pump
DC-III around the detonator.
• Paint the primer area of the shaped charges with Glyptal.
• Fill the void areas of the Pivot gun with DC-III. A grease adapter H448570 is
available to make this easier.
• Follow proper gun loading procedures.
Private
D.7.3 Deviated Wells/Small Casing

• Pivot guns are rated for well deviations up to 45° due to the fact that the gun
has to pick itself up from the bottom side of the casing to the middle of the
casing.
• Pivot guns have been run successfully in wells with higher deviations (shorter
guns and/or larger casing).
• Smaller casing makes it tougher to deploy as the gun has a steeper climb
to make.
• Ensure that the deployment is installed with MR3, as it gives a higher
deployment force.
• The tool saver (H341022) must be used in highly deviated holes or in small
casing. It should be placed below any weights and above the MPD in the
tool string.
• Anything that adds to the friction will make it tougher to deploy These include:
– Sand
– Debris
– Scale
– Heavy mud
– Paraffin
• Use Flex Joint (H341022). The Flex Joint goes above the MPD.
• Run shorter guns to :
– Decrease friction in gun and make it easier to deploy.

– Decrease the weight of the gun making it easier to deploy.
• Gun may need to be worked up and down a number of times to be free from
friction if there is no indication of full deployment.
• Another technique used in LNZ, to deploy the gun in small casing and
moderate deviations, is to pull the Head, CCL, and weight up into the
tail-pipe, leaving the Pivot Gun carrier below, and then deploy the gun. The
centralization of the tail-pipe holds the carrier off the casing wall and makes
deployment easier.
• Use new carriers with pre-formed tabs. They form smaller pieces of debris
and reduce the chance of bridging over.
Private
D.7.4 Sand and Scale

Fill the void areas with the DC-III to:
• Help keep sand and debris out.

• Reduce friction when deploying.
• A grease adapter (H448570) is available to make this easier.
• Sand does stick to the DC-III but most of it stays near the outside of the gun.
Run shorter guns to:

• Decrease friction in gun and make it easier to deploy.
Gun may need to be worked up and down a number of times to be free from
friction.
D.7.5 Gas Wells

Fill void areas of the Pivot Gun with DC-III to:
• Improve cord to charge explosive transfer.

• Reduce friction when deploying.
• Do not rerun charges.
D.8 HSD Gun Systems

This section summarizes the procedures to be followed and equipment to be
used when doing HSD jobs in various hostile environment conditions.

The table below lists the various HSD gun systems and the temperature and
pressure ratings of the carriers and spacers for each system. It also gives the
charge that can be used for that gun system.
Private
Table D-27: HSD Gun Systems
Gun Charge ExplosiveMaximum Shots Phasing Maximum Maximum Temperature

System1 Weight Diameter per (degrees)Pressure Pressure for
(gms.) (incl. Foot Carrier Spacer Pressure
burrs) (psi.) (psi.) Rating
(in.) (°F)2
2 -1/2 in. 31J UJ 10.5 2.75 6 60 25,000 25,000 500
G/HP
2-7/8 in. 34J UJ 15 3.08 6 60 25,000 25,000 500
G/HP
3-3/8 in. 41B 22 3.85 6 60 20,000 23,000 500
G/HP HJII 15 3.58 6 60 20,000 23,000 500
38A UJ
3-1/2 in. 37J UJ 34 3.81 4 60 25,000 25,000 500

G/HP 41B 22 3.81 6 60 25,000 25,000 500
HJII
3
4-1/2 in. 43C 24 5.0 12 135/45 12,000 13,000 400
UP 21 4.77 12 135/45 12,000 13,000 400
34B 24 4.63 10 180/60 10,000 13,000 400
HJII 37 4.82 4/5 60 N.A. 13,000 400
43C
UP
51B
HJII
4.72 G/HP 34JL 21 N.A. 12 135/45 20,000 23,000 500
UJ 24 4.98 12 135/45 20,000 23,000 500
43C 24 5.10 12 135/45 20,000 23,000 500
UP 21 4.99 12 135/45 20,000 23,000 500
43B 37 N.A. 5 60 20,000 23,000 500
CP 38.5 N.A. 5 60 20,000 23,000 500
34B
HJII
51B
HJII
51J UJ
5.0 43C 24 5.14 12 135/45 12,000 13,000 400
UP 24 5.17 10 180/60 10,000 13,000 400
43C 21 5.19 12 135/45 12,000 13,000 400
UP 37 5.24 4/5 60 N.A. 13,000 400
34B
HJII
51B
HJII
Private
6.0 41B 22 6.10 12 120 12,000 15,000 400

HJII 32 6.15 12 120 12,000 15,000 400
51C
UP
7.0 51B 37 7.04 12 135/45 10,000 12,000 400
HJII 61 7.20 12 135/45 10,000 12,000 400
58C 66 7.62 12 135/45 10,000 12,000 400
UP 37 7.05 14 140/20 10,000 12,000 400
64C 61 7.27 14 140/20 10,000 12,000 400
UP 66 7.75 14 140/20 10,000 12,000 400
51B
HJII
58C
UP
64C
UP
1
Only the G/HP (Gas/High Pressure) guns can be shot in air or gas. DO NOT use water guns in air or gas.
2
High Temperature/High Pressure seals required above 350°F
3
Limit the use of the 4-1/2 in. HSD up to 12,000 psi and spacers up to 13,000 psi. Above these pressures the
heavy wall 4.72 in. gun should be used as the 4-1/2 in. guns might collapse under pressures exceeding
12,000 psi.
As is apparent from Table D-27 HSD Gun Systems, the carriers and spacers are
not the real limitation for high temperature applications. The limitation exists in
the explosives used or the accessories and seals used. Please refer to the
sections on Explosives or Basic Equipment for further details if you have to
run HSD guns in high temperature and/or high pressure. Mentioned below are
high temperature, high performance charges that can be used with HSD gun
systems. Please note that the detonating cords and detonators to be used with
these charges are as follows :
• H543012 - 80 gr/ft HMX detonating cord rated to 400°F for 1 hour.

• H429816 - 87 gr/ft HNS detonating cord rated to 500°F for 1 hour.
• P291271 - Fluid disabled Manurhin detonator rated to 480°F for 1 hour.
Table D-28: High Temperature HSD Charges
Gun Size Charge Part Number 1 Hr. Temp. Rating

2⅞ in. 34J UJ, HMX H543100 400°F
34J UJ, HNS H448786 500°F
3⅜ in. 34B HJII, HMX H429586 400°F
41A UJ, HNS H334096 500°F
41B HJII, HMX H304952 400°F
1
3-1/2 in. 37J UJ, HMX H448846 400°F
4-1/2 in. 34B HJII, HMX H429586 400°F
51B HJII, HMX H334498 400°F
51J UJ, HMX H448989 400°F
Private
4.72 in. 34JL UJ, HNS H448785 500°F

51J UJ, HNS H448886 500°F
5 in. 34B HJII, HMX H429586 400°F
51B HJII, HMX H334498 400°F
7 in. 51B HJII, HMX H334498 400°F
1
New High Performance Gun System due to superior charge performance. The 37J Ultrajet HMX charge can
be shot at 4 spf or less only and must be run in the 3-1/2 in. HP carrier. If higher shot densities are used or
the 3⅜ in. carrier is used for these charges, the guns will split when they are fired.
D.8.1.1 PEGS Verified SystemsD-4

The HSD gun systems that are PEGS verified are:
• 2-7/8 in. HSD, HNS System, rated to 25,000 psi at 500°F for 1 hr, fluid or
gas environment.
• 3-3/8 in. HSD, HNS System, rated to 20,000 psi at 475°F for 1 hr, fluid
environment.
• 3-3/8 in. HSD, HMX System rated to 20,000 psi at 400°F for 1 hr, fluid
environment.
D.8.1.2 Special Procedures for High Temperature Operations

Given below are explosive considerations for various temperature ranges in TCP
operations. Some of these considerations also apply to wireline HSD jobs:
Plastics and Lubricants
Plastics and lubricants decompose and release gases at elevated temperatures.

At moderate (up to 300°F) temperatures where RDX and HMX explosive
components can be used, the amounts of gas released is minimal and poses few
problems. However, for TCP jobs requiring HNS components, temperatures and
times may be such that the gases can attack the HNS, decreasing performance or
causing misfires. While the release of gas from plastic appears to be temperature
dependent, the attack on HNS is time dependent. A test at 100 hours for a given
temperature may not yield the same results as a test at 200 hours.
Compounding the problem is the fact that at high temperatures HNS is also
decomposing. As you near the upper rating of HNS, the presence of certain
substances (eg. gas) can accelerate the decomposition of HNS.
Here are some guidelines and recommendations:
D-4. Please refer to the appendix for further details on hardware to be used.
Private
• Use high temperatures plastics, lubricants and clean gun procedures above
400°F.
• The standard percussion detonator (H429313) can be used to 425°F for
200 hours for TCP operations. Use the detonators listed in Table D-16 High
Temperature Detonators for wireline jobs.
• The high temperature percussion detonator (H524167) is qualified up to
440°F for 200 hours.
300°F to 350°F
The HMX rating is defined by the temperature time line shown in Figure 1 of the
Explosives Chapter. Below this line use the percussion detonator (H429313) for
TCP jobs and standard plastic components. When times and temperatures
are above the ratings line, switch to HNS explosives. Standard plastics can
still be used.
When using HNS components, remove excess cutting oil from inside the gun
and remove excess grease from the loading tube. For long term jobs, such as
batch completions, use the high temperature, graphite lubricant (B029786), and
thoroughly clean the loading tube inside the gun.
350°F to 400°F
Definite HNS range for TCP operations. Using HMX at 350°F for durations over
24 hours would most likely end with charge burning or possible auto-detonation.
Standard plastics, lubricants and the standard detonators (H429313 for TCP)
can be used in this range and many jobs have been run near 360°F in the 100
to 200 hour range with no reported problems. It is safer to be conservative as
temperatures approach 400°F:
• Clean the inside of the carrier, the loading tube and detonating cord with
acetone or similar solvent.
• For times longer than 200 hours use only DC-III silicone on O-rings and the
graphite lubricant (B029786) on threads. Avoid using DC-III on threads as it
is a lousy lubricant and does nothing to prevent galling.
Private
400°F to 420°F
Here is a transition zone for TCP operations demanding caution. Standard

percussion detonators can be used if the temperature is accurately known and
downhole times will not exceed 200 hours. Standard percussion detonators may
fail to fire above 425°F. Clean gun practices are necessary and high temperature
plastics are mandatory.
420°F to 440°F
SPT has conducted successful 200 hour tests in this range. Tests were
conducted following high temp. guidelines:
• high temperature plastics.

• high temperature detonator (H524167 for TCP).
• graphite lubricant.
• detonating cord cleaned with acetone.
• clean gun procedures.
As can be seen from the temperature-time chart at 440°F and 200 hours HNS is
close to its maximum capability; moving slightly above these limits will reduce
charge performance and eventually cause misfires. HNS may not auto-detonate;
however it may burn. Limited data indicates non-violent burn.
440°F to 500°F
This is out of the temperature range for TCP operations where the guns may be
downhole for long periods of time. The temperature rating will depend on how
long the guns will be exposed to high temperatures. However wireline jobs can
still be carried out at these temperatures. All the high temperature guidelines
listed above should be followed and only high temperature charges and
detonators should be used in this range (see Table D-27 HSD Gun Systems).
D.8.2 HSD Guns in Gas Environments

What would you do if you are requested to run a wireline HSD job on a producing
well with new perforations near a producing gas zone? The well has a gas
column to surface with a well head pressure of 3,000 psi. Is it safe to perforate
with standard (non-gas) carrier tubes?
Private
NO. There is significant risk of splitting the guns. It would be safe to perforate
with non-gas carriers only if you can be absolutely sure that there is going to be
ONLY liquid around the guns. However if there are gas bubbles around the guns
the carrier might split. Even few small gas bubbles around the gun increases the
compressibility of the fluid around the gun significantly to have the risk of splitting
the carriers. In fact guns rated to shoot in water only may split if shot in a fluid
of lower density such as oil or diesel.
It is better to use the HSD gas/ high pressure carriers as then there is no risk
of splitting the guns. The water carriers are being phased out since the use of
the pressure gas materials will provide increased system flexibility and reliability.
Refer to Table D-27 HSD Gun Systems for details on Gas/High Pressure HSD
gun systems.
D.8.3 Acids/H2S
with HSD guns except with basic equipment including O-rings. Refer to the

preferred technique. (See TCP FOM for details on TCP). But for deviations
below this when wireline jobs are run and the gun doesn’t go down special
slant hole equipment can be used to reduce friction and aid tool movement.
Special hardware consists of weights; rollered pivot and flex joints; and rollered
adjustable centralisers (e.g., CME-AK). See section on basic equipment/ high
deviation for specifications of various slant hole equipment.
D.8.4.1 HSD Guns Alignment using Roller Adapters

Generally rollers are not needed. Guns are simply pushed into position
in horizontal wells. However if they need to be oriented then rollers are
used. A roller should be used for each gun assembly. The design of these
Alignment/roller adapters allows long gun strings to be easily aligned in the same
radial orientation for oriented perforating operations.
It should be noted that new 2-7/8 in. and 3-3/8 in. HSD gun systems should
be used in order to benefit from the improved detonation transfer feature. The
new transfer components are spring loaded to ensure proper booster to booster
Private
overlap even when the alignment adapters are backed out one full turn to line
up the guns. The 4-1/2 in. HSD gun system already includes the new transfer
components.
Table D-29: HSD Alignment/Roller Adapters
Description Part Number

2⅞ in. HSD Upper Alignment Adapter H543079
2⅞ in. HSD Lower Alignment/Roller Adapter H428736
Assembly
2⅞ in. HSD Lower Alignment Adapter H543221
3⅜ in. HSD Upper Alignment Adapter H543016
3⅜ in. HSD Lower Alignment/Roller Adapter H543204

Assembly
3⅜ in. HSD Lower Alignment Adapter H543015
4-1/2 in. HSD Upper Alignment Adapter H428392
4-1/2 in. HSD Lower Alignment/Roller Adapter H543239
Assembly
4-1/2 in. HSD Lower Alignment Adapter H428393
Transfer Extension (adds 3 in. to donor) H428738
D.9 Casing Guns

This section summarizes the special procedures to be followed and special
equipment to be used when using casing guns in hostile environment conditions.

The table below summarizes the temperature and pressure ratings and
conditions of use of casing guns.
Table D-30: Casing Guns Ratings
Gun Type Shot Borehole Pressure Minimum Temp.

Density Fluid Rating (psi) Restriction Rating °F
(in.) (1 hr.)
3 ⅛ in. HEGS 1 4 or less All 0 to 4,000 3.38 (in fluid) 210
3.65 (in air)
4 in. HEGS2 4 or less All 0 to 4,000 4.28 (in fluid) 210
4.50 (in air)
3
3 ⅜ in. PPG 4 or less All 0 to 25,000 4 3.83 500
Private
5
4 in. PPG 4 or less All 0 to 25,000 6 4.50 500
7
3 ⅛ in. Selectric 4 or less All 0 to 8,000 3.62 250
1
High Efficiency Gun Systems. Nonreusable, retrievable hollow steel carriers.
2
High Efficiency Gun Systems. Nonreusable, retrievable hollow steel carriers.
3
Port Plug Guns. Special precautions are required for operations in dry holes.
4
Above 20,000 psi HSD guns are recommended.
5
6
Above 20,000 psi HSD guns are recommended.
7
As is apparent from the table the only casing gun that can be used at high
temperatures and pressures are the Port Plug Gun (PPG Guns). In these hostile
conditions it is generally recommended to run HSD gun systems. Nevertheless

listed below are some tips for high temperature/ high pressure conditions.
The table below lists the high temperature explosives that can be used with
Port Plug Guns. The detonating cord and detonator that can be used for high
temperature applications are:

• H429816 - 87 gr/ft HNS detonating cord rated to 500°F for 1 hour.
• P291271 - Fluid disabled Manurhin detonator rated to 480°F for 1 hour.
Table D-31: High Temperature PPG Charges
Gun Size Charge Part Number 1 hr. Temp. Rating

(°F)
3 ⅜ in. 38A UJ, HMX H304637 400
38A UJ, HNS H304569 500
4 in. 41B HJII, HMX H334534 400
41A UJ, HNS H428014 500
D.9.1.1 High Temperature Alignment Sleeves

High Temperature Alignment sleeves (H429207) have been obsoleted. They
suffer from variations in the Ryton material which caused some lots to be brittle
and crack during installation. Cracked alignment sleeves may cause charge
misalignment and damaged carrier threads.
The replacement high temperature sleeve is (H432140) rated to 500°F. The

color is light to medium brown.
Private
Temperature ratings of current alignment sleeves for the 3 ⅜ in. and 4 in. PPG is
given in the table below.
Table D-32: Alignment Sleeves
Part Number Description Temp. Rating (°F)

H247258 Alignment sleeve (yellow) 425
H432140 Alignment sleeve (brown) 500
H224735 Alignment sleeve (green) 425
The green alignment sleeves are sometimes used in old carriers which have
become oversized.

There is no minimum pressure below which casing guns cannot be used.
However the chances of blowing port-hole plugs is increased. In gas
environments the dry hole plug (B041059) should be used. This dry hole plug
can be used for pressures up to 10,000 psi in single guns (or bottom gun in
selective shooting) and 5000 psi for additional guns in selective shooting.
D.9.3 Acids/H2S
with casing guns except with basic equipment (including O-rings). Refer to the

preferred technique. (See TCP FOM for details on TCP). But for deviations
below this when wireline jobs are run and the gun doesn’t go down special
slant hole equipment can be used to reduce friction and aid tool movement.
Special hardware consists of weights; rollered pivot and flex joints; and rollered
adjustable centralisers (e.g., CME-AK). See section on basic equipment/high
deviation for specifications of various slant hole equipment.
Private
D.10 Program to Evaluate Gun Systems (PEGS)

In the past, when a perforating projectwas at the upper limits of a perforating
system’s rating, a series of tests, instigated by our clients, was performed with
the same “lot” of equipment to be used on the job. This was to confirm that
the system would work in the actual conditions. This testing helped make our
clients more comfortable when running this equipment in a hostile environment.
However, the practice of “lot testing” is expensive and only confirms that the
particular set of equipment conforms to specifications. It does not confirm that
former or subsequent production lots will perform likewise.
Our clients took the lead in addressing this issue of confidence in perforating
equipment by creating the Program to Evaluate Gun Systems - PEGS. The
program involves eleven companies: AGIP, Arco, British Petroleum, Chevron,
Conoco, Elf Aquitaine, Exxon, Mobil, Pogo, Texaco and Unocal. The purpose of
PEGS is to define pertinent standards and implement procedures for verifying
that perforating systems will perform to rated temperatures, pressures and time
on an ongoing basis. All equipment used in a perforating system is verified. This
includes explosive components, gun hardware, accessories, firing systems and
any other related equipment for either tubing-conveyed or wireline-conveyed
operations.
Service companies seeking PEGS verification of their equipment include

Schlumberger, Vann Systems, Baker Sand Control and Western Atlas.
Schlumberger is the obvious leader. We have seven PEGS-verified systems to
date. Of our competitors, only Baker haa a PEGS-verified system which is a
2-7/8 in. gun at 6 spf, with an RDX explosive package This system is rated for
240°F for 100 hr at 22,000 psi.
D.10.1 Good Fundamental Engineering:

For Schlumberger, this means that we continue to adhere to good fundamental
engineering practice which are :
• equipment design is correct for its purpose.

• design was validated by adequate testing.
• quality assurance provisions are in place to ensure ongoing reliable
performance at published temperature, time and pressure ratings.
The PEGS verification process involves three basic steps:
• equipment selection
Private
• testing
• verification
D.10.2 Selection
The verification process begins with the selection of a gun system. Once a
particular system has been chosen, and the system components have been
identified and agreed upon by all parties, a verification schedule is established
by the service company and the PEGS Coordinator.
D.10.3 Testing
Product design documentation is reviewed for completeness and correctness
to confirm that equipment testing has been performed in accordance with
Schlumberger standards which are:
• Time
• Pressure x 1.05
• Temperature + 10°C
– at minimum metal conditions.

– at maximum extrusion gaps.
Hardware and explosives can be tested separately. Specific test categories for
each are indicated as follows:
D.10.3.1 Explosive Components (charges, boosters, detonators,

detonating cord, transfers):
• Shaped-charged Production Line QC Target
• Shaped-charged Production Line Test Set-up
• Shaped-charged Production Line Charge Performance
• Shaped-charged Production (API RP 43 5th Edition Section 1 tests)
• API RP 43 5th Edition Section 3 Thermal Integrity Test Material Traceability
• Packaging Control
Private
D.10.3.2 Gun Hardware and Accessories:

• Time/Temperature/Pressure Testing (API RP 43 5th Edition Section 3)
• Mechanical Dimensional control
• Physical and Chemical Properties control
• Material Traceability
• Thermal Integrity Test
• Mechanical Integrity Test
• Electrical Transfer Test

• Elastomer Control (chemical properties, storage, shelf-life, etc.)
The testing required for PEGS is usually done as part of the design phase of
a project at SPT. This means the bulk of the exercise for a PEGS verification
is to assemble the documentation that shows the testing has been done. If a
required test has not been done, then it will be completed as part of the PEGS
data-gathering process.
There are three major issues regarding explosives, particularly shaped charges:
First, there is ongoing quality control during production - control of the test
target, standard test setup and charge performance.
Second, there is confirmation of a statistical correlation between API RP 43

data and production-line performance.
Third, there is confirmation of the thermal integrity of the explosives; i.e. desired
charge performance at ambient and rated temperature, supported by quality
control information regarding explosive purity and other critical specifications.
Thermal integrity tests are performed in accordance with API RP 43 fifth edition,
Section 3.
Other issues involve material traceability and component packaging control.

Gun hardware and accessories are also tested in accordance with API RP 43
Fifth Edition, Section 3. The emphasis is on temperature-pressure-time tests
under worst case scenario (seal dimensions adjusted to maximum extrusion
gap). Equipment is tested at 1.05 times its published pressure rating and at a
temperature of 10°C (18°F) above its rating. Of particular interest is housing
collapse or seal failure. Other issues include dimensional control, mechanical
integrity (e.g., gun swell after firing,) material traceability and control of material
properties for elastomers and steel components.
Private
Finally, the entire system, excluding explosives, is assembled and subjected to

electrical and mechanical functional tests at the standards mentioned previously.
Explosives can be done separately because they are not exposed to pressure.
D.10.4 Verification
All information developed during the various tests is recorded in accordance with
the PEGS guidelines. The file, including 19 categories of records, is submitted
to the PEGS Coordinator for review. A system audit is conducted by the PEGS
committee. The audit can range from a simple review by the PEGS committee to
the witnessing of specific tests by the committee. If the audit is satisfactory, the
Committee verifies the system. If there are questions regarding the results of the
audit, follow-up actions are agreed to and implemented. Following a successful
audit, a PEGS Summary Data Sheet is prepared for the system and this data
sheet is provided to PEGS members. The equipment may now be offered for
use as a PEGS-Verified Systems.
D.10.5 PEGS and the Field

The marketing implications of PEGS speak for themselves. British Petroleum,
Exxon, Mobil and Unocal have awarded Schlumberger work on seven wells in
the US Gulf Coast, some without bid differential, because of our ability to provide
PEGS-verified equipment. Well depths ranged from 18,000 to 25,000 ft with
temperatures ranging from 350°F to 410°F.
One item to note is that PEGS addresses design and manufacturing of

equipment only. It does not include requirements regarding field operations.
Proper maintenance and traceability of equipment in the field is essential.
D.10.6 PEGS In Summary

PEGS has brought much to the table for Schlumberger with more to come in the
future. Because the PEGS auditors are representatives of the oil companies
themselves, our continued cooperation can only strengthen our working
relationship with them. As the member companies and the industry become
more familiar with and gain confidence in our perforation equipment, this should
lead to more High Pressure/ High Temperature perforating work being done with
Schlumberger as the preferred supplier.
Today the following systems have been PEGS-verified:
Private
Table D-33: PEGS Verified Systems
System Pressure Temperature Fluid and /or Gas

Rating (psi) Rating (°F)
2-7/8 in. HSD, HNS System 25,000 500 for 1 hr Fluid or gas environment
3-3/8 in. HSD, HMX System 20,000 400 for 1 hr Fluid environment
3-3/8 in. HSD, HNS System 20,000 475 for 1 hr Fluid environment
1-11/16 in. Hyperdome HNS 25,000 500 for 1 hr Fluid or gas environment
Puncher
2-1/8 in. Hyperdome HNS 25,000 500 for 1 hr Fluid or gas environment
System
111/16 in. Enerjet III HMX 20,000 365 for 1 hr Fluid or gas environment
System
2-1/8 in. Enerjet III HMX 20,000 365 for 1 hr Fluid or gas environment
System
D.11 Pipe Recovery Systems
D.11.1 Cutters and Colliding Tools

For cutters and colliding tools there are no special procedures for hostile
environments, except that the explosives used should be rated for the
temperature and pressure they are being used in. Please refer to the chapter on
cutters and colliding tools for the temperature and pressure ratings of explosives
to be used.
D.11.2 Back-off
D.11.2.1 Comments About Back-off at High Temperature

1. High temperature back-off operations should be performed using the
following explosives:
• P285784 - High temperature, high pressure Manurhin detonator rated to

480°F for 1 hr at 25,000 psi.
• P295340 - High temperature, high pressure RF Manurhin detonator rated
to 480°F for 1 hr at 25,000 psi.
• P285791 - Back-off booster rated to 480°F for 1 hr and 25,000 psi (Boot
P190294 is required with this booster).
Private
• H429816 - 87 gr/ft HNS detonating cord rated to 420°F for 1 hr under

exposed conditions.
• H448845 - 87 gr/ft HNS detonating cord rated to 450°F for 1 hr under
exposed conditions.
2. The main difference between building a high temperature back-off bar and
a normal back-off bar is that the normal 2 in. black scotch tape cannot be
used. This and similar plastic tapes will melt and hang up on restrictions.
Two field tested options are :
• E016666 - 3/4 in. Teflon Tape.

• E027904 - 2 in. Polyimide tape.
The teflon tape is flexible and does a nice job securing the primacord.
However it is difficult to apply because it breaks easily unless it is kept cold in
a refrigerator before using.
3. Use high temperature lacing cord (E076969) to thoroughly tie the primacord
bundle into place.
4. The normal pig-tail (P095791) is rated to 400°F and 20,000 psi, but has
been used to 440°F without problems. This plug is recognized by its white
ceramic washer. Take care to check inside the head for broken off pieces of
previous pig-tails. If the plug entry hole in the head is not cleaned properly,
fluid entry can occur causing a mis-run. Note that the H029597 pig-tail has a
brass washer and is rated to 330°F and 15,000 psi. The H334564 pig-tail
has a light brown PEEK insulated wire with a brass washer, and is rated to
450°F and 20,000 psi.
For information on basic equipment refer to chapter 1, and for instructions
on how to arm the high temperature detonator refer to the Enerjet Gun
Systems chapter.
Private
SRC-Wireline\SRC-Wireline\InTouch ID 3013565\3.1\Release Date: 10-Jun-2004\EDMS UID: 274896043\Produced: 13-Jul-2006 20:55:42 D-60 WL FOM / Hostile Environment (GFE paper, by R. Sonthalia, 1996) D-60
Intentionally Blank
Private
E-i WL FOM / Appendix E-i
E Appendix
E.1 Glossary - Notes _______________________________________________ E-1
E.1.1 Applied Pressure ____________________________________________ E-1
E.1.2 Differential Pressure _________________________________________ E-1
E.1.3 Gun String - Safety Spacer Plus Guns and Spacers ____________ E-1
E.1.4 Hydrostatic Pressure _________________________________________ E-1
E.1.5 TCP String __________________________________________________ E-2
E.1.6 True Vertical Depth (TVD) ____________________________________ E-2
E.1.7 U-Tubing Effect ______________________________________________ E-2
E.2 i-Handbook ____________________________________________________ E-2
Private
SRC-Wireline\SRC-Wireline\InTouch ID 3013565\3.1\Release Date:10-Jun-2004\EDMS UID: 274896043\Produced: 13-Jul-2006 20:55:42 E-ii
Private
WL FOM / Appendix
Intentionally Blank

E-ii
E-1 WL FOM / Appendix E-1
E APPENDIX
E.1 Glossary - Notes
E.1.1 Applied Pressure

In addition to hydrostatic pressure, there may also be pressure applied to the
well through a pump or pressure source (N 2). This is called applied pressure.
The pressure at any point in the well is equal to the hydrostatic pressure at
that point plus the applied pressure.
E.1.2 Differential Pressure

Basically this is the difference between two pressures separated by a seal of
some kind. It may be the difference in pressure:
• Between the tubing and casing

• Of a formation and a test cushion
• Across a packer between the casing annulus and the formation
• Across a test valve between the valve rathole and the tubing.
E.1.3 Gun String - Safety Spacer Plus Guns and Spacers

The complete gun and spacer assembly to be run in the hole on which the firing
head is connected when the “gun string” is suspended in the slips (charges
below the rotary table).
E.1.4 Hydrostatic Pressure

The weight of a column of fluid exerts a hydrostatic pressure. The amount of this
pressure is dependent on two factors: density of the fluid and height (TVD) of
the fluid column.
Hydrostatic pressure (psi)
= fluid wt (lb/gal) x 0.052 x depth (ft)
Private
E-2 WL FOM / Appendix E-2
= fluid wt (lb/ft 3 ) x depth (ft) ÷ 144
= 61.317x depth (ft)
° API + 131.5
E.1.5 TCP String

A general concept of the TCP hardware run below the packer. It comprises
accessories, firing head(s) and gun string.
E.1.6 True Vertical Depth (TVD)

TVD is determined by finding the depth in a straight vertical line from the point
of measurement (measured depth from wireline) to the surface. A conversion
of measured depth to TVD can be made using the deviation of the well at a
point of measurement.
TVD (ft) = measured depth (ft) x cos [deviation (°)]
E.1.7 U-Tubing Effect

This occurs when a reverse circulating valve is opened and fluids of different
densities and/or heights are present in the annulus and tubing. (It can also occur
when a connection leaks or a tool fails while running in the hole.)
E.2 i-Handbook
The i-Handbook is an electronic version of the Field Data Handbook and it can
be downloaded from InTouch ID 3543141. It offers several interactive features
which include calculators and animations, along with a wealth of other field
related data. Some of the salient features are:
• Extensive Tubular Database comprising details on tubing, casing, and drill

pipes from several suppliers along with API data.
• Several useful calculators including the ones for Fracturing, Acidizing and
Cementing services.
• Ability to draw well bore diagrams and compute volumes.
Private

Schlumberger Wireline Perforating FOM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Schlumberger Wireline Perforating FOM

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Schlumberger Wireline Perforating FOM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Wireline Perforating Field

Copyright © 2006 Schlumberger, Unpublished Work. All rights reserved.

Copyright © 2006 Sophia, Unpublished Work. All rights reserved.

Copyright © 2006 Schlumberger, Unpublished Work. All rights reserved.

Trademarks & Service marks

Schlumberger, the Schlumberger logotype, and other words or symbols used

A complete list of Schlumberger marks may be viewed at the Schlumberger

Reviewer: Charleton Walker

Title: InTouch Helpdesk

Rev Effective Date Description Prepared by

1.8 13-Jan-2004 Updated the Explosives and Charleton Walker

2.2 Detonator Specifications ____________________________________ 2-29

A Perforating Gun Vertical Make-Up

B Detonating Cord Cutter Instructions

D Hostile Environment (GFE paper, by R. Sonthalia, 1996)

(S.A.F.E.) ___________________________________________________ 1-14

1.2.1 CSS Functionality ___________________________________________ 1-35

1.3.2.3 Commonly Replaced Parts for SFT-111 Casing-to-Rig Voltage

1.5.1.8 Capacitance Checking ___________________________________ 1-54

Copyright © 2006 Schlumberger, Unpublished Work. All rights reserved.

1.1 General Safety

IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF EACH EMPLOYEE TO KNOW AND FOLLOW

Every field engineer/technician is a supervisor and a representative of

IF A JOB CAN’T BE DONE SAFELY, DON’T DO IT AT ALL.

• Schlumberger Reservoir Completions Technology Center

1. United States Department of Transportation Regulations (49 CFR)

Table 1-1: Explosive Safety Equipment Check List

Safety Tube H041901

1.1.2 Explosives Field Safety Procedures Placard

key. The key MUST remain outside the

Slapper Actuated Firing Equipment

1.1.3 Field Safety Procedures for Conventional Electric

1.1.3.1 Predeparture Check

1.1.3.2 Arrival At Wellsite

a. Safe accesses to the catwalk, rig or wellhead. Eliminate any Stepping,

a. A brief outline of the perforating plan, discussing who has what

a. Turn off electrical cathodic protection system devices.

Potential Severity: Light

DO NOT PROCEED WITH THE OPERATION IF RESIDUAL VOLTAGE

g. Install safety ground straps by:

• Visually inspecting the ground connection to the logging unit, connect

Potential Severity: Light

APPLYING POWER AT SURFACE ONCE THE EXPLOSIVE OPERATION

8. Instrument cab preparations for explosive operations:

a. Ensure continuity of logging cable to Collector Safety Switch (CSS). Do

Potential Severity: Light

a. Arming or disarming a gun must not be attempted during a thunderstorm,

b. Arming procedures must not be commenced if such weather, a helicopter

Potential Severity: Light

• Percussion switches: cable must be attached before the bottom

gun or bottom two guns if using a diode switch are armed.

ii. Confirm line of fire is clear of all personnel. No other work is to be

Note: Electrical arming of Setting Tools

Potential Severity: Light

You are reminded that: ONLY THE ENGINEER OR TECHNICIAN

Note: Ballistic arming of Setting Tools

i. Standard Arming Procedure (Electrical before Ballistic)

a) Clear line of fire of all personnel. No other work is to be done on

a) Clear line of fire of all personnel. No other work is to be done on